Home

Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Setup Guide

1. Position Pinned When this check box is selected the position and the size of the object cannot be changed X and Y are coordinates of the left top corner of the object Size Adjust the width and height of the object 104 Nes WEINTEK Object General Properties 9 5 Variables of Station Number EasyBuilder allows users to set the variables of station number in PLC address As shown below var2 is one of 16 station number variables Address PLC name Mitsubishi FxO0s FxO0n Fals Faln Fxz Device type Address var2 123 Address Format 000 range 0 377 Index register The syntax of the variable of a station number varN address The range of N is integer from 0 15 address means PLC address 16 variables are availble varO var15 These variables of station number read values from address LW 10000 LW 10015 The list below shows the variables and the corresponding system reserved addresses var0 LW 10000 vard LW 10008 var LW 10001 var9 LW 10009 var2 LW 10002 var10 LW 10010 var3 LW 10003 var 1 LW 10011 var4 LW 10004 var12 LW 10012 vard LW 10005 var13 LW 10013 var6 LW 10006 var14 LW 10014 var LW 10007 var15 LW 10015 For example varO reads value from LW 10000 when the value in LW 10000 is 32 var0 234 32 234 the station number is 32 Similarly var13 reads value from LW 10013 when the value in LW10013 Is 5 var13 234 5 234
2. LLL select All Cili Togele Bookmark Ctil HF2 Next Bookmark Fi Previous Bookmark Shitt Fe Clear Al Bookmarks Togel Al Outlining Update All Ovtlining 355 L WE NTEK Macro Reference Disabled operations are colored grey which indicates that it is not possible to use that function in the current status of the editor For example you should select some text to enable the copy function otherwise it will be disabled Keyboard shortcuts are also shown 4 The toolbar provides Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Toggle Bookmark Next Bookmark Previous Bookmark and Clear All Bookmarks buttons 5 Any modification will enable the Undo function Redo function will be enabled after the undo action is used To perform the undo redo right click to select the item or use the keyboard shortcuts Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctrl Y WorkSpace S macro command maint abe abe abe end macro comma Select All Ctlta WorkSpace Toggle Bookmark Ctrl F Macro ID Next Bookmark F2 Previous Bookmark Shiftt Fe Clear All Bookmarks Toggle Al Cutline Update AU Outlning abc abe end macro coming 356 va WE NTEK Macro Reference WorkSpace 1 zi macro command main i 3 g abc ee 5 end mat Undo Ctl z Redo Redo Works pace select All Colt Toggle Bookmark Ctil F2 Next Bookmark F2 Previous Bookmark shittFe Clear All Bookmark
3. Checking STX 02H N 7 Back to a of Flowchart 1 Yes Sending ACK 06H Waiting time is 3 sec default Receiving we Exceed 3 data sec Yes Sending ACK 06H Back to b of Flowchart 1 Flowchart 2 works for Slave but not Master m SIX Start of Text ACK Acknowledge NAK Negative Acknowledge 626 re WE NTEK 31 4 Address Types Memory Map Communication There are two address types MB and MW The format of the commands that controls MB are listed below MB Commands GENE Address Low byte Bit Address High byte For example MB 18 1 16 2 18 0x12 and 0x00 oO 1 3 0x00 or 0x01 The data in MB address PE tym matieery e fox The checksum Calculate XOR from offset 0t05 The format of the commands that controls MW are listed below MW commands Offset oyte Format The operating sign to MW Address Low byte Bit Address High byte If the address includes 0x10 insert another 0x10 after it and all offsets after that are increased by 1 For example 0x10 0x04 will become 0x10 0x10 0x04 Number of sending bytes To control a word the number of bytes must be even If the number of bytes is 0x10 insert another 0x10 after it and all offsets after that are increased by 1 Ox L Ox H The address that the first and second bytes correspond Ox L Ox H to is the initial address n is the number of bytes If the data includes 0x10 insert
4. Ethernet s HMI Remote Printer Server Save to File Here are some advantages of using EasyPrinter e EasyPrinter provides two modes of hardcopy output Print Out and Save to File Users can use either way or both ways e Since EasyPrinter runs on MS Windows system it supports most of the printers available on the market e Multiple HMIs can share one printer so users don t have to prepare printers for each HMI Additionally EasyPrinter can also be a backup server Users can use Backup objects in HMI to copy history files such as Data Sampling and Event Log into a remote PC via Ethernet Please see the following illustration ER d Backup CSV Files Ethernet Remote Backup Server 577 Ki WE NTEK EasyPrinter 26 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server Screen Hardcopy gt Ethernet Finse Print Out Printer Server IP 192 168 1 26 Users can make screen hardcopies with a Function Key object The hardcopies will be transferred to the Remote Printer Server via Ethernet and then printed out 26 1 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In EasyPrinter main menu select Options Settings and the following dialog appears MT 800 Remote Printer Server Settings General Server Hardcopy Port number of the server socket 5005 Backup User name Max length 12 characters Password Max length 12 characters 111111 Naming Convention for HR
5. 3 In PC or HMI A project TASTA UN Create a Set Bit Object General Security Shape Label select PLC on HMI B in Description PLC name to control the MIRE Cece PLC connected with the na emote HMI B address x vO Write after button is released Atbribute 513 NG WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits Chapter 22 System Reserved Words Bits Some Local Words and Local Bits are reserved for system usage These registers are all with different functions described below Address Tag Library Customized 8 System Address type Address LE LE 3001 LB 5011 LB 5020 initialized as ON initialized as ON LB 9002 LB 9003 LE 5004 LB 9005 LB 9006 LB 9007 LB 9008 LB 9009 LB 9010 data upload indicator LB 9012 LB 9013 LB 9014 LB 9015 LB 9016 LB 9017 LB 9018 LB 9019 gt show set ONJ hide set OFF system setting bar reset current event log set ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON data download indicator data download upload indicator FS window contral hide OM show OFF FS button control hide ON show OFF FS window button contral hide ON show OFF status is on when client connects to this HM disable write back in PLC control s change window disable mouse cursor set ON dizable enable buzzer Users can impo
6. T MF Setting gt PEO EIET EE com Address Address Address Format DDI Address Type Bit Numeric Select Ethernet Click I F Setting to set IP Address Monitor Settings HEM Pa mime PLC FATEK FB Series v SAUN NO LF Setting Ethernet Settings r Address IPAddress 192 168 1 85 Address Format DDI f OK i Cancel 675 Lr WE NTEK EasyWatch 8 Set Address Set the address type and the address to be monitored Monitor Settings Name New Monitor Read Only i r Open HMI Manager l PLC mm o LF Setting None Address Address LW vi 10 Address Format DDDDD range 0 10799 9 Set Address Type When Word type is selected set address type to Numeric or String Numeric Select the data format of the monitor address Address Type 16 bit BCD Al 32 bit BCD E 16 bit HEX 32 bit HEX 16 bit Binary O Numeric 32 bit Binar w O String No of Word 16 bit Signed String Select data format from ANSI UNICODE and High Reversed Set No of Word to read Address Type Bik UNI ODE High Low Reversed Mumeric String Ale eo eared 676 Lib WE NTEK EasyWatch 10 Set Update Cycle Set the update interval of the monitor object The range can be set from 500ms to 5000ms String Ho of Word nh So dd nest Type UNICODE High L
7. Multiple HMI Slave HMI HMI link speed Connect I F Serial Local IP address Server IP address Subnetwork mask Default route IP address PLC time out constant sec vi PLC block pack 3 Cancel 605 og WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication 2 Double click on PLC Address View exe to check PASSIT PLC ID No and fill in Parameter 1 of EasyBuilder BitHMI IE dad 119999 10 ET 1377 10 Bapt Y I 1347 10 3 EtL 1H ddd 19999 J0 BG C 1 0 zs 0 Mord HMI LW add gt 49999 0 Word PLC TV 1255 0 10 Word PLC CY IE 199 10 DB ua 195 0 255 120 TT waag 8D aa 9509 6000 12 Word HMI RWI dde 113277 10 Bit HMD RBI dde 12047 10 140 Bru R ladd 120474 0 mr Wo My RW aa o 16 0 I EM MeL am 12 0 Word HMI Ms RW i 65535 0 3 Connect COM ports RS232 of each HMI the communication is then enabled Device address B MsRB AW Bit dddd 0 4095 hy 0 B vs B ddd 0 9909 m here will always be a PLC selected in EB500 system parameter settings in this case even to read write MT8000 HMI Local Data only the ID of the selected PLC in EB500 system parameters must also be filled in EasyBuilder parameter 1
8. 90 Object General Properties Chapter 9 Object General Properties The setting of general properties of an object includes 1 Selecting the PLC 2 Setting read and write address 3 Using Shape Library and Picture Library 4 Setting label text 5 Adjusting profile size 9 1 Selecting the PLC Some objects are for controlling PLCs As shown PLC name represents the PLC to control In this example there are two devices Local HMI and Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1n FX2 The listed available devices come from System Parameters Settings Device List PLC name Mitsubishi FXOS FXON FX1s FX1N FX2 v Loved AT Local HMI Mitsubishi FA0s Fx0n Fals F ln Fx2 9 1 1 Setting Read and Write Address Read address PLO name Local HMI wt Setting PLC name Local HMI Device type Li Address 0 Address format DODDO range 0 10799 Index INDEX 0 16 bit ka bray 91 L WE NTEK Object General Properties The settings of read and write address PLC name select the PLC type Device type Different PLC has different device type Address PLC name Device type Address Address Format Index Address Set the read and write address System tag Address tags include system tag and user defined tag Click Setting beside PLC name and select system tag check box This allows users to use the preserved addresses by system f
9. A ttribute Mode Wo of states Input low scale low For example the object is only allowed to move within 0 600 but the range of the register s value is 300 1000 Set Input low to 300 and Input high to 1000 and set Scaling low to 0 and Scaling high to 600 And the object will move within the defined range Data format Object state Moving Distance on the X axis 16 bit format Address LW n Address 1 LW n 1 32 bit format Address LW n Address 2 LW n 2 e Y axis w scaling The object is for Y axis movement with scale and the formula to calculate the moving distance on the Y axis is the same as the one in X axis w scaling Data format Object state Moving Distance on the Y axis 16 bit format Address LW n Address 1 LW n 1 32 bit format Address LW n Address 2 LW n 2 f X axis w reverse scaling This works in the way as X axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse g Y axis w reverse scaling This works in the way as Y axis w scaling but the moving direction is in reverse 189 Object Display ratio The size of shape in different states can be set individually as shown in the picture below Ratio I Ratio 12 Ratio 14 Ratio L State 2 Bl State 3 Limit address The object s moving range can be set not only by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y but also by the designated registers Supposed that the object s moving range is set
10. Error occur Cross tables 1 Access 4x 1 4x 199 698
11. TRACE LWO d a Jena macro command Devices I 484 PLA n W WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 14 Example of String Operation Functions String operation functions are added to macro to provide a convenient way to operate strings The term string means a sequence of ASCII characters and each of them occupies 1 byte The sequence of characters can be stored into 16 bit registers with least significant byte first For example create an ASCII Input object and setup as follows New ASCII Input Object Eg General Data Entry Security Shape Font De ripton Mask Use UNICODE Reverse high low byte Read address PLC name Local HMI v Sin Address LW o Address PLC name Local HMI Device type LW Address 0 System tag luser defined tag Address format DDDOD range i 0 10799 Index register Run simulation and input abcdef The string abcdef is stored in LWO LW2 as follows LB represents low byte and HB represents high byte HE LE The ASCII input object reads 1 word 2 bytes at a time as described in the previous chapter Suppose an ASCII input object is set to read 3 words as shown in the above example it can actually read at most 6 ASCII characters since that one ASCII character occupies 1 byte 485 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference The functionality of each string operation function is described in t
12. 3 sack BS search 1 Folders Bee Address G ftp 192 168 1 117 Other Places l datalog eventlog recipe amp Internet Explorer User uploadhis BG Internet 636 Ki WE NTEK FTP Server Application 32 2 Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data To backup Data Sampling records 1 Click datalog folder to check the file names in EasyBuilder 2 Click on file names to check the content 3 Copy and paste to save the files to PC File Edit View Favorites Tools Help pack pi Ba po Search 1 Folders Ey uploadhis a Internet To backup Event Alarm Log records 1 Click eventlog folder to check the files 2 Copy and paste to save the files to PC File Edit View Favorites Tools Help pack gt a po Search Folders EBk Other Places EJ 192 168 1 117 User uploadhis Internet To backup or update Recipe records 1 Click recipe folder to check the files 2 Copy and paste to save the files to PC File Edit View Favorites Tools Help sack v Ba po Search 1 Folders BER Address Other Places recipe rcp recipe a rcp Ey 192 168 1 117 User uploadhis a Internet 637 Ly WE NTEK FTP Server Application Since recipe data is automatically saved once every minute after updating recipe rcp or recipe a rcp HMI must be restarted in one minute otherwise the new updated recipe data will be overwritten by the former data Use system regis
13. Change full screen window O Change common window Display popup window gt eo Gb i E Retum to previous window O Close window ASCTILUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Es ASCI UNICODE In the Label tab select Use label type faj in Content and select AR MingtiM GB which must be a font set in step 1 as shown below The Function Keys used for typing non ascii characters in the same keyboard must all use the same font For example in a Simplified Chinese keyboard use AR MingtiM GB in each key for entering characters Function Key Object s Properties i p General Security Shape Label Profile T we vVHHON ttribute Font AR MingtiM GB v Color EE Size 16 Align Center v Blink None vi ban Italic _ Underline Duplicate these attributes to every state 151 Ki WE NTEK Object When finished add window no 11 to System Parameter Settings General Keyboard as shown below System Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printer Backup Server lt e Mail Recipes Device Model General System Setting Security Font Fast selection button Attribute Disable Screen saver Back light saver None b l minute s Screen saver None vi minute s Options Startup window no 10 WINDOW 010 vi Common window Above base wind
14. 389 re WE NTEK Macro Reference Name SWAPW SWAPW source result Description Exchanges the high word and low word data of a 32 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main int source result SWAPW 0x12345678 result result is 0x56781234 source 0x12345 SWAPW source result result is 0x23450001 end macro command LOBYTE LOBYTE source result Description Retrieves the low byte of a 16 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable resu t must be a variable macro_command main short source result LOBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x34 source 0x123 LOBYTE source result result is 0x23 end macro command HIBYTE HIBYTE source result Description Retrieves the high byte of a 16 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main short source result 390 re WE NTEK SR WEINTEK 0 Macro Reference Reference HIBYTE 0x1234 result result is 0x12 source 0x123 HIBYTE source result result is 0x01 end macro command Name LOWORD LOWORD source result Description Retrieves the low word of a 32 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main int source result LOWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x5678 source 0x12345 LOWORD source result
15. Acknowledged event G fe P e seeceeseeess pe The time interval for beep sound is once in each second If enabled the selected sound will be played when an event is triggered Continuous beep can also be enabled which only stops when the event is acknowledged or recovered For continuous beep a delay time can be set between triggering the alarm and the start of beeping Address of WATCH 1 WATCH 8 Click Syntax to edit and display the value in watch address when the event is triggered Up to 8 watch addresses can be set 84 Ko WE NTEK Data Sampling Chapter 8 Data Sampling oO 4 I 00110101 Save the sampled Use Trend Display n to ae and History Data esignate Display objects to location such as l HMI SD card display sampling records USB disk Define how the data is sampled 1 sampling time 2 address 3 data length 8 1 Data Sampling Management Create a new Data Sampling object first by the following steps 1 From the menu select Objects and click on Data Sampling 2 Click New to finish relevant settings Data Sampling Object Read address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold address Auto stop Delete Settings 85 p WE NTEK Data Sampling 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling The following introduces how to add a new Data Sampling Data Sampling Object Sampling mode Clear address
16. ER Configuration Click the Word Lamp icon on the toolbar to open a Word Lamp object property a dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Word Lamp object will be created 128 Lv WE NTEK Object Hew Word Lamp Object General Security Shane Label Mae 2 E Read address PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting No of stas Mode Offset Word lamp object offers the following three modes for selection a Value The state is displayed according to the value in the designated word address and plus or minus the Offset As shown below if the value within LW 200 is 3 since the offset is set to 3 the shape of state 6 is displayed value 3 offset 3 129 Object Hew Word Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Read address PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting Address Ly Ww 16 bit Unsigned A ttribute b LSB Convert the value from decimal to binary The least significant active bit in a binary data word selects the state displayed oc 0000 State 0 displayed All the bits are 0 1 0001 State 1 displayed The least significant active bit is tg ees somme 2 0010 State 2 displayed The least significant active bit is P a e bit O 4 0100 State 3 displayed The least significant active bit is el 5 0101 State 1 displayed The least significant active bit is el 0110 State 2 displayed The least significant active bit is
17. Here is an example to explain History control If the designated register is LW 0 and the sampling data available in the files are pressure 20061120 dtl pressure 20061123 0tl pressure 20061127 dtl and pressure 20061203 dtl and it is 2006 12 3 today based on the value of LW 0 the sampling data file which is selected by Trend Display is shown as follows Value of LW 0 Selected sampling history data 0 pressure 20061203 dt i pressure 20061127 dt pressure 20061123 0ti pressure 20061120 dt Distance between data samples Pixel is selected 1 2 3 Distance between data samples 9 Pixel O Time Distance pire s 212 M WEINTEK Object Select Pixel Then Distance can be used to set the distance between two sampling points See the picture below pe JPP ARE fy poma PV URI I y X axis time range Time is selected X axis time range 0 Pixel Time Distance second is Select Time Then Distance is used to set the X axis in unit of time elapsed See the picture below 20 seconds Oba a gt ee m Other than these two methods select Time for X axis time range and go to Trend Grid and enable Time scale Please refer to Time scale in the later section 213 Ki WE NTEK Object Dynamic distance between data samples Dynamic X axis time range If selected a word register can be designated to adjust the distance between data samples
18. ID 000 macro 0 vi Trigger address PLC name Setting Address LB 0 Trigger mode OFF gt ON v Select a pre defined Macro from the drop down list When the state of the designated Trigger address changes the selected Macro is executed The ways to execute Macro by Trigger address 1 Bit goes ON OFF gt ON 2 Bit goes OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON 4 Execute the selected Macro when bit is ON When the bit remains ON Macro will be executed repeatedly h Screen hardcopy When the state of the designated Trigger address changes print the selected screen The ways to activate screen hardcopy by Trigger address 1 Bit goes ON OFF gt ON 2 Bit goes OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON There are three options to specify the source window for hardcopy 286 og WE NTEK Object PLC Control Description PLC name Local HMI Attribute Type of control Screen hardcopy Active only when designated window opened Rotate image 90 di Trigger address PLC name Setting Address LB Trigger mode oFF gt ON Source window for print Current base window Window no from register Designate window no PLC name Setting Address LW y l 16 bit Unsigned Printer SD card Current base window Print the base window at the time the operation is activated Windo
19. It is also available to right click and select Run EasyDiagnoser for entering the setting window when executing On Line Simulation in EasyBuilder Siemens S7 300 ET2005 Ethernet Exit simulation Run EaryDiagnoser Screenshot After setting completed click OK EasyDiagnoser operation window appears as below 641 Lib WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser File View Ophons Help Command Read Write Device Static jo Address Type Range 0 29999 FIQ Device Index Address Length Time Errar Package ID Device Station Index Address Length 15 15 22 Looking for the target HMI E 401 Eee 7 E ILB 0056271 15 15 22 Connection established with the target HMI Sin Local Htl LB 00574 1 it BY a2 SIEMENS S7 300 M 00000751 BS 143 SIEMENS S7 300 DB10 00000714 33 2 EasyDiagnoser Settings Save As The captured information of Easy Diagnoser can be saved as xls which can be read in Excel Exit Exit current file CH AIHD Click Device Bar to display Device window Chit Alt Click Package Bar to display Package window Ch AHL Click Logger Bar to display Logger window Ve Click Output Bar to display Output window 642 Lh WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser Options Toolbars Options Help Display toolbar icons of Device Bar Package Bar Logger Bar Output Bar Status Bar VW Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool Easy
20. Loch assert WorkSpace 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 GetData OK O _ Press to fold for next gniurrentMCount 1 SetData qgnCurrentMCou Free je ej gniurrentMCount 2 SetDatal qgnlurrentMCou FE ee next J Free GetDatal gntount gnoount WorkSpace Local H GetData OK 0 Lo set gnt a7 f gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt ass 48 Getdata qnmacrol 49 gnmacrolb gnCurr 50 SetDatalgnmscrol 51 GetDatalgqnCount 52 gqntlount gniurren 53 SetDatalgnCount 54 gntestVal gnure 55 SetDatal gntestVal 56 gnoorrectVal 2 EF SetData qneorrecty Set gnt aet gnc aet gnc assert 58 ASYNC_TRIG MACRO rGetDatalgnmscrolD Li ggi bError assert gr gnmacrolD garlurrent HI 60 ff gt gt gt gt 7 gt gt 3 gt gt gt agen Setdatal gqnmacrolIp Li ai Loca 62 gniurrentMCou 63 end Macro command SetDatalgnCount gutestVal gniourrent HC Loga 10 Right click to select Toggle All Outlining to open all folded macro code blocks WorkSpace WorkSpace 27 Getbata OK O 47 d gt gt gt 48 Get i 49 gmmac 50 Of Seqh T Si Ge 52 gnCou Select All Ctrl A 53 ffaet 54 gnteg Toggle Bookmark Ctl F2 55 Setba NextBookmak F2 gg gneor Previous Bookmark ShitF2 57 SetDa Clear All Bookmarks 60 oe Update All Outlining 61 Local HMI Fee ee HMI I HMI I I LU I LU qncour MI LI 1 HHT nooun
21. MODBUS RTU HMI PLC PLC type MODEU KTU COM Port Settings COM Timeout sec Turn around delay msi Baud rate Data bits i Send ACK delay ms Parity Parameter 1 Stop bits Parameter 2 Parameter 3 The number of resending commands Max vwrite command size words System Parameter Settings Font i 1 Extended Memory Printen Backup server Device Model General System Setting Security Device list VF Protocol Sta Interface Location Device type LocalHMI LocalHMI Local MT6056i 320x MODBUS RTO Local MODBUS KIU COMI 9600 E 8 15 R5485 21 502 Lig WE NTEK Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server In the setting page of each object select MODBUS RTU in PLC name and set the address of MODBUS RTU Read address PLL name MODELS RTU ww Setting Address Ose multi coils Since the server is a HMI the corresponding read and write address are as follows read write Ox 1x 1 12096 read write LB 0 12095 read write 3x 4x 5x 1 9999 read write LW 0 9998 read write 3x 4x 5x 10000 65535 read write RW 0 55535 503 Ly WE NTEK Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 2 Changing MODBUS Server Station Number in Runtime EasyBuilder provides the following system registers to change MODBUS Server station number in runtime LW 9541 MODBUS ASCII server station no COM 1 LW 9542 MODBU
22. bool ret3 ret3 StringCompareNoCase a3 0 b3 0 ret3 false ur re WE NTEK Macro Reference GE end macro command Name StingFind Syntax position StringFind source start target start position StringFind source target start position StringFind source start target position StringFind source target Description Return the position of the first occurrence of target string in the source string The two string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns the zero based index of the first character of substring in the source string that matches the target string Notice that the entire sequence of characters to find must be matched If there is no matched substring it returns 1 macro_command main char src1 20 abcde char target1 20 cd bool post pos1 StringFind src1 0 target1 0 pos1 2 char target2 20 ce bool pos2 pos2 StringFind abcde target2 0 pos2 1 char src3 20 abcde bool pos3 pos3 StringFind src3 3 cd pos3 1 end macro command Name StringReverseFind position StringReverseFind source start target start position StringReverseFind source target start position StringReverseFind source start target 427 re WE NTEK Macro Reference position StringReverseFind source t
23. describe what the specification is how to use etc After editing click Compile and Save to save this function to the Library Otherwise a warning will be shown Successfully add a function into Macro Function Library Macro Reference Macro Fae Function Name int ADD int int int SUBS int int int MUL int int int DIV int int Function Editing Field qium Click the right mouse button to display edit menu Edit description here Function Description Field Function Name int ADD int int int SUBS int int int MUL int int this is a macro about square 4 New Delete Edit vort import 454 Lyd WE NTEK Macro Reference N 1 The total size of data type can be declared in a function is 4096 bytes 2 Function name must only contain alphanumeric characters and cannot start with a number 455 Ki WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 3 2 Delete a Function 1 In function list select the function to be 55 deleted and click Delete res 0 int MUL int int int DIV int int short test1 short 2 Click Yes to confirm No to cancel the Macro Function Library met deletion mete 3 int MUL int int 3 Click Yes to delete MAX SHORT ago function this is a macro about square New Delete Edit
24. macro_command main int a 10 b 20 Add a b end macro command Or sub Add int result x 10 y 20 result x y end sub macro_command main Add end macro command 376 re WE NTEK Macro Reference syntax description sub Mustbe used to begin the function block Optional This is the data type of value that the function returns A function block is not always necessary to return a value parameters Optional The parameters hold values that are passed to the function The passed parameters must have their type declared in the parameter field and assigned a variable name For example sub int MyFunction int x int y x and y would be integers passed to the function This function is called by a statement that looks similar to this ret MyFunction 456 pressure where pressure must be integer according to the definition of function Notice that the calling statement can pass hard coded values or variables to the function After this function is executed an integer values is return to ret Local variable Variables that are used in the function block must be declared first declaration This is in addition to passed parameters In the above example x and y are variables that the function can used Global variables are also available for use in function block Statements Statementstoexecute return value Optional Used to return a value to the calling statement The value can be a constant
25. rrrnrnnnnrnnnnnnrvrrnnnrnvnnnnrennnnrrennnnsnenn 461 18 11 Compiler Error Message rrrnrannrnrannrnrnnnenrannrnnansennnnnennansnnnansnnnnssnnnnnennnnssnnnnnee 467 18 12 Sample Macro Code rrrnnnnrnnnnnnenrnnnennnnnenrnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennansnnnnnsnnnnnsnnnnssnnnnnee 473 18 13 ME TRAGE NNN 478 18 14 Example of String Operation Functions errnrrvvrnnrrvvrnnvrvernnrrverrnerennnnrrennnnerennn 485 18 15 Macro Password Protection cccccccsececeeeeeeeseeeceeeseeeeseeeseeesueeseeeseeeseeesaeeens 496 Chapter 19 Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server rrnnrnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnrennnrrennnrsennnrrennnnnen 497 19 1 Configure HMI as a MODBUS Device rrannrnnannennnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnsnnnnnennnnner 497 19 1 1 Creating a MODBUS Server rrrrnnnnrnrvrnnnnrvvnnnnrnnrnnnrnnnnnnrenrnnnsrnsnnsnnnnnnnee 498 19 1 2 Access a MODBUS S rver unss mmmnnse ene mn jets 501 19 2 Changing MODBUS Server Station Number in Runtime rronnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnrvnnnnnenn 504 19 3 About MODBUS Address Type rrrrnnnnrnnnnnenrnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnsnnnnnennnnnnnnnnssnnnnsee 505 Chapter 20 How to Connect a Barcode Reader rrrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnvnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennrnnrneeennn 506 20 1 How to Connect with a Barcode Reader rrrnrnnrrnnnnnnrvvnnnnrrenrnnerennnnerennnnerennnnvne 506 Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection vrrnrrvvnnnrrvernnrrvennnerennr 510 21 1 HMI to HMI Communication re
26. 18 6 3 Data Manipulation eorrennnrennnrrnnnrrnnnrrnnnrennnrennnrennnrennnrennnrennnrennnrennnnennnnen 389 18 6 4 Bit Transformation cccccccceccceecesececeeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeesueeseeeneeeseueeseessees 392 18 6 5 Communication i sccsnceu sven cecicesascanceeenseceanceneceeeseaseesenwaueso useseewemeesuowenseseeeones 394 18 6 6 String Operation FUNCTIONS icc sccg ccs scerencesccveceesasdccysceeacsesdauhensssasicasacadice codes 411 18 6 7 Miscellane0us arrnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnennnennnne 437 18 7 How to Create and Execute a MaCro cccccccccecececececcacecccececececuaeacsceseueaeaverans 444 KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 User Manual 18 7 1 How to Create a MacCro rrrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnsnnnnnsnnnnn 444 18 7 2 Execute a Macro arrnnnnennnennnnnnnnennnrnnnrnnnnennnennnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnennnennnsnnnnennsennnne 448 18 8 User Defined Macro Function rrrrarannarerranerranrnnanrnnanrnnanennanennnnsnnnnsnnnnsnnnssnnnsee 449 1626 1 MPOM PUNGHOM LID Aly F EE 450 18 8 2 How to Use Macro Function Library rrrrnnrrnnnnernnnevnnnernnnennnnennnnennnnennnnen 451 18 8 3 Function Library Management Interface rrrnnrnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnrnnnrennnrrnnnrennnnen 453 18 9 Some Notes about Using the Macro rrannnnnrnnnnvnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnennnnnnrnnnnnnenn 460 18 10 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device
27. 3 a Group 168 Lv WE NTEK Object When finish entering data in the last object to end data entry of all objects please select Stop sequential input function after input check box Input order Enable Stop sequential input function after input Input order 3 a Group 1 4 gt The following shows the Numeric Format tab of Numeric Input and Numeric Display objects for setting the properties of displaying value Numeric Input Object s Properties p gt aE EPE gt General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile Display Data format 16 bit Unsigned v Mask Number of digits Left of decimal Pt 4 Rightof decimal Pt p scaling option Do conversion Limits Direct Dynamic limits ee PLC high 9999 Input low i nut high i ER v Use alarm color Low limit as High limit rn 169 Ly WE NTEK Object Display Data format Set the data format of a designated word register The selections are listed below 16 bit uses 1 word where 32 bit uses two words Format 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 16 bit Binary 32 bit Binary 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Signed 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Signed 32 bit Float Mask If selected any values entered will be hidden by displaying them as Number of digits Left of decimal Pt The number of digits before the decim
28. 399 Easv ccest server Losin Easy ecess server yr iho net Some functions are duplicated from system registers such as Hide system setting bar LB 9020 Hide mouse cursor LB 9018 Disable buzzer LB 9019 Prohibit remote HMI connecting to this machine LB 9044 and Disable upload function LB 9033 Users can also set these functions via system tag 60 Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings To select a system tag select Address System tag check box when adding a new object and then select the Device Type To browse all the system tags Select Library Tag System from the main menu of EasyBuilder Startup language after redownloading the project Set the language to use when HMI starts after the project is re downloaded Execute init MACRO when power on Designate the macro to be executed when HMI power on Auto logout If leaving HMI untouched for longer than the set time the objects protected by security classes will not be able to operate The user ID and password must be entered again to unlock it Hide System Setting Bar Hide the system setting bar in the bottom right corner of the HMI screen Hide Mouse Cursor Hide the mouse cursor in HMI screen Disable Buzzer Mute HMI Prohibit remote HMI connecting to this machine Prohibit the connection with a remote HMI The remote HMI will not be able to control the local HMI Disable upload functi
29. 5 000 01 30 15 03 29 500 12 P 15 03 29 500 4 971 01 30 15 03 30 480 25 P 15 03 30 480 4 940 01 307 715 035 315 5907 25 p 15 03 31 590 4 940 01 30 15 03 32 480 25 15 03 32 480 4 940 01 30 15 03 33 480 365 15 03 33 480 4 124 01 30 15 03 34 480 365 15 03 34 480 4 124 01 30 15 03 35 580 365 p 15 03 35 580 4 124 01 30 15 03 36 610 1023 P 15 03 36 610 2 545 C 01730 15 03 37 480 1023 P 15 03 37 480 2 545 D 0054 MOE 01 30 15 03 38 610 1023 P 15 03 38 610 2 545 01 30 15 03 39 450 1520 P 15 03 39 450 1 352 new value LIL value 1 x E 1 MEG 01 30 15 03 40 560 1520 P 15 03 40 560 1 352 01 30 15 03 41 480 1520 P 15 03 41 480 1 352 value x 0 0024 5 01 30 15 03 42 480 1465 _ 15 03 42 480 1 484 01 30 15 03 43 500 1465 15 03 43 500 1 484 Include millisecond information 01 30 15 03 44 450 2301 15 03 44 450 0 522 01 30 15 03 45 530 2301 0 15 03 45 530 0 522 Load Setting 01 30 15 03 46 580 3214 15 03 46 580 2 714 gt 01730 15 03 47 450 32 14 Fi 15 03 47 450 2 714 Save Setting 574 gt Ly WE NTEK EasyConverter QI snill m The settings above can be saved and loaded next ti
30. 552 wa WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 24 EasyAccess disconnect set OFF connect set ON EasyAccess server 189052 satus of comecing o EasyAccesssener n a rR For further information on EasyAccess please visit http www ihmi net Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 553 Lib WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 25 Pass Through Settings LW 9901 16bit pass through source COM port 1 3 R W R Y R Y COM 1 COM 3 LW 9902 16bit pass through destination COM port R Y R Y 1 3 COM 1 COM 3 LW 9903 16bit pass through control 0 normal 1 pause 2 stop communications between HMI and PLC when executing pass through Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 554 Li WE INTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 26 Disable PLC No Response Window LB 9192 disable USB 1 PLC s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 9195 disable USB 2 PLC s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11960 disable PLC 1 s PLC No Response dialog when ON Note1 LB 11961 disable PLC 2 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11962 disable PLC 3 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11963 disable PLC 4 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11964 disable PLC 5 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11965 disable PLC 6 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB 11966 disable PLC 7 s PLC No Response dialog when ON LB
31. 69 SIEMENS S7300 Et 11 C810 000033 fo SIEMENS S7300 Et 12 DBTO 00006 3 T SIEMENS S7300 Et 255 DBO 00009 5 649 Lr WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser 33 4 Save As The captured information of Easy Diagnoser can be saved as xls which can be read in Excel W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser File View Options Help klo md PIL Device ot Index Address Lengtt 176 R Ha SIEMENS 5S7 300 Et 1 10 DB10 000003 175 R 64 SIEMENS S7 300 Et 1 11 DB10 00003 3 174 R 70 SIEMENS S7 300 Et 1 12 DB10 00006 73 173 R T SIEMENS S7 300 Et 1 255 DB10 00009 15 650 Ki WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser 33 5 Window Adjustment Users can drag or use smart docking icons in editing window to place the windows to the desired position W Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser File View Optons Help He 7 l l Logger emm Command Read rite Device All ation jo 10 35 14 Looking for the target HMI Address Type A Range o EE TE 10 35 14 Connection established with the targ No Cmd PID Device nd s ATTE Tho TMT Error Index Type Mame MTSO00 Series Hhil Location Local LA Black Interval 5 words Polling Facksges Max AGE Length 256 words x Smart Docking Smart Docking Package Device Station Index Address Length 41 LB 00000 1 52 LB 00562 12 11 2 LB 00000701 1201 LB 00563 71 Smart Docking H amp E Not
32. 7 Date DDMMATY v Color EE v Sequence no Color EE O Time ascending 6 Time descending History control PLC name Local HMI se Setting Data Sampling object index Select a Data Sampling object as the source data Grid Enable to show grids between rows and columns like shown below 225 Sy WEINTEK Object Color Change the color of grids Column interval Change the width of each column The uguice below are the examples Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch No Time Date 3587 21 57 eoor 1 I 0 3665 3665 21 57 57 160007 A aa a si 3667 121571180807 110 3661 21 57 16 09 07 1 0 151 3680 12156180907 0 10 1 56 ni A l BRINN Profile color Change the color of frame and background Use Transparent to hide frames and background Time and Date Enable disable showing the time and date and configure its format Time ascending Put earlier data at the top and the latest data at the bottom TE oaro 2 I 2 me 16 09 07 4 4 29116 09 07 7 6 EG 16 09 07 9 8 5 002431 160907 6 4 Pe 810024 34160907 3 6 ANAA T 226 L WE NTEK Object Time descending Put the latest data at the top and the earlier data at the bottom ge 4780 22 23 54 16 09 07 3 2 ee eee 1778 ze EF ED Toae a ie E gt History Control The history files are sorted with date and given an index The latest one is assigned
33. Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Read Write use different addresses Read address PLC name Local HMI w Setting Write address Notification Enable O Set ON 8 Set OFF Before writing _ After writing PLC name Local HMI w Setting Notification on myvalid input Enable Set ON O Set OFF PLC name Local HMI w Setting Read Write use different address Set Read address and Write address differently Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the word device that displays the value Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Write address Select the PLC name Device type Address of the word device that system writes to 165 WW WEINTEK Object Notification If enabled the state of a designated address will be set to ON or OFF either before or after the object writes the new value to the word register address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the notification settings Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Before writing After writing Set the value of the designated register before or after the object writes the new value to the write register address Notification on valid input If an illegal value is entered automatically set the
34. LW 9016 16bi BCD localweek RJ R R W 9023 16bit local week Note2 R R R 32bit system time unit 0 1 second R R R cm F 1 Value range 2000 2037 2 Value range 1 7 meaning Monday Sunday 3 When use LW 9010 to LW 9023 to update RTC time the system will check if RTC time is successfully updated If the system still fails to update RTC time the system register LB 11958 time setting error will be set ON and restore to the time before update Updating time on PC during simulation by using LW 9010 to LW 9023 does not work 517 pi WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 3 User Name and Password LB 9060 password error LB 9061 update password set ON LW 9082 16bit auto logout time unit minute 0 Y HE Y R Y disable the function LW 9219 16bit user no 1 12 R LW 9220 32bit password R W R LW 9222 16bit classes can be operated for current user bit 0 A bit 1 B bit 2 C 32bit user 1 s password R W R 32bit R Y 32bit R Y 32bit R Y 32bit R Y 32bit R Y 32bit R Y 32bit R Y 32bit R Y 32bit R Y 32bit R Y R Y lt lt lt LW 9500 LW 9502 LW 9504 LW 9506 LW 9508 LW 9510 LW 9512 LW 9514 LW 9516 LW 9518 LW 9520 LW 9522 lt user 2 s password lt user 3 s password ee AA x Ner J lt user 4 s password user 5 s password user 6 s password user 7
35. LW 9901 pass through source COM port 1 3 COM 1 COM 3 LW 9902 pass through destination COM port 1 3 COM 1 COM 3 Start Pass through Com Port Function in Project Manager Click Pass through button in Utility Manager Project Manager to set the communication parameters as shown below 613 JS WE INTEK Pass through Ethernet com port HMI IF Get Hh Communication Parameters Hil work mode Unknown Source COM Por PC gt Heil COM 1 Baud rate 9600 Data bits Parity Mone Stop bits Destination COM Port HMI PLO CoM 2 hl Baud rate 9600 Data bits Parity Mone Stop bits Start Pass through Stop Pass through HMI IP Assign HMI IP address Get HMI Communication Parameters Read the settings of Source and Destination COM port Pass through Function Click Get HMI Communication Parameters to update the communication parameters Source COM Port gt Destination COM Port The communication parameters of Source and Destination COM Port are displayed The settings will be used when Start Pass through is clicked Baud rate Data bits Parity and Stop bits of Source and Destination COM Port should be set to the same Source COM Port connects PC so select RS 232 mode in most situations Destination COM Port connects PLC so the setting depends on the PLC type RS 232 RS 485 2W or RS 485 4W 614 Lig WE NTEK Pass through Function m When finish usi
36. Measurement bit TI Output bit Q Preset time PT Elapsed time ET Description See the figure aboe Period 1 When the IN turns ON the TI and Q are turned ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting Period 2 When the ET equals PT the Tl and Q are turned OFF Period 3 When the IN turns ON the TI and Q are turned ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting Period 4 When the ET equals the PT the TI and Q are turned OFF E Accumulated On delay Mode Description Input bit IN Main switch of Timer Measurement bit TI Output bit Q Preset time PT Elapsed time ET Reset bit R Reset ET to 0 Period 1 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting the Q remains OFF Period 2 When the IN turns OFF and if the ET is less than the PT the TI be turned OFF The ET is in the retentive state Period 3 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON The timer measurement starts again and the ET starts counting from the kept value The Q remains OFF Period 4 When the ET reaches the PT the TI be turned OFF and the Q be turned ON Period 5 When the IN turns OFF the Q be turned OFF Reset the ET to 0 by using Reset bit R 316 Ly WE NTEK Object m Accumulated Off delay Mode Deserpton Input bit IN Main switch of Timer Measurement bit TI Output bit Q Preset time PT Elapsed time ET Reset bit R Reset ET to 0 Period 1 When the IN turns ON the Q
37. Model General System Setting Security Device Properties Mame MODBUS Server COM Ethernet OHMI PLC Location Lacal we Settings PLC type MODBUS Server COME theret W100 MODBUS _SER WER SO PLE I F Settings Lse broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read command size words Max vrite command size words 498 p WE NTEK Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server If PLC I F is set to RS 232 or RS 485 please select COM COM 1 COM 3 and set correct communication parameters as below MODBUS Server Station no is setto 1 PLE type MODBUS server COM Ethemet v 1 00 MODBUS SERVER so PLC I F RES 232 we COM COM1 9600 E 8 1 Settings If PLC I F is set to Ethernet please set Port no PLE type MODBUS server COM Ethemet v 100 MODBUS SERVER 50 PLC I F Ethernet v IP Local Port 8000 HMI Port Settings Use UDP User Datagram Protocol The Port no of MODBUS Server and HMI must be the same To change the port number please set in the Model tab System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device d Model General i System Setting Security HMI model Port no 8000 fused as MODBUS server s port no 499 Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server Ki WE NTEK When finished MODBUS Server is listed in Device tab The configuration of MODBUS device is
38. SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 else SetData k 2 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if if KO O then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 1 1 else if k 2 1 then SetData k 3 Device 1 4x 2 1 end lf if k 0 0 then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 3 1 else if k 2 2 then SetData k 3 Device 1 4x 4 1 else SetData k 4 Device 1 4x 5 1 end If end macro command 5 while and wend statements macro command main chari 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if a i 120 then c 200 break end if i i 1 475 re WE NTEK Macro Reference wend SetData c Device 1 4x 2 1 end macro command 6 break and continue statements macro_command main char 0 int a 13 b 14 c 4848 b 0 13 while b 0 ali 20 i 10 if ali 120 then c 200 i i 1 continue end if i i 1 if c 200 then SetData c Device 1 4x 2 1 break end if wend end macro command 7 Array macro command main int a 25 b 25 b 0 13 476 Ly WE NTEK for i O to b 0 step 1 ali 20 i 10 next i SetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 13 end macro command 477 Macro Reference re WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 13 Macro TRACE Function TRACE function can be used with EasyDiagnoser to show the current content of the variables The following example illustrates how TRACE function could b
39. Swords 20 words 20 words x EasyDiagnoser With Trace function offered by Macro the executing status of Macro can be seen Please refer to EasyBuilder User s Manual Chapter 18 MACRO for more information In illustration below for ID 2 Ln 7 and ID 2 Ln 8 ID 2 represents Macro name Ln 7 and Ln 8 represent that they are in 7 and 8 lines of Macro U Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser File View Options Help LESE ID 2 Ln 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 c1 a s1 34767 fl 1 234567 MO 2 Ln 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 cl a s1 32767 fl 1 234567 MO 2 Ln 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 c1 a s1 34767 fl 1 234567 MO 2 La 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 c1 a s1 34767 fl 1 234567 ID 2 Ln 7 The results are ID 2 Ln 8 cl a s1 32767 fl 1 234567 ID 2 Ln 7 The results are 648 CIX Ps lt Lig WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser 33 3 Error Code In activity area users can find the reason of error through error codes listed below 0 Normal 1 Time out 2 Fail Error 12 Ignore When error occurs error message will be shaded red as shown below The error code is 1 since PLC is disconnected with HMI The error code is 12 since PLC No Response message window is shown WY Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser Cptons Help Tre i S Address Type l Cmd PID Device Index Address Length Time Error m Jr i _ gt
40. VariableName Expression Example A 2 where a variable A is assigned to 2 368 N WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 4 3 Logical Statements Logical statements perform actions depending on the condition of a boolean expression The syntax is as follows Single Line Format if lt Condition gt then Statements else Statements end if Example if a 2 then b 1 else b 2 end if Block Format If lt Condition gt then Statements else if lt Condition n gt then Statements else Statements end if Example ifa 2 then b 1 else if a 3 then b 2 else b 3 end if 369 re WE NTEK Macro Reference syntax description if Mustbeusedtobeginthe statement oo lt Condition gt Required This is the controlling statement It is FALSE when the Must precede the statements to execute if the lt Condition gt evaluates to ME ae De SMeren eee te omom omnes It is optional in block format but necessary in single line format without med else The statement will be executed when the lt Condition gt is TRUE Optional The else if statement will be executed when the relative lt Condition n gt is TRUE Optional see lt Condition gt Optional The else statement will be executed when lt Condition gt and lt Condition n gt are both FALSE endif Must be used to end an if then statement 18 4 4 Selective Statements The select case construction can be used like multiple if else statements
41. or 00000 In addition the time tag displayed on the upper left corner of the object and on the X axis can be set to SSSSS or SSSSS leading zero formats and are based in seconds If the Clear address in Data Sampling object is enabled the sampled data will be cleared and the sampling time is reset to the start that is the time starts counting from the first data sample after reset The figure below shows the settings of Clear address Clear address Enable Mode oFF gt 0k vi PLC name Setting Time Date The time of latest sampling data will be marked on the top left corner of the object It is used to set the time display format and color 219 WW WEINTEK Object The picture below shows the attribute of Channel tab Trend Display Objects Properties General Trend Channel Shape Profile Data sampling object Description Data type 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit BCD 16 bit BCD 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Unsigned 32 bit Float 32 bit Float Channel Fen property Color PLE name Local HMI wt Setting Cancel Channel Configure each sampling line s format and color and the displayed data s low limit and high limit At most 64 channels could be configured Dynamic limits unchecked Zero gt Span Zero and Span are used to set the low limit and high limit of sampling data If the low limit is 50 and the high limit is 100 for one sampling l
42. A to F it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 0x3c int result1 bool success1 success1 StringHexAsc2Bin src1 0 result1 success1 true result1 is 3c short result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Bin 1a2b3c4d result2 success2 true result2 3c4d The result exceeds the data range of result2 char src3 2 4g char result3 bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Bin src3 0 result success3 false because src3 contains characters other than 0 to 9 Il a to f or A to F end macro command StringBin2HexAsc success StringBin2HexAsc source destination start Description This function converts binary data to a hexadecimal string It converts the binary data in source parameter into a hexadecimal string and stores it in the destination buffer Source can be either a constant or a variable 421 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of hexadecimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main int src1 20 char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringBin2HexAsc src1 d
43. Circle Rectangle cancel In the above dialog box users can set the meter display object s outline Refer to the picture below for the names of each part of the meter Range mark Tick mark YX Corrdinate 8 Pointer Pin point 204 Object Degree Set the objects start degree and end degree The angle range is 0 360 degrees The following pictures show several results of different settings Z gt Start degree 290 End degree 70 2 Start degree 120 End degree 240 Q Start degree 40 End degree 140 2 Start degree 225 End degree 315 Background Set the object s background color and profile color 205 Ly WE NTEK Object Full circle When Full circle is selected the object will display the whole circle Otherwise the object will display the defined degree range See the picture below Full eirele non full circle Transparent When Transparent is selected the object will not display the background and profile color Tick marks Configure the tick mark s number and color Pointer Configure pointer s style length width and color Pin point Configure the style radius and color of the pin point The following picture shows the Limit tab 206 L WE NTEK Object New Meter Display Object General Outline Limits Shape op 8 sem 8 Value Range limits Enable Low En Mid ov High bd Width 3 3 Use
44. File index control address 4 The beginning of time Second 0 normally gt Start time control address 5 The ending of time The period of time gt End time control address 6 Update Enable video The elapsed playing time of video will be writing into Playing time register at a rate set by Update time period in seconds ie period Second Playing The elapsed playing time of video Second gt Playing time control address 7 USB 1 USB 2 Play video files in USB 1 or USB 2 disk The folder name of video files stored in SD card or USB disk Files must be stored in root directory Subdirectories won t be accepted EX root sub is an invalid directory cm layin Video praying Folder name Video file store location 1 Folder name cannot be empty 2 Folder name cannot include N lt gt 3 A folder name must be in ASCII characters When finish playing all the video files replay from the first file Ex Video 1 gt Video 2 gt Video 1 gt Video 2 Background The background color of the object Auto repeat 271 Lig WE NTEK Object cm The data format for control address is 16 bit Unsigned or 16 bit Signed If using 32 bit Unsigned or 32 bit Signed only the previous 16 bits will be effective Control command a Play index file Command 1 Parameter 1 file index Parameter 2 ignore set 0 cm e Files are stored with file names i
45. JOG for controlling the zoom in and zoom out function OA value eg Decrease the value of LW 1 to exhibit zoom in function as shown below The value of LW 1 decreased to 11 OAA value U 222 re WE NTEK Object Increase the value of LW 1 to exhibit zoom out function as shown below The value of LW 1 increased to 41 223 Lig WE NTEK Object 13 18 History Data Display Overview History Data Display object displays data stored by Data Sampling object The difference from Trend Display is that History Data Display objects use tables to display numbers Please note that the History Data Display will not refresh the table automatically when the data updates It shows only the data retrieved from the designated record as the time window popped up Ch 2 reosor o 0 mi 0 0 0 EE 0 0 0 16 09 07 Fo 0 3571 J5isahe0a07 010 0 3570 21 52 16 09 07 0 0 0 3589 2152 ho0a07 00 0 FLAA ARAINA ni i A Pe Configuration Click the History Data Display icon on the toolbar to open History Data Display dialog box Fill in properties click OK button and then create a new History Data Display object 224 NG WE NTEK Object Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Shape Data Sampling bjs Enable Color gt Colunninevel 0 O Profile color Grid Transparent Frame mn Background Time Time HH MM v Color gen Date
46. MW MW LW 10517 16bit PLC 4 send ACK delay unit ms SIEMENS 7 400 Link type 16bit PLC 4 parameter 2 SIEMENS 7 400 CPU slot 16bit PLC 5 timeout unit 100ms 16bit 16bit LW 10521 16bit PLC 5 turn around delay unit ms LW 10522 16bit PLC 5 send ACK delay unit ms SIEMENS 57 400 Link type LW 10523 16bit PLC 5 parameter 1 SIEMENS 57 400 rack LW 10524 16bit PLC 5 parameter 2 SIEMENS S7 400 CPU slot 16bit 16bit 16bit PLC 6 timeout unit 100ms 16bit 16bit LW 10526 16bit PLC 6 turn around delay unit ms LW 10527 16bit PLC 6 send ACK delay unit ms SIEMENS 57 400 Link type LW 10528 16bit PLC 6 parameter 1 SIEMENS S7 400 rack 16bit LW 10529 16bit PLC 6 parameter 2 SIEMENS 7 400 CPU slot RW RY R LW 10530 16bit PLC 7 timeout unit 100ms R Y R Y LW 10531 16bit PLC 7 turn around delay unit ms ORW RY RY Y LW 10532 16bit PLC 7 send ACK delay unit ms SIEMENS 7 400 R W R Y Link type LW 10533 16bit PLC 7 parameter 1 SIEMENS 7 400 rack LW 10534 16bit PLC 7 parameter 2 SIEMENS 87 400 CPU slot 533 R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y lt Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 10535 16bit PLC 8 timeout unit 100ms R Y R Y LW 10536 16bit PLC 8
47. O warningts 25526 bytes 314444 bytes Picture size 405032 bytes Shape size 202 bytes Sound size 63164 bytes Total size 98458 bytes 0 56M Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects compile Build font files 620 WE NTEK Project Protection 30 3 Disable XOB Upload Function EasyBuilder provides a system reserved address LB 9033 When this address is set ON xob file cannot be uploaded To change the setting please reboot HMI Attempting to upload an xob file with this address set ON the file obtained after uploading is 0 byte and cannot be decompiled Address Tag Library Customized 8 System Address tag name LB 9022 LB 9023 LB 9027 LB 9031 delete the earliest event log file on HMI memory set ON delete all event log files on HMI memory set ON LB 9024 LB 9025 LB 9026 refresh event log information om HM memory set OM delete the earliest data sampling file on HMI memory set ON delete all data sampling files on HMI memory set ON refresh data sampling information on HMI memory set ON LB 9028 LB 9029 LB 9030 reset all recipe data set OM save all recipe data to machine set ON update COM 1 communication parameters set ON Update COM 2 communication parameters set ON SAVE BERE to HMI IE disk sD zE est OM LE 3035 LB 9036 LB 9041 LP sn HM free space insufficiency alarm
48. Original Change the high limit of Y axis to 25 zoom in X KH YL YH o 50 Jo a XY XY1 XY2 LW100 control LW 101 display number Ld Change the high limit of Y axis to 100 zoom out 246 KR WE NTEK Object QI sl E X and Y data can be set to different formats EX If X data uses 16 bit unsigned Y data uses 32 bit signed please note the address setting m When using a Tag PLC such as AB tag PLC X and Y must be in the same format When using different formats a warning will be shown 247 og WE NTEK Object Display Area tab Hew ZY Plot Object General Display Area Shape Profile color Transparent Curve Fen property ees 8 Line Point O E axis projection O Y axis projection Reference line Limit from PLC fr 0 J iht V Reference line 1 20 Reference line 2 ao eee Reference line 3 1 m 1 Reference line 4 Profile color Select frame and background colors or select Transparent check box Curve For each channel select the properties of color width and line style 248 W WEINTEK Object bg Maker There are four different types of XY plot Maker Point width 5 Line Point O E axis projection Y axis projection The result is shown below Example The curve shown below is drawn with 7 points numbered from PO to P6 The steps the system draws the X axis Projection a C
49. Same as the keyboard s lt key moves the text cursor to the left side of the previous number or character Right Same as the keyboard s key moves the text cursor to the left side of the next number or character ASCII UNICODE Specify the character to be entered by this key 148 Object Execute Macro Select this check box to execute one of the Macros from the drop down list that has already been configured by users 8 Execute macro Macro macro 1 ID 1 w Window title bar Function Key defined can be used to move a popup window which is no window title bar to a preferred position on screen Select the popup window and then click on a preferred position the window will be moved FK Alarm Status I Select the window title bar firstly Touching the screen for the new position the popup window will be moved Screen hard copy Print the current window Before using this function choose a printer model in System Parameter Settings Model Printer If a single color printer is used selecting grayscale can get a better print result but the text may not be clearly printed To improve text printing it is not necessary to select grayscale 8 Screen hard copy Printer HP PCL Series SB w Mode Notification Enable Notification If this selection is enabled it will notify a designated bit address to set ON or OFF each time the button is pressed x E
50. See the picture below pr Frame Background Bar Bar style WSS Target Indicator When the register value meets the following condition the color of filled area will change to the target color Target Value Tolerance lt Register value lt Target Value Tolerance Assume Target Value is 5 and Tolerance is 1 As shown below if the register value is equal to or larger than 4 5 1 and equal to or less than 6 5 1 the filled area s color of the bar will change to the target color Target value 5 Tolerance 1 199 pi WE NTEK Object Alarm Indicator If the register value is larger than High limit the color of filled area will change to High color If the register value is smaller than Low limit the color of filled area will change to Low color Target Alarm Dynamic Address When Enable is ticked the Low limit and High limit of Alarm indicator and the Target Value of Target indicator will use from the value of designated registers See the picture below Hew Har Graph Object General Outline Shane _ A tbribute type lom Men mf sem Bar width ratio 991 Bar color style Frame Bar Target indicator Enable rasene 0 larm mdicators Lowlint 7 Low color Target slannzerolspan dynamic address Enable PLC name Local HMI w Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned The following table shows the read address of low limit hi
51. Sets the range of values set by entering values in Input low and Input high If the value entered is outside the limits the value in the register cannot be changed Address Set the low high limit by a designated register When Address is LW n where n is an arbitrary number the rule of setting limits is 171 For example when Address is LW 100 the rule of setting limits is 16 bit 32 bit Dynamic Address LW 100 LW 100 LW 100 LW 100 High limit LW 101 LW 102 Low limit When the value in the register is outside the Low limit display digit color set High limit When the value in the register is outside the High limit display digit color set Blink When the value in the register is outside the limits the digits flash The following shows the Font tab of Numeric Input and Numeric Display objects for setting the properties of the displayed digits including Font Color Size and Align Numeric Input Objects Properties General Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile A tribute Font Comic Sans ME v Color mmm gt Align Attribute Color When the value is within the limits display digit color set in this tab Align There are three selections Left Leading zero and Right Left Leading zero 0012 Right 12 Size Set the font size 172 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 10 ASCII Input and ASCII Display Overview ASCII I
52. TV address type of the Local PLC The addresses of TV start from 0 and contain 6 consecutive words and each of them store the following information Second range 0 59 Minute range 0 59 Hour range 0 23 Day range 1 31 Month range 1 12 Year range 1970 2037 Clock source Extemal device we 55 System Parameter Settings PLC name Mitsubishi FX0s FxOn FX1s Fx1n FX2 Device type TV Address 0 Address Format DDD range 0 255 Index register 16 bit Unsigned Type A printer can be connected with the HMI For HP PCL Series it has to be connected through USB interface while other printers through a COM port For more information please refer to Chapter 23 HMI Supported Printers Printer Type HF PCL Series SB hul a None Paper size op M D E F EPSON ESC P2 peres HF PCL Series UH Asotin A630 SPRT SP DITI DIV D5 D6 4 DN T EPSON TM L90 EPSON THM T70 BEIGHTEE WH E19 BEIGHTEE WH C102 If the printer is connected through COM configure the parameters correctly If the printer type is SP M D E F the pixels of width has to be set accurately i e the set pixel s cannot exceed printer s default setting or the HMI will fail to print data Printer Te Band rate Data bits Pastels of width pieli Screen hard copy scale 100 prel for 1610 type or 220 pixels for 2407 4004 type Width Set to Small Middle or L
53. The xob file obtained after compiling can only be executed on HMI when HMI key and Project key match If the keys don t match LB 9046 is set ON To change HMI key please reboot HMI cm m When HMI key and Project key don t match HMI and PLC cannot communicate Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 622 WE NTEK Project Protection 30 5 MTP Password After a project mtp is done editing a password can be set to protect the mip file In System parameter Security tab select Enable check box in Project password and click Settings password range 1 4294967295 The password will be required when attempting to open the mtp file Address o Project password iM TF file ne MIF file Password 1954321 range 1 4294967295 Cancel m When using Window Copy function if the source file is protected by MTP password please enter the correct password for the system to execute window copy 623 y WE NTEK Memory Map Communication Chapter 31 Memory Map Communication 31 1 Introduction Memory Map communication protocol is similar to IBM 3764R and it is used when the memory data transferred seldom between two devices When setting the two devices one is set as Master and another is Slave Generally Master and Slave do not communicate unless the data in the assigned address has changed Once the data is synchronized the communication
54. Time Set Address mode when start time and end time Is out range error occurs in the set action time Note BCD is not an acceptable format E In Time Set Address mode the action will not start up until the first time the time data is successfully updated 306 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 29 Option List Overview Option List object displays a list of items that the user can view and select Once the user selects an item the corresponding value will be written to a word register There are two forms for this object Listbox and Drop down list The listbox lists all items and highlights the selected one The drop down list normally displays only the selected item Once the user presses it the system will display a listbox which is similar to Listbox beneath the object Listbox Drop down list 14 Apr 2009 13 Apr 2009 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 09 Apr 2009 w 14 Apr 2009 vw h 13 Apr 2009 12 Apr 2009 11 Apr 2009 10 Apr 2009 w Configuration Click the Option List icon on the toolbar to open a Option List object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Option List object will be created 307 og WE NTEK Object Option list Hew Option List Object Option list Mapping Security Shape Label ammet Attribute ne ll Item no Selection EE Source of item data Monitor addres PLC na
55. a ae 7 0111 State 1 displayed The least significant active bit is el dl bit 3 130 Object c Change state by time The state displayed changes on a time base The frequency can be set Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the word device that controls the Word Lamp object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Address PLO name Local HMI w Device type i Li s Address Format DDDDD range 0 10500 Index register 16 bit Unsigned hd Attribute No of states The number of states is utilized by the object The state is numbered from 0 so the number of states minus 1 will be the state number If the value within the word register is 2 No of states defined in Attribute the highest state will be displayed If the number of states is set to 8 the valid states will be 0 1 2 7 In this case if the word value is 8 or higher the system will display the state 7 shape 131 Lr WE NTEK Object In Label tab Language 1 determines the relevant settings of the font For Language 2 8 only the font size can be changed and other settings follow Language 1 Kew Fon Lamp Object Garmel Semi hans label Use atal Use label Ebrary Label bag Labs D Us bitmap font smell meg i Align Left Tils Unisin Daph Beis altinbotet 15 ee ee Cr Hosen D sshoa
56. current project as xls file current project 347 og WE NTEK Click New and set the relevant properties The information of the address tag The name of the address tag As defined in System Parameter Settings Device list The tag address type Bit Word Available device types are limited by PLC name amp Address type Address of the Tag Address Taz Description Tag name PLC name Address type Device type Address Address format Address Tag Library test pump Mitsubishi FxOs FxOn FX1s Fx In Fx2 ka Bit O word DDD range 0 255 Cancel Click OK a newly added tag can be found in the Customized library Address Tag Library Customized O System No Address tag name FLE name Users can Import MT 500 tag to represent the address Address type Address Read Write Description Mitsubishi FOs FxOn Fodl sf Pec vee Read write Save Tag File Load Tag File Export CSW Import CSV Export EXCEL Import EXCEL 348 pi WE NTEK Address Tag Library 16 2 Using Address Tag Library Hew Bit Lamp Object General Security Shape Label pep Read address PLC name Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn Fx1s Faln Fx2 iv Setting Address i pump test pump Y Address gt PLC name Mitsubishi FX0s FxOn Fxls Fxln FX2 hd Device type pump best pump Address ren ooo O v User defined tag Addr
57. f RSLogix 5000 AB 1769 L23E 0B61 18 11 Controller Tags AB controller File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tool Window Help gH amp v amp amp amp v Rem Run OE Aun Mode Path AB_ETH 14192 168 1 130 Backplane 0 No Forces P E Controller OF No Edits T Battery OK d b i i gt K EEE EE Name Sela Value a Force Mask Style Data Type ontroller Fault Handler E gt Decimal DINT Power Up Handler E Arap2D En i Decimal DIN T 25 5 E Tasks 4 ArayBaol farce Decimal BOOL 256 Bg MainTask H AnaDINT E f Decimal DINT 130 E D MainProgram Sd Unscheduled Programs Phases E rayHeal feed f Float FREAL T25 B E Motion Groups EE 0 Decimal BOOL I Ungrouped Axes E INT 10 cut fa Decimal INT S60 Add On Instructions 4 Locakt C oe ra AB Embedded IO Data Types Locattil Me ion AB Embedded 10 mg et ML 15 Locat2C ee pe AB Embedded D Eg Add On Defined 1 Locakzil re TER AB Embedded D Og Predefined o Local 2 0 MaN Mann AB Embedded 0 gg Module Defined VarBool a Decimal BOOL ee m VaDint 21862 Decimal DINT E HE CompectLogixS 2238 081 Fen E Varlnt 0 Decimal INT 8 1769 L23E OB1 AB VarReal 0 0 Float REAL E 1769 L23E QB1 Ethemet Fort LocalEN F VarSint 128 Decimal SINT Step 2 Export Tags to csv file i RBSLogix 5000 AB 1769 L23E QB1 18 11 Controller Tags ABicontoller File Edit View Search
58. other addresses are set as follows In the example format 16 bit Unsigned is used and Offset value storage address are all m Item Control No of data Offset value storage Data 1 Data 2 Address address cry LW 2 m LW O m LWet m Channel 1 LW 100 LW 101 LW 102 LW 100 m woane Channel 2 LW 200 LW 201 LW 202 LW 200 m LW 201 m 238 Ly WE NTEK Object No offset settings Has offset settings address address _ 1 Mo of Data n 1 No of Data n 2 Data n to be displayed on the graph m n 1 Data n Data n to be displayed on the graph m n 1 m When Control word address is set to LW n No of data address and Offset value storage address are as follows Address 16Bit 32Bit m Ifthe control registers are 32 bit devices only bit 0 15 will be used as control purpose bit 16 31 will be ignored as illustrated below 32 bit device 31 16 15 0 O o m When the value in Control word address is not zero the system will read No on data address and Offset value storage address m Itis recommended to use Offset to start address for data block display with multiple channels and the same device type You can use Control word address at continuous address for each channel The system will read the control words of all the channels in one read command and it shall speed up the response time Please refer to the following picture The cont
59. result result is 0x1234 source 56 78 BIN2BCD source result result is 0x5678 end macro_command Name BCD2BIN BCD2BIN source result Description Transforms a BCD type value source into a binary type value result source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main short source result BCD2BIN 0x1234 result result is 1234 source 0x5678 BCD2BIN source result result is 5678 end macro command Name DEC2ASCII DEC2ASCIl source result start len Description Transforms a decimal value Source into an ASCII string and save it to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if result s type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on The first character is put into result start the second character is put into result start 1 and the last character is put into result start len 1 source and len can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable EE re WE NTEK Y WENTEK 0 Macro Reference Reference start must be a constant macro_command main short source char result1 4 short result2 4 Source 5678 DEGC2ASCII source result1 0 4 result1 0 is 5 result1 1 is 6 result1 2 is 7 result1 3 is 8 the length of
60. when start executing the next time to execute the macro object will be 5 seconds later Active Cycle Settings 680 Lr WE NTEK EasyWatch 3 Macro The setting includes Macro and Sleep Macro Set the Macro ID to execute and click Add to add the Macro to the list Macro Macro Macro ID 0 Sleep Sleep Time Sleep Set the time interval between the execution of two Macros Click Add or Replace to add or replace the Macros listed here Macro VE Macro ID 0 Macro ID Sleep 1000 ms E Sleep Sleep Time Can 681 Lr WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 5 HMI Manager 35 5 1 HMI Settings There are two ways to open HMI Settings 1 2 J Untitled EasyWatch New Page Select from the toolbar Objects HMI Manager File Edit Objects Help al ee JE GE E Sr INE vw x Address select from the quick selection tools HMI Manager 682 Lib WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 5 2 HMI Manager HMI Manager Local Host 8000 192 168 1 85 8000 Default HMI EasyWatch allows monitoring addresses of multiple HMIs for easier management Add Please refer to 35 3 3 Add a New Device Modify Select a HMI to modify the settings Remove Remove HMI settings and click OK Local Host 8000 192 168 1 85 8000 Default HMI Easy Watch A re you sure you want to permanently delete this HMI and
61. 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 2 end macro_command Name StringCopy success StringCopy source destination start or success StringCopy source start destination start Description Copy one string to another This function copies a static string which is enclosed in quotes or a string that is stored in an array to the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start destination start must be an one dimensional char array This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of source string exceeds the max size of destination buffer it returns false and the content of destination remains the same The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 abcde char dest1 5 bool success1 success1 StringCopy src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 abcde char dest2 5 bool success2 success2 StringCopy 12345 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 12345 char src3 10 abcdefghij char dest3 5 bool success3 success3 StringCopy src3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same ny Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference char src4 10 abcdefghij char dest4 5 bool success4 success4 StringCopy src4 5 dest4 0 success4 true dest4 f
62. 0 fixed ofo Bit 00 Status bit Read operation completed 0 reading or reading not started 1 reading completed Bit 01 Error bit Start or end time format incorrect 0 corrected 1 error Q sl m After the scheduler reads the data and the status is turned ON The value in Address 1 01 the control bit must be turned OFF address 0 The status bit and error bit will be turned OFF 1 30 at the same time 302 L WE NTEK Object 1 1 i ON l l Control Bit PE BM OFF AR SE l l l I I I v y ex HMI confirms that Control Bit HMI confirms that Control Bit is set ON is et OFF PLC to HMI 4 v l l HMI turns Status Bit ON Dad HMI to PLC OFF ON 1 5 8 Er Status Bit oi TE Vv Error Bit turns ON when fm error occurs I ON 1 5 8 Error Bit HMI to PLC OFF lt Communication delays HMI turns bit OFF User PLC turns bit OFF c Action mode Time setting address 2 Enable disable Enable termination action and Setting on individual day Whatever the Enable termination action bit is all the time data from Control to End time second will be read 15 02 01 00 Bit Reserved 0fed fo o Bit 00 Enable termination action 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 01 Setting on individual day 0 Disabled 1 Enabled sl m If Setting on individual day is OFF all 11 registers are still read but e
63. 100 Bottom limit LW 100 LW 100 Upper limit LW 101 LW 102 145 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 5 Function Key Overview The Function Key object can be used for several tasks 1 Open close return to a screen window 2 For keypad design 3 Execute a Macro 4 Print screen Configuration Click the Function Key icon on the toolbar to open a Function Key object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Function Key object will be created 146 Lr WE NTEK Object New Function Key Object General Security Shape Label Description Activate after button is released 8 Change full screen window Change common window Display popup window Window FUN 1 i Wy If j B O Ww BD 1 i Return to previous window Close window ASCIIUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Delete Left Right ASCII UNICODE Execute macro Window title bar Hard copy screen to USB disk 5D card or printer Screen hard copy Import user data Use USB Security Key Notification Enable Set ON 8 Set OFF PLC name Local HMI Address LB Cancel Activate after button is released If this function is selected the action is delayed till button is released otherwise the action is executed once the button is pressed 147 Ly WE NTEK Object Change full screen window Chan
64. 100 the Slider will enter values between 5 and 100 b Address Set the Low High limit by a designated register When Address is LW n where n is an arbitrary number the rule of setting Low High limit is 16 A wn w wimi iwn wn Pw win For example when Address is LW 100 the rule of setting Low High limit is 16 bit 32 bit LW 100 LW 100 LW 100 LW 100 LW 101 LW 102 Coarse increment Apart from moving the roller to change the value as in Resolution if this option is selected the word value will increase decrease by the Increment value each time the object is touched Slider button type A choice of different slider shapes and the width of the Slider may be set Color Colors of the frame background and slot may be chosen Slider button type Slot Frame Background 163 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric Display Overview Numeric Input object and Numeric Display object can be used to display the value of a designated word register Numeric Input object can be used to input a value into a register via a keyboard Configuration Click the Numeric Input or Numeric Display icon on the toolbar to REE open a Numeric Input or Numeric Display object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Numeric Input or Numeric Display object will be created 164 pi WE NTEK Object Hew Numeric Input Object Ed General
65. 105 Lig WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 6 Broadcast Station Number HMI provides two ways for users to enable broadcast command First is to set the PLC parameter directly in system parameter settings PLC type Mitsabishu FROsFXOWFX SFA WFE V 1 20 MITSUBISHI FXDN 50 PLC I F RS 485 4w v COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings PLC default station no LW 10000 16bit vad v Default station no use station no variable Lise broadcast command gt Broadcast station mo 355 The second way is to use system tag to enable or disable broadcast station number or to change It The corresponding system tags are listed below LB 9065 disable enable COM 1 broadcast station no LB 9066 disable enable COM 2 broadcast station no LB 9067 disable enable COM 83 broadcast station no LW 9565 COM 1 broadcast station no LW 9566 COM 2 broadcast station no LW 9567 COM 3 broadcast station no 106 Ly WE NTEK User Password and Object Security Chapter 10 User Password and Object Security This chapter discusses the protection for operations provided by setting up user passwords and security classes To set up the protection system please 1 Set user password and operable classes 2 Set object class for objects An object belongs only to one security class Setting the object class to None means any user can operate this object 10 1 User Password and Operable Object Classes The secu
66. 11967 disable PLC 8 s PLC No Response dialog when ON A 1 LB 11960 to LB 12026 are registers for disabling the PLC No Response pop up dialog for PLC 1 to 67 555 wa WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 27 HMI and Project Key LB 9046 project key is different from HMI key when ON PR R R LW 9046 32bit HMI key i series only Note1 Rw RY R No 1 When change HMI key using LW 9046 please reboot HMI to enable the new settings Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 556 Lb WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 28 Fast Selection Window Control LB 9013 FS window control hide ON show OFF R Y LB 9014 FS button control hide ON show OFF R Y LB 9015 FS window button control hide ON show OFF R Y 557 Lb WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 29 Input Object Function LW 9002 LW 9004 LW 9052 32bit float input high limit 32bit float input low limit 32bit float the previous input value of the numeric input object LW 9150 32 words keyboard s input data ASCII LW 9540 16bit reserved for caps lock oa 558 E WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 30 Local Remote Operation Restrictions LB 9044 disable remote control when ON R Y LB 9053 prohibit password remote read operation when ON R Y LB 9054 prohibit password remote write operation when ON R Y LB 9196 local HMI su
67. 12 Keyboard Design and Usage Numeric Input and ASCII Input objects need keyboard as an input tool Both numeric keyboard and ASCII keyboard are created with Function Key object The types of the keyboards are 1 Fixed Keyboard Popup keyboard Popup keyboard with title bar without title bar 3 UNICODE Keyboard UNICODE _ FK 0 aa 116 L weinTEK Keyboard Design and Usage 12 1 Steps to Design a Popup Keyboard Step 1 Create and open a window for the new keyboard For example set to window no 200 Widows x Object list w 195 A 197 an New 209 Step 2 Adjust the height and width of window no 200 and create a variety of Function Key objects in ASCII UNICODE mode For example FK_11 is used as the Esc key ASCIVUNICODE mode O Enter O Backspace Clear O Dekt Ope O Right ASCI WICODE FK_14 is used as the Enter key ASCILUNICODE mode Etg OO Backa Clear O Ex O Det Oeti O Right O ASCII UNICODE 117 Le WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage The rest are mostly used to enter numbers For example FK 0 is used for entering number ii Ga ASCIVUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Cleat Ex Delete Left Right ASCII UNICODE Step 3 Select a suitable picture for each Function Key object and placed at the bottom layer as a background Step 4 Select System Parameter Settings G
68. 2 Building Label Library 1 Open Label Tag Library New Label name Pump Alarm Ho of states Label name Specify the name of the Label No of states The number of states to be displayed by this Label 2 Click OK a new label is added to the Label Library select it and click Settings to set its content Label Tag Library mem set YHHONOOMOGE atte ine ts Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 Language 6 Language o Language 7 Language 8 PEER Pump Alarm 2 lt 7 Eg HA gt Export EXCEL File Import EXCEL File Cana 3 Set up the corresponding language contents Label Tag Content Label Content Settings Label name Pump lam Language 1 i are you Language 5 Change No of States 341 og WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language 15 3 Setting Label Font Select Label Tag Library Font to see the languages the Label contains and set the font Different languages can use different fonts Label Tag Library Font Comment Language Language 3 Language 4 Language 7 Font When using a Label to show different languages different fonts can be selected Comment The memo for each font 342 L WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language 15 4 Using Label Library When there are defined labels in Label Library the labels can be found in the object s Label tab Select Use labe
69. 20 Pass Through Settings avasveaaeensmemamesagmeimdgmmedmaismmmmdgiatei 554 22 26 Disable PLC No Response Window rrnrrrnnnnnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnrevnnnrnnnnnrnnnnrennnnnennnnee 555 22 27 AM nd PIET KO sivewesevevewessxazeuceewaxanciaxarauricynreueseversesbesarueesteeaveeeaeeeceyenee 556 22 28 Fast Selection Window Control rranannnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnenrnnnennnnnennnnsennnnsnnnanennnnnee 557 22 29 Input NEON ab 558 22 30 Local Remote Operation Restrictions rrrrnrnnnrnnnnnnnnrnrnnnrenrnnnrenrnnnrennnnerennnnsne 559 21 560 Chapter 23 HMI Supported Printers rrnnrrvnrnnnrvnrnnnrevrnnnrennnnnrennnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnsennnnnsennnnsnenn 561 23 1 The Supported Printer Types rrrrrrnrnnnnrnrnnnnvnrnnnnrnvnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrennnnnsnnnnnsnrnnnnnnee 561 23 2 How to check the Supported HP Printer Types rrnnrrnnnnnrvenrnnererrnnerenrnnvrennnnvnee 564 23 3 How to Add a New Printer and Start Printing cccccccccsseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 567 23 3 1 Add Printer Type ranrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanrnnnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnnsnnnnsnnnnee 567 PRE Ae La E a A A A OEE E EEE ENE 568 TREE 569 TONN E E 7 54 569 24 2 Recipe Extended Memory Editor Setting ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaaeess 569 Chapter 25 EasyConverter ccccccsecccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeceeeeeseeceeseeceeseeesseeeessaueessaeeesseeeesaneeeeas 572 251 How to E
70. 3 mark 4 space RW RY RY omassa mm COM tops 1 12 26 W Av RY 190555 160 COM 2 mode I RS2324 RS485 AWZAS4B5 an AW RY AY LW 9556 16bit COM 2 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 10 14400 2 19200 11 28800 3 3 R W R Y R Y 8400 4 57600 LW 9557 16bit COM 2 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits am Av RY LW 9558 16bit COM 2 parity O none 1 even 2 0dd 3 mark 4 space RW RY RY LW 9559 16bit COM 2 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits CRESES LW 9560 16bit COM 3 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W LW 9561 16bit COM 3 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 10 14400 2 19200 11 28800 3 3 8400 4 57600 LW 9562 16bit COM 3 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9563 16bit COM 3 parity O none 1 even 2 odd 3 mark 4 space RW RY R hl KJEDE nere COM 3 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits E DESE ve com reste Rw RY R Rw RY R RW RY RW RY RW RY 16bit PLC 1 send ACK delay unit ms 532 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 16bit PLC 1 parameter 1 16bit PLC 2 parameter 1 16bit PLC 2 parameter 2 16bit PLC 3 timeout unit 100ms 16bit PLC 3 turn around delay unit ms 16bit PLC 3 send ACK delay unit ms 16bit PLC 4 timeout unit 100ms R R MW MW MW MW MW MW N MW MW MW MW MW MW 16bit PLC 4 turn around delay unit ms MW MW MW MW MW MW N MW MW MW N
71. 32 bit float 32 bit float 32 bit char char 8 bit When a SetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function will automatically send int format or float format data to the device For example macro_command main float f 2 6 SetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 end macro command will send a floating point value to the device macro command main int I bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 405 re WE NTEK Macro Reference inte 5 int f 10 for i 0 to 29 b i true next i for i 0 to 49 d i i 2 next i fori 0to9 f i 1 3 next i setthe state of LB2 SetData a Local HMI LB 2 1 set the states of LBO LB29 SetData b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 set the value of LW2 SetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 set the values of LWO LW49 SetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 setthe values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int SetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words SetData f 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 end macro command 406 re WE NTEK Macro Reference Name SetDataEx Syntax SetDataEx send datafstart device name device type address offset data count or SetDataEx send data device name device type address offset 1 Description Send data to the PLC and continue execu
72. 8 Time based Trigger based Enable Sampling time interval 1 second s w PLC name 4 nor Mp Read address Hold address PLO name FE HMI vi Setting Enable Max data records 1000 _ auto stop TEE 3 2 Data Format Data length 0Owordis Save to HMI memory Save to SD card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 6 Preservation limit Days of preservation day s Data Record 1 Sampling mode Time based mode samples data in a fixed frequency The Sampling time interval can be set from 0 1 second s to 120 mins Sampling mode Time based CO Trigger based Sampling time interval 1 second s Ww Trigger based mode triggers data sampling by the status of a designated address Mode Conditions to trigger Data Sampling OFF gt ON Trigger sampling when the status of the address changes from OFF to ON ON gt OFF Trigger sampling when the status of the address changes from ON to OFF OFF lt gt ON Trigger sampling when the status of the address changes Sampling mode CO Time based Trigger based Mode OFF gt 0N s PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting 86 Ne WEINTEK Data Sampling 2 Read address Specify an address to be the source of Data Sampling Read address PLC name Local HMI w Setting Address 3 Data Record The max number of data records can be saved by one Data Sampling in one day is 86400 1 record per second for 24hours If sampli
73. A macro has the following structure Global Variable Declaration Optional Sub Function Block Declarations Optional Local Variable Declarations End Sub macro_command main Required Local Variable Declarations Statements end macro_command Required Macro must have one and only one main function which is the execution start point of macro The format is macro command main end macro command Local variables are used within the main macro function or in a defined function block Its value remains valid only within the specific block Global variables are declared before any function blocks and are valid for all functions in the macro When local variables and global variables have the same declaration of name only the local variables are valid The example below shows a simple macro which includes a variable declaration and a function call macro_command main short pressure 10 local variable declaration SetData pressure Allen Bradley DF1 N7 0 1 function calling end macro command 362 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 3 Syntax 18 3 1 Constants and Variables 18 3 1 1 Constants Constants are fixed values and can be directly written into statements The formats are Constant Type Note Example gt Must begin with Ox Ox3b Oxffff 0x237 Single character must be enclosed in a data name single quotation marks and a string group of characters must be enclosed by double quotation ma
74. Bit 1 gt Event Index 17 1 x 16 Bit 3 gt Event Index 19 Type x 1000 Bit offset of the event indicator For example if the value of Type is 1 and the value of Event indicator is 5 Binary 101 the event messages with index number 1001 and 1003 will be triggered 1 x 1000 Bit 1 gt Event Index 1001 1 x 1000 Bit 3 gt Event Index 1003 For Event Message Settings please see the following page 689 Ly WEI NTEK Sequence of Events Event Message Settings Event Message Settings Device 0 Index 1001 Color M This event will be triggered if the following two conditions are met 1 Device is equal to record s Trigger device 2 Index is equal to record s Type x 1000 bit offset where bit offset is the bit position 1 to n whose bit status is 1 in record s Event indicator For example Event indicator 00011001 will trigger 3 SOE events with bit offset 1 4 5 Use label library Content Device 0 amp Index 1001 setting Description 0 Gives the device type a specific index value range 0 to 255 Index Gives the event message a specific index value Sets the font color of the displayed event Use label If selected the content is from Label Library library Label Library Opens Label Library to build modify or delete label tag Enters the content to be displayed 690 Ly WE NTEK Sequence of Events 36 3 SOE Display SOE Display object allows users to view
75. CD or visit Weintek Labs Inc s website at http www weintek com The language versions include Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese English Italian Korean Spanish Russian and French The latest upgraded files can be downloaded too Hardware Requirements Recommended CPU INTEL Pentium II or higher Memory 256MB or higher Hard Disk 2 5GB or higher Disc space available at least 500MB CD ROM 4X or higher Display 1024 x 768 resolution or greater Keyboard and Mouse Ethernet for project downloading uploading USB Port 2 0 for project downloading uploading RS 232 COM for on line simulation Printer Operating System Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 re WE NTEK EasyBuilder Installation and Startup Guide 1 2 Steps to Install EasyBuilder 1 Installing EasyBuilder Put the disk into the CD drive The computer will run the program automatically or execute under the root directory Autorun exe manually The installation screen is shown below L wenrek EasyBuilder8000 MTB 21 Install E ae Document Library Drivers Project www weintek com 2 Click Install the dialog below is shown select the language and click Next Select Setup Language Select the language to use during the installation English hd English gt Spanish gt French gt Italian gt Simplified Chinese gt Traditional Chinese Korean gt Russian Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder Instal
76. Cancel 569 Ki WE NTEK Recipe Editor Step 1 Click Add the popup dialog shows Data Type Description Description price Enter the name of the data type C 16 bit BCD C 32 bit BCD 16 bit HEX C 32 bit HEX 16 bit Unsigned C 16 bit Signed Data format Select data 32 bit Unsigned C 32 bit Signed format If select String please enter the length Float words and select ASCII Unicode String WORLDIs ae ASC C Unicode Cancel Step 2 After setting click OK to start editing recipe data Set Data Format Address range unit word Select your data format Data 0 Fror 1 To 2300 Save Format Delete Format Data format Description Add 16 bit Unsigned recipe no String ASCII product Delete 32 bit Unsigned price String ASCI barcode Clear All Modify Cancel 570 LW weinrex 4 Recipe Extended Memory Editor C Documents and Settingsn Selle File Edit View Window Help D k terel ID ADDRESS recipe no 0 ND OO ssJ On on ke te ae pd ft gt dal wj bk Step 3 0 23 46 69 92 138 161 184 0 zi A 8 F o OD OD Oy product bread coke coffee chair desk tea egg coke coke lemon tea bag book barcode 1547965231 D 1437296591 3265479210 9 6454789321 1464545441 C 1234534444 4568974164 3 1246634344 4644245645 o 4645244575
77. Cycle Value WA New Monitor J Connected 192 168 1 85 8000 Default HMI HMI LW 10 16 bit Unsigned 2500 ms 0 Ea Wo gt Fox Help press F1 P NUM SCRL y l When system register LB 9044 disable remote control or System Parameter Settings System Setting Prohibit remote HMI connecting to this machine is enabled monitoring in EasyWatch is not available 668 Ly WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 2 Basic Functions 35 2 1 Basic Functions mem besmi O O New Open a new EasyWatch file oe es an existing EasyWatch file dd Save dd file Seve EasyWatch fle to ewttormat As Save Seve EasyWatch fle to ewttormat file to ewt format _ O Exit _ O ian Cut to relocate the selected items to the ian Copy dike the selected items to the clipboard Paste Paste the items in the clipboard at the selected location Add Object Add new Monitor or Macro objects Delete Objects Select the objects to be deleted a dialog will be shown click Yes to delete Modify Object Change the settings of the selected object HMI Manager Add modify or remove HMI settings Run Execute the selected object Stop Stop executing the selected object Help Topics Reference of how to operate the basic functions About EasyWatch EasyWatch version information us a E m m m m 669 We WEINTEK EasyWatch 35 2 2 Quick Selection Tools Untitled E
78. Enor Jim oc 456 Ki WE NTEK 18 8 3 3 Modify a Function 1 Users can modify the functions exist in the Library 2 Selecta function to modify by clicking Edit to enter Function Editor 3 Double click on the function to be modified can also enter Function Editor 4 After modifying Compile then Save before leaving Macro Reference Function Name int ADD int int int SUBS int int int MUL int int int DIV int int short test1 short this is a macro about square Bort Import 2 amp SB AA sub short ADD short a short b 2i short c i c a b Ea Modify Function Name and Definition Here Click the right mouse button to display edit menu Edit description here This is the function of A B Modify Function Description 457 Ki WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 3 4 Import a Function Potion dan int ADD int int int SUBS int int int MUL int int int DIV int int 1 Functions can be imported using hart tent shart an external mlb file this is a macro about square New Delete Edit 2 For example import a function ee os library math mlb which contains a function i a GU J CAEBPro library test1 Organize New folder 3 Click Open gt Faoi Name 3 Date modified frr Pr ee ea ro
79. Fa Virtual Serial Port COMS To change the number of virtual serial port please click Virtual Serial Port to open Port Settings Advanced as follows 609 L tgs WE NTEK Pass through Function PX Virtual Serial Port COM4 Properties General Port Settings Driver Details Advanced Settings for COM4 Bits per second 19200 v Use FIFO butters requires 16550 co a Select lower settings to correct conn Select higher settings for faster perfa Stop bits Receive Buffer Low 1 Flow control Transmit Buffer Low 1 l R a Restore Defaults 29 1 3 How to Use Ethernet Mode After installing virtual serial port driver please follow the steps below to use Ethernet mode of pass through function Step 1 Set the IP address of the HMI connected with PLC For example HMI IP is 192 168 1 206 Step 2 Set the serial port that connects HMI with PLC For example COM 2 RS 232 is used to connect PLC Step 3 Click Apply to update the settings 610 Ki WE NTEK Pass through Function rn Weintek Virtual Serial Port COM7 Stop Pass through re i Step 4 When running PC application set COM port to the used virtual serial port For example in Mitsubishi application if the virtual serial port is COM 7 please set PC side I F Serial setting COM port to COM 7 as follows Lr WE NTEK Pass through Function Transfer Setup CCIE Com MNET I
80. HMI PLC default station no 0 Cl Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command Broadcast station no And set as below Read address PLC name MODBUS RTU v Setting Address 4x vw 2554200 When HMI sends a command to address 25544200 all the PLCs will receive this command and will not reply Note Only PLCs that support broadcast command can use this function Interval of If the interval between read addresses of different commands is less than block pack this value the commands can be combined to one But the combining words function is disabled if this value is set to 0 For example the interval value is set to 5 to read 1 word from LW3 and 2 words from LW6 respectively read from LW6 to LW7 since the interval of addresses between LW3 and LW6 is less than 5 these two commands can be combined to one The result is to read 5 consecutive words from LW3 to LW7 Note The maximum size of command combination data must be less than Max read command size Max read The maximum data size to read from the device at one time Unit word command size words Max write The maximum data size to write to the device at one time Unit word command size words After all settings are completed a new device named Local PLC 1 is added to the Device list System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model Gene
81. HMI or PLC In this example the device used is a HMI so select HMI Location Select Local or Remote In this example Remote HMI is used select Remote Set the IP address and port number of the Remote HMI by clicking Device Properties Settings IP Address Settings Ethernet IP address 192 168 1 a 10 i Port no 8000 Cancel After all settings are completed a new device named Device with No as Remote HMI 1 is added to the Device list System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General System Setting Security Device list Name Location 53 L WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 2 Model Configure the HMI model Timer Printer and Scroll bar settings System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model Generel SystemSetting Security HMI model MT6070iH MT8070iH MT6100i MT8100 WT3010 800 x 480 v HMI station no 0 wl Port no 8000 fused as MODBUS server s port no Timer Clock source Extemal device w PLC name Local HMI o Address LW vlo 16 bit Unsigned Printer Type SP M D E F hd COM COM 3 vi Band rate 19200 v Data bits 8 Bits vi Parity None vw stop bits 1 Bit vw Pixels of width 100 pixels Screen hard copy sc
82. Ho riaan k Rew Ward Lamp Ober emer Secunty Share Label _ Use bte fe Dar babel beary Label tag Label 0 _ Choe biii font Label Library Stade 0 HO Dupbeste an fobiler retinal Dire bon 132 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 3 Set Bit Overview The Set Bit object provides two operation modes manual or automatic Manual mode can trigger a designated bit address to change the state between ON and OFF when the object is touched In automatic mode the bit is automatically activated when a pre defined condition occurs touching the button will not be effective Configuration H Click the Set Bit icon on the toolbar to open a Set Bit object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Set Bit object will be created 133 Ki WE NTEK Object Hew Set Bit Object General Security Shape Label Write address PLC name Local HMI w Setting Write after button is released A ttribute Macro Execute macro Macro ID1 aD 13 vi Trigger mode OFF gt 0N vw CIFF i ON gt 0FF OFF gt 0N Cancel Write address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the Set Bit object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Address PLC name Local HMI wt Device type LB a Address Format DDDDD range 0 1
83. ID Wofthe object Address of the object 646 Lib WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser Note a Click Package ID the device station number will be displayed in 3 column Polling Packages Package ID Device Station Index Address Length 4 i1 Local Hhil LB 00562 11 o 0 Local Hhil LB 00574 1 SIEMENS S7 300 Ethernet ES 2 Bo 3 SIEMENS S7300 Ethernet 10 C610 00000 SS b Double click Package ID then select object the 1 column directs the object s position For example select Numeric Input and the screen no displays 10 This shows that this object is in window no 10 in the project and will be marked with pink frame in HMI as shown below Folling Fackages q EJ Object Screen IC Address 4 i1 Local Hhil LB 00562 11 6 0 Local Hhil LB 00574 1 BY 32 SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet 1 Mi OOOOO S41 68 3 SIEMENS 57 300 Ethernet DB10 000003 gt Eg A D810 Numeric I DB10 00001 Murneric l 10 4 D610 00002 Siemens S7 300 ET200S Ethernet Shows the object 647 Lh WE NTEK e Devices Devices window displays information of HMI and PLC Index Type Marne Location Block Interval Wax Read Length hax Write Length Index Type Mame Location PLE IF Block Interval Wax Read Length hax Write Length e Output Macro debug 0 MTSO00 Series Hh Local Swords 256 words 256 words 1 SIEMENS 871300 Ethernet Local Ethernet 192 168 1 97 1
84. INVBIT ADDSUM XORSUM CRC INPORT OUTPORT POW GetError GetData GetDataEx SetData SetDataEx SetRIS GetCTS Beep SYNC_TRIG_MACRO ASYNC_TRIG_MACRO TRACE FindDataSamplingDate FindDataSamplingindex FindEventLogDate FindEventLogindex StringGet StringGetEx StringSet StringSetEx StringCopy StringMid StringDecAsc2Bin StringBin2DecAsc StringDecAsc2Float StringFloat2DecAsc StringHexAsc2Bin StringBin2HexAsc StringLength StringCat StringCompare StringCompareNoGCase StringFind StringReverseFind StringFindOneOf Stringincluding StringExcluding String ToUpper String ToLower StringToReverse String TrimLeft String TrimRight Stringinsert 367 re WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 4 Statement 18 4 1 Definition Statement This covers the declaration of variables and arrays The formal construction is as follows type name This defines a variable with name as name and type as type Example int define a variable A as an integer type namef constant This defines an array variable called name with size as constant and type as type Example int B 10 where define a variable B as a one dimensional array of size 10 18 4 2 Assignment Statement Assignment statements use the assignment operator to move data from the expression on the right side of the operator to the variable on the left side An expression is the combination of variables constants and operators to yield a value
85. IP3 537 cm Nm oS y WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits Zz O a D D i i a lt RY Ry RY 16bit PLC 4 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 R Y 16bit PLC 4 s port no R Y R Y 16bit PLC 5 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 R Y R Y 16bit PLC 5 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 R Y 0 lt D lt 2 16bit PLC 5 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 R Y 16bit PLC 5 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 R Y RY RY RV RV RV RY RY RY lt J J D J E T I FI lt R RV R RV RY RV RY hy AY or M RY 16bit PLC 8 s port no 16bit PLC 9 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 RW 16bit PLC 9 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 RW D lt R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y SEE 16bit PLC 9 s IP2 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 ORW O i 16bit PLC 9 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 ORW O 16bit PLC 9 s port no R z CICI ICICI C CI C C I ICI C I C CIII CI IC CICC ze aN E EA EN EN E R SEE N E R 2 2 RS SNR R R R aR S aN a olol O olol olol ojl OO ol ojl olol olol olol ojoj olol olol ol ojoj o oO N A Ds OIOI Ds As AI DI DI DI DI DI OD DI DID DI OIOI OI OIOI OQI OQI OJI OTITI O DNINIDIDININIDIN IN 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 0O 0O 0 0O 0D 0D 0D 0 0O O NIDDIOAL RIO NI 1 01 0 0OIN IDI AIRI O
86. Import Picture Export the selected picture to the designated place As shown below users can get the original picture My Recent Documents Desktop E My Documents as My Computer J File name I 7 r i Mu Network Save as type Bitmap file bmp s i Cancel m The compatible picture formats are omp jpg gif dpd and png When adding a GIF picture in Picture Library if this picture file is animated the loop times of this animated picture can be set 334 gt WEINTEK Get Picture Picture fle State O 0 C Documents and Settings NicolasB8 gif State 0 Width 74 Height 40 Size 10157Bytes Loops O GIF default Infinite Customized 50 Shape Library and Picture Library Cancel The example below shows how to create a new Picture Library and add a Picture with two states into It Step 1 Click New Lib and enter the name of the new Picture Library Hew Library Library name TEST 335 wa WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library A new Picture Library TEST will be added At this moment there is no Picture in the library Picture Library Ea Library State 2 1 button 2 buttor2 3 buttona 4 button 5 button _type11 6 button typel iii 7 button typel3 o button typeld4 CTT A 5 7 z 3 O O D O D D D D Step 2 Draw the pictures to be added suppose the two pictures below are used to represent state 0 a
87. LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 Oxff force bit on command 5 0 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 send out a Write Single Coil command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 end macro command Name INPORT INPORT read_data start device name read count return value Description Reads data from a COM port or the ethernet These data is stored to read_data start read datalstart read count 1 device name is the name of a device defined in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device read count is the required amount of reading and can be a constant or a variable If the function is used successfully to get sufficient data return value is 1 otherwise Is 0 Below is an example of executing an action of reading holding registers of a MODBUS device Read Holding Registers macro_command main 397 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read no return value read data 2 FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 Ox1 station no command 1 0x3 function code Read Holding Registers address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 read 2 words 4x 1 and 4x 2 HIBYTE read no command 4 LOBYTE read no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6
88. LW 10007 16bit var7 station no variable 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit J ml z D J Pi z J 5s J ml z J ee 16bit var2 station no variable usage var2 address J ml z J ml 16bit var3 station no variable usage var3ttaddress J xN z J 16bit var4 station no variable D z J ml 16bit var5 station no variable usage varb address D z J mn 16bit var6 station no variable usage var6 address usage var7 address LW 10008 LW 10009 LW 10010 LW 10011 LW 10012 LW 10013 LW 10014 16bit var14 station no variable usage var14 address LW 10015 16bit var15 station no variable usage vari5 address Y lt 16bit var8 station no variable usage var8 address a aA aA aAa aA Re usage var4 address D z J S 16bit var9 station no variable usage var9 address lt 16bit var10 station no variable usage vari10 address JJ ml z J Mag 16bit var11 station no variable usage var11 address J SS z J 5s 16bit var12 station no variable usage vari2 address J xN z J Bas 16bit var13 station no variable J ml z J ml JJ I lt D DID D DI DIDI DIDID D DID D D D usage var13 address a A r RR Please confirm your Internet connection before download
89. LW 9455 to be the time tag of event log Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 521 og WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 6 HMI Hardware Operation LB 9018 disable mouse cursor set ON ml I LB 9019 disable enable buzzer LB 9020 show set ON hide set OFF system setting bar LB 9033 disable when on enable when off HMI upload function i series only Note1 w R W ml ig I LB 9040 backlight up set ON Note2 LB 9041 backlight down set ON Note2 LB 9047 reboot HMI set ON when LB9048 is on W LB 9048 reboot HMI protection LB 9062 open hardware setting dialog set ON lt E LB 9063 disable set ON enable set OFF popuping information dialog while an USB disk is plugged i series support only 008 Gere batery vage sees supports ony Wed R LW 9025 16bit CPU loading x 100 oR LW 9026 16bit OS version year ORO LW 9027 16bit OS version month OR LW 9028 16bit OS version day ORO LW 9040 16bit backlight index Note2 ORO LW 9080 16bit backlight saver time unit minute R Y LW 9081 16bit screen saver time unit minute R Y S A h After changing the settings please reboot HMI for updating LW 9040 used together with LB 9040 LB 9041 can adjust the backlight brightness with level 0 31 3 For LW 9008 when the battery voltage level goes below 2 80V it is recommended to replace
90. Loe Local 4d C Local 4 Local d C Gielen Focal Local Loen Local 6 Local 6 0 D E F E H DESCEIFTDATATYFE SPECIFIEE ATTRIBUTES AB 1769 D 0 AB 1769 P nr0 AB 1769 DO16 2 0 AB 1769 DOIlA PO AB 1769 DOI6 0 0 AB 1769 DOGS2 0 0 AB 1769 DOSAp0 AB 1769 DOS2 0 0 AB 1769 DGL6 0 0 AB 1769 DOIlA Pd AB 1769 DO16 0 0 AB 1769 _ IFL6 C0 0 AB 1769 Fl6 1 0 AB 1769 IFl6 0 0 In RSLogix5000 Controller Organizer Data Types Module Defined double click Data Type of the module Sub items of the module will be shown in a popup dialog Copy the Name and Data Type of the members 664 Ki WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Controller Oreanizer 1 Unscheduled Frograms 3 4 Motion Groups ST Ungrouped Axes Add On Instnetions 2 4 Data Types Ca User Defined Og Strings Og dd On Defined ot Fredefined 3 48 Module Defined Step 1 AB 1769 DIS LO M AB 1769 D310 I AB 1769 DOC AB 1769 DOLS LO I AB 1769 DOLS O0 AB 1769 DO32 C00 AB 1769 DO32 L0 AB 1769 DO37 000 H AB 1769 IF16 C40 H AB 1769 IF16 10 in AB YOO IFl C O EE EEE EE EEE Step 2 In Structure Editor exe right click on Module Defined and then click New Data Type sbracture Editor Data Types H User Defined Mame Strings E Predefined Step 2 Description E aB 1769 AB 1769 Pa20 0 AB 1769 PpPOl6 00 AB 1769 Dose Oro Data Type Description AB 1769 IFle r o GB Embedded IQ16F C 0 AB Embedded O16F 1 0 AB Emb
91. Ls WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 1 Device Parameters in this tab determine the attributes of each device connected with HMI The device can be a Local Remote HMI PLC When creating a new project file there is a default device Local HMI which indicates the HMI that will be updated and programmed To change the relevant device settings click System Parameter Settings Settings to open Device Properties dialog as shown below Device Properties Name Local HMI HMI Location Local Interval of block pack words 5 i Cancel 44 L WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 1 1 How to Control a Local PLC p mit PLC Device HMI Local PLC means the PLC is connected to the local HMI To control connect a Local PLC add this type of device first Click System Parameter Settings New to open Device Properties dialog as shown below For example we want to connect Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1n FX2 as a Local PLC Device Properties Mitsubishi FxOs FXOn FX1s FXiIn Fx2 OHMI PLC Location Local v PLC type Mitsubishi FAOsFXOn FX1s FX In FE2 1 20 MITSUBISHI FXON so PLC I F RS 485 4W COM COM1 9600 N 7 1 Settings PLC default station no o Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words 5 Max read command size words Max write command size words Cancel The settings
92. Manager Eg Select the folder to save download data Sources _ Project Recipe RW CA EBSDOOVHMIL memory recipe recipe rcp Recipe RWA CAEBSDOCYVHMI memory recipelrecipe_a rco Data log Select the source files m When download data is successfully built two folders can be found history and mt8000 mt8000 is for storing project file history is for storing recipe data and data sampling event log records 352 Transferring Recipe Data 17 3 Transferring Recipe Data Use Data Transfer Trigger based Object to transfer recipe data to a specific address or save the data of this address in RW and RW Al Use Data Transfer Trigger based object to transfer Recipe Data to the designated address or save the data of the designated address to RW and RW Al New Data Transfer Trigger based Object General Security Shape Label Source address Set the source of the am een ears Ades ea Set the destination Destination address of the data to PLC name transfer to Herse Attribute Set the number of No of word words to transfer Mode from source to destination 17 4 Saving Recipe Data Automatically In order to prolong the life span of HMI memory system will automatically save the recipe data to HMI every minute To avoid losing data when turning HMI off during the interval of saving data system register LB 9029 Save all recipe data to machine set ON is provid
93. Monitor Object if the status shows Connected current HMI address value will be displayed Modifying the value is also available when Read Only checkbox Is not ticked For Macro Object if set to Direct Active there will be an Active button in this column for clicking and directly execute Macro Drag and drop the column headers to the desired location J Untitled EasyWatch mX File Edit Objects Help He Ola a gy Ga e New Fage New Fagel PERE OIE v x fs Address Type i Name Status HMIPLC Address Address Type Update Cycle Value HA New Monitor Stop Mocal Host 8000 HMI LW 10 16 bitBCD 2500 ms s Fou Help press Fl CAP NUM SCRL 685 Lg WE NTEK Sequence of Events Chapter 36 Sequence of Events 36 1 Introduction SOE the abbreviation for Sequence Of Events is a function that records the precise time of the events occur and sorts the events by their time sequence When an event occurs PLC will store the data frame in Address of first record and writes the number of events in No of queued records HMI will scan No of queued records in the frequency set in Scan cycle If the value in No of queued records is not 0 HMI reads the data frame in Address of first record The content of data frame records the precise time and type of the event etc In EasyBuilder System Parameter Settings gt Device list gt Settings gt Device Properties select
94. Printer Backup Server check box 579 WE INTEK EasyPrinter System Parameter Settings Eg Device Model General System Setting Security Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Use MT Remote Printer Backup Server Mote Use EasyPrinter to configure PC for printing screen hardcopy and storing backup data Qutput settings Orientation 8 Horizontal vertical Printer size 8 Original size CO Fit to printer margins Communication settings IP address 192 168 1 76 Part User name Password m m e 3 In Output settings set appropriate values for left top right bottom margins Note The margins are all set to 15mm in the example 4 In Communication settings fill in the IP address of the printer server following the settings in EasyPrinter Set the port number to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 5 Click OK 6 In EasyBuilder main menu select Objects Button select Function Key select Screen hardcopy and set Printer to MT Remote Printer Backup Server 580 Ly WEINTEK EasyPrinter Window title bar Hard copy screen to USB disk SD card or printer 8 Screen hard copy Printer MT Remote Printer Backup Serve MT Remote Printer Backup Server Notification Enable 7 Place the Function Key object in the common window window no 4 for screen hardcopies an
95. SOE event messages The setting of SOE Display is available after enabling Sequence of events in Device list The General tab of SOE Display object is shown in the following figure SOE Display Object s Properties General SOE Display Shape Font Profile Description Query address PLC name Local HMI Setting Address Lyy 16 bit Unsigned Query address uses 19 word registers to select the events to be displayed n is any number Name Query Address Description Starttmems nss 1 Endimems n SiS 691 Ly WE NTEK Sequence of Events The value in Mode indicates Query Start date values in query address n 2 to n 4 are used When Status is 4 the value in End date Query address n 12 to n 14 is needed to form a query range Query Start time values in query address n 5 to n 7 are used When Status is 4 the value in End time Query address n 15 to n 17 is needed to form a query range Query Start time ms value in query address n 8 is used When Status is 4 the value in End time ms Query address n 18 is needed to form a query range Query Type value in query address n 9 is used Query Device value in query address n 10 is used Query User name value in query address n 11 is used The value in Status indicates Mode Selects the events where the value of the column assigned in Mode Selects the events where the value
96. Set constant 35 to LWIOO Set constant 36 to LWIOC Set constant 0 to LM I00 Use the Set Word object to set the value of LW 100 to 36 the display is shown in the following figure Set constant 35 to LIO Set constant 36 to LWI0C Set constant O to LICO To close window no 35 or 36 use Set Word object to set the value of LW 100 to 0 Another way is to place a Function Key object in window no 35 or 36 and set the key to Close window cm Upto 16 windows can be displayed simultaneously at run time The system does not allow opening the same window with two Direct or Indirect windows in one base window 181 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 12 Direct Window Overview Direct Window object defines the position and size of a popup window location on a window When the content of the bit register is changed the window will pop up at the predefined location The display area for the popup window is limited by the size of predefined location Restore the value of the bit register to close the popup window The difference between the Direct Window and the Indirect Window is that Direct Window object has a predefined window number For both of them users can use the state of the bit device register to open or close the popup window Simply speaking Direct Window is controlled by a bit register and Indirect Window is controlled by a word register Configuration EJ Click the Direct Window ico
97. StringGet str1 0 Local HMI LW 0 20 412 re WE NTEK Macro Reference end macro command Name StringGetEx Syntax StringGetEx read data start device name device type address offset data count Description Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of read data device name device type address offset and data count are the same as GetData macro command main char stri 20 short test 0 macro will continue executing test 1 even if the MODBUS device is not responding StringGetEx str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 1 macro will not continue executing test 2 until MODBUS device responds StringGet str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 2 end macro_command Name Stigs O Syntax StringSet send data start device name device type address offset data count Description Send data to the PLC Data is defined in send data startj send data start data count 1 send data must be a one dimensional char array data count is the number of sent characters it can be either a constant or a variable device name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters device type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device type is LW BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method
98. The objects in the common window Window No 4 will be shown in each base window This determines that the objects in common window 58 Ly WE NTEK Event Keyboard Project protection i series only System Parameter Settings are placed above or below the objects in the base window c Keyboard caret color Set the color of caret that appears when entering data in Numeric Input and Word Input objects d Object layout Options Startop window no 10 WINDOW 010 Common window Above base window w Object layout EW enabled If Control mode is selected when operating HMI Animation and Moving Shape objects will be displayed above other kinds of objects neglecting the sequence that the objects are created If Nature mode is selected the display will follow the sequence that the objects are created the first created will be displayed first e RW A enabled Enable or disable recipe data RW A Enable this the objects can then control RW A The size of RW Ai is 64K Extra no of events The default number of the events in the system is 1000 For additional number of events modify this setting The maximal is 10000 The window number in which the keyboard is placed When using Numeric Input or ASCII Input objects the type of keyboards can be selected Up to 32 keyboards can be added To design a keyboard a window should be designated for creating it Press add after creating a
99. Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Mode Toggle cm A screen can display up to 16 popup windows simultaneous including System Message Window Direct Window and Indirect Window m The system does not allow opening the same window with two Direct or Indirect Windows in one base window Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address L B10 Mode Toggle 184 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 13 Moving Shape Overview Moving Shape object defines the states and moving distance of an object The state and the location of the object depend on three consecutive PLC registers The first register controls the state of the object the second register controls the horizontal position X and the third register controls the vertical position Y Data format Object state Moving Distance Moving distance on the X axis on the Y axis 16 bit Address LW n Address 1 Address 2 LW n 1 LW n 2 32 bit Address LW n Address 2 Address 4 LW n 2 LW n 4 Configuration Click the Moving Shape icon on the toolbar to create a Moving Shape object Set up the properties press OK button and a new Moving Shape object will be created 185 te WE NTEK Obj ect Hew Moving Shape Object General Shape Label Description PLAC name Read address PLO name Address A ttribute Mode No of states Min X Display ratio state Limit address PLC name Set
100. W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9914 16bit remote HMI 22 s port no R Y R Y LW 9915 16bit remote HMI 23 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9916 16bit remote HMI 23 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9917 16bit remote HMI 23 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO 1P1 1P2 1P3 LW 9918 16bit remote HMI 23 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9919 16bit remote HMI 23 s port no R Y R Y LW 9920 16bit remote HMI 24 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9921 16bit remote HMI 24 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9922 16bit remote HMI 24 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9923 16bit remote HMI 24 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9924 16bit remote HMI 24 s port no R Y R Y LW 9925 16bit remote HMI 25 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9926 16bit remote HMI 25 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9927 16bit remote HMI 25 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9928 16bit remote HMI 25 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9929 16bit remote HMI 25 s port no R Y R Y LW 9930 16bit remote HMI 26 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9931 16bit remote HMI 26 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9932 16bit re
101. W R Y R Y parameters changed on line set ON LB 10072 forced to reconnect PLC 6 ethernet when IP or system R W R Y R Y parameters changed on line set ON LB 10073 forced to reconnect PLC 7 ethernet when IP or system R W R Y R Y parameters changed on line set ON LB 10074 forced to reconnect PLC 8 ethernet when IP or system R W R Y R Y parameters changed on line set ON LB 10075 forced to reconnect PLC 9 ethernet when IP or system R W R Y R Y parameters changed on line set ON LB 10100 PLC 4 status ethernet set on to retry connection Note3 LB 10400 PLC 5 status ethernet set on to retry connection LB 10700 PLC 6 status ethernet set on to retry connection LB 11000 PLC 7 status ethernet set on to retry connection LB 11300 PLC 8 status ethernet set on to retry connection LB 11600 PLC 9 status ethernet set on to retry connection LB 11900 PLC 10 status ethernet set on to retry connection LB 11901 PLC 11 status ethernet set on to retry connection RW RY RY LB 11902 PLC 12 status ethernet set on to retry connection RW RY RY gt LB 11903 PLC 13 status ethernet set on to retry connection RW RY RY LB 11904 PLC 14 status ethernet set on to retry connection RW RY RY LB 11905 PLC 15 status ethernet set on to retry connection RW RY RY LB 11906 PLC 16 status ethernet set on to retry connection LW 9600 16bit PLC 4 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 1P2
102. all of it s monitor Cancel 683 Ki WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 6 Object List 35 6 1 Page Settings Add a new page Click on icon to add a new page Untitled EasyWatch File Edt Objects Help Name Status HMP wa New Monitor WE Stop Local Host 8000 HMI Delete a page Click on X icon and confirm the deletion File Edt Objects Help Untitled EasyWatch File Ed Objects Help 684 EasyWatch 35 6 2 Columns of Object List J Untitled EasyWatch x File Edit Objects Help kE On BE Xiwwoals New Page New Fagel v Xx Name Status HMI PLC Address Address Type Update Cycle Value NA New Monitor Stop Local Host 8000 HMI LW 10 16 bitBCD 2500 ms Z Fox Help pess F1 CAP NUM SCEL 3 Name Display object names the small icons beside the names are for users to identify the type of the objects Status Display the status of the objects Connecting Connected or Stop If HMI is not connected or Port No is incorrect error message HMI Not Found will be shown For Monitor Objects if the address is incorrect Address Error message will be shown HMI PLC Display the information of HMI PLC that is currently operated by the objects Address Address Type For Monitor Objects the relevant address settings will be displayed Update Cycle Set the update interval of the monitor object Value For
103. and Data storage start address it might cause error for trend curve plot 2 How to clear the graph a Write 2 to Control word address all the trend curves will be cleared b The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve is cleared Word Address Last displ d h Cl ISplayed grap Control earl 7 No of Data Data 1 Data 2 10 Data 3 Li Data 4 Data 5 o _ wl Data 6 Clears the previous Data 7 graph display Even if 40 30 20 there is data the graph does not display 237 Ly WE NTEK Object 3 How to clear the previous trend curve and display new one a Write the number of data to No of data address i e control word address 1 b Store the data consecutively beginning at Data storage start address c Write 3 to Control word address the previous trend curves will be cleared and the new content in data block will be plotted on the screen d The system will write 0 to Control word address after the trend curve displayed Word Address Redraw screen d No of Data Data 3 Data 1 Last displayed graph 10 4 How to use offset mode If Offset to start address is selected Control word address No of data address and Offset value storage address will use 3 consecutive addresses For example assume the total number of channels is 3 start from 0 to 2 and 3 Control word address are LW 0 LW 100 and LW 200 Then
104. and perform selected actions depending on the value of the given variable When the matched value is found all the actions below will be executed until a break statement is met The syntax is as follows Format without a Default Case Select Case variable Case value Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 b 1 break end Select 370 N WE NTEK Macro Reference Format with a Default Case Case else Select Case variable Case value Statements break Case else Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 b 1 break Case else b 0 break end Select Multiple cases in the same block Select Case variable Case value1 Statements Case value2 Statements break end Select Example Select Case A Case 1 Case 2 b 2 Case 3 b 3 break end Select 371 re WE NTEK Macro Reference syntax description Select Case Must be used to begin the statement variable Required The value of this variable will be compared to the value of each case Case else Optional lt represents the default case If none of the cases above are matched the statements under default case will be executed Whena default case is absent it will skip directly to the end of the select case statements if there is no matched case Optional The statements under the matched case will be executed until the break command is reached If a break command is absent it simply k
105. ate 2member 666 wa WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Step 4 Select data then click Edit since the data of the modules can be operated by bit Binary Access should be selected then click OK to return to Structure Editor Edit data member Mame Description Data Type AB 1769 DI6G B0 AB Embedded IG16F C 0 AB Embedded IO16F I 0 AB Embedded O816 0 0 AB Embedded OB16 1 0 QB Embedded O816 0 0 ALARM ALARM AMALOG ALARM DIGITAL AL Valve CONTROL Array Dimensions Dim Pim 1 Dim O Show Data Types by Groups Click OK to finish setting 667 Lib WE NTEK EasyWatch Chapter 35 EasyWatch 35 1 Overview EasyWatch allows users to monitor HMI or PLC address values via Ethernet on PC or calling out Macro for easier debugging remote monitoring and controlling For example In EasyBuilder create a Numeric Input Object address set to LW 10 and set the same in EasyWatch The value will be shown in EasyWatch when it is successfully connected Numeric Input Object s Properties eo General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Profile Description Read Write use different addresses Read address PLC name Local HMI v Setting Address LW Bilin Untitled EasyWatch am E File Edit Objects Help 4 wh d El r sg Lal P New Page vw x Neme Stus HMIPIC Addes Address Type Update
106. be or not to be that is the question success Stringinsert 0 Hamlet dest 0 ur re WE NTEK Macro Reference success false dest remains the same end macro command 436 re WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 7 Miscellaneous Name SYNC_TRIG_MACRO SYNG TRIG MACRO macro id Description Trigger the execution of a macro synchronously use macro id to designate this macro in a running macro The current macro will pause until the end of execution of this called macro macro_idcan be a constant or a variable macro_command main char ON 1 OFF 0 SetData ON Local HMI LB 0 1 SYNC_TRIG_MACRO 5 call a macro its ID is 5 SetData OFF Local HMI LB 0 1 end macro command Name ASYNG TRIG MACRO ASYNC TRIG MACRO macro id Description Trigger the execution of a macro asynchronously use macro id to designate this macro in a running macro The current macro will continue executing the following instructions after triggering the designated macro in other words the two macros will be active simultaneously macro id can be a constant or a variable macro command main char ON 1 OFF 0 SetData ON Local HMI LB 0 1 ASYNG TRIG MACRO 5J call a macro its ID is 5 SetData OFF Local HMI LB 0 1 end macro command 437 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference Name TRACE Syntax Syntax TRACE format argument Description Use this function to send spe
107. be turned ON and TI remains OFF Period 2 When the IN turns OFF the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting the Q remains ON Period 3 When the IN turns ON the Tl and Q remains ON the timer measurement ET pauses Period 4 When the IN turns OFF the paused timer measurement ET continues Period 5 When the ET equals the PT the Tl and Q are turned OFF Reset the ET to 0 by using Reset bit R 317 Object 13 31 Video In Overview Specific HMI models provide the video input function Users can install surveillance camera then monitor the factory any time they want The video images can also be stored in devices and analyzed on PC This function can be utilized in different aspects Apart from monitoring factory it can also be used in mobile vehicles or building automation monitoring For hardware HMI provides 2 channels for video input Users can switch the monitored channel and capture images without being influenced by playback function such as pause The captured images are still the real time external video images Supported formats are NTSC and PAL Note For MT series only MT8000X series supports video inputs Configuration PS Click Video Input icon on the toolbar to open a Video Input object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Video Input object will be created New Video In Object BE General Description Input channel Encode Format Cap
108. by clicking Settings next to Remote IP Address Settings Ethernet COM port use master slave protocol IP address 192 168 vn Port no 8000 OK came PLO Type PLC I F The interface used for Remote PLC If the remote PLC uses a COM port PE RARS ZBR mass PLC Set the station number of Remote PLC default station no Set the COM port used by the Remote PLC this setting must be correct After all settings are completed a new device named Remote PLC is added to the Device list System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General SystemSetting Security Device list Name Location Device type Local HMI MT60701H M T8070 siemens 7 200 Remote IP 192 168 1 10 Port 8000 COM 19 Siemens 7 200 Local HMI 51 WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 1 3 How to Control a Remote HMI Ge Ethernet i HMI Ethernet E HMI Remote HMP is the HMI other than Local HMI and PC is also a Remote HMI To control a Remote HMI add this type of device first Click System Parameter Settings New to open Device Properties dialog as shown below Device Properties Device HMI OPLC Location Remote v Settings IP 192 168 1 10 Port 8000 Interval of block pack words 5 Cancel 52 Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Setting Description O
109. by the value of the designated register Address then the address of Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y are listed in the following table Data format Min X Max X Min Y Max Y address address address address 16 bit format Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 32 bit format Address 2 Address 4 Address 6 190 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 14 Animation Overview Animation object is defined by a pre defined path and states It will move to the given point and show in the given state as defined by registers The object state and position depend on current value of two consecutive registers The first register controls the state of the object and the second register controls the position along the predefined path Configuration Click the Animation icon on the toolbar First create the pre defined path Move the mouse to each moving position and click the left button to define positions one by one When it is done right click on the screen set up the properties press OK button and a new Animation object will be created AN 0 posen 5 amp pasitian State 0 pasitian I posand f pasien I S postens To change the object s attributes you can double click on the object to open Animation object s properties dialog box as shown in the picture below 191 og WE NTEK Object Animation Object s Properties General shape Label Profile Attribute motse Fos
110. card free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9037 USB 1 free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9038 USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON The text shown in windows no 5 8 can be edited for easier reference y m A screen can display up to 16 popup windows simultaneous including System Message Window Direct Window and Indirect Window m The system does not allow opening the same window with two Direct or Indirect Windows in one base window m Windows no 3 to 9 are used by the system only and windows no 10 to 1999 can be edited based on actual usage 73 6 2 Create Set and Delete a Window Check the existing windows in View Window Tree Him Dey Eies Liker toe gier Eiin Standard Toolbar Project Toolbar Libuay Toolbar Text Tolkar Edit Toolbax State Toolbar Draw Toolbar PLC Toolbar Object 1 Toolbar Object 2 Toolbar Window Tree oc 0 Windows Object lst 3 Fast selection 4 Common Window 5 PLC Response HMI Connecton T Password Restrcton 0 storage space nsutffurent g W 10 WINDOW 010 gt Window Operations x Window preview w 0003 Fast Selection 0004 Common VW irdovr 0004 gt 4 Object list displays window numbers and window names Opened windows are marked with sign Press the sign to see the object ID address and description in this window Window preview displays the thumbnails of windows 6 2 1 Creat
111. command to 4x 1 4x 50 registers 696 Le WE NTEK MODBUS TCP IP Gateway 37 2 2 Notes about Configuring Address Mapping m UDP is not supported when using the MODBUS TCP IP Gateway function m This function is only supported by MODBUS Server Ethernet interface m System register LW 9288 is used to indicate if data transfer has been correctly executed The alue F error BEE represent ee eee Read or write the register that is not defined in the Address Mapping Table Read or write a range of registers that is not within the range defined ina single Address Mapping Table Or read write a register that is defined in other Address Mapping Table m The defined register range must not overlap between different mapping tables m If MODBUS TCP IP Gateway is enabled EasyBuilder will cancel the original mapping between MODBUS Server and HMI register That includes 1 Ox 1x mapped to LB 2 3x 4x mapped to LW RW Therefore to access data in LB or LW register via Ox 1x 3x 4x configure the Address Mapping Table again The following figure is an example Mapped PLC Address Table Size Read Write gt Local HMI 12400 Bit s Read Write Ix lt gt LB lx 1 lt Local HMI LB 0 12400 Bit s Read only 3x gt LW 3x 1 lt Local HMI LW 0 9999 Word s Read only dx lt gt LW 4x 1 lt gt Local HMI LVW 0 9999 Word s Read Write 3x lt gt RW 3x 10000 lt Local HMI RW 0 55536 Word s Re
112. compile error 469 re WE NTEK Macro Reference For example macro_command main int a b fora Oto2 b 4 xyz illegal xyz is undefined next a end macro command C28 must be macro command There must be macro command C29 must be key word sub The format of function declaration is sub data type function name For example sub int pow int exp end sub Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C30 number of parameters is incorrect Mismatch of the number of parameters C31 parameter type is incorrect Mismatch of data type of parameter When a function is called the data type and the number of parameters should match the declaration of function otherwise it will cause a compile error C32 variable is incorrect The parameters of a function must be equivalent to the arguments passing to a function to avoid compile error 470 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference C33 function name undeclared function C34 expected constant expression Illegal array index format C35 invalid array declaration C36 array index error C37 undeclared identifier i identifier Any variable or function should be declared before use C38 un supported PLC data address The parameter of GetData SetData should be legal PLC address If the address is illegal this error message will be shown C39 idenifier must be integer char or constant The format of arr
113. dest1 0 success1 true dest1 a bc BB Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference char set2 20 char dest2 4 success2 String TrimLeft a bc set2 0 dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same char src3 20 abc char dest3 20 bool success3 success3 StringTrimLeft src3 0 dest3 0 success3 true dest3 abc tt end macro_command success StringTrimRight source start set start destination start success StringTrimRight source set start destination start success StringTrimRight source start set destination start success StringTrimRight source set destination start false If the length of trimmed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 a bc char set1 20 char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringTrimRight src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 a bc char set2 20 char dest2 20 success2 StringTrimRight a bc set2 0 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 a bc BA Description Trim the trailing specified characters in the set buffer from the source string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successf
114. enable check box under Sequence of events Click Settings to specify the data format SOE Display object can then display the event sequence for easier observation Device Properties Name MODBUS TCP IP HMI Location Local PLC type MODBUS TFIIF V 1 80 MODBUS TCPP si PLCYF Ethemet 0 192 168 1 118 Port 502 Settings C Use UDP User Datagram Protocol PLC default station no 1 C Default station no use station no variable E Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words 5 Max read command size words 120 Max write command size words 120 Sequence of events W Enable Settings maa 686 Lg WE NTEK Sequence of Events 36 2 SOE Settings r SOE Settings SOE record definition Record location dian a fyken No of queued records Setting Scancyde 10 unit 100ms REN er als Data byte offset from record start Address of first record Trigger device 0 v Device Setting Type 1 v Type Address 3x 10 Event indicator 2 v 3 x Yea lig Event messages Font j Y nh G ont Arial Day 6 No Device Index Content Default Event Hour 7 v 0 1001 Device 0 amp Index 1001 a 1 1001 Device 1 amp Index 1001 Second 9 v 0 2001 Device 0 amp Index 2001 40 RS 11 m 1 2001 Devi
115. file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four data AN Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference sampling files as follows 20101210 dtl 20101230 dtl 20110110 dtl 20110111 dtl The file index are 20101210 dtl gt index is 3 20101230 dtl gt index is 2 20110110 dtl gt index is 1 20110111 dtl gt index is 0 return value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 data log number year month and day can be constant or variable index and return value must be variable return value is optional macro command main short data log number 1 year 2010 month 12 day 10 index short success if there exists a data sampling file named 20101210 dtl with data sampling number 1 and file index 2 the result after execution Success 1 and index success FindDataSamplingindex data log number year month day index end macro command FindEventLogDate return value FindEventLogDate index year month day or FindEventLogDate index year month day Description A query function for finding the date of specified event log file according to file index The date is stored into year month and day respectively in the format of YYYY MM and DD The event log files stored in the designated position such as HMI memory storage or external memory device are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The mo
116. from source to destination register The difference is that the Data transfer time based object transfers data based on time schedule and is able to transfer data in bits Configuration Click Data Transfer Time based icon on the toolbar to open the Data Transfer Time based Object management dialog as shown below vi Data Transfer Time based Object 1 Local HMIELB 00 gt Local HMIELB 10 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 10 bitis 2 Local HMELWSS0 gt Local HMELW260 Mode Word Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 1 word s Press the New button in the above dialog box to open a Data Transfer Time based object property dialog as shown below set up the properties press OK button and a Data Transfer Time based object will be created 277 Object Data Transfer Time based Object Attribute Address type Interval 3 0 secondis w Active only when designated window opened Source address PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting Destination address PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting Attribute Address type Select the data transfer unit either Bit or Word No of words or No of bits No of words will be shown when Word is selected in Address type meaning the data transfer unit is word See the picture below Attribute Address type Interval 3 0 second s hl When Bit is selected the unit of data transfer is bit
117. index 0 mostly today the second latest file is assigned index 1 and so on History Control is used to select the history data to be shown 227 og WE NTEK Object The picture below shows the attribute of Data Format tab Hew History Data Display Object General Data Format Title Shane Chamel Channel 0 Channel 7 Ww Channel 0 16 bit Unsigned Left of decimal Pt Right of decimal Pt Display Center v leading zero Channel 1 16 bit BCD Display Channel 2 22 bit Unsigned Display Channel 3 32 bit Float ai Cancel Each History Data Display object can display up to 64 channels Use Display to select the channels to be shown on the screen In the figure above there are 4 channels channel 0 to channel 3 in the Data Sampling object and only Ch O and Ch 3 are selected The data formats are shown next to channel name The data format of each channel is decided by the corresponding Data Sampling objects The result is shown below 228 Ly WE NTEK Ch 0 4 2 Date Ch 3 16 09 07 6 09 07 6 09 07 6 09 07 6 09 07 6 09 07 16 09 07 6 09 07 6 09 07 Mal 2 43 08 270 22 3342 2 33 41 2 33 40 7 2 33 39 27 33 38 5265 22 33 37 72 33 36 RIRA 99 99 95 When display String format in History Data Display object users may choose a Display in UNICODE mode b Reverse high byte and low byte data then display Channel I String 5 wordi character
118. infinite loop with no PLC communication The size of an array exceeds the storage space in a macro 4 The PLC communication speed affects the running time for the macro to execute Also too many macros may slow down the communication between HMI and PLC 460 og WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 10 Use the Free Protocol to Control a Device If EasyBuilder does not provide a driver for a specific device users can use OUTPORT and INPORT built in functions to control the device The data sent by OUTPORT and INPORT must follow the communication protocol of the device The following example explains how to use these two functions to control a MODBUS RTU device First create a new device in the device table The device type of the new device is set to Free Protocol and named with MODBUS RTU device as follows System Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printer Backup Server e Mail Recipes Device Model General System Setting Security Font Device list Local HMI fLocalHmI Local eMT3105 800 x Disable n a I Local Server MODBUS RTU Device Local Free Protocol COM 1 9600 E 8 1 RS232 Device Properties Name MODBUS RTU Device OHMI PLC PLC type Free Protocol v LODO FREE PROTOCOL SO PLE IF RE 932 vr COM COMI 9600 6 8 1 Settings The interface of the device PLC I F uses RS 232 If a MODBUS TCP IP devic
119. like to select a different folder click Browse m Ce LW WE NTEK EasyBuilder Installation and Startup Guide 6 Users will be enquired if there are any additional tasks to be done For example Create a desktop icon Select it if needed then click Next to continue 1 setup EasyBuilder amp 000 Y4 64 Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing EasyBuilder8000 4 64 then click Next Additional icons 7 When finish settings please check if they are all correct If any changes need to be made click Back to change the settings or click Install to start installing 18 Setup EasyBuilder8000 4 64 Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing EasyBuilder8000 v4 64 on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back if you want to review or change any settings Destination location C 1EB8000 Start Menu folder EBS000 Additional tasks Additional icons Create desktop icon Install Cancel pi WE NTEK EasyBuilder Installation and Startup Guide 8 Installation processing 15 Setup EasyBuilder8000 Y4 64 Installing Please wait while Setup installs EasyBuilder8000 4 64 on your computer Extracting files CHEBSO00OI driver x series TOSHIBA T SERIES sx 9 Click Finish to complete the installation 15 Setup EasyBui
120. macro_command main char src1 20 cabbageabc 429 Macro Reference char set1 20 abc char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 Stringlncluding src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 cabba char src2 20 gecabba char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 Stringlncluding src2 0 abc dest2 0 success2 true dest2 char set3 20 abc char dest3 4 bool success3 success3 Stringincluding cabbage set3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro command Name StringExcluding Description success StringExcluding source start set start destination start success StringExcluding source set start destination start source start set destination start source set destination start success StringExcluding success StringExcluding Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters that are not in the set string beginning with the first character in the source string and ending when a character is found in the source string that is also in the target string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the si
121. message The four formats of date tag MM DD YY DD MM YY gt DD MM YY YY MM DD Time Displays the time tag with each alarm message The four formats of time tag HH MM SS HH MM gt DD HH MM HH In the Font tab set the size of the font or select Italic The font and color of the alarm messages is set in Alarm Event Log object 262 WW WEINTEK Object 13 23 Data Transfer Trigger based Overview Data Transfer Trigger based object can transfer values from the source registers to the destination registers The data transfer operation can also be activated by changing state of bit register Configuration Click the Data Transfer Trigger based icon on the toolbar to open a Data V Transfer Trigger based object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Data Transfer Trigger based object will be created Hew Data Transfer Trzger based Object General Security Shape Label Denton bource addres Destination address PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting Attribute Daer Trigger mode ON OFF Ww rigg Trigger address Bunes PLL name Local HMI Setting OK Cancel Source address Data Transfer object reads the data from Source Address 263 Lig WE NTEK Object Destination address Data Transfer object writes the data to Destination Address Attribute No of words It is the number of words to be transferred from Source Addre
122. mtp If the password is entered incorrectly for three times please restart EasyBuilder Project name C Documents and Settings Administrator EYMTP1Lmtp OB file name C Documents and Settings Administrator MTP 1 xob OB password set used in decompiler Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI ENE Password I Password Rath irange 0 4294901760 D errorist O warningts Object size 26094 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 405032 bytes Shape size 202 bytes Sound size 639164 bytes Macro size 14 bytes Address tag size 10 bytes Total size 899050 bytes 0 86M succeeded Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects pull font fe 619 Lr WE NTEK Project Protection 30 2 Decompilation is Prohibited After a project mtp is done editing users can compile the project to xob format The xob file can be downloaded to HMI Select the Decompilation is prohibited check box when compiling the setting in XOB password will be ignored Furthermore the xob file cannot be decompiled to mip file Project name C Documents and Settings Administrator MTP Lmtp OB file name C Documents and Settings Administrator 2 EYMTP1L xob l Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI Startup language after redownloading the project Language 1 we CUEBSOOOCHT fontiMTPi i1 ttt Times New Roman 0 errors
123. no 4 UNICODE Display Center Reverse high low byte Object Lib WE NTEK The picture below shows the attribute of Title tab Hew History Data Display Object Use title Enable or disable title which is marked as shown below eneral Data Format Use title Title background Transparent Title name Title Label library CE None Time Date ch 0 ch 1 chi ch 3 ch ch 5 cho ch ch s ch 3 eh 10 eh 11 eh 12 eh 13 eh 14 Label tag Ko Time Date GRUS 5272 2243 00T 4 5271 22 43 08 16 09 07 230 Object Object Title background Transparent When selected hide the background for title area Background color Set the background color of title Setting This dialog window defines the text to be shown on the title 5272 22 43 09 16 09 07 int 5271 22 43 08 16 09 07 2 You can also use Label Tag Library to use multi language text for titles Click Setting and select one label tag from label library as shown below Title Setting If the format of sampling data is changed during off line simulation please delete previous data records in C EasyBuilder HMI memoryldatalog to prevent the system from misinterpreting the old data records 231 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 19 Data Block Display Overview Data Block Display is a combination of se
124. occurs As shown below when the backlight turns ON the system set 5 into the designated register Attribute Det Style Set when backlight on vw set value 5 m Set when backlight off Automatic function occurs whenever the backlight is inactive The value entered in Set value is set into the word address when the action occurs As shown below when the backlight turns OFF the system set 5 into the designated register Attribute Set Style Set when backlight off v set value 5 m Cyclic JOG Each time when the button is pressed increase the word address value to the Upper limit by Inc value then reset to the Bottom limit As shown below each time when pressing the button the system will increase the value in the designated register by 1 till the value is 10 and then reset to 0 and increase again by pressing the button Attribute set Style Cyclic JOG v Bottom limit 0 Upper limit 10 Inc valve 1 m Cyclic JOG Each time when the button is pressed decrease the word address value to the Bottom limit by Dec value then reset to the Upper limit As shown below each time when pressing the button the system will decrease the value in the designated register by 1 till the value is 0 and then reset to 10 and decrease again by pressing the button Attribute Set Style Cyclic JOG v Bottom limit 0 Upper limit 10 Dec valve 1 144 L WE NTEK Object E Cyclic JOG When the bu
125. result is 0x2345 end macro command HIWORD HIWORD source result vev Retrieves the high word of a 32 bit source into result Source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main int source result HIWORD 0x12345678 result result is 0x1234 source 0x12345 HIWORD source result result is 0x0001 end macro command 391 re WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 4 Bit Transformation Name GETBIT GETBIT source result bit_pos Description Gets the state of designated bit position of a data source into result result value will be 0 or 1 source and bit pos can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro command main int Source result short bit pos GETBIT 9 result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit pos 2 GETBIT source result bit_pos result is 1 end macro_command SETBITON SETBITON source result bit_pos Description Changes the state of designated bit position of a data source to 1 and put changed data into result source and bit pos can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro command main int Source result short bit pos SETBITON 1 result 3 result is 9 source 0 bit_pos 2 SETBITON source result bit_pos result is 4 392 re WE NTEK Macro Reference end macro command Name SETBITOFF SETBITOFF source result bit pos Description Changes the state of designated bit p
126. s jore chac 2 eed p ert bee eT r PE REAR Ce REE me Jam GJERS E ANT Upon completion of the steps above user defined functions can be used freely without defining the same functions repeatedly 452 Macro Reference 18 8 3 Function Library Management Interface Macro list 1 Open macro management dialog click Library to open Macro Function Library dialog Macro Function Library D 2 A list of functions will be shown int SUBS int int When the project is opened the nmin Lists Default Functions software will load all the functions in the Default Function Library Displays Function Description New Delete edit Managing Tools Export Import 3 Each listed function has the following format return type function name parameter typel parameter typeN return type indicates the type of the return value If this value does not exist this column will be omitted function name indicates the name of the function N in parameter typeN stands for the number of parameter types If this function does not need any parameter this column will be omitted sub int ADD int a int bl int ret ret ath return ret end su 453 Lr WE NTEK 18 8 3 1 Create a Function 1 Click New to enter Function Editor Edit function in Function Editor Edit the function description to
127. s password ea user 8 s password ea user 9 s password J D J J D D D Ui Dd I I 222222222222 2 22 2 so user 10 s password Ses wr wr wr Nr user 11 s password Nas 32bit user 12 s password Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 518 Ki WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 4 Data Sampling 7 p i LW 9064 32bit size of data sampling files on HMI memory LW 10489 16bit LW 10490 32bit LW 10492 16bit LW 10493 32bit size of data sampling files on USB 1 LW 10495 16bit no of data sampling files on USB 2 LW 10496 32bit size of data sampling files on USB 2 RO 82bit size of data sampling files on HMI memory R gt OR PR OR OR OR OR no of data sampling files on SD card re size of data sampling files on SD card ke no of data sampling files on USB 1 xA xo xo xo LB 9025 PY Poy 1B 9026 1B 9027 1B 9034 1B 11949 1B 11950 1B11951 1B 11952 1B 11953 1B 11954 B 11955 LB 11956 B 11957 LW 9063 OR RO LW 9064 OR RO LW 10489 PRL RO LW 10490 OR RO LW 10492 OR RO LW 10493 OR RO LW 10495 RPR LW 10496 PR TR A 1 The registers for deleting or updating data samplings do not work during simulation on PC 519 y WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 5 Event Log Read R Write W Control Y Address Desc
128. start Description This function converts an integer to a decimal string It converts the integer in source parameter into a decimal string and stores it in the destination buffer source can be either a constant or a variable Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of decimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main int src1 2147483647 char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringBin2DecAsc src1 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 2147483647 short src2 Ox3c char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringBin2DecAsc src2 dest2 0 success2 true dest2 60 int src3 2147483647 char dest3 5 bool success3 success3 StringBin2DecAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same NB Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference end macro command Name StringDecAsc2Float success StringDecAsc2Float source start destination Syntax or success StringDecAsc2Float source destination This function converts a decimal string to floats It converts the decimal string in source parameter into float and stores it in the destination variable The source string param
129. state of a designated register Hew Homeric Input Object fx General Data Enty Numeric Format Security Shane Font Mode Input order Enable Input order i B Group stop quvental input fonction after input Eevboard Use popup keypad Hide title bar Window no Popup position 00 relative to HMI screen 6 O oO 0 Hint If the keyboard isan USB keyboard on mdirectidivect window or on the same window please don t check Use popup keypad Restart the keypad if input value is out of range 166 Ly WE NTEK Object Mode e Touch Used when data entry is initiated by touching the screen object e Bit control Used when data entry is enabled by turning ON a designated bit and entry ends when the bit goes OFF Allow input bit address specify a bit address that enables or ends data entry The order of data entry is specified in Input order and an external USB keyboard is needed for data entry Input order Perform continuous input by setting Input order and Group e Criterion of searching the next input object a The range of Input order 1 511 The range of Group 1 15 If Group is not selected its input order is 0 The system only searches for the objects with the same Group The lower number of order is entered before the higher number of order For the two objects in the same group and input order the object placed in the lower layer is entered first 229
130. that a lt StepValue gt other than one is to be used StepValue Optional The increment decrement step of lt Counter gt It can be omitted when the value is 1 If step lt StepValue gt are omitted the step value defaults to 1 Optional Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE for next loops may be nested next Required Counter Optional This is used when nesting for next loops 18 4 5 2 while wend Statements The while wend statement runs for an unknown number of iterations A variable is used to test for ending conditions When the condition is TRUE the statements inside are executed repetitively until the condition becomes FALSE The syntax is as follows while lt Condition gt Statements wend Example while a lt 10 a a 10 wend 373 re WE NTEK Macro Reference Syntax description while Must be used to begin the statement ed Required This is the controlling statement When it is TRUE the loop begins execution When it is FALSE the loop terminates return value Statements to execute when the evaluation is TRUE wend o Indicates the end of the while end statements 18 4 5 3 Other Control Commands Used in for next and while wend It skips immediately to the end of the iterative statement Used in for next and while wend It ends the current iteration of a loop and starts the next one The return command inside the main block can force the macro to stop anywh
131. the characters of a string to lowercase Reverse the characters of a string Trim the leading specified characters in a set from the source string StringExcluding StringToUpper StringToLower String ToReverse String TrimLeft String TrimRight Trim the trailing specified characters in a set from the source string Insert a string in a specific location within another Stringinsert 486 9 WE NTEK Macro Reference tings For more detailed information of the above string operation functions please check out the Built In Function Block section In order to demonstrate the powerful usage of string operation functions the following examples will show you step by step how to create executable project files using the new functions starts from creating a macro ends in executing simulation 1 How to read or write a string from a device Create a new macro Edit the content Mork Space Macro ID 0 Macro name imacro_O CC Periodical execution Sp B HACGIO comand mairi 4 char s8r 20 Seringcec atc O Local HHI LWE 0 20 Seringset sec O Local HHI LW 50 20 ba end mACE D Command The first function StringGet is used to read a string from LWO LW19 and store it into the str array The second function StringSet is used to output the content of str array Add one 44 ASCII Input object and one el Function Key object in window 10 of the project The settings of thes
132. the new window number is written back into a designated address 281 NO WEINTEK Object For example if current window is window no 10 and the setting is as shown below PLC Control Description PLC name I Local HMI vi Attribute Type of control Change window vi Active only when designated window opened Turn on back light Clear data after window changed Use window no offset Trigger address PLC name Setting Address LW 0 16 bit Unsigned When LW 0 is changed to 11 the system will change the current window to window no 11 and then write 11 to LW 1 When the window is changed the new window number is written back into the address that is calculated by Trigger address and the data format as shown in the table below 16 bit Signed Address 1 32 bit Unsigned Address 2 32 bit Signed Address 2 Activate only when designated window opened Allow this operation only if a particular screen is displayed Clear data after window changed Reset the value at trigger address to zero after the PLC Control object is activated Turn on back light Illuminate the screen when the PLC Control object is activated Use window no offset select the check box and select an window offset the new window no to change to will be the value in Trigger address plus the offset 282 L WE NTEK Object For example if Trigger address is LW 0 and offset is set to 5 When the valu
133. turn around delay unit ms R Y R Y LW 10537 16bit PLC 8 send ACK delay unit ms SIEMENS 7 400 R W R Y R Y Link type LW 10538 16bit PLC 8 parameter 1 SIEMENS 7 400 rack R Y R Y LW 10539 16bit PLC 8 parameter 2 SIEMENS 7 400 CPU slot R Y R Y 534 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 16 Communication Status with PLC COM Read R Write W Control Y Address Description Local MACRO E HMI R Y R Y LB 9150 auto connection for PLC 1 COM1 when ON R Y R Y LB 9151 auto connection for PLC 2 COM2 when ON R Y R Y LB 9152 auto connection for PLC 3 COM3 when ON R Y R Y PLC 1 status SNO COM1 set on to retry connection LB 9200 an R W R Y R Y Note LB 9205 PLC 1 status SN5 COM1 set on to retry connection R Y R Y LB 9206 PLC 1 status SN6 COM1 set on to retry connection R Y R Y LB 9207 PLC 1 status SN7 COM1 set on to retry connection R Y R Y PLC 2 status SNO COM2 set on to retry connection LB 9500 Kj l R W R Y R Y Note PLC 3 status SNO COM3 set on to retry connection LB 9800 Her R W R Y R Y Note 18 12030 COM 1 saus OFF normal ON open tated Nowe R R R L8 12081 COM 2 status OFF normal ON open taie a R OR COM 3 status OFF normal ON open failed RI R R 535 AN AN AN A A ee AAN AN A y WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LB 12033 COM 4 status OFF normal ON op
134. up Window Settings dialog m Right click on the window number in the window tree and select Settings 10 WINDOW O 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Close m In Window Open Window select the window then click Settings m In the window right click when no object is selected and select Attribute 76 KR WE NTEK Window Operations 6 2 2 Open Close and Delete a Window Open an existing window m Double click on the window number in the window tree m In the window tree select the window right click then select Open m In Window Open Window select the window then click Open Close or delete an existing window m In the window tree select the window right click then select Close or Delete m In Window Open Window select the window then click Delete To delete a window please close it first 77 Lv WE NTEK Event Log Chapter 7 Event Log EL 20100524 evt 201045824B8 Define Event content and g View the process of trigger condition Trigger Event according to the condition Save the Event Log to specified device Event using the object 7 1 Event Log Management Using these objects to view the process of baal the whole event from triggering waiting to Alarm Bar Alarm Display Event Display be processed return to normal Define the event content first Alarm Event Log Category All 2 v 26 No a at Content Mode Condition Read
135. value is 0 it means reading fails in executing INPORT According to the MODBUS RTU protocol specification the correct response 1 must be equal to 0x03 After getting correct response calculate the data of 4x_1 and 4x_2 and put in the data into LW100 and LW101 of HMI if return value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read_data 0 response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x 1 read data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 SetData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if The complete macro is as follows Read Holding Registers macro command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short read no return value read data 2 i FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 Ox1 station number command 1 0x3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 address 0 starting address 4x 1 is 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read no command 4 LOBYTE read no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC 464 N WE NTEK Macro Reference LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return value read response if return value gt 0 and response 1 0x3 then read data
136. will stop The purpose of Memory Map is to keep the consistency of the assigned part of data between two devices Master and Slave The corresponding addresses of Master and Slave devices should have the same property as MW MB address type The size of MW MB in HMI is 10 000 words MB and MW indicate the same area of memory for example MBO MBf correspond to the bits of MW0 MB10 MB1f correspond to MW1 as shown below MB DDDDh DDDD 0 4095 31 2 PIN Settings When using Memory Map communication protocol the Master and Slave must have the same communication parameters The wiring is shown below COM Port RS232 Pin Mapping TX f RX RX TX GND GND COM Port RS485 4W Pin Mapping TX RX TX RX RX TX RX TX GND GND Note the will be distinct depends on the type of PLC or controller 624 re WE NTEK 31 3 Communication Flowchart Flowchart 1 Yes No Receiving STX 02H Sending ACK 06H Waiting time is 3sec default Received Data Yes Sending ACK 06H Sending STX 02H Waiting time is 3 sec command Checking NAK 15H Delay 100ms Checking ACK 06H Yes Sending data Receiving ACK 06H Stop sending 625 Exceed 3 sec Receiving EY Exceed 3 sec E Flowchart 2 Exceed 3 Memory Map Communication sec sec Ly WE NTEK Memory Map Communication Flowchart 2
137. windows all have the same S Ze 2 Indirect Window is automatically resized according to the size of the popup window to be displayed The difference between Direct Window and Indirect Window is that the display of Direct Window is controlled by the state of a designated bit register where the Indirect Window is controlled by the value in a designated word register that calls the popup window number Configuration Click the Indirect Window icon on the toolbar to open a Indirect Window object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Indirect 183 Window object will be created 177 Lv WE NTEK Object New Indirect Window Object Read address Pic name Auto adjust window size Aigment Trelative to object display region Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the word device that calls the popup window Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Attribute Style Set the display style of the popup window There are two styles No title bar With title bar 178 Ki WE NTEK Object a No title bar The position of the window is fixed as pre defined in set up WINDOW 35 b With title bar The position of the window can be dragged during operation WINDOW 35 Use window no offset Sets the offset for selecting the popup window The pop
138. 0 0x20 40 FILL with white space 18 Stringset message clear O Local HMI LW 100 40 19 if name match tryue and password match true then 20 stringset message success 0 Local OMI LW 100 40 21 else 22 Stringset message fail 0 Local AMI LW 100 40 23 Lend if 24 end macro conmand 490 re WE NTEK Macro Reference The first two StringGet functions will read the strings input by users and store them into arrays named name_input and password_input separately Use the function StringCompare to check if the input account name and password are matched If the account name is matched name match is set true if the password is matched password match is set true If both name match and password match are true output the string Success Access Accepted Otherwise output the string Fail Access Denied Add ASCII noua and Function Koll objects in window 10 of the project The settings of these objects are shown as below Function Key object is used to execute macro 1 I Login Object settings F Object 1 Function Koll O OBecie man Macro Object 2 ASCII noua 491 Lr WE NTEK Macro Reference Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting 1 Address PLC name Local HMI Ww Device type Li aa Address pp System tag User defined tag Address Format DODDO range 0 10799 Index register Object 3 ASCII Input ASCII In
139. 0 response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 4x 1 read data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 4x 2 SetData read data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if end macro command The following example explains how to design a request to set the status of Ox 1 The request uses Write Single Coil 0x5 command Request Functioncode 1Byte 008 gt Response Functioncode 1Byte 0x08 1 Output Address 0x0000 to OxFFFF 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error 01 or 02 or 03 or 04 The complete macro is as follows Write Single Coil ON macro_command main char command 32 response 32 short address checksum short I return value 465 N WE NTEK Macro Reference FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 FILL response 0 0 32 command 0 Ox1 station number command 1 0x5 function code write single coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 command 4 Oxff force Ox_1 on command 5 0 CRC command 0 checksum 6 LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBY TE checksum command 7 OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send request INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 return value read response end macro command 466 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 11 Compiler Error Message 1 Error Message Format error C error description is the error message number Example error C37 undeclared ident
140. 0 5774 end macro command SEC source result Calculate the secant of source degree into result 380 re WE NTEK Macro Reference source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main float source result SEC 45 result result is 1 414 source 60 SEC source result if source is 60 result is 2 end macro command CSC source result Description Calculate the cosecant of source degree into result source can be a constant or a variable resu t must be a variable macro_command main float source result CSC 45 result result is 1 414 source 30 CSC source result result is 2 end macro_command ASIN ASIN source result Description Calculate the arc sine of source into result degree Source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main float source result ASIN 0 8660 result result is 60 source 0 5 ASIN source result result is 30 381 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference i end macro command Name ACOS ACOS source result Description Calculate the arc cosine of source into result Source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro command main float source result ACOS 0 8660 result result is 30 source 0 5 ACOsS source result result is 60 end macro command ATAN ATAN source result Description Calculate the arc tangent of source
141. 1 item count Item address Reverse highjlow byte The length of each item WORDS UNICODE PLC name Local HMI w Setting a Control address It is used to update and assign the number of items Address If the value at this address is changed to 1 the option list would be replaced by items defined at Item address After updating the value will be restored to 0 Address 1 Define the number of items in Item address b Item address Assign the item address UNICODE The item will use UNICODE characters such as Chinese characters The UNICODE characters used here should be used by other objects so EasyBuilder will compile the needed fonts and download these fonts to HMI and the UNICODE letters could be displayed correctly The length of each item Define the number of letters for each item The number of items multiplied by The Length of each item must be less than 1024 words Send notification after writing successfully If the Enable check box is selected it will notify a designated bit address setting ON or OFF after the command is successfully executed Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the object or configure in General tab 311 w WEINTEK Obj as ject Mapping Hew Option List Object Option list Mapping Security Shape Label fem data met default Error notificat
142. 1 20 bool success1 success1 StringMid src1 5 6 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 fghijk char src2 20 abcdefghijklmnoparst char dest2 5 bool success2 success2 StringMid src2 5 6 dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same char dest3 20 12345678901 234567890 bool success3 success3 StringMid abcdefghijklmnoparst 5 5 dest3 15 success3 true dest3 123456789012345fghij end macro command StringLength length StringLength source start or length StringLength source Obtain the length of a string It returns the length of source string and stores it in the length field on the left hand side of operator The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start The return value of this function indicates the length of the source string 423 Macro Reference macro command main char src1 20 abcde int length1 length1 StringLength src1 0 length1 5 char src2 20 a b c d e int length2 length2 StringLength src2 0 length2 20 char src3 20 abcdefghij int length3 length3 StringLength src3 2 length3 8 end macro_command Name Srno SS O success StringCat source start destination start or success StringCat source destination start This function appends source string to destination string It adds the content
143. 1 00 00 Tuesday yes WE NTEK Object When Address is selected The scheduler object retrieves the start end time and day of week information from word registers enabling all parameters to be set and changed under PLC or user control Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit O Constant Time setting addres PLO name Local HMI wt Setting Cones J E sem dotonmode eo Swotine 9 0 O O O sieo O O OS Stime uge Stime ond O O O mme mme Bul tme je Bid mere Cancel Time setting address Designated as the top address in a block of 11 sequential registers which are used to store time setting data The format of the 11 word registers should normally be 16 unsigned integer If a 32 bit word address is chosen only bits 0 15 are effective and bits 16 31 should be written as zero a Control Time setting address 0 Turn Control ON to tell the HMI to read and update Action mode Start time and End time values 15 0 Bit Reserved 0 fixed 0 Bit 0 no action 1 read times action mode 301 Lig WE NTEK Object N n l m HMI will not regularly read the data from Action mode address 2 to End time address 10 Please turn Control ON when the settings are changed b Status Time setting address 1 When the read operation above completes bit0 of this register truns ON If time data read is out of range or incorrect in any way bit1 turns ON 15 02 O1 00 Bit Reserved
144. 1 parity O none 1 even 2 0dd 3 mark 4 space 16bit COM 1 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits 16bit COM 2 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9556 16bit COM 2 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 16bit COM 2 parity O none 1 even 2 0dd 3 mark 4 space 16bit COM 3 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W LW 9561 16bit COM 3 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 616 Ly WE NTEK Pass through Function LW 9562 16bit COM 3 databits 7 7 bits 8 8 bits LW 9563 16bit COM 3 parity O none 1 even 2 0dd 3 mark 4 space LW 9564 16bit COM 3 stop bits 1 1 bit 2 2 bits m Io stop Pass through change the values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 to 0 617 Lb WE NTEK Project Protection Chapter 30 Project Protection The copyright of program design must be protected This chapter discusses how to protect the projects by settings in EasyBuilder m The protected projects cannot be decrypted by the factory since they are encrypted by users therefore please remember your password 618 Ki WE NTEK Project Protection 30 1 XOB Password After a project mtp is done editing users can compile the project to xob format The xob file can be downloaded to HMI Password can be set to protect the xob file in XOB password when compiling Password range 0 4294967295 A password will be required when attempting to decompile the xob file to
145. 10110 dtl gt index is 1 20110111 dtl gt index is 0 return_value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 data log number and indexcan be constant or variable year month day and return value must be variable return value is optional macro command main short data log number 1 index 2 year month day short success if there exists a data sampling file named 20101230 dtl with data sampling number 1 and file index 2 the result after execution success 1 year 2010 month 12 and day 30 Name success FindDataSamplingDate data_log_number index year month day end macro command FindDataSamplingindex Syntax return value FindDataSamplingIndex data log number year month day index or FindDataSamplingindex data log number year month day index Description A query function for finding the file index of specified data sampling file according to the data sampling no and the date The file index is stored into index year month and day are in the format of YYYY MM and DD respectively Data Sampling Object Local HMI LWO Periodical Disable Disable Disable Disable Local HMI LWO Periodical data sampling no The directory of saved data Storage location filename yyyymmdd dil The data sampling files under the same directory are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved
146. 13 19 29 53 Event 0 1 10 2012 01 13 19 29 54 Event 0 2 10 2012 01 13 19 29 55 Event 0 0 10 2012 01 13 19 29 55 Event 0 2 10 2012 01 13 19 29 56 Event 0 0 0 2012 01 13 19 29 56 Event 0 1 10 2012 01 13 19 29 57 Event 0 gt m Double click on a dtl or evt file will automatically generate an Excel file However if the Strings in dtl file are in UNICODE please open EasyConverter to convert the file manually 573 Lb WE NTEK EasyConverter 25 2 Scaling Function The equation of scaling new value value A x B C users can set the values of A B and C A lower limit of the value B scaled max scaled min upper limit lower limit C scaled min sampling Data Information Select number of digits after decimal point aim No Namo Jmf Word Ss Dis foran ie 16 bit Unaened 16 bit Unstgned l 1 For example here is a voltage data the format is 16 bit unsigned range 0 4096 To convert the data to volt range 5V 5V New value value 0 x 0 0024 5 sampling Data Information Eg Before scaling After scaling Select number of digits after decimal point Time Millisecond A Millisecond 01 30 15 03 26 760 0 15 03 26 760 5 000 01 30 15 03 27 530 0 P 15 03 27 530 5 000 01 30 15 03 28 480 0 P 15 03 28 480
147. 1999 Index register 134 Ly WE NTEK Object Write after button is released If this function is selected the action is delayed till button is released otherwise the action is executed once the button is pressed This function does not work with momentary buttons Attribute Set Style Please refer to the following description for different types of operation mode Periodical toggle Set a designated bit ON and OFF at a set time interval Time hs interval can be selected gt the range 0 1 25 5 seconds Set ON when window Set ON the bit within the window when the window opens Dannan Set OFF when window Set OFF the bit within the window when the window opens seer brikke closes Set OFF when window Set OFF the bit within the window when the window closes closes Set ON when Set the bit ON when the backlight is turned ON backlight on Set OFF when Set the bit OFF when the backlight is turned ON backlight on Set ON when Set the bit ON when the backlight is turned OFF backlight off Set OFF when Set the bit OFF when the backlight is turned OFF backlight off Macro Set Bit object can trigger the start of a Macro routine when the Macro has been created in advance Please refer to Chapter 18 Macro Reference for more information 135 Object Trigger Mode Athibute Macro Execute macro Macro IDI AD 1 w Trigger mode If Set style is set to Toggle there is a furthe
148. 1P2 1P3 LW 9811 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP1 IP address ven IPO 1P1 1P2 1P3 LW 9812 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP2 IP address ven j IPO 1P1 1P2 1P3 LW 9813 16bit remote HMI 3 s IP3 IP address ven IPO 1P1 1P2 1P3 LW 9814 16bit remote HMI 3 s port no LW 9815 16bit remote HMI 4 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9816 16bit remote HMI 4 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9817 16bit remote HMI 4 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9818 16bit remote HMI 4 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9819 16bit remote HMI 4 s port no LW 9820 16bit remote HMI 5 s IPO IP address ves IPO 1P1 1P2 1P3 LW 9821 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP1 IP address ven IPO 1P1 1P2 1P3 LW 9822 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP2 IP address ven j IPO 1P1 1P2 1P3 LW 9823 16bit remote HMI 5 s IP3 IP address e IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9824 16bit remote HMI 5 s port no LW 9825 16bit remote HMI 6 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9826 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9827 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP2 IP address Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits fmpodprapeie a a LW 9828 16bit remote HMI 6 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9829 16bit remote HMI 6 s port no R Y R Y LW 9830 16bit remote HMI 7 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y I
149. 2 168 1 or HMI name etc for narrowing the range of the target HMI Listing 2 Specialized Criterion for the HMI IP 192 168 1 26 1 dtl EasyConverter c Pathname 192 168 1 26 Listing 3 Specialized Criterion for HMI name Weintek_01 dtl EasyConverter c Pathname Weintek 01 594 Ly WE NTEK EasyPrinter Listing 4 Specialized Criterion for Data Sampling file name Voltage dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs Pathname Voltage 26 4 3 The Format of a Convert Batch File The following explains the arguments in a criterion File Type Command line HMI IP Name e File Type This argument specifies the extension name of the uploaded file in this criterion e g dtl for Data Sampling history files evt for Event Log history files e Command line The command EasyPrinter sends to a console window if the uploaded file meets the criterion e HMI IP Name This argument specifies the HMI that meets the criterion e Condition 1 This argument specifies the folder name of the Data Sampling files that meet the criterion This is not effective to other format of files e Condition 2 Reserved 26 4 4 The Order of Examining Criterion EasyPrinter examines criterion in descending order every time a file is uploaded Once the file meets a criterion it stops the examination and starts over for the next file Therefore users should place the criterion with a wider range downward
150. 2 in order to display full string content For example macro command main char src1 10 abcde StringSet src1 0 Local HMI LW 0 5 end macro command The ASCII display object shows 414 Description Macro Reference abeg If data count is an even number that is greater than or equal to the length of the string the content of string can be completely shown macro command main char src1 10 abcde StringSet src1 0 Local HMI LW 0 6 end macro command macro command main char str1 10 abcde Send 3 words to LWO LW2 Data are being sent until the end of string is reached Even though the value of data count is larger than the length of string the function will automatically stop StringSet str1 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 end macro command StringSetEx StringSetEx send data start device name device type address offset data count Send data to the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of send data device name device type address offset and data count are the same as StringSet macro command main char str1 20 abcde short test 0 macro will continue executing test 1 even if the MODBUS device is not responding StringSetEx str1 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 0 20 test 1 ur Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference macro will not continue executing test 2 until MODBUS device responds StringSet str1
151. 20 abcde bool ret2 ret2 StringCompare a2 0 b2 0 ret2 true Description Do a case sensitive comparison of two strings The two string parameters accept both static string in the form string1 and char array in the form str1 start This function returns a Boolean indicating the result of comparison If two strings are identical it returns true Otherwise it returns false ur Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference char a3 20 abcde char b3 20 abcdefg bool ret3 ret3 StringCompare a3 0 b3 0 ret3 false end macro command Name StringCompareNoCase ret StringCompareNoCasef stri start str2 start ret StringCompareNoCase string1 str2 start ret StringCompareNoCase str1 start string2 ret StringCompareNoCase string1 string2 Description Do a case insensitive comparison of two strings The two string parameters accept both static string in the form string1 and char array in the form str1 start This function returns a Boolean indicating the result of comparison If two strings are identical it returns true Otherwise it returns false The ret field is optional macro_command main char a1 20 abcde char b1 20 ABCDE bool ret1 ret1 StringCompareNoCasef a1 0 b1 0 ret1 true char a2 20 abcde char b2 20 abcde bool ret2 ret2 StringCompareNoCase a2 0 b2 0 ret2 true char a3 20 abcde char b3 20 abcdefg
152. 200 LW 0 Index 0 LW 9200 If the value in Read LW 0 Index 0 LW 10 is set to 3 Index 0 LW 9200 Read LW 0 LW 20 is set to 6 is O 1 Index Function of Word Index 0 LW 9200 LW 0 Index 0 LW 9200 If the value in Read LW 0 Index 0 Index 0 LW 9200 Read LW 10 3 is 10 Exampl LI amps Index Function of Bit In the same way Index Register can be used for Bit address 1 Word 16 Bit adding 1 in the value of index register adding 16 Index Function of Bit Index 6 LW 9206 LB 0 Index 6 LW 9206 Index 6 LW 9206 The switch LB 0 Index 6 reads LB 16 ON is set to 1 I Index Function of Bit Index 6 LW 9206 LB 0 Index 6 LW 9206 Index 6 is setto 2 The switch LB 0 Index 6 reads LB 32 OFF 114 Index Register m When using Index Registers for bit addresses 16 bit addresses will be calculated as one unit EX If the target is LB 0 and set the value in Index Register to 1 LB 16 will be activated If set the value in Index Register to 2 LB 32 will be activated Index Register is used to change addresses Through changing the data in Index Register user can make an object to read and write different addresses without changing its own address settings Therefore user can transmit or exchange data among different addresses Please confirm your internet connection before downloading the demo project 115 Lv WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage Chapter
153. 3 The text aligned Right 111 222222 333333333 Blink Specify the way the text blinks Choose None to disable this feature or set the blinking interval to 1 second or 0 5 seconds Italic Use Italic font Italic Label Underline Use Underline font Underline Label Movement setting Direction Set the direction of the marquee effect No movement se Ho movement 102 WEINTEK Object General Properties Continuous Specify how the marquee effect is displayed If not selecting this check box the next text appears only when the previous text disappears completely See the picture below If selecting this check box the text will be displayed continuously Speed Adjust the speed of the text movement Content Set the content of the text If using Label Library the content comes from Label Library Tracking If this check box is selected changing the text of one state will also change the text of the other states Duplicate this label to other states Duplicate the current text to the other states 103 wa WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 4 Adjusting Profile Size When an object is created double click it and select the Profile tab to adjust the position and size of the object Bit Lamp Objects Properties General Security Shape Label Profile Position kam Pinned rn 14 v vja Bl H Size width 5
154. 3 Objects This chapter explains the ways of using and setting different kinds of objects To set the general properties of the objects please refer to the relevant chapters as listed below Shape Label Profile Please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties Security Please refer to Chapter 10 Security Index Register Please refer to Chapter 11 Index Register Label Tag Library Please refer to Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi language Usage Address Tag Library Please refer to Chapter 16 Address Tag Library 124 Object 13 1 Bit Lamp Overview Bit Lamp object displays the state of a designated bit address If the bit state is OFF the State 0 shape will be displayed If the bit state is ON the State 1 shape will be displayed OFF State ON State Configuration Click the Bit Lamp icon on the toolbar to open a Bit Lamp object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Bit Lamp object will be created 125 oh WE NTEK Object Hew Hit Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Read address PL name Local HMI w Setting Invert signal Blinking time 0 5 seconds vi Mode Altemating image on state 0 ve Cancel Description User can describe the information of the object Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Addr
155. 3 Off line and On line Simulation reronrornnrornnnornnnernnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennanennnnene 31 34 PATER aa a EEIE 32 Chapter 4 Hardware Settings rrarrrrnnrrrrnnnrrrnnnrrrnnnrnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnansennansennansennansnnnnssennnssnnnnn 37 EO 37 42 System SENGS eee 38 21 NENNE 38 42 2 VAN TOO ene 39 4 2 3 System Information rrranrnnnnnnrnnnrvnnnnvnnrrnnnrnvnnnrnnnnnnnnnennnrennnsnnnnnennnsennnennnsen 40 4 2 4 System Setting sagnene 40 Chapter 5 System Parameter Settings 0 0 sscccc0scccscsececesecesceeeeseeeesscaeeecceseeccasenaseeeseses 43 SJ CC EE EE 44 5 1 1 How to Control a Local PLC ronnnnnnnnonrnnnenrnnnenrannrnnnnnennnnrnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnn 45 5 1 2 How to Control a Remote PLC rrrnnnrnnnnnernnnnenrnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnn 50 5 1 3 How to Control a Remote HM lessan aaa a 52 SEAN 90 EE ene E 54 5B General rrmrarerrarerrarerrarerranerranennanennanennanennanennanennunennanennunennunennunennusennunennunennnnen 57 54 System SING aac ceeareeencequorancciseussseancuesseoustansesnctsuncstnuenensueusancsecesunepecteneesenueasesnaonarest 60 Skole 21610 4 EE 63 5 5 1 Select operatable classes for each USEM ccccceeeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeees 63 So 65 KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 User Manual 5 7 Extended Memory cccccsscccssccceececuceceucecuceceuceceusecsueesueeseueessueesseeeseeeeseeseseeeegs 67 5 8 Printer Backup Serve
156. 5 Keyboard e Select Use a popup keypad A pre designed popup keypad can be chosen by selecting a check box and selecting the relative position on the HMI screen When data entry is enabled the popup keypad displays in the selected position and closed when data entry ends e Not selecting Use a popup keypad When data entry is enabled the popup keypad is not displayed Users may a Create a custom design on the same screen window b Use a USB keyboard e Hide title bar Use a keypad without the title bar e Restart the keypad if input value is out of range When entering data if the value entered is not within the valid range the system will automatically restart the keypad 167 Ly WE NTEK Object E i Lampe E Design a group of Numeric Input Object This example demonstrates how to use Input Order and Group to perform continuous input in several Numeric Input objects After entering data in one object entry will be passed to the next input order object which is in the same group m Create three Numeric Input Objects and set Input order to 1 2 and 3 respectively Include the three objects in Group 1 as shown below Address Setting LW 0 Input order Enable Stop sequential input function after input Input order 1 a Group LW 1 Input order Enable Stop sequential input function after input Input order 2 a Group LW 2 Input order Enable Stop sequential input function after input Input order
157. 5676454567 4564676454 Recipe Editor In this example the total length of data format is 23 words Each 23 words will be one set of recipe data The first set recipe no address 0 product address 1 10 price address 11 12 barcode address 13 22 The second set recipe no address 23 product address 24 33 price address 34 35 barcode address 36 45 and so on Ned m After editing recipe data it can be saved as rcp emi or csv The rcp files can be downloaded to HMI using Project Manager or external devices USB disk or SD card The emi files can be saved directly to the external device and insert the device to HMI to be the extended memory EM 571 Ki WE NTEK EasyConverter Chapter 25 EasyConverter EasyConverter reads the data sampling file dtl and event log file evt in HMI and convert the files to Excel format How to launch EasyConverter m From Project Manager click EasyConverter m From EasyBuilder 8000 menu Select Tool Data Event Log Converter 25 1 How to Export DTL or EVT file to Excel 1 When opening a data sampling file dtl a pop up window shows as below 2 Click OK then click Export to Microsoft Excel sampling Data Information Date Time Millisecond A 2012 01 30 14 33 13 290 0 2012 01 30 14 33 14 290 1 EE ae 2012 01 30 14 33 15 290 2 16 bit U
158. 6bit pending command no in PLC 5 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit 16bit ethernet _ ER Nes pending command no in PLC 6 ethernet pending command no in PLC 7 pending command no in PLC USB error code for PLC 1 Note2 Pin error code for PLC 2 error code for PLC 3 ea error code for PLC 4 ke error code for PLC 5 ke error code for PLC 6 error code for PLC 7 error code for PLC 8 error code for USB PLC Dm Dm end i i 1 e 7 J i L A 1 LW 9351 to LW 9389 are registers relevant to the number of pending commands in PLC PLC 1 to 39 2 LW 9400 to LW 9449 are registers relevant to the errors occur during communication with PLC PLC 1 to 50 549 Lt WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 22 Miscellaneous Functions LB 9000 initialized as ON R W R Y R Y LB 9009 data download indicator oR R R Lom aawo fatal na 15 9012 daadomioadupoasndenr al ala 189016 sausisonwenactemcomedsjomenm n a rR LB 9039 status of file backup activity backup in process if ON OR R R LB 9045 memory map communication fails when ON O R R R LB 9049 enable set ON disable set OFF watch dog i series support only Note1 LB 9059 disable MACRO TRACE function when ON Note2 R Y R Y LB 9064 enable USB barcode
159. 8 00 and cool down to 30 at 17 00 Monday to Friday LW 100 is used to store the set point value uw 00 90 C EE Fa 100 a0 P P a Fi oe 60 ddd Setpoint value 90 Lwi00 30 EITT FEST SNNN Setpoint value 30 At End Time Click Scheduler icon on the toolbar or select Objects Scheduler to configure the Scheduler object Click New to add a new object 292 Ki WE NTEK Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Description Scheduler 1 Power ONH startend action Acton mode Bit ON Bit OFF 6 Word write Acton address PLL name Lacal HMI w Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Word write value settings 8 Constant Address Setva O General tab 1 Select Word write in Action mode Acton mode Bit ON Bit OFF Word write 2 Set LW 100 in Action address Acton address PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Address Liw We 16 bit Unsigned 293 Select Constant for Word write value settings and enter 90 in Start value Object gt WE INTEK Object Word write value settings Constant O Address start value 90 Time Set tab 4 In Time set tab select Constant General Time Set Prohibit Constant Address 5 Enter Start time as 8 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Deselect Setting on individual day Setting on individual day 8 0 M 0 HE MM S
160. 8 32bit project size in K bytes R R Oo R R PR R LW 9120 32bit compiler version OR R R R R RO O R R 16bit project name 16 words 32bit project size in bytes LW 9122 16bit project compiled date year LW 9123 16bit project compiled date month LW 9124 16bit project compiled date day 530 y WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 14 MODBUS Server Communication Read R Write W Control Y Address Description Local MACRO jp HMI R Y R Y 189055 MODBUS server COM 1 receives a request when ON R 18905 MODBUS server COM 2 receives arequest when ON R n R MODBUS server COM 3 receives a request when ON R RI R MODBUS server ethernet receives a request when ON RI RI R 16bit request s function code MODBUS server COM 1 RI RI R 16bit request s starting address MODBUS server COM 1 RPR R LW 9272 16bit request s quantity of registers MODBUS server COM re 1 LW 9275 16bit request s function code MODBUS server COM2 R R R LW 9276 16bit request s starting address MODBUS server COM 2 RPR R LW 9277 16bit request s quantity of registers MODBUS server COM 2 LW 9280 16bit request s function code MODBUS server COM 3 LW 9281 16bit request s starting address MODBUS server COM 3 LW 9282 16bit request s quantity of registers MODBUS server COM 3 LW 9285 16bit
161. A NI O 0 MXOINIADI AI RARI OI IN R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y R Y Y O O NO O LB 9153 to LB 9189 are registers relevant to auto connection with PLC PLC 4 to 40 LB 10070 to LB 10081 are registers relevant to re connection with PLC PLC 4 to 15 LB 10100 to LB 11939 are registers relevant to communication status with PLC PLC 4 to 49 LW 9600 to LW 9769 are registers relevant to setting IP address of PLC PLC 4 to 37 538 m Ly WEINTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 18 Communication Status with PLC USB LB 9190 auto connection for PLC USB 1 when ON R Y LB 9191 PLC status USB 1 set on to retry connection R Y LB 9193 auto connection for PLC USB 2 when ON R Y LB 9194 PLC status USB 2 set on to retry connection R Y 539 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 19 Communication Status with Remote su Read R Write W Control Y Address Description Local ev fres LB 9068 Pus connection for remote HMI 1 when ON Ga R W R Y R Y Note 15 9069 ato connection forremoteHMI2 when ON Am RY AV 189070 avto comecionforrencieHIMS when ON Aw RY AY 189071 auto comeetonforremete HMI when ON AW RY RY 189072 auto conection tor remos HMIS when ON Rw RY RY 15 9073 auto connection tor remote HMI S when ON RW RY RY auto connection for remote HMI 7 when ON RW RY RY LB 9100 remote HMI 1 status set on to retry connection TA
162. Add New Macro Settings cccccscccccsececceeeeeseeeeeeeesesseeeesseeeesseeeeseeeeeas 680 35 5 HMI ManagQe cccccccesccccceeeceeceeeceeceeeceeceeeceesaeecesseeeeesseeeeeeseaeeeesaueeeesseeeeesaneeess 682 SE ESS 0 ss cessecee nce seen cnconcesenweant sascoeoeanne sentence suseescaneweecegecesascosoeansccesseues 682 ea LEE AOO EEE 683 Go ODEO gt EEE EE 684 35 6 1 Page Settings rrnrrnvrnnnnrvrrnnnrvvrnnnrenrnnnrenrnnnrennnnerennnnsrennnnsnennnnsnennnnnneennnee 684 Ly WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 User Manual 35 6 2 Columns of Object List rrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnenrnnnrenrnnnrenvnnnrennnnnrrnnnnnrennnnnnsennnnn 685 Chapter 36 Sequence of EVENtS cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeessaeeeessaeeeesseeeeeenas 686 l MI Z Z Z 1 33939333 686 SENNA 687 GEO DIDI is sacxsencvavs souseanetaysionsedaxsipons ya satoaue iaeonuniawpousdencsavalancsauuseupuarstouueinecsndeis 691 Chapter 37 MODBUS TCP IP Gateway cccccccseccecssseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeessaeeeesaaeeeessaeeeeenas 694 IA ONE EEE EE EEE 694 TN 694 37 2 1 Steps to Create an Address Mapping Table rrrrrnrnnnnrnnnrvrnnnnennnrrrnnnnnnn 694 37 2 2 Notes about Configuring Address Mapping rrnrrvrrnnnerrnrnennnrrennnrrrrnnnnen 697 KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder Installation and Startup Guide Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Installation and Startup Guide 1 1 EasyBuilder Installation Software Download EasyBuilder from
163. BS MUL and DIV 5 The exported mlb file can be imported on another PC Open HMI programming software import then the functions in this file can be used Macro Reference Function Name int ADD int int int SUBS int int int MUL int int int DIV int int short test1 short this is a macro about square WTO 506 short test1 short int ADD int int int SUBS int int int MUL int int int DIV int int length short Gr C EBPro library Organize v New folder Sr Favorites Name E Desktop di picture i Downloads di shape Recent Places di sound 10922 mlb Libraries length mib Documents length 0926 mib ap Music math mib t Pictures Videos f Computer amp Local Disk C CD Drive D STEP 7 GA FAE vboxsrv E File name 459 Encoding macro Libranes m b Date modified non WN O 3 y p gt Pam er j et Fr t o p X Text Documents bt EE re WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 9 Some Notes about Using the Macro 1 The maximum storage space of local variables in a macro is 4K bytes So the maximum array size of different variable types are as follows char a 4096 bool b 4096 short c 2048 int d 1024 float e 1024 2 A maximum of 255 macros are allowed in an EasyBuilder project 3 A macro may cause the HMI unresponsive Possible reasons are A macro contains an
164. C is connected follow the original settings System Parameter Settings Printer Backup HETVEr pystemn pettine Extended Memory Device list Mame Location Device type Interface WF Protoc Local MT6070iH MT8070 Disable Nia Master Slave Se ie OM1 1 15200 E 9 1 R3232 Local Server Master Slave e Loca Device Properties PLC type Master Slave Server w v 1 00 MASTER SLAVWE so FLC IF p5 235 Ww COM COMI 115200 E 8 1 Settings r 604 Ki WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication 3 Fill in MT500 PLC ID No in Parameter 1 Refer to MT500 settings Device Properties Name hes Location PLE type Master Slave Server vw wW 1 00 MASTER SLAVE so PLC I F RS 232 Ww COM COMI 115200 E 8 1 Settings EB500 Settings System Parameter Setting PLC General Indicator Security Editor Hardware Aux 1 In EB500 System PLC type MITSUBISHI FXON FX2 Parameter Settings set Multiple HMI Slave HMI HMI link speed 115200 PLO VF port PN Data bits 7 5 Parity HMI model MT510T MT508T 640 x 480 Stop bits Parameter 1 Turn around delay Parameter 3 Parameter 4 m Baud rate must be identical in EB500 and EasyBuilder Parameter 5 Parameter 6 HMI station no 0 vi PLC station no
165. C name Local HMI s Setting Attribute Type Choose either Normal or Offset When Offset is selected an original value must be entered for reference Please refer the illustration below 197 Lig WE NTEK Object A thibute Type Sigs ve Direction Up me gen UO span 10 Origin 5 Bar width ratio c3 100 han Direction Determine the bar graph direction Available options are Up Down Right and Left Zero Span The percentage of filling can be calculated by the following formula The percentage of filling Register value Zero Span Zero 100 Assume Offset is selected If Register value Zero is greater than 0 the bar will fill up from Origin If Register value Zero is less than 0 the bar will be drawn below Origin For example Origin is 5 Span is 10 and Zero is 0 For different value in read address it will display as below If the value at read address is 4 high limit 10 20 8 origin 5 a 4 low limit 5 If the value at read address is 8 high limit 10 29 3 origin 5 ae 4 low limif 5 198 Object Bar width ratio It is the ratio of bar to object width The figure below shows two ratios 50 and 100 ts 100 50 Bar color style To set the bar s frame and background color bar style and bar color
166. CC Link Ether NETHOM modu module module PC side I F Serial setting RS 2320 nclude FX USB A W FX3U USB BD Cancel C USB GOT tansparent mode USBBuilt im port um 5 gt Transmission speed 115 2Kbps HEEN s NETHOM Accessing host station When finished to execute PLC application on PC HMI will be switched automatically to Pass through mode the communication between HMI and PLC will be suspended The PLC is controlled via the virtual serial port by PC as shown below Pass through mode will be turned off if the application ends 1 Weintek Virtual Serial Port AI PLC cm When select Ethernet under Pass through mode the communication between HMI and PLC can continue without stop but not all drivers support this System register LW 9903 pass through control 0 normal 1 pause 2 stop communications between HMI and PLC when executing pass through controls the communication status under Ethernet Pass through mode 612 29 2 COM Port Mode Source COM Port Destination COM Fort PLC PC Application Source COM Port The port connects HMI with PC Destination COM Port The port connects HMI with PLC To use COM port mode of Pass through please set the properties of Source COM Port and Destination COM Port correctly 29 2 1 Settings of COM Port Mode There are two ways to enable COM port mode of Pass through function 1 Project Manager 2 Use system registers
167. Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the Toggle Switch object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object The address can be the same or different from Read address Write after button is released If this function is selected the action is delayed till button is released otherwise the action is executed once the button is pressed Attribute Set ON Press the button to set ON the designated register Set OFF Press the button to set OFF the designated register Toggle Press the button to set the designated register to an inverse state Set OFF when the state is ON set ON when the state is OFF Momentary Hold the button to set ON in the designated register and OFF when released Macro Toggle Switch object can trigger the start of a Macro routine when the Macro has been created in advance Please refer to Chapter 18 Macro Reference for more information 155 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 7 Multi State Switch Overview Multi state Switch object is a combination of Word Lamp object and Set Word object The appearance of the object is controlled by the value of the read word address when pressing the button Configuration Click the Multi State Switch icon on the toolbar to open a Multi State Switch object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Multi State Switch obj
168. Command 8 Parameter 1 target time Second Parameter 2 ignore set 0 cm e Going Backward to the designated second in Parameter 1 If the video is paused the backward action will be started by playing e When the designed time is earlier than the beginning of time it will play from beginning I Adjust volume Command 9 Parameter 1 volume 0 128 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 273 Ly WE NTEK Object cum e Default volume is 128 j Set video display size Command 10 Parameter 1 display size 0 16 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 Ne e Parameter 1 0 Fit video image to object size e Parameter 1 1 16 Magnification from 25 400 in 25 increments where 1 25 2 50 3 75 and so on k Status control address 3 e When playing a video the system will turn ON file open and file playing bits 00 and 01 If the file cannot be scanned or an unacceptable command is entered the bit 08 will be set ON If the file format is not supported or a disk I O error occurs during playback eg USB disk unplugged the file error bit 09 is set ON 15 09 08 02 01 00 bit Reserved allo Lolo Jolo 00 File Opened Closed 0 closed 1 opened 01 File Playing 0 not playing 1 playing 08 Command Error 0 accepted 1 incorrect 09 File Error 0 accepted 1 incorrect 274 Object The figure shows the status value associated Playing with each state
169. Data bits Parity Stop bits Barcode reader can be connected with HMI via USB or COM port When using COM port please set the communication parameters correctly When using USB no need to set the parameters Read byte limit This function will restrict the number of bytes a barcode reader reads in order to prevent overloading The range is 10 to 512 For example Read byte limit is set to 10 If the data read by barcode device is 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 0x33 0x38 12 bytes Only the first 10 bytes will be read in this case 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 0x30 0x38 Use a start code If this check box is selected the data is only valid when the first data identifies with the start code otherwise the data will be ignored The start code will not be stored in the address of barcode reader For example if the start code is 255 Oxff and the data read 507 re WE NTEK How to Connect a Barcode Reader Oxff 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 The data saved in the designated barcode reader address will be 0x34 0x39 0x31 0x32 0x30 0x30 0x34 0x37 Terminator Terminator means the end of data when terminator is detected it stands for the end of data stream CR LF Ox0a or 0x0d stands for the end of data STX ETX 0x02 or 0x03 stands for the end of data Other Users can set the terminator None If this option is selected HMI will save all the data to the designate
170. Data data Local HMI LB 0 4 Description Read data from a device Usage GetData desti PLC name device type address data count Example char byData 10 Variable 1 Variable type short 16 bit Variable data v Read address PLC name Local HMI Device type g Address 0 d Address format DDDDD range 0 12095 BIN vi Data count 4 446 Lv WE NTEK Macro Reference Step 4 After the completion of a new macro press Compile button to compile the macro Work Space Security Macro ID 0 Macro name macro test use execution condition Cl Periodical execution Execute one time when HMI starts ee macro commard rain Short dara 4 getDbataideate 0 Local HHI LW 0 4 aj g On ie GI pee 2nd MACE OD command Pick the sight mouse button to display edit menu al Password protect Decompdstion cannot recover MACROS when checks Password protect 447 re WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 7 2 Execute a Macro There are several ways to execute a macro a Use a PLC Control object Execute the macro when the Trigger address changes as defined 1 Open PLC Control and add one PLC Control object with the Type of control as Execute macro program 2 Select the macro in Macro name Choose a bit and select a trigger condition to trigger the macro In order to guarantee that the macro will run only once consider latching the tr
171. Data in extended memory will not be erased when power is cut which means next time when start up HMI again data in the extended memory remains the same as before power off This is similar to recipe data RW RW_A The difference is that users can specify the location to store data SD card USB disk When the device of extended memory does not exist and to read data in it the data content will be 0 to write data to a device that does not exist the PLC no response message will be shown in HMI HMI supports Hot Swapping function for SD card and USB devices Users can insert or remove the device for extended memory without cutting the power With this function users can update or take data in extended memory 68 WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 8 Printer Backup Server Configure remote printer backup server System Parameter Settings Device Model General System Setti Secur Font 1 Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Use MT Remote Printer Backup Server Note Use EasyPrinter to configure PC for printing screen hardcopy and storme backup data Output setings Orientation Horizontal O Vertical Printer size Original size O Fit to printer margins Communication settings IP address 192 168 1 10 Port 8005 User name FEA Password 111111 The settings are described below Setting Description Output settings Orientation Set how will words or pictures be printed out ho
172. Diagnoser Update Package List FS Show Object ID HMD lear Activity List Show Status Bar At the bottom of EasyDiagnoser window display information of CAP NUM and SCRL Update Package List When users change window on HMI update the Polling Package information of current window with this list Show Object ID HMI Show the ID of objects in HMI as shown below About EasyDiasnoser _ EasyDiagnoser version 1 1 Ver Copyright 0 2008 Activity area In the activity area users can observe the communication between HMI and PLC 643 Ly WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser address Type p pe Mo cma PID Device St Index Address Length Time Error 139 R 68 SIEMENS S7 300 1 255 DB10 00000714 50 0 138 R 4 Local Hhil LB 00562 11 20 0 137 R 0 Local Hhil LB O05 74 4 10 0 136 R BF SIEMENS S7300 1 255 MW 0000071 40 1 135 R 4 Local Hh l LB 00562 11 20 1 134 R g Local Hh l LB 005741 20 1 133 R 68 SIEMENS S7300 1 255 DB10 00000714 30 1 132 R 4 Local Hhil LB 00562 11 30 1 131 R g Local Hhil LB 005741 30 1 130 R GT SIEMENS S7 300 1 255 hl 00000751 40 0 129 R 4 Local Hhil LB 00562711 20 0 x tem Description O Command a Read Write Display Read and Write commands in activity area b Read Display only Read commands in activity area c Write Display only Write commands in activity area Device a All Display information of Local H
173. Folder when writing files Use IP address Use HMI name assign HMI name by Lw390327Lw9033 Prefix Properties Minimize to system tray Detailed message 1 Select General on the left side 2 In Server set Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 3 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and enter IP_ in the Prefix field 578 4 6 WEINTEK EasyPrinter 4 In Properties select Minimize to system tray Set the print out location MT Box Remote Printer Server Settings General Output Hardcopy Print out to Epson Stylus COLOR 640 ESCIP 2 sade Save to Files in 1 Select Hardcopy on the left side 2 In Output select Print out to and choose a printer as the output device for screen hardcopies Note the printer shown in the image above is an example please select an actual printer located in your private network environment 3 Click OK to confirm the settings 4 In EasyPrinter main menu select File Enable Output to output any incoming print request 26 1 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder The setting procedure of EasyPrinter in EasyBuilder 1 Open a new project or an existing project in EasyBuilder 2 In EasyBuilder main menu select Edit System Parameter Settings Printer Backup Server and select Use MT Remote
174. Font files Download the font used in project Firmware Mecessary if Update firmware or execute download first time The selected files will be Use user defined startup screen erased before downloading Eben Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data sampling Reboot HMI after download HM 7 Reboot HMI after download Will reboot after Automatically using current settings to download after compiling downloading v Automatically using current settings to download after compiling If this is checked system will download project to HMI according to last settings Please see illustration below 32 L WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Project v Automatically using current settings to download after compiling Function Properties The way to enable this Dispi function duse C Display Common Window objects on Base Windows Dew Objects L C Using function key to make shape library object Automatic save and compile when download and simulate 1 Click Function Properties 2 Tick Automatic save and compile when download and simulate EasyEnilder amp 000 MTP1 10 Download delete startup screen file EB Fie Edt View Option Draw downloading D Janez EB file IBA testpic bmp a 3 downloading C EBS0004341 firmware comi downloading CEBS8000434 firmwaretgui downloading C EBS000434 firmware driver i downloading C Documents and Ad ae xob downloading CEBS000434 fort M
175. HMI y Setting Address Lw vlo 16 bit Unsigned IL J Enable acknowledge function Enable acknowledge function If this check box is selected the Acknowledge value selected for the associated event specified in Alarm Event Log will be written to the Acknowledge address designated in Alarm Display The following explains the general settings of these two objects 252 Object Hew Alarm Bar Object Alam Shape Font Include categories o thn tene Alacn Event Log object ecol speed Speed 5 E Acknowledge style Transparent Frame EE Background a Format mort Time sending 8 Time descending Order Characters Display items Display order Event trigger date Event trigger date Event trigger time Event trigger time Event message Event message If Display chars is 0 it means that the system will display all of characters Date MELODIY Time HA MM SS v Include categories Select the categories displayed in Alarm Display or Alarm Bar Alarms within these categories will be displayed only For example if the category is set to 2 to 4 only events in categories 2 3 4 will be displayed Please refer to Chapter 7 Event Log Scroll Speed and Acknowledge style Select one of the speed settings at which the messages scroll and whether to acknowledge the alarm by a single or double click The selection of scroll speed is only avail
176. II2FLOAT source start result len Description Transforms a string source into a float value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start source and len can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 float result source 0 5 source 1 6 source 2 387 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference source 3 8 ASCII2FLOAT source 0 result 4 result is 56 8 end macro command 388 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 3 Data Manipulation FiLL sourcefstart preset count Sets the first count elements of an array source to a specified value preset source and start must be a variable and preset can be a constant or variable macro command main char result 4 char preset FILL result 0 0x30 4 result 0 is 0x30 result 1 is 0x30 result 2 is 0x30 result 3 is 0x30 preset 0x31 FILL result 0 preset 2 result 0 is 0x31 result 1 is 0x31 end macro command SWAPB SWAPB source result Description Exchanges the high byte and low byte data of a 16 bit source into result source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro command main short source result SW APB 0x5678 result result is 0x7856 source 0x123 SWAPB source result result is 0x2301 end macro command
177. IP address of the printer server following the settings in EasyPrinter Set the port number to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 4 Click OK 584 EasyPrinter Create a Backup object 1 In EasyBuilder main menu select Objects Backup and the following dialog appears New Backup Object Ed General Security Shape Label Source Orw CRW Historical event log Backup position GJUSB 1 USB 2 50 card Remote printer backup server Mote Use LW 9032 9039 to change the backup Folder name Mote Use Remote printer backup server to store data to remote PC Enable the server in System Parameter Printer Backup Server settings Save Format Format MTS000 Event Log File evt ve Range Start Today Yesterday Within All imas 90 days vi Trigger Made Touch trigger wt In Source select Historical event log or RW RW A if needed In Backup position select Remote printer backup server In Range select Today and All or other options if needed In Trigger select Touch trigger Click OK Place the Backup object in the common window window no 4 and users will be able to make backups anytime needed 8 Compile and Download project to HMI Press the Backup object in the screen to make a backup of the history data eee oS S 585 Ly WE N
178. L Series USB 0 O I gt EEE Er HP compatible USB printers that support HP PCL5 level 3 protocol PCL 5 was released on HP LaserJet III in March 1990 added Intellifont font scaling developed by Compugraphic now part of Agfa outline fonts and HP GL 2 vector graphics e PCL 5e PCL 5 enhanced was released on HP LaserJet 4 in October 1992 and added bi directional communication between printer and PC and Windows fonts For more details of HP PCL series please refer to 23 2 m Axiohm A630 Micro printer from France connects via serial port please configure communication parameters to match the printer Ki WE NTEK m SPRT Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer Pixels of width must be correctly set and can t exceed printer default setting 100 s EPSON TM L90 Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer Pixels of width must be correctly set and can t exceed printer default setting 570 m EPSON TM T70 Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer Pixels of width must be correctly set and can t exceed printer default setting 570 The paper cutting mode can be selected No cut Partial cut 562 HMI Supported Printers s BRIGHTEK WH A19 Supported models A92R10 00E72A 72 in model number represents hexadecimal printer and repr
179. LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBYTE checksum command 7 send out a Read Holding Registers command OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 read responses for a Read Holding Registers command INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return value if return value gt 0 then read_data 0 response 4 response 3 lt lt 8 data in 4x 1 read_data 1 response 6 response 5 lt lt 8 data in 4x 2 SetData read_data 0 Local HMI LW 100 2 end if end macro command 398 re WE NTEK Macro Reference Name INPORT2 INPORT2 response start device name receive len wait time Description Read data from a communication port COM Port or Ethernet Port The data read will be saved in response The description of device name is the same as OUTPORT receive len stores the length of the data received this must be a variable receive len total length can t exceed the size of response wait time in millisecond can be a constant or variable After the data is read if there s no upcoming data during the designated time interval the function returns macro command main short wResponse 6 receive len wait time 20 INPORT2 wResponse 0 Free Protocol receive len wait time wait time unit millisecond if receive len gt 0 then SetData wResponse 0 Local HMI LW 0 6 set responses to LWO end if end macro command GetData GetData read_data start device n
180. Library Shapes are vector graphics in the use of lines curves or polygons A complete Shape can have more than one state and each state includes two parts frame and inner as shown below State O State I 325 WEINTEK Shape Library and Picture Library An object can use only frame or inner or both Click Call up Shape Library and the Shape Library dialog appears as below pe 3 SE all up shape Library Shape Library Library Select Lib Lib New Lib Unattach Lib System Frame 0 Untitled 1 Untitled Delete All States System Button States 3 States 3 Fre 3 a J System Lamp Frame Frame Frame Frame Delete Cur State Rename Place b 4 Untitled 5 Untitled 6 Untitled 7 Untitled States 3 States 3 States 3 States 3 Frame Frame Frame Frame State O State 11 Display Inner Frame Library Shape Libraries which have been added into the current project Select a library from the list Select the state represented by the current Shape If the selected state doesn t have a shape it means that the Shape does not exist or the state of the Shape isn t defined Select Lib Select a Shape Library to add into the project By previewing the content of the library on the right side of the window users can select a suitable library 326 Ly WE NTEK S WEINTEK Spe Library and Picture Library Library and Picture Library yom B wrod T bukten p J TE bukt
181. Logic Communications Mewin Window Help u Options Ta Bak amp ee Sa E Security b Rem Run U Run Mode Documentation L a 61 130Backplanes0 la Fanes Controller OF of Battery OF Mo Edits ak E 1 0 OK ft JE _ E _ Import Controller Organizer Export Tagsand Logic Comments and Logic Comments SS Controller 4B Ar Controller Tags Motion Controller Fault Handler Monitor Equipment Phases 56 Power Up Handler PP Sa Tasks Custom Tools Er Sa Main Task ae EH C3 Mainfro sram Ef ControlFL A amp H 3 Unecheduled Programs Phases j ooo j Online Books E S Motion Groups a ae o 653 Lib WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Step 3 In EasyBuilder add Rockwell EtherNet IP Tag CompactLogix ControlLogix driver Enter PLC IP address and click Import Tag System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Eas E88000 3 O e Frinter Backup server driver firmware My Recent font Documents GHMI memory library media driver BD project 50 card Dusb1 usb2 CJusbdriver virtual com Local Local PLC 4 Rockwell Etheill Local File name AB Tags My Network Files of type RSLogix 5000 Import Export File CSY EasyHuilderd000 AN Import tag mformaton successfully 4 mm E gt gt gt Step 4 In the object setting dialog select the PLC type and select a controller tag H
182. MI HMI IP Password Type MT6000 8000 i Series v F Settings Reboot HMI Connect via USB Launch EasyBuilder LONEC dol cable or Ethernet to to edit projects Ethernet 8 USB cable fi series only check the HMI history files information After rebooting the system returns to the initial condition Data Event Log File Information Review the address ranges and formats of Utility supported PLCs Conversion tool for i Data Samplin g EasyBuilder8000 Event Log EasyConverter Easy 4ddressviewer mine monitorin Remote printer 4 al debu n i Ad backup server Recipe Extended Memory Editor gging l Build Download Data for CF USB Disk Extended Memory and recipe editing Save the data in GF SD USB to download to HMI Allow other PC applications to connect PLC via HMI 18 L WE NTEK Project Manager 2 1 HMI IP Password Settings eitame When operating HMI via Ethernet or USB cable please set the password for HMI to protect against unauthorized access Ee t Downoad Upload Reset Download functions share the same password while Upload function uses another one N m Please remember the password otherwise while restoring HMI default settings the project files and data in HMI will be completely erased amp Project Manager HoR Reboot HMI rn sv Reboot the HMI without unplugging After Type reboot the system returns to the initia
183. MI and PLC It depends on the setting of command as following e f command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area e If command is set Read the Read information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of Local HMI and PLC will be displayed in activity area 644 L WENEK 00000 FasyDiagnoser b Local HMI Display information of Local HMI it depends on the setting of command as following e f command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of Local HMI will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Read the Read information of Local HMI will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of Local HMI will be displayed in activity area c PLC Display information of PLC it depends on the setting of command as following e If command is set Read Write the Read and Write information of PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Read the Read information of PLC will be displayed in activity area e f command is set Write the Write information of PLC will be displayed in activity area select specific Station for display on the screen This function will be disabled when selecting All in Device Address Users can select all or a part of address types to be displayed on the screen This function will
184. NNM NM Pp NY ete gt LANE PN Oa a gt ee m 4 LW300 Watch line can also export sampling data with multiple channels The system will consecutively write each channel to the specified address and the following addresses in the same order in Data Sampling object The address assigned to Watch line is the start address and sampling data for each channel will be exported to the word devices starting from start address If the data format of each channel is different the corresponding address of each channel is arranged from the first to the last If the watch register is LW 300 LW 300 Ch 0 16 bit Unsigned 1 word LW 301 Ch 1 32 bit Unsigned 2 words LW 303 Ch 2 32 bit Unsigned 2 words LW 305 Ch 3 16 bit Signed 1 word 215 Ly WE NTEK Object Time stamp output If selected the system will start counting time from the first data sample and output the elapsed time counted of the latest data sample to the register designated in Time stamp output 2 When pressing a point on the trend curve the relative time of the nearest data sample is then output to Time stamp output address Note the format of the register designated in Time Stamp Output and Time Stamp Output 2 must be 32 bit Time stamp output 2 is only available for Trend Display real time mode while Time stamp output is available for real time mode and history mode This function is only available when Relativ
185. No 5 6 7 8 are the default System Message Windows Window No 5 PLC Response When the communication between PLC and HMI is disconnected this message window will pop up automatically right on the base window currently opened m PLC no response window can be disabled by system registers Please refer to Chapter 22 System Reserved Words amp Bits for more information Window No 6 HMI Connection When failing to connect HMI with a remote HMI this message window will pop up automatically 72 WE NTEK Window Operations Window No 7 Password Restriction When attempting to control an object without authorization this window may pop up as a warning depending on the settings of the object Window No 8 Storage Space Insufficient When HMI flash memory USB disk or SD card run out of storage space this message window will pop up automatically When the memory space is under 4 MB The following system registers can be used to check the free memory space in HMI USB disk or SD card LW 9072 HMI current free space K bytes LW 9074 SD current free space K bytes LW 9076 USB 1 current free space K bytes LW 9078 USB 2 current free space K bytes To check if there is sufficient storage in the devices the following system registers can be used These addresses will set ON when the space is under 4 MB LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9036 SD
186. O IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 10311 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 10312 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 10313 16bit remote PLC 3 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 10314 16bit remote PLC 3 s port no R Y R Y LW 10315 16bit remote PLC 4 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10316 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP1 IP address R Y R Y 547 Lig WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 10317 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP2 IP address eae IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 10318 16bit remote PLC 4 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 10319 16bit remote PLC 4 s port no QI sl E 1 LW 10050 to LW 10299 are registers relevant to the IP address of the HMI connected to remote PLC The HMI connected to PLC 1 to the HMI connected to PLC 50 548 Ki WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 21 Communication Error Messages amp No of Pending Cmd 16bit pending command no in local HMI LW 9350 LW 9351 16bit pending command no in PLC 1 COM 1 Note1 LW 9352 16bit LW 9353 LW 9354 LW 9355 LW 9356 LW 9357 LW 9390 LW 9400 LW 9401 LW 9402 LW 9403 LW 9404 LW 9405 LW 9406 LW 9407 LW 9490 ea N pending command no in PLC 2 COM 2 COM 3 ethernet ke Nas 16bit pending command no in PLC 3 16bit pending command no in PLC 4 ethernet Ses 1
187. Object There are two demonstrations to help you understand the usage of Schedule Example A motor is scheduled to power ON at 9 00 and power OFF at 18 00 Monday to Friday We are using LB 100 to control the motor state LB 100 will be set ON at 9 00 and OFF at 18 00 At End Time Motor Stops Click Scheduler icon on the toolbar or select Objects Scheduler to configure the Scheduler object General 1 Select Bit ON in Action mode Acton mode Bit ON Bit OFF Word write 2 Use LB 100 as Action address Acton address PLE name Local HMI w Setting 290 Ki WE NTEK Object Time Set 3 In Time Set tab select Constant General Time Set Prohibit 8 Constant Address 4 Enter Start time as 9 00 00 and select Monday to Friday Deselect Setting on individual day Setting on individual day Start I A da wal In ae o JH 0 9 0 Sess ere Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 5 Enter End time as 18 00 00 and select Enable termination action check box End Enable termination action 18 GB 0 a 0 HEMM SS 6 Click OK a new schedule object will be created on the Scheduler list Scheduler l scheduler I Bit ON Local HAMIL B10 Time MON TUE WED THU FRI 291 W WEINTEK Object Example k A thermal heater is scheduled to heat up to 90 C at 0
188. P Linux Imaging and Printing Print Scan and Fax Drivers for Linux The HP Linux Imaging and Printing project provides printing support for 2 134 Browse Knowledge Base printer models including Deskjets Officejets Photosmarts Business Inkjets o tli LaserJets LaserJet MFPs Edgeline MFPs Edgeline MFPs and PSCs Screenshots search Knowledge Base News Please note There are small number of printers that are not supported See the Features Licensing Information Unsupported Printers page for a complete list How To s Get Help Troubleshooting FAQ s Install and Setup A Lookup By Printer Type and Model Technical Docs step 1 Select Printer Type Download Color LaserJet Color LaserJet MFP Install Install Wizard Step 2 Select Printer Model Supported Printers Te i Requirements HP Color LaserJet cp1516ni Printer step 3 Click Continue B Recommended Printer Models List Need a printer to use with Linux Use this list to see our fully supported recommended printer models 4 Find Other Information The first item is Driver plug in its description must be None which indicates that this HP printer is supported by HMI APDK device class es LJColor Postscript HPLIP device sub class es USB VID PID 1008 20503 nm models dat name hp color laserjet cpl51 ni All information provided is believed to be accurate but is not guaranteed Notes Network support i
189. PO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9831 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9832 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9833 16bit remote HMI 7 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9834 16bit remote HMI 7 s port no R Y R Y LW 9835 16bit remote HMI 8 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9836 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9837 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9838 16bit remote HMI 8 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9839 16bit remote HMI 8 s port no R Y R Y LW 9905 16bit remote HMI 21 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 Note4 LW 9906 16bit remote HMI 21 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9907 16bit remote HMI 21 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9908 16bit remote HMI 21 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9909 16bit remote HMI 21 s port no R Y R Y LW 9910 16bit remote HMI 22 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9911 16bit remote HMI 22 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9912 16bit remote HMI 22 s IP2 IP address SAN IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 ae Y R Y y WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 9913 16bit remote HMI 22 s IP3 IP address R
190. R L8 9473 EM9 storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9474 EMA s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R LB 9475 _ EMS storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9476 EM6 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9477 EM7 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R gt L8 9478 EMB s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9479 EM9 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9480 EMO s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9481 EM1 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9482 _ EM2 storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9483 EM3 storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9484 EM4 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9485 EMS s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9486 EM6 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON R R R eee see TT EEE TEN EEE EM8 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON OR R R EM9 s storage device USB2 disk does not exist when ON OR R R 524 vo WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 9 Storage Space Management LB 9035 HMI free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9036 SD card free space insuffic
191. R W R Y R Y Note 15 9101 remote HMI 2 status set on to retry connector AW RY Av LB 9102 remote HMI S status seton to rory connector RW RY RY LB 9103 remote HMI4 status seton to rory connection RW RY RY LB 9104 remote HMIS status seton to rory connection RW RY RY 9405 remore VG situs setono retry conector Aw RY AY remote HMI 7 status set on to retry connection RW RY RY remote HMI 8 status set on to retry connection RW RY RY LB 9149 forced to reconnect remote HMI when IP R W R Y R Y changed on line set ON LW 9800 16bit remote HMI 1 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 Note3 LW 9801 16bit remote HMI 1 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9802 16bit remote HMI 1 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9803 16bit remote HMI 1 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9804 16bit remote HMI 1 s port no LW 9805 16bit remote HMI 2 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9806 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 540 om y WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9808 16bit remote HMI 2 s IP3 IP address r IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9809 16bit remote HMI 2 s port no LW 9810 16bit remote HMI 3 s IPO IP address ven IPO 1P1
192. Return to normal Font size 16 A Addresses of WATCHI WATCHS Multi watch 1 y Syntax The settings are described below Content The text content displayed in Alarm Bar Alarm Display and Event Display objects Use the formats in the following two examples or WATCH addresses to use register data in content The data of the LW register can be used in the content displayed when an event is triggered Format d gt initial sign gt address d gt end sign When an event is triggered if the value in LW 20 is 13 Setting High Temperature 20d Display High Temperature 13 83 Ly WE NTEK Event Log Example kr The data in the specified address when the event is triggered can be included in the content displayed The address should be set to the Read address of Event Log take MODBUS RTU 4x address as an example Format d gt initial sign gt address d gt end sign When an event is triggered if the value in MODBUS 4x 15 is 42 Setting High Temperature 15d Display High Temperature 42 Font Color The font and color can be set differently for each event The setting determines the font and color shown in Alarm Bar Alarm Display or Event Display objects Write value for Event Alarm Display object When an event in Event Display or Alarm Display is acknowledged the value is written to the assigned Write address Sound
193. S Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 6 Enter End time as 17 00 00 and select Enable termination action check box End Enable termination action 17 0 0 HH MM SS 7 Return to General tab and enter 30 in Write end value Vist va 8 Click OK a new schedule object will be created on the Scheduler list 294 og WE NTEK Object E General tab Scheduler General Time Set Frohibit Description Scheduler 1 Power ON startend action Acton mode O Bit ON Bit OFF Word write Acton address PLC name ie HMI w Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Word write value settings 8 Constant Address Shatvalwe 90 O Power ON start end action Check the condition when the HMI is powered ON e Enabled When HMI is powered ON within the scheduled time range the start action will be performed automatically When HMI is powered ON outside the scheduled time range the end action will be executed 295 Ly WE NTEK Object Inside scheduled range Start time Power ON End time Start action Termination action Outside scheduled range Power ON Start time End time Termination action Start action Termination action Disabled When the HMI is powered ON at a time later than the start time the start action will not be performed but the end action will be performed When the end action is not defined the scheduled r
194. S ASCII server station no COM 2 LW 9543 MODBUS ASCII server station no COM 3 LW 9544 MODBUS ASCII server station no Ethernet 504 Ly WE NTEK Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 3 About MODBUS Address Type Address types in EasyBuilder MODBUS protocol are 0x 1x 3x 4x 5x 6x 3x_bit and 4x bit MODBUS RTU function codes are listed below 0x Coils A read and write device type When reading a bit with this device type the function code is 01H When writing a bit the function code is 05H When writing multiple bits the function code is OFH 1x Discrete Inputs A read only device type When reading a bit the function code is 02H 3x Input Registers A read only device type When reading data the function code is 04H 4x Holding Register A read and write device type When reading data the function code is 03H When writing data the function code is 10H 5x The function codes are the same as 4x The difference is that 5x makes double word swap when the format is 32 bit unsigned If the data read by 4x is 0x1234 the data read by 5x is 0x3412 6x A read and write device type When reading data the function code is 03H The difference from 4x is that when writing data the function code is O6H meaning to write a single register 3x_bit The function code is the same as 3x The difference is that 3x bit reads a single bit in the data 4x_bit The function code Is the same as 4x The difference is that 4x_bit reads a si
195. SB barcode reader please set LB 9064 OFF Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 509 p WEINTEK Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection Chapter 21 Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection There are two ways of Ethernet communication 1 Use RJ45 straight through cable hub AA Control center m WS Ethernet J T Es Switch Hub IWH 2 Use RJ45 crossover cable and without hub but this is limited to the condition of point to point connection HMI to HMI or PC to HMI Ethemet Crossover cable Ethemet Sa mm Crossover cable Through Ethernet network the system provides the following methods for data transmission IWH IWH IWH 1 HMI to HMI communication 2 PC to HMI communication 3 Operating the PLC connected to another HMI 510 pi WEINTEK Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection 21 1 HMI to HMI Communication To exchange data between one HMI and another HMI add a new remote HMI device in System Parameter Settings Assume there are HMI A and HMI B and we want to use a Set Bit object on HMI A to control LB 0 on HMI B Ethernet Crossover cable 1 Set the IP address of the two HMIs i e HMI A 192 168 1 1 HMI B 192 168 1 2 WH WH 2 In HMI A project Device Properties System Parameter Settings Name Device list as Location IP 192 168 1 2 Port 8000 Add a remote HMI B IF Address Set
196. See the picture below Attribute Address type Bit v Interval 3 0 second s v No of bits 15 Interval Select the time interval for each data transfer for example when 3 seconds is set the system will transfer data every 3 seconds 278 Lb WE NTEK Object m Specifying a short time interval or a big number of data to transfer may cause an overall performance of system decrease Therefore it is recommended that users choose a longer time interval and a smaller amount of data to transfer m When a short interval is inevitable be aware of the interval must be longer than the data transfer operation For example if the data transfer operation takes 2 seconds you must set the interval longer than 2 seconds Source address Data Transfer object reads the data from Source Address Destination address Data Transfer object writes the data to Destination Address After all settings are completed press OK button and a new Data Transfer Time based object will be created The Data Transfer Time based management dialog displays brief information for each object as shown below Data Transfer Time based Object 1 Local HMI LB200 gt Local HMI LB210 Mode Bit Time interval 2 0 second s transfer length 10 bit ay A avi ee HU ee MINER Yor inne interyval 0 secant anser iononrmn Local HMILB30 gt Local HMLLESO Mode Bit Time interval 3 0 second s transfer le
197. Setting Drmamic limits High 32767 High 22707 Direction There are four selections right left uo or down Right Lett Up Down Right direction Left direction ae direction non origin origin aight Down direction 243 Ly WE NTEK Object No of channels Up to 16 independent channels may be selected for observation Control address Address Control the operation of all channels simultaneously When the control address is set to LW n different values entered in it represents different commands and the following one address LW n 1 will also be designated to control the number of data points plotted Control value Result address LW n Plot point on XY curve The plotted points are kept i ote pits eke _ Clear all XY curves _ 2s Clear then plot new XY curve control the number of data points plotted After operation Control address will be set 0 which represents action completed ready for next operation No of data address Controls the number of data points Each channel has a selection of up to 1023 points per plot Channel Select a channel to configure Read Address PLC name Select a PLC which will be the source of X data and Y data and designate a read address The format of the data register blocks used for the display channels depends on whether Separated address for X and Y data has been selected and if Dynamic limits has been selected
198. T gt 1 Chapter 6 Window Operations 2 Chapter 12 Keypad Design and Usage 149 E WE NTEK Object _Example ED Design Non ASCII character keyboard The following explains how to enter and display non ascii characters in HMI such as Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese Japanese Greek and so on Please follow the steps Step1 Setting non ascii fonts Add the needed non ascii fonts in System Parameter Settings Font Please use the required font for the language used System Parameter Settings Extended Memory ___ Printer Backup Server e Mail Recipes Device Model Generel System Setting Security Font Fonts for non asci strings ACaslonFro Bold F Add RE Black Arial Bold Arial Narrow Arial Narrow Bold Delete All Batang Step2 Design non ascii keyboard Create window no 11 and design the non ascii keyboard The following use Simplified Chinese as an example 9 H 10 WINDOW 010 H 11 SimpleChinese Keyboard FJ BACK CLEAR ESC The objects in this window are all Function Keys that are set to the needed functions as labeled Take the jj Function Key as an example create a function key in ASCII UNICODE mode as shown below 150 Ki WE NTEK Object ef ke D TH AY am A Description H 4 3 Activate after button is released Function Key Objects Properties General Security Shape Label Profile
199. TEK EasyPrinter m The Backup object can be triggered via a bit address m Users can arrange a Scheduler object which turns a bit ON at the end of the week to trigger the Backup object to automatically back up all history data 586 Ly WE NTEK EasyPrinter 26 3 EasyPrinter Operation Guide The following introduces the interface and operation of EasyPrinter 26 3 1 Appearance EasyPrinter main menu is divided into 5 parts as shown below iik VI karene Printer Server Liy Tri fac fm View pusen pep 14 35 02 Prina sercer 16 actee and ewady for cequeris The following introduces the functions Area Name Job List 2 Property Window Preview Window 4 Download Progress Window Shows the time and message information of 5 Message Window events such as incoming request incorrect password etc 587 Ly WEI NTEK EasyPrinter 26 3 2 Operation Guide The following describes the function of EasyPrinter menu items e File Enable Output Selected EasyPrinter processes the tasks one by one Unselected EasyPrinter stores the tasks in memory m EasyPrinter can only reserve up to 128 MB of task data in memory If the memory is full any request coming in afterwards will be rejected Users must either operate Enable Output or delete some tasks to make room for new tasks e Edit Edit Edit screen hardcopy by setting Orientation Scaling and Margi
200. TP LED ttt downloading CEBS000434 fort MTPLEL ttf scan font finished reboot HMI finished 3 Save project 4 Click Download 5 On dialog box tick Automatically using current settings to download after compiling Ethernet O USB cable i series only Password Set Firmware 6 Cl ick Down load Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time T After fi nish setti Ng i next ti me Use user defined startup screen when click D ownloa d File location D JanesriHEB file FIG testpic bmp EasyBuilder will automatically Reset recipe 7 Reset event log 7 Reset data sampling compile and download project to v Reboot HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling the latest target HMI 33 Le WE NTEK m Way 2 Ethernet HMI Name 1 On HMI set HMI name first System settings Network Time Date Securit HMI name setting ha Ti HMI name 2 On PG select the set HMI name and start downloading Download Ethernet O USB cable i series only qlee HMI name test v 192 168 1 22 tfest OS 20091002 or later supports Search Search all OS 20091002 or later supports Firmware Font files Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time hv Use user defined startup screen File location Di Janezx HEB file FOBHtestpic bmp 4 05 20091002 o
201. The above shows the PLC is connected with HMI 1 and HMI 1 is connected with HMI 2 via COM port so that HMI 2 can control the PLC through HMI 1 The following are examples of how to use EasyBuilder to create projects used on HMI 1 Master and HMI 2 Slave 599 pi WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication 28 1 How to Create a Project of Master HMI The following is the project content of HMI 1 in System Parameter Settings Device System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory FrmterBackup server Device Model General System Setting Security Device list Location Device type Interface IF Proto Local HMI Local HMI Local HM TAOTDiIHMTS0T70 Disable Wid Local FLE 1 FATEE FB Series Local F TEE FB Series COM 1 600 E 7 1 3 E232 Master slave Se Local Master slave Se COM 3 115200 F 6 1 Rk 1 Due to COM 1 of HMI 1 connects PLC the device list must include Local PLC 1 in this case is FATEK FB Series The communication parameters must be set correctly 2 Due to COM 3 of HMI 1 is used to receive commands from HMI 2 a new device must be added Master Slave Server for setting communication properties of COM 3 The picture above shows the parameters of COM 3 115200 E 8 1 and uses RS232 These parameters are not required to be the same as PLC but the Data bits must be set to 8 In general a higher baud rate for HMI 2 is recommended for a more efficient
202. The following explains the situations while 16 bit register is used 244 Ly WE NTEK Object 1 If Separated address for X and Y data is not selected and set Read address to LW n Xdaa Ydaa Xdata Ydata gt LW n 10 LW n 11 2 If Separated address for X and Y data is selected and set X data to LW 0 Y data to LW 100 select Dynamic limits Not select Dynamic limits kome Yata Xda Vaa Limits When Dynamic limits is not selected the Low and High limits can be set Limits Dynamic limits X axis Low 0 High 32767 7 axis Low 0 High 32767 The Low and High limits are used for counting X and Y range in percentage Read Address Value Low Limit Scale High Limit Low Lmit 245 Ki WE NTEK Object Dynamic Limits When the format is 32 bit and the address is LW 100 n the corresponding data will as table below If Separated address for X and Y data is not selected LW100 LW104 n 4 If Dynamic limits is selected a zoom effect can be created by changing the setting of Low High Limits Please refer to Trend Display Object In the following example XL X low limit XH X high limit YL Y low limit YH Y high limit and XY XY1 XY2 are three XY data When changing the high limits of X and Y axis the result is shown below Go XY XY1 XY2 XY XY1 XYZ LW100 control LW 101 display number LW100 control L101 display number L L
203. Trigger address PLC name Local HMI v Address a vllo 4 External trigger word When selecting External trigger word users can specify the number of days to backup data using Trigger address Trigger Mode External trigger word Syntax Trigger address PLC name Local HMI w Setting Address Lw vllo Trigger address usage Suppose LW n is used m LW n Will start to back up when the value LW n ch anges from 0 to Set 1 to trigger backup activity m LW n 1 The start date of backup d es e E LW n 2 The number of days for backup Syntax dialog is shown on the right The max no of days is 90 today yesterday 0 i 2 the day before yesterday n and 50 on LWint 2 Define backup range Unit day max value 90 1 All history files should have been saved in memory either HMI memory USB stick or SD card Otherwise the Backup object will not work 2 The maximum number of days for backup is 90 days 268 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 25 Media Player When the first time a project using Media Player object it is necessary to download the project via Ethernet Therefore Media Player drivers will be installed in HMI Overview Media Player object will play video files with controls Seek Zoom and Volume to provide maintenance instructions or procedures on video so as to enable on site operators to perform tasks efficiently Note Only MT8000X series supports this func
204. VNC wiewor bor Jere Minnene Internet Hapit Q 1 DN Go ve 7192 160 I 28 REAL Ve VNC Viewer Free Eden 1 Copyright C 2002 2008 Rea Lid See h p eva re aure Om for misrmnabon on VNC Ew E THC Viewer Connection Details E BIK Server 192 168 1 zal Encryption Not supported About Options OK Cancel B FHC Authentication No Encryption A Eg Password Je Bee Powe Mnd Taine Beptnree Q a E w i w OR 108 165 1 28 VNC Viewer Fres Edtion I Copyright C 2002 2008 Res lat Dust pe AR Tourch I4 Communication Becomes Easv One HMI allows only one user to log in VNC server at one time If there is no activity for more than one hour HMI system will log out automatically Lub WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Chapter 5 System Parameter Settings Launch EasyBuilder in the main menu select Edit System Parameters to open the System Parameter Settings dialog system Parameter Settings Ed Font Extended Memory Frinter Backup server Device Model General System Setting Security Device let Local HMI Local HMI Local I HM TEO7OiH MTE 07O Dis able Ni ri MA Project description System Parameter Settings are divided into several parts Device Model General System Setting Security Font Extended Memory and Printer Backup Server These will be introduced respectively in this chapter 43
205. W LW 10063 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote too PLC 3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 nm oy RW LW 10064 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to LW 10065 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote toe PLC 4 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 546 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 10067 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote R W R Y R Y PLC 4 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10068 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote R W R Y R Y PLC 4 IP address IP0 IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10069 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to R W R Y R Y remote PLC 4 LW 10300 16bit remote PLC 1 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10301 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 10302 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 10303 16bit remote PLC 1 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 10304 16bit remote PLC 1 s port no R Y R Y LW 10305 16bit remote PLC 2 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 10306 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 10307 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 10308 16bit remote PLC 2 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 10309 16bit remote PLC 2 s port no R Y R Y LW 10310 16bit remote PLC 3 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IP
206. W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9951 16bit remote HMI 30 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9952 16bit remote HMI 30 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9953 16bit remote HMI 30 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 y WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits LW 9954 16bit remote HMI 30 s port no LW 9955 16bit remote HMI 31 s IPO IP address IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9956 16bit remote HMI 31 s IP1 IP address IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9957 16bit remote HMI 31 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9958 16bit remote HMI 31 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 KE DE KE id LW 9959 16bit remote HMI 31 s port no LW 9960 16bit remote HMI 32 s IPO IP address R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9961 16bit remote HMI 32 s IP1 IP address R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 KE KE LW 9962 16bit remote HMI 32 s IP2 IP address IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9963 16bit remote HMI 32 s IP3 IP address IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9964 16bit remote HMI 32 s port no ql 1 LB 9068 to LB 9099 are registers relevant to auto connection with remote HMI HMI 1 to 32 2 LB 9100 to LB 9148 are registers relevant to communication status with remote HMI HMI 1 to 49 3 LW 9800 to LW 9899 are registers relevant to setting IP address of remote HMI HMI 1 to 20 4 LW 9905 to LW 9999 are registers relevant to setting IP address of re
207. WE NTEK Object Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the word device that displays characters Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object No of words Click Setting to select the maximum number of words to be displayed Address PLC name Local HMI Device type LW Address 0 System tag Address format DDDDD range 0 10799 Index register ho of word 3 An UNICODE character uses 1 word and an ASCII character uses 1 byte Therefore 1 word can be used as 1 UNICODE character or 2 ASCII characters 1 word equals to 2 bytes 175 Lv WE NTEK Object Hew ASCII Input Object General Security Shane Font Content Attribute In the Font tab of ASCII Input object and ASCII Display object the font size color and alignment can be set Left alignment ab Align bde Left or Right justified as shown Right alignment ab bde 176 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 11 Indirect Window Overview Indirect Window object calls a popup window where the window number corresponds to the value in a designated word register The control word register is set in Indirect Window entering a value in the register calls the corresponding number of popup window There are two ways to use Indirect Window object 1 Preset an area for Indirect Window in this way the popup
208. X 32 bit HEX Numeric 16 bit Binary 1 32 bit Binar O String No of Word Te EUe na 6 bit Unsigned 16 bit Signed Update Cycle 2500 ms v Cancel Name Name the object and the name can t be repeated Read Only If an object is set to read only its address value can t be set HMI Select the HMI to monitor PLC Set the device station number and interface of the PLC to monitor Address Set the address type and the address to monitor Address Type When the address type is set the available formats to display the address can be selected When executing the address will be calculated and displayed according to the selected format Update Cycle Set the update interval of the monitor object If many objects are executed simultaneously error or delay may happen 672 Lib WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 3 3 Add a New Device 6 Select HMI Select a target HMI If the target HMI does not exist follow the steps to add a new device Monitor Settings Name New Monitor H Read Only HMI 1192 168 1 85 8000 Default HMI vi Open HMI Manager HMI Manager 192 168 1 85 8000 Default HMI HMI Settings HMI Name Default HMI vi 192 168 1 118 Default HMI 192 168 1 145 Default HMI Cancels 192 168 1 146 Default HMI Search Al 192 168 1 90 Default HMI 192 168 1 94 Default HMT 192 148 1 96 Default HMT Use Local HMI Or sel
209. X 0x02h Master receives STX 0x02h from Slave and sends ACK 0x06h to Slave Slave receives ACK 0x06h from Master Slave sends 0x01 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x02 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x10 as shown below SEE o foxos The operating sign to MW 0x10 Address Low byte 0x10 Insert 0x10 0x00 Bit Address High byte 0x02 The number of bytes sent MW 10 two bytes eS iY 0x10 0x10 is the low byte in MW 10 0x10 Insert 0x10 0x00 0x00 is the high byte 0x10 End sign pm PP 10 0x10 The checksum 0x01 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x02 0x10 0x10 0x00 0x 10 0x03 0x10 5 Master receives data from Slave and sends ACK 0x06h to Slave 6 Slave receives ACK 0x06h from Master Slave sends the updated data in MW to Master and Master synchronizes its MW data with Slave 629 WE NTEK Memory Map Communication 31 5 Settings The following explains how to connect two HMIs using Memory Map protocol mi m If the type of these two HMls are different please create different project files or after setting the first HMI directly change to the type of the second HMI in Edit System Parameter Settings Model and then compile and download the project to the second HM I 31 5 1 Add a Memory Map Device Launch EasyBuilder select New and the model of HMI as shown below 1 Click Edit form the main menu click System Parameter Settings and select Device tab then click New to add a new device 2 Inthe Name field ent
210. able in Alarm Bar 253 og WE NTEK Object Color Use color to indicate different state of alarms Frame and background may be made invisible by selecting Transparent check box Sort Sort alarms in time ascending or descending order Time ascending Latest alarm is placed last in the list Time descending Latest alarm is placed first in the list Order amp Characters Use the up and down arrow buttons to adjust the display order of the alarms Date Displays the date tag with each alarm message The four formats of date tag MM DD YY DD MM YY DD MM YY gt YY MM DD Time Displays the time tag with each alarm message The four formats of time tag HH MM SS HH MM gt DD HH MM HH In the Font tab set the size of the font or select Italic Alarm Display Object s Properties Generel Alum Shape Font Profile Attnbute sme 16 v 7 Italic The font and color of the alarm messages is set in Alarm Event Log object Event Alarm Log General Message Text Content Event 0 Warning Press to acknowledge this alarm event Label Library Font Arial vi Color 254 i en Object 13 22 Event Display Overview Event Display object is used to display alarm messages which are login in Event Alarm Log When designated addresses meet the trigger condition events or alarms will be displayed in time date order as they occurred in Event Display Event Displ
211. acro name sub 15i macro command main 20 short value 1 adres35 0 1i 0 21 int gnmascrolb 0 22 bool bError 0 231 int tempoount 0 tempval 0 24 int gn urrentMID 0 gniurrentMCount 0 gnoount 0 gautestVal 0 gneorreetVal 0 Fed Select All a5 26 gt Undo MID gt gt gt gt gt bb bobb n nn 27 gnlun Redo 28 SetDe HMI LW 1000 1 Toggle Bookmark Ctl P2 LW adress 1 35 temp Next Bookmark F2 36 value Previous Bookmark ShittF2 37 adre Clear All Bookmarks 38 ffo gt i LMD Ur to 5 Or 5 Or Or i D Ve 1 Toggle All Outlining 40 SetDe Vee Anne leal HMI LU 1002 1 MIDS 335225222 oD LW 1 1 358 og WE NTEK Macro Reference b If there is already a bookmark where the cursor is placed select Toggle Bookmark to close it otherwise to open It c Right click and select Next Bookmark the cursor will move to where the next bookmark locates Selecting Previous Bookmark will move the cursor to the previous bookmark Workspace Works pace WorkSpace WorkSpace Macro ID 42 macro command main short value 1 adress 0 1i 0 int gqnmacrolb 0 gno ount 0 gntestVal 0 gn bool bError 0 int tempCount 0 tempval 0 int gnourrentMID 0 qnourrentNMOount 0 ff eee SEG qoLurrentNlID gt 5555055505 gt gniurrent MID 1 SetDatal gnCurrentMID Local HMI LW 1000 Fron enn Bet gnCurrentHID g
212. ad Reboot HM 1 Click to Save mtp file 2 Click to Compile to xobfile for downloading to HMI this also checks if the project can run correctly Project name C Documents and Settings Administrator 2 MTP1 mtp Users are allowed to S el e ct th e q n g u 2 g e S XOB file name C Documents and Settings Administrator ENMTP1 xob needed for the project XOB password used in decompiler C Decompilation is prohibited and download to HMI wi select the languages used on the Hil up to 8 languages can b t d Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 e selected Language 5 V Language 6 Language 7 Language 8 fo error s O warning s Object size 44878 bytes Font size 314444 bytes Picture size 792988 bytes Shape size 842 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Macro size 14 bytes Tag size 20 bytes Total size 1189660 bytes 1 13M v Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects Compile Build font files A successfully compiled file will get this dialog box 30 L WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Project 3 3 Off line and On line Simulation OK without HMI amp PLC and save more time Off line simulation Simulate project operation on PC Simulate operations without connecting PLC PC PLC HMI OK without HMI and save more time Connect PC PLC amp set correct parameters Click
213. ad only Ax lt gt RW 4x 10000 gt Local HMI RW 0 55536 Word s Read Write Table Description MODBUS Address 697 pi WE NTEK MODBUS TCP IP Gateway m SCADA can only read write the register defined in one Address Mapping Table at one time that is the same MODBUS command cannot access the data in the registers defined in different Address Mapping Tables Table Description MODBUS Address PLC Name Mapped PLC Address Table Size Read Write Access D200 D298 4x 1 gt FATEK FB Series D 200 99 Word s Read Write AccessRO R99 4x 100 lt gt FATEK FB Series TE Read Write As shown in the above figure in Mapping Table 1 set MODBUS 4x 1 to access register D 200 table size 99 words and in Mapping Table 2 set MODBUS 4x 100 to access register R 0 table size 100 words If using SCADA to send a command to read from 4x 1 to 4x 199 table size 199 words since the range spans two different tables the command will not be accepted by HMI Instead access the data with two separate commands 4x 1 4x 99 and 4x 100 4x 199 each reading only from one table as shown in the following figure PLC Driver MODBUS Server Eg FATEK FB series Mapping Table 1 PLC Address Success 1 Access 4x 1 4x 99 2 Access 4x 100 4x 199 t SCADA Host PC PLC Free Protocol Master Machine gt Connected Device Supervisory Device PLC Address Supported Drivers
214. address Notification address Event 0 WC IRD z 0 00 Loc al HMI LW ig Dis Able Dis able 0 Event 1 BIT ON Local HMI LB 0 Disable Disable JEnable back light when alarm occurs History files V Save to HMI memory Save to SD card Save to USB 1 Save to USB 2 Preservation limit Days of preservation day s Print V Sequence no J Event trigger time O HH MM SS HH MM O DD HH MM V Event trigger date O MM DD YY DD MM YY O DD MM YY O vy MM DD Settings copy Paste L_Export J Import gt 78 Ko WE NTEK Event Log The settings are described below Alarm Event Log Category Al 2 no Category Text Mode Condition Read address Notification address Buzzer Event WORD lt 000 Local HMI LW 0 Duste Disable Event BIT OW Local EMI LB Dinti History fies 7 Save to HMI memory L Save to SD card Save to USB 1 save to USB 2 Fa Preservation knit Days of preservation 2 darts Print Sequence n Event trigger time OH MM SS Co HMM OD0cHH MM Evernt trigger date CO MMDDSYY DD MMYY ODOM YY C new JG set Delete Settings paste pet Jor Category Classifies events by dividing them into 0 255 categories Select one category to add or view event log In the bracket it shows how many events are in this category History files To specify the storage location of an event log However when executing On line o
215. after correctly connecting the device V When On line simulating on PC if the control target is a local PLC i e the PLC directly connected to PC there is 10 minutes simulation limit Off line IAT on v rer i 0 7 as 1 ve 3 e G il 4 Ej 2 28 3 On line oa Ef A ols RE m z ii Es re EasyView DANE me 5 Window gt i 2 Winslow gt 3S Skye jam EsryBuiker30 FE Chapar _03_C Paint Shop Pro Microsoft Off Bb a FF 0340 31 Create an EasyBuilder Project 3 4 Download the Project to HMI m Way 1 Ethernet HMI IP Window Help Before Download be sure to check if all the ae Compie settings are correct TE On line Simulation Colt te Ofline Simulation ChltT Download F7 GE Build Dets for USB Disk or CF Caud Download Reboot HMI A Input Password amp Specify HMI IP Download delete startup screen file downloading D JanescefieEs file FI BLA testpic brmp downloading EBS000434 firrowareycom i w Ei downloading C EBS000434 firmware gui i Firmware downloading C EBS000434 firmwarel driver i downloading C Documents and Settings Administrator Am MTF 1 xob Update HMI kernel downloading C EB8000434 font MTP1 0 ttf downloading C EBS000434 font MTP1 1 ttf programs Must do this when san font finished reboot HMI finished first time download files to finished HMI Ethernet COUSB cable i series only Password Set
216. al else The format of if statement is if logic expression then else if logic expression then end if Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C17 illegal expression no for without matching next for statement error missing for before next C18 illegal variable type not integer or char Should be integer or char variable 468 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference C19 variable type error Missing assign statement C20 must be keyword to or down Missing keyword to or down C21 illegal expression no next The format of for statement is for variable initial value to end value step next variable Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C22 wend statement contains no while While statement error missing while before Wend C23 illegal expression without matching wend The format of While statement is while logic expression wend Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C24 syntax error break break statement can only be used in for while statement C25 syntax error continue continue statement can only be used in for statement or while statement C26 syntax error Error in expression C27 syntax error The mismatch of an operation object in expression can cause a
217. al point Right of decimal Pt The number of digits after the decimal point Scaling option Do conversion If this check box is selected Engineering low and Engineering high boxes appear Values entered in these boxes correspond to the display range required The setting also requires Input low and Input hight in the limits section If A indicates the original data and B indicates the displayed data B Engineering low A Input low x ratio where the ratio Engineering high Engineering low Input high Input low As shown below the original data is 15 after conversion where 10 15 0 x 50 10 20 0 40 As a result 40 will be displayed 170 Ly WE NTEK Object scaling option Do conversion Dynamic scales Engineering low 10 Engineering high 50 Limits Direct Dynamic limits PLC low g PLC high 20 Input low Input high Dynamic limits Set the Engineering low and Engineering high by a designated register When Dynamic Address is LW n where n is an arbitrary number the rule of setting Low high limit is For example when Dynamic Address is LW 100 the rule of setting Low High limit is 16 bit 32 bit Dynamic Address LW 100 LW 100 w00 L200 High limit LW 101 LW 102 Limits This section allows users to apply display limits to the values held in the input register The color when the register value is outside limits can be set Constant
218. alculates the two points in X axis Xo 0 and Xe 0 b Link all the points in the order of Xo 0 PO P1 P6 Xs 0 and returns to Xo 0 at last c Fill out all enclosed areas Enclosed region s ar ak att ea er ae one state cone Me iS de one oe a one oe oe ox s ees ens ae ee ae it i at at Mu Mt ul ut ut at Ta St ut aat ul at at St ME aat ut Xo 0 Xs 0 Xo 0 Xs 0 249 Lv WE NTEK Object Similarly for Y axis projection Enclosed region Reference line Up to 4 horizontal reference lines can be configured on the graph Fill in high low limits and Y axis coordinate percentage values with choice of color for each reference line Reference line Limit from PLC Low limit 0 a High limit 100 Reference line 1 20 Reference line 2 40 Reference line 3 60 Reference line 4 80 i N v If Limit form PLC is selected designate a register to be the read address of reference line Reference line Limit from PLC LC name Local in Address LW v 20 16 bit Unsigned Reference line 1 20 u v Reference line 2 40 7 Reference line 3 60 m o Reference line 4 80 u Noi XY Plot can be drawn repeatedly up to 32 times 1 channel 32 times 2 channels gt 16 times The way t
219. ale 100 vi 100 pixels for 1610 type or 220 pixels for 2407 4004 type Scroll bar Width Small Middle Large The settings are described below Setting Description S Select the HMI model to use HMI model MT6070iH M T8070iH MT6100i MT81004 WT3010 800 x 480 E MTEOSGTMTSOSET 220 x 224 HMI station no T6D7OTAMTSOTOT 480 x 234 MT6104 T MTB080T MTB104T 640 x 480 Fort no T3010 800 x 480 If the HMI model is changed the Resize pop up windows objects dialog will pop up as shown below Select required adjustment and click OK In most cases please select all options 54 NG WEINTEK P WEINTEK System Parameter Settings Parameter Settings Resize pop up windows objects General windows Resize pop up windows Y Resize objects Keyboard windows Resize keyboard windows v Resize function key objects Set the station number of current HMI The default value is O Set the port number of current HMI It is also used in MODBUS TCP server The default value is 8000 Timer Clock source Set the source device of the clock time information It is used by Data Sampling Event Log etc a lf HMI RTC is selected the time information comes from the internal clock of the HMI If External device is selected the time information comes from an external device The address of the source device must set correctly As shown below the time information is from
220. ame device type address offset data count or GetData read_data device_name device_type address_offset 1 Description Receives data from the PLC Data is stored into read_datal start read data start data_count 1 data_count is the amount of received data In general read_data is an array but if data_count is 1 read_data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to read one word data from PLC macro_command main nn W WEINTEK Macro Reference short read data 1 2 read data 2 GetData read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 GetData read data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end macro command Device name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows see FATEK KB Series system Parameter Sethngs Ed Font Extended Memory FrinterBackup server Device Model General System Setting Security Device list Mame Location Device type Local HMI Local HMI MT60561 220 x Disable NA N A Local ser MODEUS ETU Local Free Protocol COM Re 0 Remote F FATEE FB seres Remote IF 210 60 117 2 FATEE FB seres COMI Rs Device type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device type is LW BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be i
221. ample to access the data in the 50 consecutive registers of FATEK FB Series PLC starting from register D 0 configure the settings as shown in the following figure Table Settings Description Device type 2 Mode Read Write Read only Write only 3 MODBUS address PLC name MODBUS Server Address 4x x 1 4 Mapped PLC address PLC name FATEK FB Series Address D x 0 5 Table size Word s 6 Conversion F AB gt BA ABCD gt CDAB Select the device type of the registers to be mapped in the example select Word Select the mode to access the data in the mapped register in the example set to Read Write a N Nx 3 Set the start address of MODBUS in the example set to 4x 1 4 Set the start address of the mapped PLC in the example set to D 0 5 Set the range size of address mapping in the example set to 50 6 If needed select high low byte swap AB gt BA or high low word swap ABCD gt CDAB MODBUS Address Access DO D49 4x 1 Mapped PLC Address Table Size Read Write seks EN Read Write PLC Name gt FATEK FB Series Table Description The above figure shows that MODBUS Server 4x 1 4x 50 registers are mapped to FATEK FB Series PLC D 0 D 49 registers 5 When finished the data of FATEK FB Series PLC D 0 D 49 registers are now accessible by using MODBUS TCP IP protocol to send read write
222. ange is not recognized and no action is performed Action Mode Choose the action to do at the given time Bit ON At the start time set the designated bit ON At the end time set the designated bit OFF Example Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Start time End time ON 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 Bit OFF At the start time set the designated bit OFF At the end time set the designated bit ON Example Start time 09 00 00 296 Ly WE NTEK Object End time 17 00 00 Start time End time OFF i 09 00 00 12 00 00 17 00 00 Word write The Write start value entered here is transferred to the designated Action address word register at the start time At end time the Write end value entered here is written to the Action address Example Device address LW100 Start time 09 00 00 End time 17 00 00 Write start value 10 Write end value 0 LW 100 LW 100 l EE 09 00 00 17 00 00 m Only if an End time is enabled and entered on the Time set tab will the Write end value box appear 297 og WE NTEK Time Set Constant Address Specify start time and end time Constant allows specifying a date or period and time Address allows controlling the time by a designated address When Constant is selected Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Address Setting on individual day start pp p OM e Son Mon Tue Wen Tho En
223. another 0x10 after it and the Number of sending bytes offset 3 remains the same but n n 1 Same thing applies to other 0x10 data The checksum Calculate XOR from all above 627 Ly WE NTEK Memory Map Communication 31 4 1 Communication Examples Example E If Master sets the data of MW 3 to 0x0a Master will build communication with Slave immediately due to the data changed so Slave will update its MW 3 to 0x0a the procedure is shown below Master sends STX 0x02h Slave receives STX 0x02h from Master and sends ACK 0x06h to Master Master receives ACK 0x06h from Slave Master sends 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x0a 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x19 as shown below a dl rn SEE 1 0x03 Address Low byte 2 0x00 Bit Address High byte 3 Joxo2 The number of bytes sent MW 3 two bytes 4 5 10x0a 0x00 Data in MW 3 is 0x0a and 0x00 0x19 The checksum 0x01 0x03 0x00 0x02 0x0a 0x00 0x10 0x03 0x19 5 Slave receives data from Master and then sends ACK 0x06h 6 Master receives ACK 0x06h from Slave When finish communicating Master sends the updated data in MW to Slave and Slave synchronizes its MW data with Master 628 Ly WE NTEK Memory Map Communication Example LI If the data includes 0x10 please notice the change in data format If set MW 10 of Slave to 0x10 Slave will build communication with Master immediately and Master will update its MW 10 to 0x10 the procedure is shown below Slave sends ST
224. are described below Setting Description Name The name of the device HMI PLC In this example the device used is a PLC so select PLC 45 WS WEINTEK L P WEINTEK Stem Parameter Settings Parameter Settings Select Local or Remote In this example the PLC is connected to the Local HMI so select Local PLC type Select the type of the PLC PLC I F The available PLC interface RS 232 RS 485 2W RS 485 4W Ethernet and USB If the interface used is RS 232 RS 485 2W or RS 485 4W configure communication parameters by clicking Device Properties Settings and then Com Port Settings dialog opens as shown below COM Port Settings COM co Timeout sec 0 Baud rate Turn around delay rms Parity J Parameter 1 Stop bits Parameter 2 ro 0 Data bits 7 Send ACK delay ms o D 0 0 Parameter 3 The number of resending commands o v Cancel Timeout If the communication has been disconnected for more than preset time limit configured in Timeout in sec Window No 5 will pop up and show PLC No Response message as shown below Turn around delay While sending the next command to PLC HMI will delay the sending according to the time interval set in Turn around delay This may influence the efficiency of the communication between HMI and PLC Default value is 0 Note If the PLC used is SIEMENS S7 200 Se
225. arge as required Set the width of Scroll Bar when the size of the object is too small to display the contents a scroll bar is displayed in the object 56 vg WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 3 General Configure the properties related to screen display System Parameter Settings x Font ExtendedMemory Printer Backup Server Device Model General System Setting Security Fast selection button Attribute Enable vi Position Left Hide button when HMI starts Screen saver Back light saver None v minute s Screen saver None v minute 3 Options Startup window no 10 WINDOW 010 v Common window Above base window v Object layout Nature v RW enabled Event Use L W9450 9455 as time tags of event logs Extra no of events 0 Keyboard 150 Keypad 1 Integer A Add ATAR i Kai beer I 53 Keypad 4 Integer Delete 54 Keypad 5 Integer Caretcolor i Selection color DI Project protection 1 series only Enable Project key 111111 range 0 4294967295 Tf this key is different from HMI key the project won t be executed normally Use L W9046 9047 to change HMI key LB9046 indicates check result key error when status is on 57 Lg WE NTEK System Parameter Settings The settings are described below Seting Deseription gt Fast Setting the attributes for fast selection button f
226. arget Description Return the position of the last occurrence of target string in the source string The two string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns the zero based index of the first character of substring in the source string that matches the target string Notice that the entire sequence of characters to find must be matched If there exists multiple substrings that matches the target string function will return the position of the last matched substring If there is no matched substring it returns 1 macro_command main char src1 20 abcdeabcde char target1 20 cd bool post pos1 StringReverseFind src1 0 target1 0 pos1 7 char target2 20 ce bool pos2 pos2 StringReverseFind abcdeabcde target2 0 pos2 1 char src3 20 abcdeabcde bool pos3 pos3 StringReverseFind src3 6 ab pos3 1 end macro command StringFindOneOf position StringFindOneOf source start target start position StringFindOneOf source target start position StringFindOneOf source start target position StringFindOneOf source target Description Return the position of the first character in the source string that matches any character contained in the target string The two string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source sta
227. as the smallest file index number For example if there are four event log files as follows EL 20101210 evt EL 20101230 evt EL 20110110 evt EL 20110111 evt nm Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference The file index are EL 20101210 evt gt index is 3 EL 20101230 evt gt index is 2 EL 20110110 evt gt index is 1 EL 20110111 evt gt index is 0 return value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 index can be constant or variable year month day and return value must be variable return value is optional macro command main short year 2010 month 12 day 10 index short success if there exists an event log file named EL 20101210 evt with index 2 the result after execution Success 1 index success FindEventLogindex year month day index end macro command 443 og WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 7 How to Create and Execute a Macro 18 7 1 How to Create a Macro Please follow the steps below to create a macro Step 1 Click on Macro Manager icon on the tool bar in EasyBuilder to open Macro Manager dialogue box as follows OK Macro under development C Password protect Decompilation cannot recover MACROs when checks Password protect In Macro Manager all macros compiled successfully are displayed in Macro list and all macros which is under development or cannot be compiled are displayed in Macro und
228. asyWatch NG File Edit Objects Help k 8 a ERN ie Lal Y B New Open a new EasyWatch file F Open Open an existing EasyWatch file KI Save Save EasyWatch file p Cut Cut to relocate the selected items to the clipboard E Copy Copy the selected items to the clipboard el Paste Paste the items in the clipboard at the selected location La Run Execute the selected object E Stop Stop executing the selected object 196 Delete Objects Delete the selected object ed Monitor Add a new Monitor object s Macro Add a new Macro object Cl HMI Manager Add modify or remove HMI settings 2 Help Topics Reference of how to operate the basic functions 670 EasyWatch LW WE NTEK 35 3 Monitor Settings 35 3 1 Add Monitor There are two ways to create a Monitor Object Select from the toolbar Objects Add Object Add Monitor 1 J Untitled EasyWatch Se Fi Objects Help Add Object p New N Cal HMI Manager 8000 Default HMI HMI LW 10 BS pl Add new address monitor CAP NUM SCRL 2 2 Select from the quick selection tools Add Monitor 671 p WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 3 2 Monitor Settings Monitor Settings Name New Monitor M Read only HMI Local Host 8000 p Open HMI Manager En cc dsionno LF Setting None Address Address LW v 10 Address Format DDDDD range 0 10799 Address Type 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD 16 bit HE
229. at MT8000 Data E File dtl v Comma Separate hi 266 Ly WE NTEK Object When back up event log in csv format users can open the csv file in EXCEL as shown on the right The Data column means 0 Event is triggered message 1 Event is acknowledged Emergency 2 Event returns to normal arrir En Range Word Word Start Choose either Today or Yesterday Within Select the range of time period For example Yesterday is selected at Start and 2 day s is selected here which means the files obtained yesterday and the day before yesterday will be backed up Select All to save all files in 90 days in the system Range start Within MOE I davis 5 dawisi T days 14 danish 31 dawisi Trigger Mode Trigger There are three ways to activate Backup function 1 Touch trigger Touch the object to activate backup operation Trigger Mode Touch trigger 2 External trigger bit Register a bit device to trigger the backup operation ON gt gt OFF Bit device change from ON to OFF to activate backup operation OFF gt gt ON Bit device changes from OFF to ON to activate backup operation ON lt gt OFF 267 L WE NTEK ep Bit device change state to activate backup operation 3 Trigger address When use External trigger assign a bit device as shown below Trigger Mode External trigger bit vi Condition OFF gt ON vi
230. ate of LB2 to the variable a GetDataEx a Local HMI LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetDataEx b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetDataEx c Local HMI LW 2 1 get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 GetDataEx d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW7 to the variable e note that he type of e is int GetDataEx e Local HMI LW 6 1 get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW19 to f 0 f 9 since each integer value occupies 2 words GetDataEx f 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetDataEx f Local HMI LW 2 1 ny Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference endmacrocommand Name SetData Syntax SetData send_data start device name device type address offset data count or SetData send data device name device type address offset 1 Descriptio Send data to the PLC Data is defined in send data starfj send data start n data count 1 data count is the amount of sent data In general send data is an array but if data count is 1 send data can be an array or an ordinary variable Below are two methods to send one word data macro command main short send_data_1 2 5 6 send data 2 5 SetData send data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 SetData send data 2 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 end mac
231. ate the connection states with PLC through COM1 LB9200 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 0 and LB9201 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 9200 so on ER 209 When ON indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLG Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC These local registers indicate the connection states with PLC through COM2 LB9500 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 0 and LB 9500 LB9501 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 9755 SO On When ON indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLC Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC These local registers indicate the connection states with PLC through COM3 LB9800 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 0 and LB 9800 LB9801 indicates the connection state with PLC station no 1 and LB 10055 So on When ON indicates connection state is normal When OFF indicates disconnection with PLC Set ON again the system will then try to connect with PLC 603 re WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication 28 3 How to Connect with MT500 Project of Slave HMI EasyBuilder Master Slave Protocol enables MT500 to exchange data with MT8000 local data via the connected PLC m EasyBuilder Settings 1 Select Master Slave Server driver and click Settings If a PL
232. ave to files in Inform EasyPrinter to convert the hardcopy result into a bitmap file and save it in the specified directory Users can find the bitmap files at Specified Path HMI Folder yymmdd_hhmm bmp For example when a hardcopy request is given at 17 35 00 12 Jan 2009 the bitmap file will be named 090112 1735 bmp And if there is another bitmap file generated in the same minute it will be named 090112 1735 01 bmp and so on 3 Backup M I 83500 Remote Printer Server Settings General Output Hardcopy Backup Files in When target file has existed Dvenurite it The content will be destroyed 8 Append BAK to the file name Convert Batch File Enable 591 Ly WE NTEK EasyPrinter e Output EasyPrinter stores the backup files to the specified path For Event Log files Specified Path HMI Folder eventlog EL_yyyymmdd evt For Data Sampling files Specified Path HMI Folder datalog Folder name of the Data Sampling yyyymmdd dtl For Recipe files Specified Path HMI Folder recipe recipe rcp or recipe a rcp e Convert Batch File Select Enable to convert the selected history file to csv or xls Excel format of Convert Batch Files m System registers LW9032 to LW9039 can be used to specify HMI name EasyPrinter names the folder using IP address if the HMI name is not set 592 L weinTeK EasyPrinter 26 4 Convert Batch File EasyPrinter pr
233. axis only The object is only allowed to move along the X axis The moving distance ranges from Min X to Max X A tribute Na of states Data format Object state Moving Distance on the X axis 16 bit format Address LW n Address 1 LW n 1 32 bit format Address LW n Address 2 LW n 2 b Y axis only The object is only allowed to move along the Y axis The moving distance ranges from Min A ttribute Mode No of states maven Max 600 Y to Max Y Data format Object state Moving Distance on the Y axis 16 bit format Address LW n Address 1 LW n 1 32 bit format Address LW n Address 2 LW n 2 c X amp Y axis The object is allowed to move along the X axis and Y axis The moving range in X and Y direction is defined by Min X Max X and Min Y Max Y respectively Athibute 188 L WE NTEK Object Data Object state Moving Distance on Moving distance on format the X axis the Y axis 16 bit Address Address 1 LW n 1 Address 2 LW n 2 format LW n 32 bit Address Address 2 LW n 2 Address 4 LW n 4 format LW n d X axis w scaling The object moves in X axis only with scaling Supposed that the value of the designated register is DATA the system uses the following formula to calculate the moving distance on the X axis X axis move distance DATA Input low Scaling high Scaling low Input high Input low
234. ay object displays real time active events or historical files as they are triggered acknowledged and cleared in multiple lines 12 13 06 12 13 06 12 13 06 12 13 06 12 13 06 217 3106 22 03 75 220313 22 03 12 22 02 57 22 02 56 22 02 56 22 02 58 Event 3 when LBTI ON Event f When LW f gt 10 Event 0 when LWO 100 Event 3 when LB11 ON Event 2 when LB10 ON Event 1 When LW 1 gt 10 07 27 40 14 32 56 94 32 57 44 92 59 Event 0 LWee2 UO Multi tert Configuration Click the Event Display icon on the toolbar to open a Event Display object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Event Display object will be created 255 pi WE NTEK Hew Event Display Object Mode fe General Event Display Shape Font Description Mode Realtime vi Acknowledge addr sea tnt PLC name Local AMI Address Ly 0 iL Control address PLC name Local HMI Address LW v 100 Enable event management vw Setting 16 bit Unsigned v Setting 16 bit Unsigned Object Select Real time to work with current events or Historical to view data from previous Alarm Event Log files a Real time Acknowledge address When in Real time mode and an event is acknowledged by touching an active display line the Acknowledge value selected for the associated event specified
235. ay is Declaration array name constant constant is the size of the array Usage array namejinteger character or constant Any format other than this format will cause a compile error C40 execution syntax should not exist before variable declaration or constant definition For example macro command main int a b fora 01o02 b 4 a inth k illegal definitions must occur before any statements or expressions for example b 4 a next a end macro command C41 float variables cannot be contained in shift calculation C42 function must return a value 471 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference C43 function should not return a value C44 float variables cannot be contained in calculation C45 PLC address error C46 array size overflow max 4k C47 macro command entry function is not only one C48 macro command entry function must be only one The only one main entrance of macro is macro command function_name_ end macro command C49 an extended addressee s station number must be between 0 and 255 For example SetData bits 0 PLC 1 LB 3004123 100 illegal 3004123 means the station number is 300 but the maximum is 255 C50 an invalid PLC name PLC name is not defined in the device list of system parameters C51 macro command do not control a remote device A macro can only control a local machine For example SetData bits 0 PLC 1 LB 300 123 100 PLC 1 is
236. b 20 switch 30 float pressure 15 The minimum array index is 0 and the maximum is array size 1 Example char data 100 array size is 100 In this case the minimum of array index is 0 and maximum of array index is 99 100 1 364 re WE NTEK Macro Reference Variable and Array Initialization There are two ways variables can be initialized 1 By statement using the assignment operator Example inta float b 3 a 10 b 0 1 2 During declaration chara 5 b 9 The declaration of arrays is a special case The entire array can be initialized during declaration by enclosing comma separated values inside curly brackets Example float data 4 11 22 33 44 now data 0 is 11 data 1 is 22 18 3 2 Operators Operators are used to designate how data is manipulated and calculated Operator Description Example Arithmetic Operators Description Example A B C Modulo division return A B 5 remainder 365 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference Comparison Description Operators Less than or equal to _ if A lt 10 then B 5 Greater than if A gt 10 then B 5 Greater than or equal ifA gt 10thenB 5 to Equal to if A 10 then B 5 Not equal to FA lt gt 10 then B 5 Logic Operators Description Example SSS Cand Logical AND A lt 10andB gt 5thenC 10 wor Logical Exclusive OR i Avor2561nenB 5 not Locical NOT not Athen B 5 Shift and bi
237. be disabled when selecting All in Device Range Set the range of address types to be displayed This function will be me a disabled when selecting lai in Address zane ami EE Polling Packages Polling Packages c x Fackage ID Device Station Index Address Length 41 Local HMI LB 00562 11 a i0 Local HMI LB 10057471 BY EIN SIEMENS S 300 Ethernet 1 M 00000 71 BY 3 SIEMENS S7300 Ethernet 1 10 0610 00000 73 BY fs SIEMENS S7 300 Ethernet 1 11 DB10 00003 73 TO Cs SIEMENS S 300 Ethernet 12 L610 00006 3 H 715 SIEMENS S7 300 Ethernet 1 DB10 00009 75 645 Ki WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser em lbeseptlen O Package ID Use the information of package ID to check the PID in activity area for finding the problem Displays HMI and PLC type Station Displays PLC station number Index Display objects used index register numbers Address Length Displays device type address Length how many words of the Package Object Screen IL Address 41 Local Hh l LB 00562 11 a OD Local Hh l LB 00574 1 67 32 SIEMENS S7 300 Ethernet 1 M 00000 1 Toggle 5 10 30 Mi 00000 Toggle 5 10 29 Mi 00000 Toggle 5 10 29 Mi 00000 Toggle 5 10 20 Mi 00000 Toggle 5 10 20 Mi 00000 Toggle 5 10 ff M 00000 Item Deseripton Object Package ID where this objectisplaced gt Screen Window in the project where this object is placed gt
238. bject Ia sa j aU 217 Lig WE NTEK Object Grid Set the distance and the color of grid Horiz The number of horizontal lines Verti interval a Pixel Distance between data samples Pixel Time Distance 60 pixelis When Pixel is selected in General tab Verti interval is used to select how many sampling point will be included between two vertical grid lines See the picture below Gril J Enable Color v Horiz 4 Ai divisionts Vert interval 4 point s b Time When Time is selected Verti interval is used to select the time range between two vertical grid lines See the picture below Grid Enable Color OO v Hors 4 divisonts Vert interval 4 second i Time acale Enable Format HH MM Font Aharoni Bold Color DIZE E According to these settings the system will calculate the number of vertical grid line automatically Time Scale Select Enable to enable the time scale on the bottom of trend display Format selects the time scale displayed Font Selects font style Size Selects font size Default font size 8 218 M WEINTEK Object id Cs a S O O HH MM HH MM HH MM HH MM HH MM HH MM HH MM Relative time mode If selected the system will start counting time from the first data sample The time displayed on the upper left corner of the object and the range of X axis starts from 00 00 00 00 00 0
239. ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeas 83 Chapter 8 Data Sampling ccccccccceccccceeeeceeeeeeseeeesseeeesseeeessaeeeseaeeeseaeeessaeeeseeeeseeeesseeesaaes 85 8 1 Data Sampling Management rrrnnnnennnnnonrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnsennnnnennnnsnnnnnsene 85 8 2 Create a New Data Sampling sensira nin Ra 86 Chapter 9 Object General Properties rrrrrrrnnrrrnnnnrnrnnnrrrnnnrnrnnnennannennannennannennansnnnnssnnnnssennnn 91 9 1 Selecting the PLG rrrranrrnnarnrrnnnnrnnnnrrnnnnenrnnnrnnansennnnnennansnnnnnsennansennnnennnnsennnnsennnnsen 91 9 1 1 Setting Read and Write Address rrrrnrrnnanerrnnenrnnernanenranenranenrnnrnnnrrnnnnennnsen 91 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture Library rrrrernnrernnnrvnnnernnnernnnrnnnnennnrernnnernnnennnnen 94 9 2 1 Settings of Shape Library ccecccsecceeccceeeccseeccenecceaecceeecesaeeceneeseneeseneess 95 9 2 2 Settings of Picture Library rrrnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnvrnnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnsennnsen 98 9 3 MATTE 100 Se VE UG OTN EE 104 9 5 Variables of Station Number rrrrannrnnnnnrnrannrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnvannrnnansnnnansennansnnnnnee 105 9 6 Broadcast Station Number rrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnenrnnnennnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnsennnnennnnner 106 Chapter 10 User Password and Object Security rrrararrarrnranannanenranennanennanennanennanennanennnn 107 10 1 User Password and Operable Object Classes rrrrarrnnarrnnannn
240. ce 1 amp Index 2001 Setting Description SOE record definition Record length Sets the data length of SOE The range is 10 to 128 bytes scan cycle Sets the frequency for the system polling the SOE data the unit is 100 milliseconds the range is 10 to 32767 Data byte offset from record start The SOE data format of each brand of PLC is different User should manually specify the format the start offset and end offset of each data field for the system to analyze data frame correctly The format is defined as the following Trigger device Designates the name of device type and its index number The range is 0 to 255 Type Designates the name of event type and its index number The range is 0 to 255 Year The date of the event The time of the event 687 Ly WE NTEK Sequence of Events The millisecond of the time of the event Name settings Designates the user name for login The range is 1 to 12 Record location No of queued The number of SOE occur will be written in this register For records example if set Address of first record to LW 0 data length 12 bytes 6 words when there are two SOE occur then LW 0 to LW 5 will be the first data while LW 6 to LW11 will be the second data and so on After the value is input it returns to zero in the system Address of first Sets the start address to read SOE data record Event Messages Sets the font f
241. ch and a Multi state Switch Create a Toggle Switch Object as shown below 1 Setthe PLC name of read address and write address to Memory Map 2 Set Address to MB O 3 Set Switch style to Toggle The picture and label of the object can be select Hew fTogele Switch Object Ed General security Shape Label b i O Read address PLO name Memory Map Ww Setting Invert signal Write address PLO name Memory Map wr Setting Write when button is released A ttribute 632 Lig WE NTEK Memory Map Communication Create a Multi state Object as shown below 1 2 3 set the PLC name of read address and write address to Memory Map Set Address to MW 1 Set Cyclical to Enable The picture and label of the object can be select New Multi State Switch Object Ed General Security Shape Label penn Read address PLO name Memory Map w Setting Write address PLO name Memory Map w Setting Write when button is released A ttribute Cyl Eble User defined mapping 633 Lr WE NTEK Memory Map Communication 31 5 3 Execute the Settings Compile and download the same project to HMI 1 and HMI 2 Fast Sel Press the button in one of the HMIs the status of another one will also be changed The way to connect a HMI with a controller is similar to the example above Please make sure that the data in add
242. cified string to the EasyDiagnoser Users can print out the current value of variables during run time of macro for debugging When TRACE encounters the first format specification if any it converts the value of the first argument after format and outputs it accordingly format refers to the format control of output string A format specification which consists of optional in and required fields in bold has the following form flags width precision type Each field of the format specification is described as below flags optional width optional A nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of characters printed precision optional A nonnegative decimal integer which specifies the precision and the number of characters to be printed type Corc specifies a single byte character d signed decimal integer signed decimal integer O unsigned octal integer u unsigned decimal integer Xorx unsigned hexadecimal integer Eore Signed value having the form 0 dadd e sign ddd where dis a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or f Signed value having the form dddd dddd where ddad is one or more decimal digits The length of output string is limited to 256 characters The extra BB US WE INTEK Macro Reference characters will be ignored The argument part is optional One fo
243. cipe Data with Ethernet or USB Cable 1 Open Project Manager and click Download 2 Select RW and RW_A and Browse the source file 3 After downloading restart HMI RW and RW A will be updated Download MTBOOOf8000 i Series vi d Project S t th fil H Ry CJEBSO0O0DVrecipelrecipe rcp Re s j e CJ EBSOO0Nrecipelrecipe a rcp source Data log Install X series media plaver drivers d Startup screen error CJEBSO0ODrecipelrecipe a rcp not found scan font finished reset HMI finished finished Connection 4 8 Ethernet O USB cable fi series only Hare HMI Name nicolas 8100 s 192 168 1 111 Default Hi il 192 168 1 112 tony 81503x 192 168 1 115 nicolas 8050 Automatically 192 168 1 115 nicolas 6100 reboot HMI after 192 168 1 15 toni downloading 192 168 1 20 921 OG 20091002 or later supports 1971491 709 ikewin MITA FOU Reboot HM after download v Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log When Reset recipe check box is selected the system will clear all the data in RW and RW A before downloading 351 L WE NTEK Transferring Recipe Data 17 2 Updating Recipe Data with SD Card or USB Disk 1 Open Project Manager and click Build Download Data for SD Card or USB Disk 2 Insert a SD card or USB disk into PC 3 Click Browse to designate the file path 4 Click Build EasyBuilder will save the data in SD card or USB disk Project
244. communication with PLC 600 og WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication 28 2 How to Create a Project of Slave HMI The project content of HMI 2 in System Parameter Settings Device aystem Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Frmter Backup Server Device Model eneral o systembeting mecurity Device list Mame Location Device type Interface Local HMI Local MT6070iH MTSOTO Disable FATEE FE Sernes COM 1 master slave FATEE FE serier LOM1 115200 E Due to the PLC that HMI 2 reads from is connected with HMI 1 thus HMI 2 views PLC asa remote device Therefore it is necessary to add a Remote PLC 1 into the device list and in this case is FATEK FB Series The way to create Remote PLC 1 is described below 1 Create a new device FATEK FB Series PLC default station no must be the same as the connected PLC PLC type FATEK FB Series V 1 70 FATEK_FB s0 PLC I F R5 232 v COM COMI PLC default station mo 1 Default station mo use station no variable 2 Correctly set the parameters COM 1 of HMI 2 actie Sa cae IE i connects with COM 3 of HMI 1 so they both V 1 70 FATEK FB 50 must have the same communication parameters and interfaces ignoring the PLC parameters As COM Port Settings below use RS232 parameters 115200 E 8 i PLC defa Baud rate 115200 v Defau Data bits Bat M Parity Ev
245. completed Compile the mtp file and download the compiled xob file to HMI then HMI data can be read or written using MODBUS protocol System Parameter Settings Printer Backup Server Font Extended Memory System Setting Security Model General Device Device list VF Protocol RIGA Interface Location Device type Local MTSO7DIHJIMTS070 Disable MODBUS Server 1 MODBUS Server p COM 1 9600 E 5 1 R5232 500 og WE NTEK Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 2 Access a MODBUS Server Two HMI can be configured as one MODBUS client and one MODBUS server to communicate and exchange data First add a new device in client s device list If the client uses Ethernet set PLC type to MODBUS TCP IP and fill in the correct IP address the IP of MODBUS Server Port no and Station no Device Properties Mame MODBUS TCP IP OHMI PLC Location cal PLC type MODBUS TCPIP IE Address Settings 192 168 IP address Port na 5 Timeout sec 1 Turn around delay nns Send ACK delay ms Parameter 1 Parameter 2 E Parameter 3 The number of resending commands 501 Ly WE NTEK Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server If the client uses RS 232 or RS 485 interface the PLC type must set to MODBUS RTU and configure the communication parameters correctly Device Properties
246. connected with the remote HMI so it can not work 472 re WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 12 Sample Macro Code 1 for statement and other expressions arithmetic bitwise shift logic and comparison macro_command main int a 10 b 10 b 0 400 400 lt lt 2 401 b 1 22 2 30 7 b 2 111 gt gt 2 b 3 403 gt 9 3 gt 9 3 lt 4 3 lt 8 8 8 b 4 not 8 1 and 2 1 or0 1 xor2 b 5 405 and 3 and not 0 b 6 8 amp 4 4 amp 4 814 8 4 b 7 6 4 b 8 Ox11 b 9 409 for i O to 4 step 1 if a 0 400 then GetData a 0 Device 1 4x 0 9 GetData b 0 Device 1 4x 11 10 end If next end macro command 2 while if and break statements macro_command main int b 10 i re while i 5 20 3 GetData b 1 Device 1 4x 11 1 if b 1 100 then break end if 473 re WE NTEK Macro Reference wend end macro command 3 Global variables and function call char g sub int fun int j int k int y SetData j Local HMI LB 14 1 GetData y Local HMI LB 15 1 g y return y end Sub macro command main int a b i a 2 b 3 fun a b SetData i Local HMI LB 16 1 end macro command 4 if statement macro command main int k 10 j for O to 10 KU next if k O 0 then SetData k 1 Device 1 4x 0 1 end if 474 re WE NTEK Macro Reference if k 0 0 then
247. cro command main bool a 401 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference bool b 30 short c short d 50 int e int f 10 double g 10 get the state of LB2 to the variable a GetData a Local HMI LB 2 1 get 30 states of LBO LB29 to the variables b 0 b 29 GetData b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 get one word from LW2 to the variable c GetData c Local HMI LW 2 1 get 50 words from LWO LW49 to the variables d 0 d 49 GetData d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 get 2 words from LW6 LW7 to the variable e note that the type of e is int GetData e Local HMI LW 6 1 get 20 words 10 integer values from LWO LW19 to variables f 0 f 9 since each integer value occupies 2 words GetData f 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 get 2 words from LW2 LW3 to the variable f GetData f Local HMI LW 2 1 end macro command Name GetDataEx GetDataEx read data starf device name device type address offset data count or 402 re WE NTEK Macro Reference PO GetDataEx read_data device_name device_type address_offset 1 Description Receives data from the PLC and continue executing next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of read_data device_name device_type address_offset and data_count are the same as GetData macro_command main bool a bool b 30 short c short d 50 inte int f 10 double g 10 get the st
248. ct Se l Lebe select HMI A in PLC name Do I O__ Write address to control the address of the ET NE ER adressa HMI B Write after button is released Attribute ny l m PC can control at most 64 HMIs simultaneously As shown above HMI can also control PC PC can be seen as another HMI that is adding a remote HMI in the project files of HMI A HMI B and the IP of the remote HMI is set to the IP of PC 512 Lb WE NTEK Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with Other HMI g ai x 9 m OR L Through Ethernet network PC or HMI can operate the PLC that is connected to another HMI as shown above a PLC is connected to COM 1of HMI B When using PC or HMI A to read PLC data the settings of PC or HMI A project is shown below a IAH OM mort Y IAH PLC Device 1 Set the IP address of HMI B i e 192 168 1 2 2 In PC or HMI A project Device Properties System Parameter vare Settings Device list OHM OPL Add a remote PLC and set Location IP 192 168 1 2 Port 8000 Name to PLC on HMI B PLC type Mitsubishi FEOSFXDMFE 1 sFE 1FX2 Set correct parameters V 1 20 MITSUBISHI_FXON so Since this PLC is connected S to remote HMI B set the IP COM COMI address to HMI B IP 192 168 1 2 PLC default station no p Default station no use station no variable
249. ct the HMI to be watched Please note that Project Port should be the same as Port No used in project file R Utility Manager E K HHI IP Password Type eMT 3000 SERIES EAEI ve J a Sonne i HMI Mame Deisult Hui w 192168 1 117 n colas 8104xh LJ Ethemet OSE cab 192 1681 116 nicolas 81000 Search 19821689 1 141 ek T3105 tory 192 168 1 132 ekdT3105 torv 192 168 1 135 Deiault HM 192 169 1 144 Deau HMI OS 20091002 of later supports 149164 9 184 Mad ai dk HAM EasyBulder F EaspAddressviener Build Download Data for SUSE Dek 4 Download the project to HMI and start the project If EasyDiagnoser is unable to get connection with the HMI to be watched it is possible that HMI power is not ON or Port No is incorrect This may cause EasyDiagnoser to connect then disconnect with HMI continuously Please check the Port No in EasyDiagnoser settings 5 When EasyDiagnoser succeeds in connecting with HMI simply execute macro 1 Output window will then display the output of the TRACE function KP Weintek MT Diagnostic Tool Numeric Display med LW O File View Options Help Output Function Key SJ ID 1 Ln 11 LWO 2 ID 1 Ln 11 LWO 3 ID 1 Ln 11 LW0 4 ID 1 Ln 11 LWO 5 ID 1 Ln 11 LWO amp Macro D 1 macro command main short GetData a Local HMI LW a a 1 SetData a Local HM
250. ction is performed the HMI will read the specified bit state If it is ON the scheduled start end action will be skipped Otherwise it will be performed normally Sound Enable the sound output function to play the chosen sound when action 305 Ly WE NTEK Object Restrictions 1 Up to 32 scheduler entries are allowed 2 A time schedule applies one action only when the start time is reached User set OFF Start time End time Action Set Bit ON Start time 08 00 00 End time 08 20 00 OFF 07 50 00 08 00 00 18 10 00 18 20 00 3 Write start end value and Prohibit bit is read only once before start action After that even to change the state or Prohibit bit or Write start end value the end action and the value written will not be affected Also to read data of Write start end value and Prohibit bit there is a delay of start action due to the communication 4 Each time RTC data is changed schedule list entries that possess both start and end times will be checked for in range or out range conditions For in range the start action will occur If the end action is not set the new range is not recognized the action will not occur 5 If several schedule objects are set to the same start time or end time the action is performed in ascending order of the schedule number 6 In Time Set Address mode the system will read Control word regularly The length of the period depends on the system 7 In
251. d Enable termination action Cancel Setting on individual day e Setting on individual day is selected Start and end times can be assigned to different days of the week 298 Object og WE NTEK Scheduler cum General Time Set Prohibit Constant Address Setting on individual day Start g a fo 0 HEMM SS ES Osm Mon OTe OWed OTmm OFn Sat End 17 0 10 HAMMSS Osm OMon Tve OWed OT OF O Sat Start action Termination action 09 00 17 00 l l Monday Tuesday Start and end time must be entered Start and end time must be on a different time or same time but different day Setting on individual day is not selected Start and end times entered must start and end within 24 hours 299 Object og WE NTEK Scheduler Object General Time Set Prohibit Constant Address Setting on individual day Start 9 Gp S Sun Mon Tue End Enable termination action 17 o Start action 09 00 cum 0 HEMMSS Wed Thu Fi O HEMM SS Sat Termination action 17 00 m Start and end time must be on a different time different day m If an end time is earlier than a start time the end action will occur early the next day Start date Monday Start time 22 00 End time 01 00 Monday 22 00 00 300 0
252. d address of barcode reader When finish setting a new device will be added to the Device list Now the barcode reader can be selected in PLC type when creating an object The address types gg vg Description type name FLAG 0 indicates the status of data reading When finish Bit FLAG reading data the status of FLAG 0 is changed from OFF to ON and will not return OFF automatically Word BARCODE BARCODE 0 Number of bytes currently read BARCODE 1 n Store the data read The following is a setting example the barcode is 9421007480830 BARCODE 0 is the address of Numeric Display Object BYTES and BARCODE 1 n is the address of ASCII Display object BARCODE Read byte limit Address BARCODE 0 BYTES bo o j Address BARCODE 1 n BARCODE Jlse a start code Terminator crjle OstyETX Oothr o O Mone 508 Ly WE NTEK How to Connect a Barcode Reader In the example the data stored in the barcode reader address Barcode Reader Address Data 13 bytes decimal The data saved in this address is 14 bytes 7 words If BARCODE 0 the number of bytes is odd the system will add a byte 0x00 to make it an even number m HMI can only connect with one USB barcode reader When the device list in the project includes this kind of device the system reserved address LB 9064 enable USB barcode device disable keyboard when ON will set ON To enable USB keyboard again and stop using U
253. d of the format specification is described as below ur re WE NTEK Macro Reference flags optional width optional A nonnegative decimal integer controlling the minimum number of characters printed precision optional A nonnegative decimal integer which specifies the precision and the number of characters to be printed Corc specifies a single byte character signed decimal integer signed decimal integer unsigned octal integer unsigned decimal integer unsigned hexadecimal integer Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where dis a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or Signed value having the form dddd dddd where ddad is one or more decimal digits The length of output string is limited to 256 characters The argument part is optional macro_command main char c1 a short s1 32767 float f1 1 234567 TRACE The results are output The results are TRACE c1 c s1 d f1 f c1 s1 f1 output c1 a 1 32767 f1 1 234567 end macro command 2 Use LB9059 to disable MACRO TRACE function when ON When set ON the output message of TRACE won t be sent to EasyDiagnoser 483 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference 3 Users can directly execute EasyDiagnoser exe from Utility Manager In Utility Manager current HMI on line will be listed users can simply sele
254. data block is located 233 Ly WE NTEK Object Device type Select the device type where the target data block is located Control word address Control word address is used to control and clear the drawn curve 0 No action default 1 Draw Without clear first 2 Clear 3 Redraw After executing the operation above the system will reset the control word to zero No of data address The default for No of data address is Control word address 1 No of data address stores the number of word devices in each data block i e the number of data The maximum value is 1024 Data storage start address If Offset to start address is not selected please select the start address which stores the data Offset value storage address lf Offset to start address is enabled the Offset value storage address will be set as Control word address 2 Format If you select 16 bit data format the address for each data will be start address start address 1 start address 2 and so on If you select 32 bit data format the address for each data will be start address start address 2 start address 4 and so on Limit Set the minimum and maximum limit for the curve 234 og WE NTEK Object The figure below show the settings in the Display Area tab Data Block Display Objects Properties General Display Area Shape Profile _ Data sample nm manples to scroll i Enab
255. device disable keyboard when ON Note3 LW 9006 16bit connected client no OR LW 9024 16bit memory link system register R Y R Y LW 9032 8 words folder name of backup history files to SD USB R W R Y R Y memory LW 9050 16bit current basewindowID R R R 16bit language mode Note4 R Y R Y 16bit driver ID of local PLC 1 OR f R PR 16bit driver ID of local PLC 2 OR R R 16bit driver ID of local PLC 3 OR R J R 16bit driver ID of local PLC 4 OR R J R LW 9900 16bit HMI run mode 0 normal mode 1 3 test mode COM R W R Y R Y 1 COM 3 550 System Reserved Words Bits Nor When LB 9049 watch dog function is enabled if there s a failure in communication for Series HMI system will reboot 10 seconds later LB 9059 Demo project disable MACRO TRACE function b nnioad Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project LB 9064 Demo project enable USB barcode device disable keyboard b Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project When users would like to have the object s text to show multi language except for using Label Library it needs to use the system reserved register LW 9134 language mode The value of LW 9134 can be set from 0 to 7 Different data of LW 9134 corresponds to different Languages The way of using LW 9134 will differ if the languages are not all chosen when compilin
256. dic step up flow to high v Low limit 0 High limit 10 Inc value 1 Time interval 0 5 second s vi m Periodical step down Step down to the Low limit by Dec value at a set rate in Time interval then reset immediately to the High limit The action repeats whenever the screen Is active As shown below the system will decrease the value in the designated register by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 0 and then reset to 10 and decrease again and the action repeats Attribute set Style Periodic step down high to low v Low limit 0 High limit 10 Dec value 1 Time interval 0 5 second s v m Set when window opens Automatic function occurs whenever the screen is active The value entered in Set value is set into the word address when the action occurs As shown below when the window opens the system enters 5 into the designated register Attribute set Style Set when window opens v set value 5 m Set when window closes Automatic function occurs whenever the screen Is inactive The value entered in Set value is set into the word address when the action occurs As shown below when the window closes the system enters 5 into the designated register tribute pet Style Set when window closes v pet value 5 143 Lig WE NTEK Object m Set when backlight on Automatic function occurs whenever the backlight is active The value entered in Set value is set into the word address when the action
257. e News because all major Linux distributions regularly pick up the HPLIP software and Features Licensing Information include it with their distribution installation However if it is not installed or you How To s Get Help need to upgrade to a newer HPLIP version to support your printer you ve come to the right place Hoe 2 SEI On this website you can download the HPLIP software which supports 2 134 HP Troubleshooting FAQ s Technical Docs Doamnioad printers on nearly any Linux distribution available today TER ee You can also find answers to many of your questions within our new knowledge 7 base or post a question on the Get Help page when you cant find the answer directly For more detailed overview of HPLIP see the About page or just browse the site and let us know what you think on the Get Help page Download HPLIP More Information The current version of the HPLIP solution is version 3 12 6 Release Notes 3 In A Lookup By Printer Type and Model Select the printer type to be checked ex HP Color LaserJet co1518ni Printer Step 1 Select Printer Type Color LaserJet Color LaserJet MFP Step 2 Select Printer Model HP Color LaserJet cp1518ni Printer When finished click Continue 564 Ki WE NTEK HMI Supported Printers lt I gt a http hplipopensource com hplip web suppo D BOX E HP Linux Imaging and Pri in hf 23 Home gt Supporte H
258. e EasyDiagnoser doesn t support Siemens S7 1200 Ethernet and Allen Bradley Ethernet IP CompactLogix ControlLogix Free Tag Names since both of the PLC use tag 651 Lg WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Chapter 34 Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names When using the driver of Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tags CompactLogix ControlLogix the User defined tag in RSLogix5000 can be exported to csv file and then import to EasyBuilder However the data types User Defined Predefined and Module Defined cannot be exported 7 TYPE SCOPE NAME 8 ITAG Local 1 C o R Local 1 I 10 TAG Local z2 C ll TAG Local 2 12 TAG Locali 13 TAG ArravdD l4 TAG Array Bool 15 TAG Array DIMT 16 TAG Array Real 17 TAG BOO 18 TAG boQ 1 IT AP k 1 DESCRIFT DATATYPE AB Embedded IG16F C 0 AB Embedded IQ1L6F 1 0 AB Embedded OEI6 C 0 AB Embedded OBI16 1 0 AB Embedded_OGB16 0 0 DINT 25 5 BOOL 256 DINT 130 REAL L2Z5 INT 15 INT 255 Tiit SPECIFIER ATTRIBUTES RADIX RADIX RADIX RADIX RADIX RADIX Do TAT Decimal Cons Decimal Cons Decimal Cons Float Constant Decimal FLC Decimal PLCI Therefore Structure Editor in EasyBuilder is for importing and editing User Defined Predefined and Module Defined tags 652 JS WEINTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 1 Import User Defined AB Tag CSV File to EasyBuilder Step 1 Create Tags in RSLogix5000
259. e sod mn i tans 4 sg eres ER S il 2007 8 5 ET I i 4 When importing a function which already res CD Drive D STEP 7 exists in the Library a confirmation popup SB FAE Queen E i File narne Text Documents ot will be shown The buttons are Encoding fansen ee OK Overwrite the existing function with the imported Ago tet one FEE short test1 short NO Cancel the importing of EasyBuilder Pro _ i the fu nction with the same i Duplicated function name ADD Overwrite with new one name EE me vestoal notoal Yes to all Overwrite using all the imported functions with the same name New Delete Edit Export Import Notto all Cancel the Function Name importing of all the functions reo et with the same name EP 5 The imported functions will be New Function Successfully Added saved in Default Function Library so if math mlb file is deleted test1 will still exist in the Library even restarting EasyBuilder New Delete Edit Export Import 458 Ki WE NTEK 18 8 3 5 Export a Function 1 Export the function from Function Library and save as mlb file 2 Click Export 3 Select the function to be exported and click Export 4 A math mib file can be found under export directory This file contains 4 functions ADD SU
260. e only the functions in Default Function Library will be loaded in to use functions in mlb files please import them first G e p C EBPro library Organize v New folder Fr Favorites o E Desktop d picture Downloads shape Recent Places E sound length 0926 mib Libraries 7 Documents mapi tic tm Pictures menull Tid Videos M Computer r Local Disk C UA CD Drive D STEP 7 450 Ki WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 2 How to Use Macro Function Library 1 Select the function directly from Jusdlungbunldlir Macro Function Library No Fonction Name 2 In WorkSpace click GET SET FN to open API dialog box Cem an oon wn aa lt Cick the right mouse button to display edit menu 3 Atleast check one from Library or Build in and select the function to be used Functon none HS ACOS 0 4 The description displayed in API dialog is the same as written in Function Editor 451 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 5 Select the function to be used fill in the corresponding variables according to the data type TE met T7 BAGEN nn 5 ere DE Hoe et mere Soom main Unsigned LEE mim 69121456 185 Uaioe thes AEL unaigred abort beslist Uigigned Lat add junsigned char vasigned short vasigned int Serata nua Local VEI L Bene an JU result source i sl Tien JAE
261. e a Numeric Input object in Data Entry Keyboard don t select Use a popup keypad check box Hew Numeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Mode Touch w Input order C Enable Keyboard Step 2 Use Function Keys to design the keyboard and place it on the screen Step 3 Press the Numeric Input object and enter a value with function keys directly 122 Ly WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage 12 4 Steps to Design a UNICODE Keyboard Create a UNICODE keyboard with Function Keys Step 1 Place an ASCII Input object on the window and select Use UNICODE check box Step 2 Create Function Keys a B y as shown and an Enter key A simple UNICODE keyboard is created New ASCII Input Object ASCILVUNICODE mode O Enter Backspace General Data Entry Security Shape Font U N C O D EG ASCII UNICODE x Description Mask Use UNICODE Reverse high low byte nl SD ome mae aede Enter Backspace Read address FK 4 PLC name Local HMI v setting _ i ASCI UNICODE P Address ASCIVUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Local HMI ASCII UNICODE gt LW ASCIIUNICODE mode 10 System tag DODDO range 0 10799 Enter Backspace index register ASCII UNICODE Address No of word 8 Tag Library 123 Ly WE NTEK Object Chapter 1
262. e in LW 0 is 10 the new window number will be window no 15 10 5 The range of the offset is 1024 to 1024 Attribute Type of control Change window vw _ Active only when designated window opened Turn on back light Use window no offset 5 ie Trigger address PLC name Setting Address LW w Io 16 bit Unsigned sl If LB 9017 is set ON the write back function will be disabled b Write data to PLC current base window Each time the base window is changed the new window number will be written into the Trigger address c General PLC Control Transfer word data blocks from PLC to HMI and vise versa and the transfer direction Is controlled by the value contained in the Trigger address Value in Aadress 4 Transfer data from Transfer data from PLC register gt HMI RW register Transfer data from PLC register gt HMI RW register gt HMI RW register Transfer data from PLG register gt HMI LW register Transfer data from HMI RW register gt PLC register Transfer data from HMI LW register gt PLC register Four consecutive word registers are used as discussed in the following table Trigger address Determine the direction of data transfer The valid values are listed in the above table When a new control code is written into the register HMI will start to transfer After data transfer is finished the value will be set to 0 283 Object Trigger address 1 Numbe
263. e is connected the interface should be Ethernet with correct IP and port number as follows PLC type Free Protocol k Y L D FREE PROTOCOL 50 PLC I F Ethernet Use UDP User Datagram Protocol IP 192 168 1 103 Port 502 Settings 461 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference Suppose that the HMI will read the data of 4x_1 and 4x_2 on the device First utilize OUTPORT to send out a read request to the device The format of OUTPORT is OUTPORT command start device name cmd count Since MODBUS RTU device is a MODBUS RTU device the read request must follow MODBUS RTU protocol The request uses Reading Holding Registers 0x03 command to read data The following picture displays the content of the command The items of the station number byte 0 and the last two bytes CRC are ignored Request 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Response N Quantity of Registers Error Error code Depending on the protocol the content of a read command as follows The total is 8 bytes command 0 station number BYTE 0 command 1 function code BYTE 1 command 2 high byte of starting address BYTE 2 command 3 low byte of starting address BYTE 3 command 4 high byte of quantity of registers BYTE 4 command 5 low byte of quantity of registers BYTE 5 command 6 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 6 command 7 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 SO a read request is designed as follows char c
264. e objects are shown as below Function Key object is used to execute macro 1 487 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference Oen Macro D 001 macro y Read address PLC name Local HMI hd Setting Address PLC name Local HMI Ww Device type Li a Address pp System tag User defined tag Address Format DODDO range 0 10799 Index register Read address PLO name Local HMI wt Setting Address PLC name Local HMI aut Device type Livy yt Address System tag User defined tag Address Format DDDDD range 0 10799 Index register Lastly use 3 Compile to compile the project and execute Off line simulation or On line simulation Follow the steps below to operate the executing project 488 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference Step 1 input string GO Test 1 Step 2 press GO button co Test 1 Step 3 output string co 2 Initialization of a string Create a new macro and edit the content Macro ID 0 Macro name rmudns 0 C Periodical execution E F m T 2 macro command maini K 4 char stri 20 abcde E char gErze 2O et a b rgt n d E 7 Setringtcer istri Local HAI LW O 201 5 StringSet stc2e 0 Local HAI LW 50 20 mi j Ci End Macro Contanrnd The data enclosed in double quotation mark is viewed as a string str1 is initialized as a string while str2 is initial
265. e reaches 4kb Or use system register LB 9034 to force storing data Save to SD card USB 1 USB 2 save Data Sampling to the specified external device Folder name Specify Data Sampling file name which must be all in ASCII characters The folder name will be written as Storage Location Folder Name yyyymmdd dtl The files are saved in the specified folder according to the date the file is generated History files Save to HMI memory _ Save to CF card Save to USB disk Folder name Test As shown in the following figure the files are saved in the Test folder according to date Sele File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back v gt 3 Ny Search 4 Folders HAR Address D datalogiTest a E920121211 dt File and Folder Tasks EA 20121212 dtl E920121213 dt OJ Make a new folder E920121214 dtl A Publish this folder to the Web kal Share this folder Other Places 89 Ly WE NTEK Data Sampling Preservation limit This determines how many days the data is to be preserved If Preservation limit is set to 2 days the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday will be kept Data that is not built in this period will be deleted to prevent the storage space from running out EX if today were July 1st data of June 30th and June 29th will be preserved and data of June 28th be deleted m When running simulation on PG all data sampling will be saved to the datalog folder in the storage location
266. e string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if result s type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on source and len can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable ASCII2ZDEC Syntax ASCII2DEC source start result len Description Transforms a string source into a decimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start source and len can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 short result source 0 source 1 source 2 7 source 3 ASCII2ZDEC source 0 result 4 result is 5678 BBE re WE NTEK Macro Reference end macro command Name ASCII2HEX ASCII2HEX source start result len Description Transforms a string Source into a hexadecimal value saved to a variable result The length of the string is len The first character of the string is source start source and en can be a constant or a variable resu t must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main char source 4 short result source 0 5 source 1 6 source 2 7 source 3 8 ASCII2HEX source 0 result 4 result is 0x5678 end macro command ASCII2FLOAT ASC
267. e the server in Syveten Parameter Printen Backup server settings save format Format eMT3000 SERIES Event Log File evt Range Start l Today O Yesterday Within All Trigger Mode Extemal tigger bit h Condition OFF gt 0N h Trigger me EE PLC name Local HMI 265 Lb WE NTEK Object Source RW RW A Historical event log Historical data sampling Select one from the above for the source There may be several data sampling objects registered in the project When backing up Historical data log use Data Sampling object index to select the right one to back up as shown below Hew Backup Object General Security Shane Label SONCE OEW ORW A Historical event log 8 Historical data log Data Sampling object inden file Backup position Backup Position select the destination where the source files will be copied to a SD card or USB Disk The external device connected to HMI b Remote printer backup server To select this users have to enable MT remote printer backup server at Menu Edit System Parameters Printer Backup Server Save format User can select the desired format to back up the file 1 HMI Event Log File evt HMI Data Log File dtl 2 Comma Separated Values csv gt Event Log saved as a csv file Save format Format MT8000 Event Log File evt v gt Data Log saved as a csv file Save format Form
268. e time mode is selected When the designated register is 16 bit the table below shows how the data of time stamp is stored in the register Address The low word of the nearest sampling time to the pe S e NE eine oO Address 1 The high word of the nearest sampling time to the td Address 2 The low word of the latest sampling time Address 3 The high word of the latest sampling time The following demonstrates the operation when Time stamp output is enabled LW 20 21 The 14 seconds displayed in the register represents the nearest sampling time to the touch point LW 22 23 The 27 seconds displayed in the register represents the latest sampling time 00027 11 2112 as 11 2 T i Time stamp 1 LW 20 21 4 ry Time stamp 1 LW 22 23 E 216 og WE NTEK The picture below shows the attribute of Trend Display Trend Display Objects Properties General Trend Channel Shape Profile Frame lbl Bar keround a sow scroll controls Frid Enable Color Horiz divisioni Verti interval second 3 Time scale Enable Format Font Color es mize Timne Date Relative time mode Time COHH MMSS HH MM ORNER O B8888 Leading ser Date GIMMDODYY ODDMMYY ODDMMYY OYYMMDD Color Frame The color of frame Background The color of background Show scroll controls To enable disable scroll control on the bottom of Trend Display o
269. e used in macro First of all add a new macro macro_1 in the project and in macro_ 1 add TRACE LW d a d indicates display current value of LW in decimal format The content of macro_1 is as follows macro_command main short a GetData a Local HMI LW 0 1 a a I SetData a Local HMI LW 0 1 TRACE LWO a a end macro command For the detailed usage of TRACE function please refer to the following paragraph 478 Lib WE NTEK Macro Reference Macro list IO OOO macro 0 Work Space Macro ID ooo Periodical execution or LAE AN Macro name macro 1 2i macro command main i 3 4 Short a 5 GetDatalia Local HMI LU 0 1 6 a a 1 ET Setbatala Local HMI LW 0 1 gi TRACE LWO qd ajl Macro under c 10 end macro command H Secondly add a Numeric Display object and a Function Key object in window no 10 of the project The settings of these objects are shown below Function Key object is used to execute macro 1 d 10 WINDOW 010 x Numeric Display Object s Properties i 7 l oo Execute macro Macro macro_1 ID 1 Lastly compile the project and execute Off line simulation or On line simulation 479 Lyd WE NTEK Macro Reference Objects Library Tools Window Help TE Sy Za Off line Simulation Ctrl T When processing simulation on PC right click a
270. e v User defined mapping setting Switch style There are JOG and JOG selections When the Offset is not 0 state displayed is no of state 1 Offset a JOG Increase the value of a designated register by 1 each time when pressing the button till the value equals to No of states A cyclic action can be enabled As shown below each time when pressing the button the state number will add 1 start from state 0 till state 4 no of statej 1 and returns to 0 and step up again Attribute Switch style JOG v No of states 5 Cyclical Enable User defined mapping b JOG Decrease the value of the designated register by 1 each time when pressing the button till the value equals to 0 A cyclic action can be enabled As shown below each time when pressing the button the state number will minus 1 start from state 4 no of state 1 till state 0 and returns to state 4 and step down again Attribute Switch style JOG vw No of states 5 Cyclical Enable User defined mapping 158 gt WEINTEK Object User defined mapping The value placed in the write register of each selection can be set also the action taken when an illegal value is entered or notify a designated bit address Remain current state If an illegal value is entered Multi state Switch will remain at the current state Jump to error state If an illegal value is entered Multi state Switch wi
271. e will be added to the library The below shows the shape number 0 in this library has only 1 state and is defined as a frame D Untitled States I Frame Step 3 Do the step 2 again this time the shape is set to state 1 Save to Shape Library Shape library TEST Description Untitled Shape no 0 Frame C Inner Width 77 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined 330 Ly WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library A complete Shape with two states is created as shown below Shape Library mH State O State 11 Stes 0 z BE TESE EENE 331 Ly WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library 14 2 Creating Picture Library Click Call up Picture Library button in the toolbar and the Picture Library dialog appears SD Call up Picture Library Picture Library Library State fr t1 buttont 64 2 button2 64 3 button3 64 4 button4 64 O Red 1 Green 2 Yellow 3 Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 12342 bytes 12342 bytes 12342 bytes 12342 bytes BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 State 0 State 11 4 Lamp Red 5 Lamp Green 6 Lamp Yellow 7 Lamp Blue States 2 States 2 States 2 States 2 12342 bytes 12342 bytes 12342 bytes 12342 bytes BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 BMP 64x64 Background Setting peser S Library Picture Libraries which have been added into the current project Select a libra
272. econds macro_command main Beep end macro command 410 Macro Reference 18 6 6 String Operation Functions Name StringGet StringGet read_data start device name device type address offset data count Description Receives data from the PLC The String data is stored into read_data start read data start data count 1 read data must be a one dimensional char array Data count is the number of received characters it can be either a constant or a variable Device name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters as follows see FATEK KB Series aystem Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Frmter Backup Server Device Model General pystemn pettine DECUIT Device list Device type MT60561 320 x Disable NA Nth Name Location Local HMI Local HMI Local Local Ser MODBUS KTU Remote P F ITEE FE se FE seres Local Free Frotocol COMI Rs 0 Remote IP 10 68 1172 FATEE FB series OMI RS Device_type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device_type is LW_BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored If device type is LW_BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD Address offset is the address offset in the PLC For
273. ect Use Local HMI check box to use the project simulated on PC to be the monitor device HMI Settings V Use Local HMI HMI Port No 8000 vi ml 673 Lb WE NTEK r Select PLC Select a target PLC If HMI is selected directly control the local HMI Monitor Settings Name New Monitor H Read Only Open HMI Manager Station No 0 None Kernel sistemi DMX Series KEYENCE KV 10 16 24 40 80 Visual KY Series KEYENCE KV 5000 Ethernet KEYENCE KV 700 1000 3000 5000 Series Ls Korenix 6550 KOYO CLICK KOYO DIRECT JKOYO Ethernet Lenze Ling an BMS Loxin Loxin Unsigned LS GLOFA Cnet Signed v L5 GLOFA FEnet Ethernet L5 GLOFA GM3467 LOADER LS MASTER K Cnet LS MASTER K CPU Direct LS MASTER K MODBUS RTU LS MASTER K1051 LS Mecapion Metronix AnyPack 5 GB Cnet LS XGB FEnet Ethernet LS XGI Cnet LS XGI CPU DIRECT Cancel Help ro Please select I F Setting to COM Port or Ethernet of the PLC Monitor Settings Name New Monitor Read Only HMI NM Open HMI Manager x Station No o COM Port COM 1 Address Address x Address Format DDDD range 0 9999 674 EasyWatch Lib WE NTEK EasyWatch Select COM Port Click I F Setting to select a COM port Monitor Settings HME
274. ect will be created 156 pi WE NTEK Object Hew Multi State Switch Object General Security Shape Label Mode a Moe Read Write use different addresses Read address PLC name Local HMI v Setting Write when button is released A ttribute crid Diablo O User defined mapping mend notificaton after writing successfully Enable Set ON 8 Set OFF PLC name eee HMI w Setting Mode Offset Offers Value and LSB display mode Please refer to the Word Lamp Object section of this chapter for more information Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the word device that controls the Multi state Switch object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 157 Lig WE NTEK Object Write address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the word device that controls the Multi state Switch object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object The address can be same or different from Read address Write after button is released If this function is selected the action is delayed till button is released otherwise the action is executed once the button is pressed Attribute Select the object s operation mode Attribute Switch style JOG v No of states 2 v Cyclical Disabl
275. ed Set ON LB 9029 will force system to save recipe data once Set ON LB 9028 Reset all recipe data set ON system will clear all recipe data 353 re WE NTEK Macro Reference Chapter 18 Macro Reference Macros provide the additional functionality your application may need Macros are automated sequences of commands that are executed at run time Macros allow you to perform tasks such as complex scaling operations string handling and user interactions with your projects This chapter describes syntax usage and programming methods of macro commands 18 1 Instructions to use the Macro Editor 1 Macro editor provides the following functions a Display line number b Undo Redo c Cut Copy Paste d Select All e Toggle Bookmark Previous Bookmark Next Bookmark Clear All Bookmarks f Toggle All Outlining g Security gt Use execution condition h Periodical execution i Execute one time when HMI starts The instructions below show you how to use these functions 354 Lv WE NTEK Macro Reference 2 Open the macro editor you ll see the line numbers displayed on the left hand side of the edit area J J EE saa O80 AE Macro list ID 2 10000 ID 3 5000 WorkSpace Macro command maini end macro command edit area 4 me Click the right mouse button to display edit menu 3 Right click on the edit area to open the pop up menu as shown below
276. ed in the device table and the device must be a Free Protocol type device data_count is the amount of sent data and can be a constant or a variable To use an OUTPORT function a Free Protocol device must be created first as follows System Parameter Settings Eg Font x m Extended Memory Printen Backup Server Device Model Generel System Setting Security Device list Mo Mame Location Device type Interface VF Proto Local HMI Local HMI Local MTADSG 320 x Disable Nia A Local Server MODBUS RTU Device I 1 acal Free Protocol COM 1 19200 E 8 1 RS232 Device Properties Name MODBUS RTU Device OHMI PLC Location ocal w PLC type Free Protocol gt VL LODO FREE PROTOCOL so PLE I F p5 232 r COM COMI 19200 E 8 1 Settings The device is named MODBUS RTU Device The port attribute depends on the setting of this device the current setting is 19200 E 8 1 Below is an example of executing an action of writing single coil SET ON to a MODBUS device macro command main char command 32 short address checksum 396 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference FILL command 0 0 32 command initialization command 0 Ox1 station no command 1 0x5 function code Write Single Coil address 0 HIBYTE address command 2
277. ed picture is marked by a red frame Picture Library Library 1 huttoni button buttona buttond4 button typelli button typel2 button typel3 button typeld O PB Red States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x 1001 State O State 11 4 Lamp Red States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x1001 Import Picture Modify Picture More picture libraries O PB Red States 2 L PB Green States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x1001 S Lamp Green States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x1001 30054 bytes BMP 100x100 2 PB Yellow States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x1001 BiLamp Yellow States 2 30354 bytes BMP 100x1011 3 PB Blue States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x1001 F Lanp Blue States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x1001 Background Delete All States Delete Cur State Insert Before Insert After Lig WE NTEK Object General Properties The illustration above provides information of one of the Pictures in the Picture Library as follows 0 PB Red The number and the name of the Picture States 2 The number of the states of the Picture 30054 bytes The size of the Picture BMP The format and resolution of the Picture bmp means bitmap picture The 100x100 iformat can also be jpg png dpd or gif Picture length 100 pixels and height 100 pixels Please refer to Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library for more details When finished click OK and preview the design of the pictu
278. edded O816 0 0 AB Embedded O816 1 0 QB Embedded OB16 0 0 New Data Type Omember In New Data Type Name enter the Module Defined name 665 Ly WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Step 3 Click Paste in dialog box press Ctrl V to paste Name and Data Type fo RSLogix 5000 L32E 1769 L32E 18 11 Data Type AB 1769 DIIG I O EH File Edit View Search Logic Communucatons Tools Window Help asa AKG VE Select Offline J E RUN o W E L No Forces F a fp 4 d No Edits a Fo Ungrouped Axes Add On Instoctions SS Data Types Og User Defined Ht Strings G Add Cn Defined Lk Predefined 48 Module Defined AB 1769 DIL6 I0 ABi 1769 DIS2 I0 AB 1769 _DO16 0 0 AB 1769 DOL6 LO AB 1769 DO16 0 0 AB 1769 DO3Z CO AB 1769 DO32 I 0 AB 1769 DO32 00 AB 1769 IF16 C0 AB 1769 IF16 I O AB 1769 IF16 0 0 Trends 2 44 10 Configuration Backplane CompactLogix svsten Al 1759 L32E L32E Description Members Data Type Size 8 b E Mame Data Type Style Description Binary Binary structure Editor B Data Types User Defined Name AB 1769_D116 1 0 Strings Predefined Description Module Defined AB 1769 DILS IO AB 1769_DI32 1 0 AB 1769 DO16 0 0 AB 1769 DO32 0 0 Description 2B 1769 IF16 1 0 AB Embedded IO16F C 0 AB Embedded IQ16F I 0 AB Embedded O816 0 0 AB Embedded O816 1 0 AB Embedded OB16 0 0 4 h l ter 11
279. eeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeessaeeeeeseeeeesnaeeeeenes 635 NTP Pee eN 635 32 2 Backup History Data and Update Recipe Data rrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnrrennvrennnrennnr 637 Chapter 33 ES DAGS nwiiniseasininsinrnmvs an NNER 639 33 1 Overview and Configuration ccccccccccsseeceeceeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeseegeeeseaeeeeeseeneees 639 33 2 EasyDiagnoser Settings rrarrrrrnrrrnnnnnrrnnnrrrnnnrnrnnnrnrnnnrnrnnnennansennansennassennnssnnnnsee 642 ETT ON 649 NN 650 33 5 Window Adjustment rrrannvnnnnnnnnnnnennnnrennnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnrennnnnennnnrennnneennnnee 651 Chapter 34 Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names rrarunnannnnannnnannnnanennanennanennanennanennanennnn 652 34 1 Import User Defined AB Tag CSV File to EasyBuilder rrrrrnnnrrnnnnrnonrnnnnennnnnrr 653 34 2 Adding a New Data Type rrrnrnvnnnnnvnnnrrennnnrnnnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnssennnsnnnnnnee 655 EG ELSE SNE SEVEN SE SNE 658 JMN 660 TSI PN 664 El Je EE EE 668 35 1 Overview ee 668 Br PFU 669 292 me IS FONCION NR NN 669 GS QUICK eC CHOM TOO gt screen ce veces cessed sasey E 670 35 3 Monitor S ttinS ccccccccccsececceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeecesseeeesseueeseeeeeseeeeeseeeeseneeeseneeeseeees 671 TANN 671 BT NN 672 BH JNINNE I v 673 35 4 Macro Settings rrrronrrrnnnnrrrnnnenrannrrrnnnenrnnrennnnsennansennansrnnunsnnnusennnnnennnnsennnnsennnnee 678 SO al AT NE 678 95 42 Macro SANG ae 679 35 4 3
280. eeps on executing next statement until the end command is reached end Select Indicates the end of the select case statements 18 4 5 Iterative Statements Iterative statements control loops and repetitive tasks depending on condition There are two types of iterative statements 18 4 5 1 for next Statements The for next statement runs for a fixed number of iterations A variable is used as a counter to track the progress and test for ending conditions Use this for fixed execution counts The syntax is as follows for Counter lt StartValue gt to lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter for Counter lt StartValue gt down lt EndValue gt step lt StepValue gt Statements next Counter Example for a 0 to 10 step 2 b a next a 372 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference syntax description for gt Must be used to begin the statement Counter Required This is the controlling statement The result of evaluating the variable is used as a test of comparison lt StartValue gt Required The initial value of Counter to down Required This determines if the lt step gt increments or decrements the lt Counter gt to increments lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt down decrements lt Counter gt by lt StepValue gt lt EndValue gt Required The test point If the lt Counter gt is greater than this value the macro exits the loop step Optional Specifies
281. elected AR the specified Bit address is used Ede eee i bl deabieihe obec C Graved label when disabled erent Ude ee pee Enable when Bit is ON Enable when Bit is OFF As shown if LB 0 is ON the a ncn Hide when disabled When the specified Bit is OFF hide the object Grayed label when disabled When the specified Bit is OFF the f tose label font of the object turns gray User restriction Say so Obie Set the security class of the Pet TN are Ne object to be operated by an Flin ie a authorized user Make invisible while protected Object class None means any user can operate this object Disable protection permanently after initial activation Once the permitted class of the user matches that of the object the system will stop checking the security class permanently that means any user can operate this object freely after it is unlocked Display warning message if access denied When an unauthorized user attempts to operate the object a warning dialog Window no 7 appears The content of the message in the dialog can be modified Make invisible while protected When the user s privilege does not match the object class hide the object 108 Ly WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 10 3 Example of Object Security Settings The following shows an example of setting object security class 1 Create a project go to System Parameter Settings Security General to enable 3 users U
282. en pb T buktond ol T better oi F dni pd LY TB frame pd Ed MT8000 Demo 320x234 Opb fl MTS000 Demo 640480 Opb x EE MT8000 Demo 800x600 0 plb F pvel b a File name ar om p Files of type shape i f pb sb New Lib Add a new Shape Library Rew Library Library name Test Unattach Lib Delete a Shape Library in the project Warning Shape 0 Untitled This shape is used in Miindow 55 J Window 55 Window 55 J Window 55 J Window 55 J Window 55 J Window 55 J Window 55 J Window 55 l Sjo 4 a 6 T 5 a 10 Do you really want to unattach this library Delete All States Delete all the states of the selected Shape Delete Cur State Delete the current state of the selected Shape Rename the selected Shape 327 Ly WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library Place the shape in the window 4 10 WINDOW 010 x t A eL o Pa 2 ea oET HA if Shape Library L ner OOOOH ESE oyrem Fa panpan Syan Lap aa nattech Leb l Shasel 4 Shane 3 La pee Delete AD Suites Suns 2 2 Stakes 2 pe 2 Inner Holl la The following shows how to create a new Shape Library and add a Shape with two states into the library Step 1 Click New Lib and enter the name of the new Shape Library Hew Library Library name TEST A new Shape Library TEST will be added At this moment no Shape is in this library Library SE o waaa eee button bu
283. en failed LB 12034 COM 5 status OFF normal ON open failed R R R R R OR COM 6 status OFF normal ON open failed RI R R R R R R R OR R AR RO LB 12036 COM 7 status OFF normal ON open failed LB 12037 COM 8 status OFF normal ON open failed LB 12038 COM 9 status OFF normal ON open failed 1 LB 9200 to LB 9455 station number 0 to 255 COM 1 are registers relevant to the communication status of COM 1 2 LB 9500 to LB 9755 station number 0 to 255 COM 2 are registers relevant to the communication status of COM 2 3 LB 9800 to LB 10055 station number 0 to 255 COM 3 are registers relevant to the communication status of COM 3 4 The ON state of COM is for checking if COM is occupied by other program during simulation on PC 536 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 17 Communication Status with PLC Ethernet Read R Write W Control Y o _ av GM EE 189485 auto comecton for PLC ete when ON AW av ny AN A Ae LB 9156 auto connection for PLC 7 ethernet when ON RW RY RY LB 9157 auto connection for PLC 8 ethernet when ON RW RY RY LB 9158 auto connection for PLC 9 ethernet when ON RW RY RY LB 10070 forced to reconnect PLC 4 ethernet when IP or system R W R Y R Y parameters changed on line set ON Note2 LB 10071 forced to reconnect PLC 5 ethernet when IP or system R
284. en first time download data to X series HMI using EasyBuilder8000 Startup screen Download a bmp bitmap file to HMI After HMI is rebooted this bmp file will be shown before project starts Reboot HMI after download Automatically reboot after download Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log Erase the selected files in HMI before download 23 Project Manager 2 3 2 Upload Upload files from HMI to PC via Ethernet or USB cable Click Browse and assign the file path before uploading Upload enw Rw A Extend Memory EM PLEASE INPUT EM FOLDER NAME Eh file location CO CF SD card GC USB I O USB 2 Connection Ethernet O USE cable fi series only Hh name Default HMI w 192 166 1 102 Default Hh Search all OS 20091002 or later supports For Project RW RW A or Data log please refer to 2 3 1 Event log Upload the evt file in HMI to PC Extended Memory EM Upload the emi file saved in CF SD card or USB disk to PC Nor m The file will be uploaded to PC in xob format Please decompile it into editable mtp file first and open the mtp file in EasyBuilder 24 WE NTEK Project Manager 2 4 Simulation 2 4 1 Off line Simulation On line Simulation Off line simulation Simulate project operation on PC without any connection OK without HMI amp PLC and save more time Simulate operations without connecting PLC On line simulation Si
285. en o o Stop bits FE 3 Since HMI 2 views PLC a remote device here we change Location to Remote and select COM port to connect remote HMI HMI 1 601 Lr WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Location PLC type FA TEE FB Series V 1 70 FATEK_FB so PLC LE 2523 BREDE AT COM COMI Device list Interface Disable Location Device type Local COM I master slave mode FA TEE FB series Local HMI Local HMI Remote FLE 1 FA TEK FE eres COM I 115200 8 4 Upon completion of the settings users can find a new device named Remote PLC 1 in the Device List This device has a symbol which means even if it contains Remote in the name it actually gives commands and gets replies through a local COM port and therefore the connection with PLC can be viewed form a local system reserved register that is Remote PLC 1 Remote PLC 2 Remote PLC 3 and Local PLC 1 Local PLC 2 Local PLC 3 use the same system reserved register from the listed below 602 N WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication LB 9150 When ON auto connection with PLC COM 1 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLC LB 9151 When ON auto connection with PLC COM 2 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLG LB 9152 When ON auto connection with PLC COM 3 when disconnected When OFF ignore disconnection with PLG These local registers indic
286. eneral Keyboard Add to add window no 200 Up to 32 keyboards can be added Add a keyboard window Window no 200 Keyboard Cancel Step 5 After the keyboard window is added when creating Numerical Inout and ASCII Input objects 200 Keyboard can be found in Data Entry Keyboard Window no The Popup position is for designating the display position of the keyboard on the screen The system divides the screen into 9 areas 118 Lb WE NTEK Keyboard Design and Usage Keyboard Use a popup keypad Hide title bar Restart the keypad if input value is out of range Window no EGEN Popup position oO O O relative to HMI screen O O O 00 Hint If the keyboard is an USB keyboard on indirectidirect window or on the same window please don t check Use a popup keypad Step 6 Select 200 Keyboard When users press Numerical Input or ASCII Input objects on the screen window no 200 will pop up Users can press the keys on the keyboard to enter data 119 Keyboard Design and Usage og WE NTEK 12 2 Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct Window Step 1 Create a Direct Window object and set a read address to activate it In General Attribute select No title bar and the correct Window No Hew Direct Window Object General Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting A tribute Style No title bar vi Window No 200 Keyboa
287. er Memory Map and then select PLC set the Location to Local 3 Set PLC type to Memory Map and set PLC I F to RS 232 Device Properties Mame Memory Map OHMI PLC Location Local kd PLC type Merion Map 1 10 MEMORY MAP s0 PLC IF ips COM1 115200 E 8 1 4 Settings i PLC default station no Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command Interval of block pack words Max read command size words Max write command size words 630 Yeas i i LW we NTEK Memory Map Communication Click Settings and the setting is shown below A mod W COM COM 1 Baud rate 115200 Data bits 8 Bits Parity Even Stop bit 1 Bit COM Fort Settings COM Timeout sect Baud r te Turn around delay ims Data bits i Send ACK delay msi Parity Parameter 1 Stop bits Parameter 2 Parameter 3 The number of resending commands oc After setting the COM port click OK Click OK to finish setting Memory Map in MT500 is divided into Memory Map Master and MemoryMap Slave please refer to the relevant manual For eMT3000 and MT8000 Series select Memory Map in the PLC type setting Data bit must set to 8 bits All the settings of the two HMIs must set to the same 631 L WE NTEK Memory Map Communication 31 5 2 Object Settings Add two objects in window no 10 a Toggle Swit
288. er development The following is a description of the various buttons 444 re WE NTEK Macro Reference New Opens a blank WorkSpace editor for creating a new macro Delete Deletes the selected macro Edit Opens the WorkSpace editor and loads the selected macro Copy Copies the selected macro into the clipboard Paste Pastes the macro in the clipboard into the list and creates a new name for the macro OK Confrim all the edited Macros and click this button to save the new contents before leaving this dialog Cancel Cancel the editing and leave Macro editing dialog Library Open Macro Funtion Library managing dialog Step 2 Press the New button to create a empty macro and open the macro editor Every macro has a unique number defined at Macro ID and must have a macro name otherwise an error will appear while compiling 445 pi WE NTEK Macro Reference Work Space Security Macro ID 0 Macro name macro 0 Use execution condition Periodical execution Execute one time when HMI starts macro command main f 1 2 3 4 5 end macr oc ommand lt Click the right mouse button to display edit menu Step 3 Design your macro To use built in functions like SetData or Getdata press Get Set FN button to open API dialog and select the function and set essential parameters Build in Library Function name GetData Get
289. ere It skips immediately to the end of the main block 374 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 5 Function Blocks Function blocks are useful for reducing repetitive codes It must be defined before use and supports any variable and statement type A function block could be called by putting its name followed by parameters in parenthesis After the function block is executed it returns the value to the caller function where it is used as an assignment value or as a condition A return type is not required in function definition which means that a function block does not have to return a value The parameters can also be ignored in function definition while the function has no need to take any parameters from the caller The syntax is as follows Function definition with return type sub type lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements return value end sub Example sub int Add int x int y int result result x y return result end sub macro_command main int a 10 b 20 sum sum Add a b end macro command Or sub int Add int result x 10 y 20 result x y return result end sub macro_command main int sum sum Add 375 re WE NTEK Macro Reference end macro command Function definition without return type sub lt name gt parameters Local variable declarations Statements end sub Example sub Add int x int y int result result x y end sub
290. esents wide voltage 5 9V This is the same as the A6 16 impact printer m BRIGHTEK WH E19 Serial printers please configure the same communication parameters as the printer m BRIGHTEK WH E22 Supported models E22R10 00E725 Same as A7 16 impact printer A7 represents A72R90 31E72A E221R90 00E11740GA Serial printer connects through RS 485 port please use a RS232 to RS485 converter Lv WE NTEK HMI Supported Printers m BRIGHTEK WH C1 C2 Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer The paper cutting mode can be selected No cut Half cut Full cut Remote Printer Server n a Use EasyPrinter to start printing by the printers connected with PC via Ethernet This works under MS Windows so the most printers on market are supported 563 We WEINTEK HMI Supported Printers 23 2 How to check the Supported HP Printer Types 1 Visit the website http hplipopensource com hplip web index htmi 2 Click Install and Setup Supported Printers JO a http hplipopensource com hplip web index d HP Linux Imaging and Pri Ak Home HP Linux Imaging and Printing Print Scan and Fax Drivers for Linux Welcome to the home of Hewlett Packard s Linux Imaging and Printing software Browse Knowledge Base About ER Search Knowledge i screenshots Chances are your Linux system already has the HPLIP software installed That s Bas
291. ess Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the Bit Lamp object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 126 Object Address PLO name Local HMI Device type Address Format DDDDD range 0 11999 Index register Invert signal Reverses the display of ON OFF states For example if Invert signal check box is selected when the designated bit is OFF the object displays ON state Blinking The appearance of the object may alternate between states when the bit is ON or OFF a None No blinking b Alternating image on state 0 The appearance of the object alternates between State 0 and 1 when the bit is OFF c Alternating image on state 1 The appearance of the object alternates between State 0 and 1 when the bit is ON d Blinking on state 0 The State 0 appearance of the object will blink when the bit is OFF e Blinking on state 1 The State 1 appearance of the object will blink when the bit is ON 127 pi WE NTEK Object 13 2 Word Lamp Overview Word Lamp object displays the state according to the value of a designated word register Up to 256 states are available When the value of the register is 0 State 0 appearance of the object is displayed and value 1 displays State 1 and so on Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp LWO Numeric Display LWO Word Lamp EWO
292. ess Format DDD range 0 255 Index register Tag Library Cancel Windows X 1 Create a tag in Address Tag Library Object list vi 2 Create an object select General PLC 3 Fast selection dr Common Window E name 5 PLC Response p 3 Click Setting the setting dialog pops up 6 HMI Connection a gt Powod Reset 4 Select User defined tag check box ERE eee 5 In Device type select the defined tag AO WINDOW UIL 6 When finished the window tree will show EL 0 pump T20 Bottom Layer l li the address tag name used by the object 349 p WE NTEK Transferring Recipe Data Chapter 17 Transferring Recipe Data Recipe Data refers to the data stored in RW and RW_A addresses The way of reading and writing these addresses is the same as operating a word register The difference is that recipe data is stored in HMI when restarting HMI the latest data records in RW and RW_A are kept The size of recipe data a RW address can store is 1024KB words and RW_A is 128KB Users can update recipe data with SD card USB disk USB cable or Ethernet and use the data to update PLC data Recipe Data can also be uploaded to PC furthermore PLC data can be saved in recipe data The following explains the ways of transferring recipe data USB STORAGE ETHERNET foo SD CARD SS USB CABLE Ga 350 pi WE NTEK Transferring Recipe Data 17 1 Updating Re
293. est1 0 success1 true dest1 14 short src2 Ox3c char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringBin2HexAsc src2 dest2 0 Success2 true dest2 3c int src3 0x1a2b3c4d char dest3 6 bool success3 success3 StringBin2HexAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro command success StringMid source start count destination start or success StringMid string start count destination start Description Retrieve a character sequence from the specified offset of the source string and store it in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start For source start the start offset of the substring is specified by the index value For static source string source the second parameter start specifies the start offset of the nm Macro Reference substring The count parameter specifies the length of substring being retrieved Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the retrieved substring This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro command main char src1 20 abcdefghijklmnoparst char dest
294. eter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than 0 to 9 or it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 10 12 345 float result1 bool success1 success1 StringDecAsc2Float src1 0 result1 success1 true resulti is 12 345 float result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Float 1 234567890 result2 success2 true but the result exceeds the data range of result2 which might result in loss of precision char src3 2 4b float result3 bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Float src3 0 result success3 false because src3 contains characters other than 0 to 9 or a end macro_command Name StringFloat2DecAsc 419 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference success StringFloat2DecAsc source destination start Description This function converts a float to a decimal string It converts the float in source parameter into a decimal string and stores it in the destination buffer source can be either a constant or a variable Destination must be an one dimensional char array to store the result of conversion This fu
295. ew Hit Lamp Object General Security Shape Read addres FPLC name Allen Bradley EtherNet IP Tag CompactLogix Tag jo rc O MI Name Data Type Description ee Controller Tags E ArrayBool BOOL 256 bl BOOL i VarBool BOOL Blinking Mode JL o Jlene 654 LVS weinTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 2 Adding a New Data Type Structure Editor is located in the installation directory of EasyBuilder Double click Structure Editor exe and the editor window will show as below Step 1 Right click on the assigned data type usually labeled as User Defined then click New Data Type to start editing Sitoctore Editor Data Types Mame E Strings New Data Type Predefined Module Defined Description Data Type Description Omernmber Step 2 Enter the name of the data type Description can be left blank To add a sub item click Add 655 Shracture Editor Mew Data Type i Data Types El User Defined Mame TestStruck 4 Strings Predefined Description Module Defined Data Type Description LS 1 A Drm Step 3 Enter the name and the data type then click OK Stouctore Editor Mame Description Data Type nr Binary Access E User Defined H Strings E Predefined H Module Defined Array Dimensions Dim Dim 1 Dim Show Data Types by Groups 656 Rockwell Et
296. example StringGet read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 lf address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station nm re WE NTEK Macro Reference number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example StringGet read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 245 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If StringGet uses the default station number defined in the device list as follows it is not necessary to define station number in address offset PLC type FATEK FB Series V 1 10 FATEK FB so PLC I F RS 232 0 PLC default station no 2 COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command The number of registers actually read from depends on the value of the number of data count since that the read data is restricted to char array type of data_count actual number of 16 bit register read data read char 80 1 char 82i 1 WORD register 16 bit equals to the size of 2 ASCII characters According to the above table reading 2 ASCII characters is actually reading the content of one 16 bit register macro command main char str1 20 read 10 words from LWO LW9 to the variables stri 0 to str1 19 since that 1 word can store 2 ASCII characters reading 20 ASCII characters is actually reading 10 words of register
297. fault Reset all values or states to default value i e set 0 for item 0 1 for item 1 and so on Error Notification The system will set ON OFF to the specified bit register when error is detected The signal of the bit register could be used to trigger a procedure for correcting the error 313 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 30 Timer Overview Timer is a time switch and could be a Delay On Off Pulse and Cumulative On Off switch Time object uses the following 6 variables Preset time PT Word type Set the timer value Elapsed time ET Word type Display current elapsed value of timer Reset bit R Bit type Reset the elapsed time ET to 0 Configuration Click the Timer icon on the toolbar to open Timer object property dialog Set up 3 the properties press OK button and a new Timer object will be created New Timer Object Description l Mode Accumulated OFF delay w Time base 0 1 second s Input bit IN PLC name Local HMI v Setting Measurement bit TD PLC name Local HMI vi Setting Address LB Output bit Q v tra Preset time FT PLC name Local HMI v Setting Address LW 16 bit Unsigned Elapsed time ET Enable Setting 16 bit Unsigned Reset bit R PLC name Local HMI vi Setting 314 Ly WE NTEK Object On Delay switch o mode beserplion Input bit IN Main switch of Timer Measurement bit TI Output b
298. fined A LL ST LLL ss S TE ee e Import Import TDF files Stouctire Editor El User Defined Name Strings i t Predefined Description H Module Defined Data Type Description Omember a Import J Export T a 662 p WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names e Export Export the edited data to tdf file the exported file can be used in other PC or saved as a backup Stirmecture Editor E BERE E User Defined Name Strings Predefined Description E Madule Defined Data Type Description member r TE EE Rete 663 Lg WE NTEK 34 5 Module Defined Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Module Defined is a default structure of a module Here is an example showing how to define the default structure of a module In RSLogix5000 I O Configuration the I O module is set 3 3 VO Configuration zii Backplane CompactLogo System Aa 1769 L32E L32E 1769 L32E Ethernet Port LocalENB Beast ompactBus Local ae Ethemet 1 1769 101 644 A 2 1769 10324 S 2 1769 08168 8 4 1769 08324 A 5 1769 0 W164 8 6 1769 IF16V A The Tags of these modules won t list the structure when exported to csv file Therefore users should define it first E T ITYPE SCOPE 5 TAG 9 TAG 10 TAG Il TAG l2 TAG 13 TAG 14 TAG l5 TAG l6 TAG 17 TAG l TAG 19 TAG 20 TAG 21 TAG Step 1 E NAME Local 1 Locala Local Local 3
299. g in the system and no suitable tag is found the system will set the User defined tag in event log to false 4 Before importing Label Library Sound Library please make sure the library names exist in the system 80 Ki WE NTEK Event Log 7 2 Create a New Event Log 7 2 1 Event Alarm Log General Settings Click New in the Event Alarm Log dialog the dialog below appears Select General tab Alarm Event Log General Message Address type Read address PLC name Local HMI ve Guss Notification Enable Set ON 2 Set OFF PLC name Local HMI wt Setting Condition In tolerance Out tolerance Category Select event category 0 255 Priority level When the number of events equals to the max number available in the system default 1000 the lower priority events will be deleted and new events will be added in Read address System reads data from this address to check if the event matches the trigger condition Notification When enabled the system will set the specified address ON or OFF when the event is triggered Condition When Bit is selected Event Log will detect the state of a Bit address When Word is selected Event Log will detect the value of a Word address to check if it is greater than less than or equals to a specified value 81 Ly WE NTEK Event Log Example kr Condition Pigeni e Ottohemce 2 The setting above indicates Whe
300. g the downloaded file For example If 5 languages are defined by user in Label Library as Language 1 Traditional Chinese Language 2 Simplified Chinese Language 3 English Language 4 French and Language 5 Japanese If only Language 1 3 5 are downloaded by user the corresponding language of the value in LW 9134 will be 0 gt Language 1 Traditional Chinese 1 gt Language 3 English 2 gt Language 5 Japanese Want to know how to swith languages using Option List object toghther with LW 9134 b N Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 551 pi WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 23 Remote Print Backup Server LB 10069 forced to reconnect remote printer backup server when IP changed on line set ON LB 12040 remote printer backup server disconnection alarm when ON LW 9770 16bit remote printer backup server IPO IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9771 16bit remote printer backup server IP1 IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9772 16bit remote printer backup server IP2 IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9773 16bit remote printer backup server IP3 IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 9774 6 words remote printer backup server user name Note1 LW 9780 6 words remote printer backup server password Note1 1 When change settings using LW 9774 and LW 9780 please reboot HMI to enable the new settings A Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project
301. ge to another base window Change common window Change common window Display popup window A pop up window displays in the base window If Close this popup window when parent window is closed check box is selected the pop up window will be closed when change the base window to another window Otherwise a function key in the pop up window is needed to close it 8 Display popup window Close this popup window when change full screen window Return to previous window If this is selected the Function Key will change from the current screen to the previous one displayed For example when window no 10 is changed to window no 20 press the function key to return to window no 10 This function is only available for base window Close window Close any active popup windows message windows included ASCII UNICODE mode Configures the button as a keypad key and the character it enters via Numeric Input or ASCII Input objects ASCIIUNICODE mode Enter Backspace Clear Ex Delete Left Right ASCII UNICODE a Enter Same as the keyboard s enter function Backspace Same as the keyboard s backspace function Clear Clear the value in the word register Esc Same as the Close window function it is used to close the keyboard window Delete Same as the keyboard s Delete function deletes the number or character on the right side of the text cursor Left
302. ger 1 In Utility Manager click Select the folder to save download data FA Build Download Data me for CF SD USB Disk v Project grr INPUT EXOB FILE NAME to build the data to be downloaded first Generally divided into 2 Recipe RW PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME J Recipe A RW_A PLEASE INPUT RECIPE_A FILE NAME directories if set as the Data log Way shown ise Dae eee The download data storing structure Browse This directory Is E E E F download mt 8000 generated when downloading me history data 2 Insert external devices to HMI 3 Select Download and input correct password REBLA te od Up aes 4 Password confirmed show directories in external device pccard SD CF Card usbdisk USB Disk 5 Select a directory for storing project then click OK to start downloading Pick a Directory pk Downlc tings Password I 3 pccard NN EJ usbdisk For the structure above select download not mt8000 or history 36 Ki WE NTEK Hardware Settings Chapter 4 Hardware Settings 4 1 I O Ports The I O ports are different from one HMI type to another SD CARD amp K gt mh Download Upload project via SD card including recipe transfer event log data log etc and to backup or record history data Connects PLC or other peripheral devices RS 232 RS 485 2W 4W ee ETHERNET fF Connects to Ethernet devices such as PLC lapt
303. gh limit and target The Address means the device address For example if the device address is LW 20 and data format is 200 Ly WE NTEK Object 16 bit Low limit is LW 20 High limit is LW21 Target indicator is LW22 Zero is LW23 and Span is LW24 Data Format Alarm Alarm Target Low limit High limit indicator 16 bit format Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 32 bit format Address 2 Address 4 Address 6 Address 8 201 L WE NTEK Object 13 16 Meter Display Overview Meter object can display the value of word device by meter Configuration Click Meter Display icon on the toolbar to open Meter Display dialog box Fill in tel properties click OK button and then create a new Meter Display object 202 og WE NTEK Object The picture below shows the General tab in the Meter Display object properties dialog Hew Meter Display Object General Cutline Limits Security Shape Read address PLC name Local HMI T Setting Cancel Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Device type Address System tag and Index register of the word devices that controls the display of meter Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 203 og WE NTEK Object Hew Meter Display Object General Cutline Limits Shape Coordinate pe Fin point Radius Inner 8
304. ghij end macro command Name StringDecAsc2Bin success StringDecAsc2Bin source start destination or success StringDecAsc2Bin source destination Description This function converts a decimal string to an integer It converts the decimal string in source parameter into an integer and stores it in the destination variable The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than O to 9 it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 5 12345 int result1 bool success1 success1 StringDecAsc2Bin src1 0 result1 success1 true resulti is 12345 char result2 bool success2 success2 StringDecAsc2Bin 32768 result2 success2 true but the result exceeds the data range of result2 char src3 2 4b char result3 NT re WE NTEK SR WENTEK 0 Macro Reference Reference bool success3 success3 StringDecAsc2Bin src3 0 result3 Success3 false because src3 contains characters other than 0 to 9 end macro command Name StringBin2DecAsc success StringBin2DecAsc source destination
305. gnored If device type is LW BCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD Address offset is the address offset in the PLC For example GetData read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 If address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example GetData read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 245 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If GetData uses the default station number defined in the device list as follows it Is not necessary to define station number in address offset 400 re WE NTEK Macro Reference PLC type FATEK FB Series v V 1 10 FATEK F8 so PLC IF RS 232 PLC default station no 2 COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings Use broadcast command The number of registers actually read from depends on both the type of the read_data variable and the value of the number of data_count type of actual number of read_data 16 bit register read int 32 bit int 32 bit float 32 bit When a GetData is executed using a 32 bit data type int or float the function will automatically convert the data For example macro_command main float f GetData f MODBUS 6x 2 1 f will contain a floating point value end macro command ma
306. he following table Function name StringGet StringGetEx Description Read string data from a device Read string data from a device and continue executing next command even if no response from that device Write string data to a device Write string data to a device and continue executing next command even if no response from that device Copy one string to another Retrieve a substring Convert a decimal string to an integer StringSet StringSetEx StringCopy StringMid StringDecAsc2Bin StringBin2DecAsc StringDecAsc2Float StringFloat2DecAsc StringHexAsc2Bin StringBin2HexAsc StringLength StringCat StringCompare Convert an integer to a decimal string Convert a decimal string to floats Convert a float to a decimal string Convert a hexadecimal string to binary data Convert binary data into a hexadecimal string Obtain the length of a string Append source string to destination string Do a case sensitive comparison of two strings StringCompareNoCase Do a case insensitive comparison of two strings StringFind Find a substring inside a larger string StringReverseFind Find a substring inside a larger string starts from the D gt Q StringFindOneOf Stringincluding Find the first matching character from a set Extracts a substring that contains only the characters in a set Extracts a substring that contains only the characters not in a set Convert the characters of a string to uppercase Convert
307. he number in LW 0 and end in LW 1 Example Enter 1 in LW 0 enter 3 in LW 1 the data displayed will include data No 1 No 2 No 3 EIEL 20100604 No 4 IEE EYT SEL 20100605 No 3 GKB EYI EIEL 20100608 No 2 I7KB EVT 43 EIEL 20100609 No 1 AKE EV ds FEL 20100610 No 0 12KB EVIRA The maximum size of data that can be displayed is 4MB the exceeding part will be ignored The following shows how data will be stored while the data size is too big Example a 5 history data each is 0 5MB gt The size of data displayed is 8 x 0 5MB b 5 history data each is 1MB gt The size of data displayed is 4 x 1MB c 5 history data each is 1 5MB gt The size of data displayed is 2x1 5MB 1 x 1MB partial Enable event management If this check box is selected writing a specific value into register LW n and LW n 1 where n is an arbitrary number will control Event Display object with different commands as shown below Wen o Displayallevents 259 og WE NTEK Object Hew Event Display Object General Event Display Shape Font Include categories o thn o tene dlam Event Log object Transparent Frame mo r Background Acknowledge Do Fetum to nomnal M v select box FG Format mort Time sending 6 Time descending Order Characters Display items Display order Pe UEINCE NO Event trigger time Event tigger date Event message I Er rd Acknowledge time Event trigger date Retin t
308. herNet IP Free Tag Names Lyh WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Step 4 After adding all sub items click OK The built data type will be listed on the left side Stractore Editor Data Types l User Defined Mame TestStruct Strings Predefined Description E Module Defined Data Type Description INT A After changing the name or description of a data type click OK to update 657 ee WEINTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 3 Paste Step 1 When adding a patch of sub items this function allows users to add multiple data at one time First click Paste in the main menu Lines Step 2 Type in data name and data type in each line first It is recommended to directly copy and paste from RSLogix5000 to avoid errors Users can click Sample for reference Descriptors Mernibers Data Type Size 60 byte s E Mame Data Type Style Description External Access E VarBool BOOL Decimal HeadAwfrite a Bool amp rray BOOL 32 Decimal Ready rite o varReal REAL Float Read rite mi Real ray REAL S Float Reads rite Varlnt INT Decimal Reads rite E Int rray IMT 3 Decimal Ready rite ie VarDint DINT Decimal Read Write o DintArray DINT 3 Decimal Reads rite 658 WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Step 3 Select needed Name and Data defined in RSLogix as the table above To select all the items press and hold on the first line then slide down to the bottom
309. ia a USB cable or Ethernet 20 Ly WE NTEK Project Manager 2 2 2 Steps to Download Project to HMI via USB Disk or CF SD Card Assume we will download data in the folder named 123 K 123 on an USB disk oo 1 a D 6 7 Insert USB in which project saved to HMI In Download Upload dialog box select Download Enter Download Password In Download Settings dialog box select Download project files and Download history files check boxes Press OK In Pick a Directory dialog box select directory usbdisk device 0 123 Press OK Project will then be updated sl m f only the history files are downloaded it is necessary to reboot HMI to update files 21 gps WE NTEK Project Manager 2 3 Transfer 2 3 1 Download Download files to HMI via Ethernet or USB cable Download Firmware Dr Install X series media plaver drivers V Startup screen Filtestpic brmp Connection Ethernet O USB cable i series only Kl Marne Reset recipe Reset event log Reset data log Firmware Update HMI kernel programs The firmware must be downloaded at the first time downloading data to HMI Project Select an xob file RW RW A Select a rcp file 22 KR WE NTEK Project Manager Data log select a dtl file in datalog folder Select the data sampling folder in HMI and then select a dil file Install X series media player drivers Necessary wh
310. ich operate the designated word address to decrease the value in the register by a set amount in Dec value at a set rate in Time interval to the Bottom limit then hold this value As shown below the system will automatically decrease the value in the register by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 10 and then stops Attribute set Style Automatic JOG down to low limit v Dec value 1 Bottom limit 10 Time interval 0 5 second s v E Periodical bounce Increases the word address value to the High limit by a Inc value at a set rate in Time interval then decreases to the Low limit by the same value at the same rate As shown below the system will increase the value in the designated register by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 10 and then decrease the value by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 0 whenever the screen is active Attribute Set Style Periodic bounce up gt down gt up gt y Bottom limit 0 Upper limit 10 Inc value 1 Time interval 0 5 second s vi 142 Ly WE NTEK Object m Periodical step up Step up to the High limit by Inc value at a set rate in Time interval then reset immediately to the Low limit The action repeats whenever the screen is active As shown below the system will increase the value in the designated register by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 10 and then reset to 0 and increase again and the action repeats Attribute set Style Perio
311. iency alarm when ON LB 9037 USB 1 free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 9038 USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON LB 12048 USB 1 status exists when ON LB 12049 USB 2 status exists when ON LW 9070 16bit free space insufficiency warning Mega bytes LW 9071 16bit reserved free space size Mega bytes LW 9072 32bit LW 9074 32bit LW 9076 32bit LW 9078 32bit HMI current free space K bytes SD current free space K bytes USB 1 current free space K bytes USB 2 current free space K bytes Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 525 Lib WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 10 Touch Position LW 9041 16bit touch status word bit 0 on user is touching the screen OR R R Lw 9042 16bit touch x postion R R R Lw 9043 16bit touch y postion JR PR PR LW 9044 16bit leave x position RPR R LW 9045 16bit leave y positon PR R R Want to know how to trigger relevant registers to change window with finger slide Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 526 pi WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 11 Station Number Variables LW 10000 16bit var0 station no variable usage varO address 16bit LW 10001 16bit vart station no variable usage variffaddress LW 10002 LW 10003 LW 10004 LW 10005 LW 10006
312. ifier When there are compile errors the description of the error can be found by the compiler error message number 2 Error Description C1 syntax error identifier There are many possibilities to cause compiler error For example macro_command main char i 123xyz this is an unsupported variable name end macro command C2 identifier used without having been initialized Macro must define the size of an array during declaration For example macro command main char i int gli i must be a numeric constant end macro command C3 redefinition error identifier The name of variable and function within its scope must be unique For example macro_command main intg 10 gt g error end macro command 467 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference C4 function name error identifier Reserved keywords and constant can not be the name of a function For example sub int if error C5 parentheses have not come in pairs Statement missing or Y For example macro command main missing C6 illegal expression without matching if Missing expression in if statement C7 illegal expression no then without matching if Missing then in if statement C8 illegal expression no end if Missing end if C9 illegal end if without matching if Unfinished If statement before End If C10 illeg
313. igger bit and then resetting the trigger condition within the macro 3 Use a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object to change the bit to activate the macro b Use a Set Bit or Toggle Switch object The macro will be executed when Set Bit or Toggle Switch is pressed by user 1 On the General tab of the Set Bit or Toggle Switch dialog select the Execute Macro option 2 Select the macro to execute 3 The macro will be executed one time when the button is activated sl m If Set Bit uses Periodic Toggle the macro will be executed every time Set Bit toggles c Use a Function Key object 1 On the General tab of the Function Key dialog select the Execute Macro option 2 Select the macro to execute 3 The macro will execute one time when the button is activated d In macro editor use 1 Periodical Execution Macro will be triggered periodically 2 Execute one time when HMI starts Macro will be executed once HMI starts 448 pi WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 8 User Defined Macro Function When editing Macro to save time of defining functions user may search for the needed from built in Macro Function Library However certain functions though frequently used may not be found there In this case user may define the needed function and save it for future use Next time when the same function is required the saved functions can be called from Macro Function Library for easier editing Additiona
314. in Alarm Event Log will be written to the Acknowledge address designated in Event Display Please refer to Chapter 7 Event Log Write value for event display Write value 256 Ly WE NTEK Object Enable event management If this check box is selected writing a specific value into a register LW n and LW n 1 where n is an arbitrary number will control Event Display object with different commands as shown below LW n o Display all events Hide Confirmed events b History Control Enable reading multiple histories e f this check box is Not selected Daily event log files can be viewed and interrogated A history control address can be designated History control PLC name Local HMI Ww Setting Address LW w 0 16 bit Unsigned _ Enable reading multiple histories The designated register contains a value which is used as an index to select historical files Index value 0 calls the latest file Index value 1 calls the second latest etc The example below shows how to use the historical control address Set control address to LW 100 Assume four data logs exist dated EL 20061120 evt EL 20061123 evt EL 20061127 evt EL 20061203 evt 257 Lig WE NTEK Object The value in the control word selects the following records Value in LW 100 The selected record EL 20061203 evt 1 EL_20061127 evt 2 EL 20061123 evt EL 20061120 ev e f this check box is selected Displays a li
315. in pixel or X axis time range in second directly on HMI X axis time range O Pixel Time Default distance 100 second s vs Dynamic X axis time range PLC name Local H HMI o vi Setting Address LW v10 When this function is enabled a valid default value must be set that is when the value of the designated register is 0 Trend Display will still be calculated according to the value set here The following shows the trend curve displayed when X axis time range is set to 100 FA ELT bE Ah a AA AT A A A A AAAA A A UVA U U V U 17 56 39 17 56 51 17 57 03 17 57 15 175727 17 57 39 17 57 51 17 56 03 17 58 15 td a te gt m Dynamic X axis time range LW 10 The following shows the trend curve displayed when X axis time range is set to 200 At ad God ar EUR ETA BAL AALL V V AA EA AEE ME MM ME EM 18 05 55 16 06 15 18 06 35 18 06 55 18 07 15 18 07 35 16 07 55 18 08 15 18 08 35 18 08 55 RET man Dynamic X axis time range LW 10 214 Lig WE NTEK Object Watch line Watch line Enable PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Use the Watch line function to display a watch line when user touches the Trend Display object It will also export the sampling data at the position of watch line to the designated word device and use Numeric Display objects to display the results Please refer to the following picture Watch line Lele es A R e J NAL TAA ITJ
316. in the Convert Batch File and place the more specific criteria upward EX evt EasyConverter c Pathname dtl EasyConverter c Pathname dtl EasyConverter c Pathname 192 168 1 26 dtl EasyConverter c Pathname my HMI 01 dtl EasyConverter c Pathname my HMI 02 595 Ly WE NTEK EasyPrinter dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs Pathname Voltage The correct order of examination would be from button to top dtl EasyConverter s Voltage lgs Pathname Voltage dtl EasyConverter c Pathname my HMI 02 dtl EasyConverter c Pathname my HMI 01 dtl EasyConverter c Pathname 192 168 1 26 dtl EasyConverter c Pathname evt EasyConverter c Pathname 596 EasySimulator Chapter 27 EasySimulator EasySimulator enables users to execute On line Off line Simulation without installing EasyBuilder To do this please prepare the following files 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Noi J 1 Prepare Needed Files driver gt win32 320x234 bmp File Edit View Favorites Tools Help r 480x234 bmp i am 480x272 bmp HMI pictures in 640x480 bmp landscape Esl 800x480 bmp 800x600 bmp a 800480 800x600 102765 1024x768 bmp HMI pictures in portrait mode 2 My Pictures ig My Computer 234x320 bmp 272x480 bmp 480x800 bmp 600x800 b
317. ine Zero and Span must be set as 50 and 100 so all the sampling data can be displayed in the trend display object Dynamic limits checked The low limit and the high limit are read from the designated word devices as shown below When address is LW n the register s address 220 re WE NTEK Object For example if LW 100 is used here the low limit and the high limit will be read from Data Format Low limit Highlimit 16 bit format LW 100 LW 101 32 bit format LW 100 LW 102 A typical usage of this is used for zoom in and zoom out of Trend Display Channel visibility control If Enable is selected the bits of the assigned word register will be used to show hide each channel First bit controls first channel second bit controls second channel and so on For example there are 5 channels and LW 0 is used like the figure above channels which will be shown are Controlling Bit Will Be Displayed LW bit 000 LW bit 001 221 Ki WE NTEK Object Example 9 Example of zoom in out function To zoom in out the trend graph check the Dynamic limits as picture below PLL name Local HMI we Setting For example the LWO and LW1 are to control low limit and high limit you may change the value of LW1 to zoom in out The following picture is in original size The range of trend is between 0 30 The arrow on the right side are Set Word LW1 increment JOG and LW 1 decrement
318. ing Decide the space between lines in the text Add All Non ascii Fonts Line spacing 0 v BL gi Line spacing 0 Ls mene Line spacing 6 2 t3 66 L WE NTEK 5 7 Extended Memory System Parameter Settings Parameters in this tab determine the location of the extended memory System Parameter Settings Device General System Setting Font Extended Memory ___ Printer Backup Server EMO i File name OsDead USB1 EMI File name OsDcad USB1 EM2 fas File name OsSDcard U EM3 File name OSD card G USB I EM4 File name Osbcad USB1 EMS File name OQOsDcard USB1 EM6 File name OSsDcad USB1 EM File name OSD card USB 1 EMS File name OSsDcad USB1 EMS File name OSD card 8 USB 1 Extended Memory is numbered from EMO to EM9 It works in a way similar to other device types i e LW or RW address Users can simply select from Device type list while adding a new object Size of each extended memory is up to 2G word 67 Le WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Address PLC name Local HMI Device type Address Address format Tag Library Extended memories are saved as files in SD card or USB disk EMO to EM9 are saved as em0 emi to em9 emi respectively Users can use RecipeEditor exe to open these files and edit the data in the extended memory
319. ing and Setting a Window In window tree right click on a window number then select New Name The name will appear on the title bar and also in window tree Window no can be 3 to 1999 Size Set the window size in accordance with the HMI resolution Underlay window Popup window Please refer to the description below Window Settings Mame Window 013 Window no 13 Size Width 800 Frame Width Background Color Filled Underlay window Bottom Middle Top Popup window 74 Height Color Pattern SSS Pattern color 10 WINDOW 010 11 Window 011 12 Window 012 Monopoly Cancel Ly WE NTEK Window Operations Underlay window Underlay Window can be seen as an extra Common Window When designing the project the often used objects may be placed in different windows but not all windows These objects can be placed in underlay window Each base window can set three underlay windows as background from Bottom to Top The objects in underlay windows are displayed in this order in base window Popup window Base window can also be used as a pop up window Use X and Y to set the coordinates indicating where in the screen will this base window pop up The origin of the coordinates is the upper left corner of the window Monopoly If the option is selected when the base window pops up no operations of other popup windows and background windows are a
320. ing the demo project 527 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 12 Index Register Read R Write W Control Y Address Description Local MACRO ig HMI R Y R Y R Y R Y LW 9200 16bit address index 0 RW RY RY gt LW 9201 16bit address index 1 R Y R Y LW 9202 16bit address index 2 R Y R N s SNr lt 16bit address index 3 R Y R Y 16bit address index 4 R Y R Y 16bit address index 5 R Y R Y 16bit address index 6 R Y R Y 16bit address index 7 R Y R Y 16bit address index 8 R Y R Y 16bit address index 9 R Y R Y 16bit address index 10 R Y R Y 16bit address index 11 R Y R Y 16bit address index 12 R Y R Y 16bit address index 13 R Y R Y 16bit address index 14 R Y R Y 16bit address index 15 R Y R Y 32bit address index 16 address index 17 address index 18 a D J address index 19 address index 20 address index 21 32bit address index 25 32bit address index 26 R Y 32bit address index 27 RW 32bit 528 address index 22 address index 23 address index 24 JJ oe lt lt xs r Nr NA Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits Please confirm your Internet connection before downloading the demo project 529 Ly LI WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 13 Project File Information LW 9100 LW 9116 LW 911
321. into result Source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro command main float source result ATAN 1 result result is 45 source 1 732 ATAN source result result is 60 end macro command LOG source result Description Calculates the natural logarithm of a number source can be either a variable or a constant resu t must be a variable macro_command main Example float source 100 result 382 Rr WE NTEK Y WENTEK eae Macro Reference Reference LOG source result result is approximately 4 6052 end macro command LOG10 Syntax LOG10 source result Description Calculates the base 10 logarithm of a number source can be either a variable or a constant resu t must be a variable macro_command main float source 100 result LOG10 source result result is 2 end macro command RAND Syntax RAND result Description Calculates a random integer and save into result result must be a variable macro_command main short result RAND result result is not a fixed value when executes macro every time end macro_command 18 6 2 Data Transformation BIN2BCD BIN2BCD source result Description Transforms a binary type value Source into a BCD type value result source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable Example mac conmansman gt 383 WE NTEK S WEINTEK 0 Macro Reference Reference short source result BIN2BCD 1234
322. ion Enable Set ON O Set OFF Mapping table This table displays all available states items their item data and values To change the number of available items please refer to Option list tab Attribute Item no Item The system lists all available items Each item represents a state that will be displayed in the list This field is read only Value Here user can assign value for each item basing on the following two criteria 1 For reading If the content from Monitor address is changed the object compares the content with these values and selects first matched item If no item is matched the status goes to error state and signals the notification bit register if requested 2 For writing The system writes this value to Monitor address when user selects an item 312 Ly WE NTEK Object Item data Text displayed for each item The option list object displays the text of all items in the list for users to review and select Error state On error state the listbox style option list removes the highlight to represent no item is selected and the drop down list displays the data of error state Only the drop down style lists use Error state Listbox style lists are not able to use Error state For example item 8 is the error state when specifying 8 in Item no Similarly if you set Item no to 11 then state 11 would be the error state and so on The states are counts from state 0 Set de
323. ion Object s Properties General Shape Label Profile Position innt 3 mize Width Tape rectangle size Trajectory Shape rectangle size To set the size of the shape Trajectory Heis Heicht Cancel To set the position of each point on the moving path Object m Because multiple pictures might be used by an Animation object Set to original dimension will not return all pictures to the original size 195 pi WE NTEK Object 13 15 Bar Graph Overview Bar graph object displays data as a bar graph in proportion to its value Configuration Click Bar Graph icon on the toolbar to open Bar Graph dialog box Fill in properties click OK button and then create a new Bar Graph object Hew Har Graph Object General Outline Security Shane Read address PLC name Local HMI v Setting 196 pi WE NTEK Object Read address Click Setting to Select the PLC name Device type Address System tag and Index register of the word devices that controls how the bar graph displays Users can also configure address in General tab while adding a new object Hew Har Graph Object Bar width ratio 948 Bar color style Frame eee Par M Target indicator Target value Alarm indicators Low mit E Low color Target slarmzerofspan dynamic address Enable PL
324. ion Window Window no 3 is the default Fast Selection Window This window can co exist with base window Generally it is used to place the frequently used buttons on the lower left side or the lower right side on the screen Please create window no 3 first and set the relevant properties in System Parameter Settings General tab Apart from showing or hiding fast selection window with the button on the screen there are system registers to do so LB 9013 FS window control hide ON show OFF LB 9014 FS button control hide ON show OFF LB 9015 FS window button control hide ON show OFF 71 LVS weinTEK Window Operations 6 1 3 Common Window Window no 4 is the default Common Window Objects in this window will be displayed in other base windows not including popup windows Therefore the common objects in different windows are often placed in common window When operating HMI select Function Key Change common window to change the source of common window Function Properties In menu Option Function Properties select whether or not Sepe MELD to Display Common Window objects on Base Windows when editing a project This can avoid C using function key to make shape library object overlapping objects in base window with objects in common O automatic save and compile when download and simulate window Display Common Window objects on Base Windows 6 1 4 System Message Window Windows
325. is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored ur Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference If device type is LW BOD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address offset is the address offset in the PLC For example StringSet read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 lf address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example StringSet read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 245 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If SetData uses the default station number defined in the device list it is not necessary to define station number in address offset The number of registers actually sends to depends on the value of the number of data count since that send data is restricted to char array type of data count actual number of 16 bit register read data send char 82i ta char 80 2 ooo 1 WORD register 16 bit equals to the size of 2 ASCII characters According to the above table sending 2 ASCII characters is actually writing to one 16 bit register The ASCII characters are stored into the WORD register from low byte to high byte While using the ASCII display object to display the string data stored in the registers data count must be a multiple of
326. it Q Preset time PT Elapsed time ET Description See the figure above Period 1 When the IN is turned ON TI is turned ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting The Q remains OFF Period 2 When the ET equals the PT the Q be turned ON and the Tl be turned OFF Period 3 When the IN turns OFF the Q be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 Period 4 When the IN turns ON the TI be turned ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting Period 5 Turn IN OFF before the ET reaches the PT the Tl would be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 the Q remains OFF m Off Delay switch mode Description Input bit IN Main switch of Timer Measurement bit TI Output bit Q Preset time PT Elapsed time ET Description See the figure above Period 1 When the IN turns ON the Tl remains OFF and the Q be turned ON and the ET reset to 0 Period 2 When the IN turns OFF the Tl be turned ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting the Q remains ON Period 3 When the ET equals the PT the Q and Tl are turned OFF Period 4 When the IN turns ON the Q be turned ON and the ET reset to 0 Period 5 When the IN turns OFF the Tl be turned ON and the elapsed time ET starts counting the Q remains ON Period 6 Turn the IN to ON before the ET reaches the PT the TI be turned OFF and the ET reset to 0 the Q remains ON 315 Ly WE NTEK Object m Pulse switch mode beserpton Input bit IN Main switch of Timer
327. it Unsigned Event Alarm Log 1 General Message Text Content Event 0 Label Library Font Arial vw Color S Acknowledge value for Event larm Display object Acknowledge value 31 Max event no The maximum number of events to be displayed in this Event Display When the amount of events displayed has reached Max event no set here the oldest event will be removed and add a new event Color Indicate the different event states Frame and background may be made invisible by selecting Transparent check box 261 re WE NTEK Object a Acknowledge b Return to normal c Select box The system draw a highlight box around the latest acknowledged event Acknowledge 6 13 12 19 Event 1 When LW f gt 10 5 13 12 18 7 when LB10 ON woe I J k f y oni ba F AA n F Ie eek wee D e Falp i P UIRANR Pr i n i i IR VET AT JE P EA Egs i 7 ss faa ETS SAET ee 1 13 12 14 Sequence no Return to normal Select box Format trigger date trigger time notification time return fo normal time Sort Sort alarms in time ascending or descending order Time ascending Latest alarm is placed last in the list Time descending Latest alarm is placed first in the list Order amp Characters Use the up and down arrow buttons to adjust the display order of the alarms Date Displays the date tag with each alarm
328. ition 8 Controlled by register O Based upon time interval Read address PLC name Local HMI Setting Cancel Attribute Total no of states This configures the number of the states for this object a Controlled by register Select Controlled by register to use designated registers to control the object s state and position Read address The object s state and position are determined by the registers and the addresses must be configured correctly as in the following table 192 Ly WE NTEK Object Data Format Object s state Object s position 16 bit format Address LW n Address 1 LW n 1 32 bit format Address LW n Address 2 LW n 2 For example if the designated register is LW 100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned then LW 100 represents object s state LW 101 represents position In the picture below LW 100 2 LW 101 3 so the object s state is 2 and position is 3 pasitian 5 pasitian Q pasitian I pasitian 4 pas Hen 3 State 2 L W100 2 LW101 3 b Based upon time interval If Based upon time interval is chosen the object s state and position will change from time to time Time interval attributes is used to set the time interval for states and positions posten 2 Time interval attributes Position speed O I second s Image state chen P Backvad ol Image update time O I condis Position speed The speed of change of po
329. ized as a char array The following snapshot of simulation shows the difference between str1 and str2 using two ASCII input objects 489 L WE NTEK Macro Reference abede TT ste Macro compiler will add a terminating null character N0 at the end of a string The function StringSet will send each character of str1 to registers until a null character is reached The extra characters following the null character will be ignored even if the data count is set toa larger value than the length of string On the contrary macro compiler will not add a terminating null character 0 at the end of a char array The actual number of characters of str2 being sent to registers depends on the value of data count that is passed to the StringSet function 3 A simple login page Create a new macro and edit the content WorkSpace 1 macro command maini 2 Char name 20 admin 3 Char pass yord 20 123456 4 char name input 20 5 char password input 20 6 Char message Success 40 Success Access Accepted a char message fail 40 Fail Access Denied 5 char message clear 0 g bool name match false 10 bool password match false il 12 StringGet name input 0 Local HMI LW UO 20 13 StringGet password input 0 Local HMI LW sO 20 14 name match Stringtompare name input OJ name O 15 password match StringCompare password input O passvord O 16 L7 FILL message clear
330. l 14 1 Creating Shape Library arrnnanennnnennnnrrnanenrannnnanrnnnnrnnanrnnnnennanennanennnnsnnnnennnnsnnnsee 325 14 2 Creating Picture Library rrrrarennnrernnnerranrnrnnenranrnranennanrnnanennnnennnnennnnennnnsnnnnannnsee 332 Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi Language rrannnnnrnnnnvnrnnnnennnnnrenvnnnrennnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnn 339 Beh WNT OCC UN ON 5 sacs cee ssw sce cee aah ste eet aes 339 15 2 Building Label Library arrrnnnnnnnrnnnrrrnnnvnnnnrennnnnennnnrennnnnennnnsennnnrennnnnennnennnnnsennnnnee 341 15 3 Setting Label Font rrrronnrnnnnnonrnnnrnrannrnrnnnenrannennansnnnnnsennansennansnnnnssnnnnnsnnnnsnnnnnee 342 TO SING EAD CN UDAY EE ONE 343 15 5 Settings of Multi Language System Register LW 9134 rrrrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnnn 344 Chapter 16 Address Tag LIDER savvvvearvsvesar eee 347 16 1 Building Address Tag Library cccccccccceececeeeeseeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseuseseeeeseeeeseueeseees 347 16 2 USING Address Tag Library srasiwewsnsvivinnsasercuwsadewearnebuvannadereiaasabeenracucsimeaseweweuasevanns 349 Chapter 17 Transferring Recipe Dala seccadesi tinin eSEE 350 17 1 Updating Recipe Data with Ethernet or USB GCable rrrrrnnnrrnnnnnnrrennnnrrennnnerennn 351 17 2 Updating Recipe Data with SD Card or USB Disk rrurnnrrrvnnnnrrennnnevenrnnrrenrnnerennn 352 17 3 Transferring Recipe Data rrrnarernanernanernanernnnernnnennnnernnnernnnennnnennnnennnnsnnnnennnnennnner 353 17 4 Saving Reci
331. l MITSUBISHI FAN COMIMO00 E 7 1 Redes 28 Lub WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Project Now let s add a new object 1 Click on the object icon Toggle Switch Object 2 Set correct parameters New Toggle Switch Object General Security Shape Label d Read address PLC name Mitsubishi Fx0s FxOnFxls Fxln Fx7 r Setting Invert signal write address PLC name Mitsubishi FX05 Fx0n Fxls Fln FX2 ve Setting write when button is released Attribuke Switch style Set OFF we 3 Place the object wherever you like on window Macro 4 A project with one object is now Execute macro created EasyBuilder 8000 MTP2 10 WINDOW 010 E BK EB File B t View Option Draw Objects Libuay Tools Window Help fX Ose Lae 2 a FeeL dl ars l amp S opt of ol ZF A x U Langwege 1 ake Nee ee Ses re p7 7 Fast Selection a 4 Common Window 5 PLC Response 6 HMI Connection o T Password Restriction i 8 El 2 amp af fa 10 WINDOW 010 Po ke TS 0 Y 1 Y 1 Bc Lill A v 29 L WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Project 3 2 Save and Compile the Project E Help On EasyBuilder Tool Bar File Edit View Option Dew Ot 3 Compile 1 New CAN ET On line Sirnlation Chit tar Open Cho gt ET Offline Sinmlation ae En Download F le Seve it GF Build Data for USB Disk or CF Cand Downlo
332. l library and select the label from the pull down list of Label tag Hew Bit Lamp Object Ed General Security Shape Label Use label Use label library Label tag mods deren Use bitmap font Label pump Alar eo video Attribute Font nat O Blink Nome v Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to ESETI Movement Dineen No movement Content Tracking When a tag is selected the content of the selected tag is shown in the Content field in the font selected Please note that languages 2 8 can only set the Font Size other settings such as Color Align Blink etc will follow the settings of language 1 343 Label Library and Multi Language 15 5 Settings of Multi Language System Register LW 9134 When displaying the texts in multiple languages except for using Label Library the system register LW 9134 language mode should be used too The value range of LW 9134 is 0 7 Different values correspond to different languages Although up to 8 languages can be used in EasyBuilder if the languages are not all chosen in compiling and downloading LW 9134 will work differently For example user defines 5 languages in Label Library Only languages 1 3 5 are chosen in compiling then the corresponding values of LW 9134 are Language 1 English 0 Language 2 Traditional Chinese Language 3 Simplified Chinese 1 Language 4 French Language 5 Korean 2 H
333. l state Rehoot HM Set the correct IP address when rebooting Connection HMI via Ethernet Ethernet USB cable i series only HMI TF Data Event Log File Information After setting connect with HMI to check the Data Event Log File Information number of history files in HMI EasvBuilder8000 Data Event Log File Information Pe data log El HMI EasyPrinter EasyDiagnoser 1 20120110 dt 2 20120113 dt E GreenHouse EasyConverter Easy Address viewer Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF SD USB Disk i HMIsave event log 1 EL 20120113 evt Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through stop HMI scan font finished reset HMI finished 19 WE NTEK Project Manager 2 2 Editing Tools 2 2 1 Build Download Data for Saving in CF SD Card or USB Disk Project Manager select the folder to save download data KA Sources v Project PLEASE INPUT XOB FILE NAME Recipe RW PLEASE INPUT RECIPE FILE NAME Recipe A RW_A PLEASE INPUT RECIPE_A FILE NAME Data log 4 PLEASE INPUT DATA LOG FILE NAME I 1 Insert the external device CF SD card or USB disk to PC 2 Assign the folder to store data 3 Select source files for project recipe A and data log 4 Select Build to create files for downloading The source files will be saved in the inserted device for users to download to HMI without connecting v
334. lation and Startup Guide i Setup EasyBuilder8000 4 64 Welcome to the EasyBuilder8000 4 64 Setup Wizard This will install EB8000v464 on your computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup iS Setup EasyBuilder2000 4 64 EB8000 Remove Information Find other version of EB8000 that has been installed Would you want to remove EB8000 Select the version that you want to remove EB8000V410 EB8000V420 EB8000V421 EB8000V430 EB8000V433 vg WE NTEK EasyBuilder Installation and Startup Guide 4 Designate a new folder for EasyBuilder installation or use the folder recommended and then click Next 5 Setup EasyBuilder8000 4 64 Select Destination Location Where should EasyBuilder8000 v4 64 be installed CJ Setup will install EasyBuilder8000 v4 64 into the Following Folder To continue click Next IF you would like to select a different folder click Browse A At least 300 4 MB of free disk space is required 5 Select a start menu folder to save the program s shortcuts Click Browse to designate a folder or use the folder recommended then click Next iS Setup EasyBuilder8000 V4 64 Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the Following Start Menu Folder To continue click Next IF you would
335. ld be shown The figure below is an example of Option List used with History Data Display 309 Va cae Object MAN AWA AA AM AM LA AM AA RAN NAL A wat n a fl i 06 10 09 fi Uy d moos AE VANN g 06 06 09 13 14 18 13 14 38 1314 58 13 15 18 13 15 38 13 15 58 13 16 18 mj LAN The available options are Item data From dates of historical data Type Data Sampling w Date MMOD yy Wt a Type Two options are available Event Alarm log which is used for Event Display and Data sampling which is used for Trend Display and History Data Display b Date set the date format c Data Sampling object Select which Data sampling object is displayed when Type is Data Sampling and it should be the same as the Data sampling object index configured in Trend Display or History Data Display cm m The system automatically disables Mapping tab in Dates of historical data and Item address mode m In Dates of historical data mode When users select Drop Down List in Attribute and enable History Index mode the Option List displays in Error State 3 Item address The list will be read from given Item address and controlled by Control address The following options will be available 310 Ly WE NTEK Object Control address PLC name Local HMI w Setting Address set 1 to update item data Address
336. lder8000 Y4 64 Completing the EasyBuilder8000 4 64 Setup Wizard Setup has finished installing EasyBuilder8000 v4 64 on your computer The application may be launched by selecting the installed icons Click Finish to exit Setup LIN we NTEK EasyBuilder Installation and Startup Guide 10 The EasyBuilder shortcuts can be found in Start All Programs EasyBuilder P EasyAccess yy EasyBuilder8000 E EasyConverter Vi EasyDiagnoser EasyPrinter gp EasySimulator dd EasyWatch g Froject Manager t RecipeEditor G ReleaseNote Structure Editor All Programs fan EB8000 5 Uninstall EasyBuilders000 The description of each item in EasyBuilder menu Managing tool for HMIs connected in network data or data in the External Memory here Release Note Structure Editor pe AB TAG and improve the flexibility to read write an l efer to m HMI support downloading uploading projects via USB cable After installing EasyBuilder please go to Computer Management Device Manager to check if USB driver is installed if not please install it manually L WE NTEK Project Manager Chapter 2 Project Manager After installing EasyBuilder double click Project Manager shortcut on the desktop to start Project Manager is for launching several utilities and it is a stand alone program To launch EasyWatch please open EasyBuilder first Set password here S Project Manager BEEN before operating H
337. le scroll swatch Profile color Transparent Frame Background Color Horiz divisionis Verti Channel Semel Pen property Color 2 Data samples Configure the maximal number of data samples points to be displayed Samples to scroll Configure the number of data samples being scrolled 235 Ki WE NTEK Object Enable background Disable background a an mi Grid Enable Grid Disable Grid M aa M aa om Channel Set the color width and style of each curve Channel Channel o Fen property olor E 236 Ly WE NTEK Object Examples 1 How to show a data block a Write the number of data to No of data address i e control word address 1 b Store the data consecutively beginning at Data storage start address c Write 1 to Control word address to draw the curve without cleaning the plot All previous curves will not be erased d The system will write 0 to Control word address after it is plotted Word Address Last displayed graph Displ Control ia 7 No of Data 40 Data 1 i 30 Data 2 20 Data 3 Data 1 10 Data 4 20 Data 5 Data 6 The previous graph remains and the current Data 7 data graph overlays it During the period between c and d do not change the content of Control word address No of data address
338. led If it shows Please install weintek virtual serial port driver please click Install Pass through Ethernet O com part Virtual COM Part PC lt gt PLC Please install weintek virtual serial port driver PLO Connection Port He lt gt PLC If the dialog below shows up during installation please click Continue Anyway 608 we WE NTEK Pass through Function Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware Virtual Serial Fort has not passed Windows Logo testing to venty its compatibility with Windows AP Tell me why this testing i important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the correct operation of your system either immediately or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anyway ff When finished the Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLC field displays the virtual COM port used In this example the virtual comport used is COM 4 Pass through 8 Ethernet O com port Virtual CO Port PC lt gt PLO Cahid cm m This driver is not supported under Windows 7 64 Bit operation system 29 1 2 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port Open Device Manager to check the installed Virtual Serial Port Ports COM amp LPT Y Communications Port COML if Printer Port LPT1
339. ll jump to the error state Error notification If an illegal value is entered automatically set the value placed in the designated register OK Set default Input illegal Remain current state Jump to error state Error notification Enable Send notification after writing successfully If the Enable check box is selected it will notify a designated bit address setting ON or OFF after the command is successfully executed Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the object or configure in General tab 159 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 8 Slider Overview Slider object is used to change the value in a designated word register address by moving the roller on the screen Configuration Click the Slider icon on the toolbar to open a Slider object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Slider object will be created 160 pi WE NTEK Object New Slider Object General Outline Security Shape Description Write address PLC name Local HMI v Setting Address LW vw o 16 bit Unsigned Notification V Enable O Set ON Set OFF Before writing After writing PLC name Local HMI oy Setting Address LB 0 Watch address Enable PLC name Setting Address Lw w 10 16 bit Unsigned Write address Click Setting to select the PLC name Addres
340. llowed until the monopoly window is closed If a base window is used as a keyboard window Monopoly is automatically enabled sl m The objects in underlay window cannot be edited from the base window that displays them To edit those objects please open the underlay window where they are located m When the window number of the underlay window used by the base window is identical to the popup window the popup window is disabled m When base window and popup window use the same underlay window the objects in the underlay window cannot be displayed in popup window 75 WE NTEK Window Open Window Click New and select the type of the window and click OK Open Window Window name Fast Selection Common Window PLC Response HMI connection Password Restriction Storage Space Insufficient WINDOW D10 keypad 1 Integer Keypad 2 Integer Keypad 3 Integer Keypad 4 Integer Keypad 5 Integer Keypad 6 Integer Keypad 7 HEX keypad 8 Floating ASCII Large ASCII Middle ASCII Small ASCII Upper L ASCII Lower L ASCII Upper M ASCII Lower M ASCII Upper 5 ASCII Lower 5 100 450 800 600 300 100 300 100 410 100 320 100 800 600 209 280 198 234 200 168 304 213 160 230 241 331 306 225 209 254 720 300 576 240 480 200 720 300 720 300 576 240 576 240 480 200 480 200 Window Operations Select Window Style Settings Delet abel Fast Selection Open Common windo The way to call
341. lly Macro Function Library greatly enhances the portability of user defined functions Before building a function please check the built in functions or online function library to see if it exists Work Space Macro ID 0 Macro name Macro ID 0 Macon name Cl Perioda execution Periodical execution F ai 2 PETEN 5 ARAN 1 1 2 mere Command maini Y macro Command main li 3 4 int x1 Fre 4 int sl be 5 LAE Aui GE ine sim Sime K Sian Ah 7 7 end MACED Comnand Bi aad mACSTA 6 SrmAti flere Function Lissy 449 Macro Reference 18 8 1 Import Function Library File Open a project in HMI programming software the default Function Library File will be read automatically and the function information will be loaded in At this moment if a user defined function is called the relevant mlb file must be imported first 1 Default Function Library File Name MacroLibrary without filename extension 2 Function Library Directory HMI programming software installation directory library folder 3 library folder contains two types of function library files Without filename extension MacroLibrary the Default Function Library for HMI programming software to read at the beginning With filename extension mlb Such as math mib The files to be read written when users import export These files are portable and can be called from the folder when needed 4 When opening HMI programming softwar
342. m When using 57 200 S7 300 drivers since in EB500 the high and low bytes are sent in reverse order this will cause MT500 to misread MT8000 Local data 606 Ki WE NTEK Pass through Function Chapter 29 Pass through Function The Pass through function allows the PC applications to control PLC via HMI In this case the HMI is a converter The Pass through function provides two modes Ethernet and COM port Click Pass through button in Project Manager to open the setting dialog Project Manager E Pass through HMI IP Password an RRO Ethernet COM port Type MT6000 8000 i Series Settings Reboot HMI Virtual COM Port PC lt gt PLC Connection COM3 Ethernet O USB cable i series only HMI IP 192 168 1 94 PLC Connection Port HMI lt gt PLC HMIIP 192 168 1 94 Stop Pass through COM 1 v RS232 v Data Event Log File Information EasyBuilder8000 EasyConverter EasyAddressviewer Install Uninstall Apply EasyPrinter EasyDiagnoser Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF SD USB Disk Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through 607 Pass through Function 29 1 Ethernet Mode 29 1 1 How to install virtual serial port driver Before using Ethernet mode please check if Weintek virtual serial port driver is installed as shown below Open Project Manager to check if the driver is instal
343. me Local HMI s Setting Write when button is released send notificabon after writing sucessfully 7 Enable LEO Attribute 1 Mode The list style either List box or Drop down list 2 item no Set the number of items for the object Each item represents a state displayed in the list and a value to be written to the Monitor address 3 Background 308 Lig WE NTEK Object Change background color 4 Selection Change background color for the selected item 5 Source of item data There are 3 sources available Predefine Dates of historical data and Item address 6 Monitor address The value of selected item will be written to Monitor address Write when button is released If this option is selected the selected item value will be written to Monitor address after the button is released This option is only available in List Box style Source of item data 1 Predefine The list is manually defined in Mapping tab Attribute eina selsction ae Monitor address PL name Local HMI vw Setting Write when button is released The number of items can be adjusted by Item no and each item represents one state And each item has a value which will be written to Monitor address 2 Dates of historical data Option List object can be used with Trend Display History Data Display Event Display to control which history file shou
344. me The extension name of the setting file Igs m After setting the scaling values click Save Setting In the new Sampling Data Information dialog click Load Setting to use the settings saved before 575 W WEINTEK EasyConverter 25 3 How to Use Multi File Conversion Example E 1 Click File Multi File Add File to combine multiple files into one Excel xls file 2 Click Combine to a file files will be separated into sheets of one Excel xls file labeled with the dated it is created If this check box is not selected the files will be exported to Excel respectively Convert file list CM20111021 dtl C20111024 dt Time Milliseconibit Unsignbi 14 10 38 010 0 14 10 39 old 1 14 10 40 old 1 14 10 41 a10 1 14 10 42 ogi 1 14 10 43 950 1 14 10 44 a40 e eoa Enable Setting file 1 1 He Combine to file C Documents and Settings nicolas wuh20111021 xls Cancel The saved setting files can be loaded for combining Select both Enable Setting file and Combine to a file check boxes and select the files to be combined then click OK 576 Lr WE NTEK EasyPrinter Chapter 26 EasyPrinter EasyPrinter is a Win32 application and can only run on MS Windows 2000 XP Vista 7 It enables HMI to output screen hardcopies to a remote PC via Ethernet The following explains how to use EasyPrinter Screen ga Hardcopy
345. mote HMI HMI 21 to 39 545 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 20 Communication Status with Remote E Read R Write W Control Y Address Description Local Macho na LW 10050 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote toe PLC 1 IP address IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 Note1 PIETET LW 10051 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote test PLC 1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 ow ow LW 10052 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote toe PLC 1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 ow ow LW 10053 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote poss PLC 1 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 ow ow mv LW 10054 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote ow mv mv PLC 2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote crm oy RW PLC 2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10057 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote PLC 2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 ow ow mv 16bit IP3 of the HMI connecting to remote nm mv RW PLC 2 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10059 16bit port no of the HMI connecting to 16bit IPO of the HMI connecting to remote nm oy RW PLC 3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 LW 10061 16bit IP1 of the HMI connecting to remote ar PLC 3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 nm ony RW LW 10062 16bit IP2 of the HMI connecting to remote toe PLC 3 IP address IPO IP1 IP2 IP3 nm oy R
346. mote HMI 26 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9933 16bit remote HMI 26 s IP3 IP address R Y R Y Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits pointes PP 16bit remote HMI 26 s port no R Y R Y LW 9935 16bit remote HMI 27 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9936 16bit remote HMI 27 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9937 16bit remote HMI 27 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9938 16bit remote HMI 27 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9939 16bit remote HMI 27 s port no R Y R Y LW 9940 16bit remote HMI 28 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9941 16bit remote HMI 28 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9942 16bit remote HMI 28 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9943 16bit remote HMI 28 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9944 16bit remote HMI 28 s port no R Y R Y LW 9945 16bit remote HMI 29 s IPO IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9946 16bit remote HMI 29 s IP1 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9947 16bit remote HMI 29 s IP2 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 1P3 LW 9948 16bit remote HMI 29 s IP3 IP address R W R Y R Y IPO IP1 1P2 IP3 LW 9949 16bit remote HMI 29 s port no R Y R Y LW 9950 16bit remote HMI 30 s IPO IP address R
347. mp com exe EasySimulator exe gui exe xob_pos def m The files above can be found in EasyBuilder installation directory Please install EasyBuilder on a PC first then copy the relevant files to the target PC 597 ps WE NTEK EasySimulator 27 2 Set the Content of xob pos def Step 1 Open xob pos def using a text editing tool e g Notepad and set the relevant contents P xob pos Notepad File Edit Format view Help ar Fs operation mode 0 off line 1 on line DpiAtest f define the directory of com exe and qui exe DINEasyAccess xob 7 define the directory of xob file 0 execute Off line Simulation 1 execute On line Simulation The directories of the relevant files e g com exe gui exe EasySimulator exe etc Step 2 Double click on EasySimulator exe to start simulation Step 3 On line Off line Simulation is displayed on the screen cm m f EasySimulator exe can t be activated please check if the relevant directories are correct m If the dialog below is shown it indicates an error for xob file path please check again Failed to open project file No such file or directory 598 og WE NTEK Multi HMI Intercommunication Chapter 28 Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode Multi HMI intercommunication means that HMI uses COM port to connect with a remote HMI and read write data from to PLC connected to remote HMI as below PLC COM1
348. mulate project operation on PC and PLCs are directly connected with PC No need to Connect download project PC PLC amp set to HMI correct parameters to operate m When using On line simulation on PG if the target device is a local PLC the PLC is directly connected to PC there is a 10 minutes simulation limit L WE NTEK Project Manager Before executing On line Off line Simulation please select the source xob file When executing on line off line simulation right click to use these functions SS Exit simulation Stop simulating 00000 To mono auvent co Exit simulation To monitor current communication 00000 m Screenshot Capture and save current screen image as a picture file in the screenshot folder under the installation directory 26 L WE NTEK Project Manager 2 5 Pass Through This function allows the PC application to connect PLC via HMI In this case the HMI works like a converter Pass through provides two modes Ethernet and COM port When using Ethernet please install the virtual serial port driver first _ For more detail please refer to Chapter 29 Pass Through Function 27 L WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Project Chapter 3 Create an EasyBuilder Project Click on the icons to see illustration D Create a Save amp On line Download Off line Simulation to HMI Project Compile 3 1 Create a New Project EasyBuilde
349. n Read address value is greater than or equals to 29 30 1 Or less than or equals to 31 30 1 the event will be triggered The trigger condition 29 lt Read address value lt 31 After the event is triggered when Read address value is greater than 32 30 2 or less than 28 30 2 the system will return to normal condition Read address value lt 28 or Read address value gt 32 Example kr Condition Tigger i vale nors S e The setting above indicates When Read address value is less than 29 30 1 or greater than 31 30 1 the event will be triggered The trigger condition Read address value lt 29 or Read address value gt 31 After the event is triggered when Read address value is greater than or equals to 28 30 2 or less than or equals to 32 30 2 the system will return to normal condition 28 lt Read address value lt 32 82 Ki WE NTEK Event Log 7 2 2 Event Alarm Log Message Settings Select Message tab Alarm Event Log General Message Text Content Tank level low level WATCh d 0 J Label Library Rre da Font Arial vi Color i Acknowledge value for Event Alanm Display object Acknowledge value 11 Sound Enable Sound Library Beep Enable continuous beep until acknowledged or recovered Time delay of continuous beep 10 second s v Play Print JOntigger
350. n ascending order the index 0 file is the first file and so on e If the file cannot be found it will set Status bit 8 ON e Please stop the playing video before switching to another b Play previous file Command 2 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 cm e If File index of previous file was zero it replays the same file e If the file cannot be found it will set Status bit 8 ON c Play next file Command 3 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 e Ifthere are no more files it plays the index 0 file e If the file cannot be found it will set Status bit 8 ON d Pause Play Switch Command 4 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 272 Lig WE NTEK Object e Stop playing and close file Command 5 Parameter 1 ignore set 0 Parameter 2 ignore set 0 f Start playing at designated target location Command 6 Parameter 1 target time second Parameter 2 ignore set 0 ua e Parameter 1 target time must be less than the ending of time or it will play the last second g Forward Command 7 Parameter 1 target time second Parameter 2 ignore set 0 cm e Going Forward to the designated second in Parameter 1 If the video is paused the forwarding action will be started by playing e When the designed time is after than the ending of time it will play the last second h Backward
351. n object to use the libraries New Bit Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Shape Inner Frame z Interior pattern ar Pattern Style Duplicate these attributes to every state Picture Picture Library Use picture Set to original dimensions Preview Ce Sate Picture PB Red BMF 100x100 Background M 94 Lig WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 2 1 Settings of Shape Library Shape Library select Use shape check box to select a shape from the library Inner select this check box to set the inner part of a shape Click the drop down button to select a color or customize a color and click Add to Custom Colors EasyBuilder will save this color Custom colors miei ey f f TT IB EEE e Sat 240 Green lo Define Custo ColorlSalid um 120 Blue 255 1 as a Addto Custom Colors to Custom Colors Frame select this check box to set the frame of a shape Click the drop down button to select a color Interior Pattern set the color of the interior pattern of the shape Pattern Style Click this button to select a pattern 95 Lv WE NTEK Object General Properties Fattern Style Duplicate these attributes to every state Duplicate all attributes of the current state to the other states How to set Shape Library Click Shape Lib
352. n on the toolbar to open a Direct Window object Heer property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Direct Window object will be created 182 PL W WE NTEK Object New Direct Window Dhiect General bsa Read address PLE name Local HMI Setting Notitleba 9 Window No 3 Fast Selection Cancel Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Device type Address System tag Index register of the bit device that control the window popup Users can also set the address in General tab while adding a new object Attribute Style Define the popup window style Two styles are available No title bar and With title bar Window no Set the popup window number Here is an example to explain how to use the Direct Window object The picture below shows the settings of the Direct Window object In the example use LB 10 to call up window no 35 183 Lv WE NTEK Object Read address ce e Athibute a 4 Style Toggle Switch Window No 35 Window 035 Read address L810 Write address L810 Made Toggle If the state of LB 10 turned ON window no 35 will be popup if the state of LB 10 turned OFF window no 35 will be closed See the picture below WINDOW 35 Toggle Switch Toggle Switch Read address LB10 Write address LB10 Read address LB10 Write address LB1C Mode Toggle Mode Toggle WINDOW 35
353. nction returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of decimal string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main float src1 1 2345 char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringFloat2DecAsc src1 dest1 0 Success1 true dest1 1 2345 float src2 1 23456789 char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringFloat2DecAsc src2 dest2 0 Success2 true but it might lose precision float src3 1 2345 char dest3 5 bool success3 success3 StringFloat2DecAsc src3 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command Name StringHexAsc2Bin This function converts a hexadecimal string to binary data It converts the 420 S WEINTEK 0 Macro Reference Reference hexadecimal string in source parameter into binary data and stores it in the destination variable The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be a variable to store the result of conversion This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the source string contains characters other than 0 to 9 a to f or
354. nd add the window to the list For more information please see Chapter 12 Key Pad Design and Usage User s project can be restrained and executed on specific HMI only for series HMI Please refer to Chapter 30 Project protection for more information 59 Wes WEINTEK System Parameter Settings 5 4 System Setting System Setting is used to configure different functions of EasyBuilder System Parameter Settings Ed Font Extended Memory Frmter Backup Server Device Model General pysten setting Security startup language after redownloading the project Language 1 i Auto logout Enable i minute s When a v r does not operate the HMI for longer than the setting time the system will automatically logout Hide system setting bar Hide mouse cursor Use LB 9062 to open hardware sethng dialog Disable busser Prohibit remote HMI connecting to this machine Disable upload function effective after rebooting HMIior st LB9033 on Prohibit password remote read operation for t LB9053 on Prohibit password remote write operation for set LBOO54 on Use a disconnection icon on relative objects when PLC communication fails VNC server Password from project Password 111111 LIN protection Disable LW remote vrite via COM port or ethernet LW range 0 8 EIN protection Disable RW remote write via COM port or ethemet RW range 0
355. nd select Run EasyDiagnoser in the pop up menu Numeric Display Function Key Exit simulation Run EasyDiagnoser Screenshot Afterwards EasyDiagnoser will be started Logger window displays whether EasyDiagnoser is able to connect with the HMI to be watched or not Output window displays the output of the TRACE function The illustration below shows that EasyDiagnoser succeeds in connecting with HMI 480 Ki WE NTEK Macro Reference W Weintek HMI Diagnostic Tool EasyDiagnoser Eile View Options Help Command Read Write Device Al Mere Package ID Device St In Addres Address Type All Range E ac tassel LB 562 Mo Cmd PID Device St o 0 Local H LB 563 g 0 Local H LB 574 101 LacalH A0 3 Cukput Logger 15 04 36 Looking for the target HMI 16 04 36 Connection established with the target Hil When EasyDiagnoser is not able to connect with HMI Logger window displays content as shown below 15 17 35 Looking for the target HM The possible reason of not being able to get connection with HMI can be failure in executing simulation on PC Another reason is that the Port No used in project for simulation on PC is incorrect or occupied by system Please change Port No as shown compile project then do simulation again 481 og WE NTEK Macro Reference aystem Parameter Settings Ex
356. nd state 1 respectively Click Import Picture and a dialog appears as below Set Picture no and Picture name and then click Next Import Pitre Picture Picture no Picture name F YELLOW Step 3 When the dialog below is shown select a picture for state 0 If select Transparent check box and set to RGB 0 0 255 the blue area of this picture will be transparent After setting state 0 click Next button to set state 1 336 Ki WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library Get Picture Picture file State O CA Documents and Settingsy00 Emp State U Width 100 Height 100 Size 50054Bytes Transparent Select Transparent check box and click on an area of the picture the RGB value of the area will be displayed Take the settings above as an example the actual picture shown Is Step 4 Do the steps above again set the transparent area of the picture for state 1 and then click Finish A picture with two states will be created 337 og WE NTEK Get Picture Picture file State 1 sp E Shape Library and Picture Library CA Documents and Settingsi 11 Emp State 1 Width 100 Height 100 Size 50054Bytes Transparent When finished a new picture F Yellow is added to the library As shown this picture is in BMP format and has two states Picture Library Library button button2 buttona button button typell button typel g
357. nd time is ignored m If Setting on individual day is ON make sure that all start end times are entered If more than one start end day bit is ON and error will occur 303 Ly WE NTEK Object d Start End Day Start Day Time setting address 3 End Day Time setting address 7 Designates which day of week is used to trigger the start or end action 15 07 0 6 05 04 03 02 01 00 send bed sa ra rru wea rue mon sur Bit 00 Sunday 0 not used 1 used Bit Bit 01 Monday 0 not used 1 used Bit 02 Tuesday 0 not used 1 used Bit 03 Wednesday 0 not used 1 used Bit 04 Thursday 0 not used 1 used Bit 05 Friday 0 not used 1 used Bit 06 Saturday 0 not used 1 used e Start End Time Start Time Time setting address 4 to 6 End Time Time setting address 8 to 10 Hour 0 23 Minute 0 59 Second 0 59 Values outside these ranges will set the error bit in the Status word sl m 16 bit unsigned integer format must be used Does not support BCD format here m End time depends on Action mode address 2 Enable termination action bit 00 and Setting individual day bit 01 are related Setting individual day Enabled Disabled Enable termination action Enabled Enabled Disabled 304 Ki WE NTEK Object E Prohibit tab Scheduler General Time Set Prohibit Frohibit PLC name Local HMI Setting Prohibit Before the scheduled a
358. ndicates built in ethernet and or wireless networking Alternatively many devices may be operated on the network using an external JetDirect print server Not all network configurations are supported Please refer to the HPLIP FAQs for more information TT 565 Li WE NTEK 5 If Driver plug in Description shows Required as below this printer is not supported by HMI HMI Supported Printers Other Information hem Joseon noes Requires firmware download Mo APDK device class es LJColor Postscript HPLIP device sub classjesi HPLIP job storage 0 models dat name hp laserjet cml415tn Embedded web server i SS USB VID PID 1008 1848 mn Le sl Information provided in this website is intended to be accurate and reliable However Weintek Labs Inc assumes no responsibility for its use 566 Lieb WE NTEK HMI Supported Printers 23 3 How to Add a New Printer and Start Printing 23 3 1 Add Printer Type In System Parameter Settings Model select the printer type and set the relevant parameters x System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General System Setting Security HMI model MTSO70IHIMTSO70IHMTE LO0MTS100iMT3010 800 x 480 Ww HMI station mo 0 ye Port no 8000 fused as MODBUS server s port no Timer Clock source HMI RTC vi Printer Type To connect Remote Printer Se
359. nfigure the user passwords and security classes 5 5 1 Select operatable classes for each user System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model Generel System Setting Mecunty Select operatable classes for each user Password range 0 4294967295 No Enable Password Class A Class B Class C Class D A 1 1 O a 2 2 O 3 333 o Up to 12 sets of user and password are available Password should be one non negative integer Once the password is entered the objects that the user can operate are classified There are six security classes available A to F If None is selected for an object every user can access this object User restriction Object class For example when the security class of User1 is set as below User1 could only access objects of classes A B C and none For more information please refer to Chapter 10 Security melert operable classes for each user No Enable Passvord Class Class B Clase C 1 1 63 vg WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Project password MTP file Project password MTP file Z Enstle Users can set password to protect the project mtp files The password set here must be entered when editing the project file Select Enable then click Setting and the dialog below opens HTE file Password 111111 range 1 4294967295 Before editing a project a popup window is shown for en
360. ng pass through COM port function click Stop Pass through to stop it HMI will then restart to communicate with PLC 29 2 2 HMI Work Mode There are three work modes of HMI Mode Description S Unknown Before reading the settings of HMI the work mode is Unknown After reading the settings of HMI if the work mode is Normal the HMI does not accept any data form the Source COM Port Pass through If the work mode is Pass through the PC connected via Source COM Port can control the PLC connected via Destination COM Port 615 Ly WE NTEK Pass through Function 29 3 Using System Registers to Enable Pass Through Another way to enable Pass through is to use the system registers When the values of LW 9901 Source COM Port and LW 9902 Destination COM Port match the conditions below HMI will start Pass through automatically a The values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 must be 1 3 1 3 COM 1 COM 3 b The values of LW 9901 and LW 9902 must be different To change the communication parameters just change the value in the related registers and set ON LB 9030 update COM 1 communication parameters LB 9031 update COM 2 communication parameters and LB 9032 update COM 3 communication parameters HMI will be forced to update the settings E 16bit COM 1 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9551 16bit COM 1 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 2 19200 3 38400 4 57600 16bit COM
361. ng time interval is set to 0 1 second the max number of data records is still 86400 Data Record Max data records 1000 auto stop Data Format Data length 0 wordis Data Format Available to read several data in different format Data Format 16 bit Unstened il H 16 bit mened New ooo 2 Temperature 32 bit Float Auto stop This function depends on the arrangement of different objects and modes Set Max data records to n Objects not selecting Auto stop selecting Auto stop Deletes the earlier records Stops after reaching the and displays the latest specified number of data Trend Display Real Time number of records n in records n Trend Display Please refer to the following figure Trend Display Historical displays all history data in specified number of data Trend Display records n Keeps on sampling data and Stops after reaching the History Data Display displays all history data in specified number of data History Data Display records n Keeps on sampling new Stops sampling after Data Sampling data reaching the specified number of data records n 87 Ly WE NTEK Data Sampling The figure illustrates how the data is sampled in Trend Display Real Time mode when Auto stop check box is not selected EX 1 001 1 002 2 002 2 003 3 003 3 004 4 004 4 005 5 005 5 006 6 006 6 007 7 007 7 008 8 008 8 009 9 009 9 010 10 010 10 011 11 011 As sho
362. ngle bit in the data 505 p WE NTEK How to Connect a Barcode Reader Chapter 20 How to Connect a Barcode Reader Barcode reader interfaces Weintek HMI SIN HH VID FHM PID MM COM PORT 20 1 How to Connect with a Barcode Reader HMI can connect with USB COM port barcode reader or keyboard Please add a new device in Edit System Parameter Settings Device list as shown below Click Settings and finish Barcode Device Keyboard Settings Device Properties Name Barcode USB COM HMI PLC Location Local sl Settings PLC type Barcode US BLOM Barcode Device Keyboard Settings O Barcode device Keyboard Settings Timeout 1 0 sec V Read byte limit com com1 jo 2 Baud rate 9600 vi Data bits 8 Bits vi Y Use a start code Parity None vi Start code O gt Stop bits 1 Bit vi Terminator GRAF OSTYETX Oother 0 O None JC Cancel 506 W WE NTEK How to Connect a Barcode Reader Barcode Device Keyboard Settings Barcode device Keyboard Timeout 1 Y Read byte limit COM i Baud rate Data bits Use a start code Parity Start code 0 Stop bits Terminator cR LE OSTX ETX Oother None Cancel Timeout When select Keyboard set a time range for keyboard entries The system starts counting time from the first entry COM Baud rate
363. ngth 15 bitis 279 re WE NTEK Object 13 27 PLC Control Overview PLC Control object can execute commands when it is triggered These commands include Change window Back light control etc Configuration Click the PLC Control icon on the toolbar to open the PLC Control Object EE management dialog To add a PLC Control object click New set up the properties press OK button and a new PLC Control object will be created FLC Control Object Change window Write data to PLC current base window General PLC control LB5300 Back light controliwrite back 280 og WE NTEK Object Click New and the following dialog box will appear PLC Control PLC name Local HMI k Attribute Type of control WrEue EAS ei Change window Write data to PLC current base window ID General PLC control Back light control write back Back light control Sound control Execute macro program Trigger address Screen hardcop PLC name Setting Active only w Turn on back Use window Attribute Type of control Select a type of control form the drop down list Change window Write data to PLC current base window ID General PLO control Back light control write back Back light control Sound control Execute macro program Screen hardcop a Change window Place a valid window number in the designated trigger address to change the base screen to the new window number By default
364. nnennnnnnsnnnnssennnnnnsennnnn 615 29 3 Using System Registers to Enable Pass Through rrrrrnnnnnnnnnnrennnnerennnnvrennnnvne 616 NT POE ve 618 LE AS SVN essex E A E E AE E E 619 30 2 Decompilation is Prohibited rrrnrrnarevnnrvnnnrvnnennnrnnnnrranennnennnnennnennnennnnnnnnennsennnne 620 30 3 Disable XOB Upload Function ccccccceecccseeeceeeeceeeeseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseueeseneesaees 621 EPO 622 30 5 MIP PASSWOMG vvavvervossavamssemunmeensivvdd veden o 623 Chapter 31 Memory Map Communication cccccccccceeeecceeeeceeeeseeeeesseeeesseeeesseeeesaeeeeeas 624 ITM e E 624 IEL PIN SUNO eee ee eee a eee eee ee eer 624 31 3 Communication Flowchart rrrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnenrnnnennnnnennnnsennnnsennnnennnnnee 625 31 4 Address TyYpesS rrrrrnnnnrnnnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennnnennanennnsennnsennnnennnsennnnennnsennnnennsee 627 KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 User Manual 31 4 1 Communication Examples rrrrnnrrrnnnnrnvnnnrrrnnnrnrannrnnnnnennansennnnsennnssnnnnseen 628 31 5 Settings rrrrnnrnrvrnnnnrvrrnnnrvvrnnnrenrnnnrennnnnssnnnnnsrnnnnnnrnnnnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnnnsennnnsssnnnnsnennnnssee 630 31 5 1 Add a Memory Map Device rannnnnnnnennnnnennnnnvnnnnnennnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnennnnsen 630 I KA ODJECU JE 632 31 5 3 Ex cul the STINGS cseccwenesexenexevexcwexedaxsoesesexeeaxsdausteexedaxsmasadertsaveteneeredexet 634 Chapter 32 FTP Server Application ccccccccccsse
365. nnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnre 107 10 2 Object Securty SENOS sussebass 108 10 3 Example of Object Security Settings rrrrnnrrrrnnnerranrerrnnrernnnrrrnnnrnnnnnrnrnnnennnnnen 109 Chapter 11 Index Register rrrrranrnrnrannrnrannerranrernannennnnsennnnsnnnnnsnnnnnsnnnnnsnnnnnennnnsennnnnennnnsene 112 VINN 112 11 2 Examples of Index Register rrrrrnrnrrnnnrvnnrvrnnennrennnrnnnrennnennnrnnnnennnennnrnnnnnnnnennsen 113 Chapter 12 Keyboard Design and Usage rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrennnnnsennnnnsennnnsnenn 116 KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 User Manual 12 1 Steps to Design a Popup Keyboard rrrrarrvvnnnvvnnrvvnnrvrnnrnvnnrnvnnrnnnrrnnnnsnnnnnnnsen 117 12 2 Steps to Design a Keyboard with Direct Window rrrrnnnnnennnnnvnnnnnennnnrnnnnnnnnnnne 120 12 3 Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard on SCreen arrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnrennnnrennnnee 122 12 4 Steps to Design a UNICODE Keyboard rrvrarnrvnnrnvnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnsnnnnnee 123 PTR NE ee 124 EE ET JE aaa PERRE ERA EENE RERE RENERE RERE 125 T2 Le 128 VS 133 EE 0 0 EE ee eee ee ee 137 19 5 FUNCHON ROY osier dipinna A T AT ASAA AAAI AARAA AETA AAEN dancer ans 146 LTE MN 153 OS ES eg eee een eee eee nen ee ee ee een meee ene ee enone enone 156 BEST ee ene eee See E ern ene ee cere eee eet eee eee eee 160 13 9 Numeric Input and Numeric Display cccccccceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesaeeesaeens 164 13 10 ASCII Inpu
366. nnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 595 26 4 4 The Order of Examining Griterion rrrnnrrrrnnnrrrnnnenrannenrnnrernnnrennnnrnnnnnnnn 595 Chater 27 Easy Si MON EE 597 27 1 Prepare Needed FIl S cccccsecccsscecececeuceceuceceuceceueeceusecsueessusessueesueesaueessaees 597 27 2 Set the Content of XOD pos def rrnrrrurrannnnenannnnrnarnanenernannnnrnarnanenernusnneenesnnnen 598 Chapter 28 Multi HMI Intercommunication Master Slave Mode cccssseessseeeeseeeeees 599 28 1 How to Create a Project of Master HMI runnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnrnnnnenrnnnnennnnerennnnsenennnnsnee 600 28 2 How to Create a Project of Slave HMI rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnrnnnrenrnnnnenvnnenennnnenennnnsner 601 28 3 How to Connect with MT500 Project of Slave HM rrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnennnnr 604 Chapter 29 Pass through FUNCTION cccccccccceeececeeceeceeeeceecesseecesseusessaeeessaeeesseeeesseeeeas 607 ETEN 608 29 1 1 How to install virtual serial port river rrrarrrrnrrrrnrrrrnrrernrrernrrrnnrrennrrnnnen 608 29 1 2 How to Change the Virtual Serial Port rrrrnnnnrrennnnnrvrnnnnnvrnnnnrernnnnnnennnnn 609 29 1 3 How to Use Ethernet Mode rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnsnnnnnen 610 202 COM Por Mdb ee 613 29 2 1 Settings of COM Port Mode rrnnnnrnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnenrnnerennnnsnennnnsnennnn 613 29 2 2 HMI Work Mode arnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnonrnnnnennnnnsennnnnsennnn
367. nput object and ASCII Display object can be used to display ASCII or UNICODE characters held in a number of sequential registers form a designated word register ASCII Input object can be used to input a value into a register via a keyboard Configuration Click the ASCII Input or ASCII Display icon on the toolbar to open a RBC RE I ASCII Input or ASCII Display object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new ASCII Input or ASCII Display object will be created 173 pi WE NTEK Object Hew ASCII Input Object General Data Entry Security Shape Font Mask Use UNICODE Reverse highflow byte Read address PLL name Local HMI wr Setting Notification O Set ON Set OFF Before writing _ After writing PLC name Local HMI w Setting Cancel Mask If selected any values entered will be hidden by displaying them as Use UNICODE Select this check box to display data in UNICODE format If not selected the characters are displayed in ASCII format This feature can be used with the Function Key object UNICODE Reverse high low byte Normally an ASCII code is displayed in high ABCD BADC byte low byte order Reverse selection makes the system display ASCII characters in The left object is in normal form and low byte high byte order another is high low bvte reversed 174 og
368. ns Edit Print Job Orientation Scaling Original Fit To Margin Margins mm Left 15 Top 15 e Edit Delete Delete the selected tasks permanently e Edit Select All Select all tasks from Job List m The backup task is not editable m Edit is available only when a task is selected m Delete is available when at least one task Is selected 588 e View Properties Bar EasyPrinter Show or hide the Property Window e View Preview Bar Show or hide the Preview Window e View Download Bar In Download Progress Window the mode to display download progress can be set by clicking the header of the progress column as shown below From Progr v Percentage Display Data Length Display e View Logger Bar EasyPrinter can reserve up to 10 000 messages in Message Window If a new message comes in the oldest message will be deleted The following is the detail for Options Settings 1 General MT Box Remote Printer Server Settings General Hardcopy Backup Server Port number of the server socket 8005 User name Max length 12 characters Password Max length 12 characters 111111 Naming Convention for HAL Folder when writing files 8 Use IP address Use HMI name assign HMI name by Lyw90327Lyw9033 Prefix Properties Minimize to system tray Detailed message 589 Lr WE NTEK EasyPri
369. nsigned 16 bit Unsigned 2012 01 30 14 33 16 290 3 2012 01 30 14 33 17 290 4 2012 01 30 14 33 18 290 6 2012 01 30 14 33 19 290 7 2012 01 30 14 33 20 290 8 2012 01 30 14 33 21 290 9 2012 01 30 14 33 22 290 11 2012 01 30 14 33 23 290 12 2012 01 30 14 33 24 330 13 ee ee Date Time Millisecond sample NW _ w Select number of digits after decimal point L 14 33 13 290 0 14 33 14 290 1 ERE 30 14 33 15 290 2 5 2012 30 14 33 16 290 3 6 2012 90 14 33 17 290 4 2012 1 30 14 33 18 290 6 8 2012 30 14 33 19 290 F 9 2012 41 90 14 33 20 290 8 2012 1 30 14 33 21 290 9 7 2012 1 30 14 33 22 290 11 Include millisecond information 2012 1 30 14 33 23 390 12 2012 1 30 14 33 24 330 13 2012 1 30 14 33 25 290 14 2012 1 30 14 33 26 290 16 2012 1430 14 33 27 290 17 2012 41 30 14 33 28 290 18 hd o lt 572 E Pre gt WEINTEK EasyConverter When opening an event log file an Event column can be found as shown below 0 Event triggered 1 Event acknowledged 2 Event returns to normal a hias Event Category Date Time Message 0 1 0 2012 01 13 19 29 47 Event 0 1 10 2012 01 13 19 29 49 Event 0 2 10 2012 01 13 19 29 50 Event 0 0 10 2012 01 13 19 29 52 Event 0 2 10 2012 01 13 19 29 52 Event 0 0 10 2012 01
370. nter e Server Port number of the server socket Set the Ethernet port number to connect HMI The range is 1 to 65535 and 8005 is the default value User name amp Password Set the user name and password to restrict that only authorized HMI can send requests to EasyPrinter e Naming Convention for HMI Folder EasyPrinter use different folders to store files e g hardcopy bitmap files backup files from different HMI There are two ways to name the folders Use IP address EasyPrinter names the folder in Prefix IP address after the HMI in this IP address sends request 192 168 1 26 Etnemet a 192 168 1 27 192 168 1 28 Use HMI name EasyPrinter names the folder in Prefix HMI name after the HMI this name indicates sends request e Properties Minimize to system tray If this check box is selected the EasyPrinter shortcut icon will be placed in the system tray in PC Double click the icon in system tray to open EasyPrinter Detailed message Select this check box to display more detailed messages about events in the message window 590 Lyh WE NTEK EasyPrinter 2 Hardcopy MT Box Remote Printer Server Settings General Output Hardcopy Print out to Epson Stylus COLOR 640 ESCIP 2 v SE Save to files in fe EasyPrinter provides two modes to output hardcopy results e Output Print out to Inform EasyPrinter to print out the hardcopy result with the specified printers S
371. nter if a Data Sampling history file named 20090112 dtl is uploaded and stored EasyPrinter will send out the following command to a console window 1 EasyConverter c 20090112 ot A file named 20090112 csv Is created The criteria of the default Convert Batch File 1 Convert all Data Sampling history files dtl into csv files 2 Convert all Event Log history files evt into csv files Pathname in the second argument stands for the full path name of the file In the previous case EasyPrinter replaces it with Specified Path HMI Folder datalog Folder name of the Data Sampling object 200901 12 dtl m EasyPrinter interprets the Convert Batch File in line basis i e each line forms a criterion Any two arguments should be separated by a comma Every argument should be put in double quotes Do not put any comma inside an argument Please refer to chapter25 Easy Converter for more information 26 4 2 Specialized Criteria Sometime specialized criterion are needed when e Upload file to a specific HMI see listing 2 e Identify the HMI by HMI name see listing 3 e Process differently to different Data Sampling see listing 4 This can only be used for Data Sampling file with the file name voltage The 3rd argument indicates this criterion accepts the Data Sampling files that meet the criterion from any HMI Users can also change the 3rd argument to 192 168 1 26 19
372. o of channels is changed you must reset HMI data sampling Hanns time range Pixel 8 Time Default distance second is Dymanruc X axis time range Hold control Enable PLE name Local HMI Setting Watch line Enable PLE name Local HMI Ww Setting Time stamp output Enable PLE name Local HMI wt Setting Data Sampling Object index Select a Data Sampling object as the source data Trend mode Select the mode of data source either Real time or History 211 Ly WE NTEK Object a Real time In this mode it displays the sampling data from the moment HMI starts to present If other data are needed select History mode to read the data from history data Hold control Suspend the update of Trend Display It does not stop the sampling process of Data Sampling object The picture below shows the Hold control setting b History In this mode the data come from the history data of the Data Sampling object defined by Data Sampling Object index The sampling data is sorted by dates The system uses History control to select the history data that are created in different dates The system sorts the history data of sampling data by date the latest file is record 0 Normally it is the sampling data today the second latest file is record 1 and so on If the value of designated register in History control is n the Trend Display object will display data record n
373. o calculate 32 divided by the number of channels 250 Object 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display Overview Alarm Bar and Alarm Display objects are used to display alarm messages which are login in Event Alarm Log When designated addresses meet the trigger condition events or alarms will be displayed in time date order as they occurred in Alarm Bar or Alarm Display Alarm Bar scrolls all alarm messages In one single display line where Alarm Display shows active alarm messages in multiple lines Please refer to the relevant chapters about Event Log Alarm Bar Displays alarm messages in one single line 13 12 06 13 21 38 Event 2 when LB70 OM 13 12 0606 13 21 38 Event 3 when LET OM 13 12 06 13 21 38 Event 0 when LWO 100 13 12 06 13 21 38 Event f When LW f gt 10 Alarm Display Displays active alarm messages in multiple lines Configuration 2 Click the Alarm Display or Alarm Bar icon on the toolbar to open a Alarm Display or Alarm Bar object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Alarm Display or Alarm Bar object will be created The difference between these two objects is that Alarm Display can be controlled by a designated Acknowledge address 251 og WE NTEK Object Hew Alarm Display Object gt General Alarm Shape Font Description Acknowledge address PLC name Local
374. o normal time Sequence NO Event message EEE EJ EE coo OOo Ad If Display chars is 0 it means that the system will display all of characters Date MELODIY h l Tome HH MM SS v Include categories Select the categories displayed in Event Display Events within these categories will be displayed only For example if the category is set to 2 to 4 only events in categories 2 3 4 will be displayed Please refer to Chapter 7 Event Log Acknowledge style Select of Click or Double Click to acknowledge each single event When a new event occurs the operator can tap the event line once or twice to acknowledge the new event 260 p WE NTEK Object When acknowledged the text color of the event will change to that selected in the color section and Write value associated with that event will be sent to the register designated in the Alarm Event log Users could configure an Indirect Window object so that when an event is acknowledged the Write value is written into the read address of the Indirect Window to call a popup window with warning message As shown below if address Is set to LW 100 when the event is confirmed write 31 to the address When users acknowledge the event 31 is written to LW 100 Hew Event Display Object General Event Display Shape Font Description Mode Real time v cknowled ge lini z PLC name Local HMI v Setting _ Address LW v 100 I 16 b
375. of the column assigned in Mode is Selects the events where the value of the column assigned in Mode is Selects the events where the value of the column assigned in Mode falls in the specified range 32 Value 0 i m To query Type Device or User name the acceptable status is 0 or 1 That is if the status is 0 all the events are displayed Otherwise it selects the events only if the value of the column assigned in mode equals to the value in the query address of Type Device or User name m Set both Mode and Status to start the query The SOE Display tab is shown in the following figure 692 Ly WE NTEK Sequence of Events SOE Display Object s Properties x General SOE Display Shape Font Profile Max event no 200 Color Transparent Frame Background ME select box Fr Format port Time amending d Tome descending Order amp Characters Display items Display chars F Sequence no 0 Event tigger date 0 Type Event trigger time 1 Device Event trigger date v Event message 0 Event message Type 1 Device 0 Operator T If Display chars is D it meane that the system will display all of characters Date FY MM DD Time HHMMSS Setting Desorption S Max event no Enter the number of events to display When the number of triggered events is greater than this number the old events are overwritten by the ne
376. ommand 32 short address checksum FILL command 0 0 32 initialize command 0 command 31 to 0 462 N WE NTEK Macro Reference command 0 Ox1 station number command 1 0x3 read holding registers function code is 0x3 address 0 starting address 4x 1 is 0 HIBYTE address command 2 LOBYTE address command 3 read no 2 the total words of reading is 2 words HIBYTE read no command 4 LOBYTE read no command 5 CRC command 0 checksum 6 calculate 16 bit CRC LOBYTE checksum command 6 HIBY TE checksum command 7 Lastly use OUPORT to send out this read request to PLC OUTPORT command 0 MODBUS RTU Device 8 send read request After sending out the request use INPORT to get the response from PLC Depending on the protocol the content of the response is as follows the total byte is 9 command 0 station number BYTE 0 command 1 function code BYTE 1 command 2 byte count BYTE 2 command 3 high byte of 4x 1 BYTE 3 command 4 low byte of 4x 1 BYTE 4 command 5 high byte of 4x 2 BYTE 5 command 6 high byte of 4x 2 BYTE 6 command 7 low byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 7 command 8 high byte of 16 bit CRC BYTE 8 The format of INPORT is INPORT response 0 MODBUS RTU Device 9 return value read response 463 FK WE NTEK Macro Reference Where the real read count is restored to the variable return value unit is byte If return
377. on effective after rebooting HMI or set LB9033 ON Disable HMI to upload project after downloading HMI must be rebooted to disable uploading project Prohibit password remote read operation or set LB9053 ON Prohibit Remote HMI to read Local HMI password Prohibit password remote write operation or set LB9054 ON Prohibit Remote HMI to write Local HMI password Use a disconnection icon or relative objects when PLC communication fails Decide whether or not to display a disconnection icon on relevant objects when failing to communicate with PLC a When using this function and fail to communicate with PLC this icon will be shown in the lower right corner of the object as below 61 Lg WE NTEK System Parameter Settings VNC Server Set the password to log in VNC server LW protection RW protection If select Disable LW RW remote write check boxes and set the protect range in LW RW range values within the protected range cannot be adjusted using Remote HMI Easy Access server Through this technology users can easily access to any HMI connected to the internet and operate them on PC just like holding touch screen in hand Easy Access does not transmit updated graphic images directly but only the real time data This makes transmission really quick and efficient Please refer to EasyAccess Manual for more information 62 vg WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 5 Security Parameters in this tab co
378. op USB STORAGE A Supports USB devices such as mouse keyboard USB disk printer or barcode device lt MINI USB vw Download Upload project including recipe transfer event log data log etc In addition Weintek provides MT8 Multi Connector Cable to expand the COM port for easier operation 37 Ki WE NTEK Hardware Settings 4 2 System Settings For the first time operating HMI please complete the following system settings When finished the project files designed using EasyBuilder can be used on HMI 4 2 1 System Reset Each HMI is equipped with a reset button and a DIP switch When using DIP switch to change modes the corresponding functions will be triggered If system password is lost or forgotten please flip DIP Switch 1 to ON and the rest to OFF and then reboot HMI al ALEINE HIT er HIT HMI will switch to touch screen calibration mode 1 A sign appears on the screen touch the center of the sign after all 5 signs are touched disappears and the touch screen parameters will be stored in HMI system 2 After calibration confirm to restore the default password select Yes 3 Confirm to restore the default password again by typing yes and clicking OK The project files and history records stored in HMI will all be removed The default local password is 111111 However other passwords such as download upload pass
379. or Window No 3 To use selection the fast selection button create Window No 3 first a Attribute Fast selection button ion Hide button when HMI starts button Enable or disable fast selection window Select Enable and click Settings to set the attributes including color and text of the button b Position Fast selection button Attribute Enable Position Hide button when HMI starts Select the button position on the screen If Left is chosen the button will show up in at bottom left side of the screen if Right is chosen the button will show at the bottom right side of the screen Screen a Back light saver saver If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit set here the back light will be turned off The unit is minute Back light will be on again once the screen is touched If none is set the back light will always be on b Screen saver If the screen is left untouched and reaches the time limit set here The current screen will automatically switch to a window assigned in Saver window no The setting unit is minute If none is set this function is disabled c Saver window no To assign a window for screen saver a Startup window no Designate the window shown when start up HMI b Common window Options etartip window no 10 WINDOW 010 w Common window Above bas window Object layout Below base window base window i Abi ny bi windi 11
380. or a variable Return also ends function block execution A function block is not always necessary to return a value but when the return type is defined in the beginning of the definition of function the return command is needed endsub Must be used to end a function block 377 re WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 6 Built In Function Block EasyBuilder has many built in functions for retrieving and transferring data to the PLC data management and mathematical functions 18 6 1 Mathematical Functions Name SQRT SQRT source result Description Calculate the square root of source and store the result into result source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable source must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float source result SQRT 15 result source 9 0 SQRT source result result is 3 0 end macro_command CUBERT CUBERT source result Description Calculate the cube root of source and store the result into result source can be a constant or a variable resu t must be a variable source must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float source result CUBERT 27 result result is 3 0 source 27 0 CUBERT source result result is 3 0 378 re WE NTEK Macro Reference i end macro command Name POW o O POW source source2 result Description Calculate source1 to the power of source2 source and source2 can be a constant or a variable re
381. or displaying events Event message Sets the index number of the device and event and the list corresponding message content to be displayed When the system receives a SOE data frame there are two conditions must be satisfied when comparing the following values in order to trigger the corresponding message 1 The value in Trigger device matches the value in Device column 2 The value gained by calculating Type x 1000 Bit offset of the event indicator matches the value in Index column If either of the Device or Index columns is not defined the event message with index number 0 is displayed For example if the value of Type is 1 and the value of Event indicator is 5 Binary 101 the event messages with index number 1001 and 1003 will be triggered 1 x 1000 Bit 1 gt Event Index 1001 1 x 1000 Bit 3 gt Event Index 1003 688 Ly WE NTEK Sequence of Events The way of setting SOE is different comparing EasyBuilder8000 versions earlier than V4 65 04 with versions later than V4 65 05 The major difference is the way to calculate the event message index value as compared in the following table Versions before and includes EB8000 V4 65 04 Versions after and includes EB8000 V4 65 05 Type x 16 Bit offset of the event index For example if the value of Type is 1 and the value of Event index is 5 Binary 101 the event messages with index number 17 and 19 will be triggered 1 x 16
382. or particular purpose The address tags are divided into bit or word LB or LW After selecting System tag not only will the Device type displays the chosen tag Address will also display the chosen tag as shown below Address PLC name Local HMI k Device type LB S000 initialized as ON adm B Address Format DDDDD range 0 12095 Index register 92 og WE NTEK Object General Properties The illustration below shows a part of system tags For more information please refer to Chapter 16 Address Tag Library and Chapter 22 System Reserved Words and Bits Address PL name Device type Address Address Format Index register Select this check box to use the index register please refer to Chapter 11 Index Register for more information Selecting Data Type LB 9000 initialized as ON LE 9000 initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON initialized as ON Pr A gt Ill EasyBuilder supports data types that are listed below Selecting correct data type is necessary especially when using address tag 16 bit B 32 bit BCO 16 bit Hex 32 bit Hex 16 bit Unsigned 16 bit Signed 32 bit Unigned 32 bit Signed 32 bit Float 93 Le WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 2 Using Shape Library and Picture Library Shape Library and Picture Library are used for adding visual effect on objects Select Shape tab when creating a
383. osition of a data source to 0 and put in changed data into result source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos SETBITOFF 9 result 3 result is 1 source 4 bit pos 2 SETBITOFF source result bit pos result is 0 end macro_command INVBIT INVBIT source result bit pos Description Inverts the state of designated bit position of a data Source and put changed data into result source and bit_pos can be a constant or a variable resu t must be a variable macro_command main int source result short bit_pos INVBIT 4 result 1 result 6 source 6 bit_pos 1 INVBIT source result bit_pos result 4 393 re WE NTEK Macro Reference end macro command 18 6 5 Communication DELAY time Description Suspends the execution of the current macro for at least the specified interval time The unit of time is millisecond time can be a constant or a variable macro_command main int time 500 DELAY 100 delay 100 ms DELAY time delay 500 ms end macro_command ADDSUM ADDSUM source start result data count Description Adds up the elements of an array source from source start to source start data count 1 to generate a checksum Puts in the checksum into result result must be a variable data_count is the amount of the accumulated elements and can be a constant o
384. output buffers associated with the COM port 408 re WE NTEK Y WENTEK 0 Macro Reference Reference macro command main int com port 3 PURGE com port PURGE 1 end macro command Name SetRTS SetRTS com port source Description Set RTS state for RS232 com port refers to the COM port number It can be either a variable or a constant source can be either a variable or a constant This command raise RTS signal while the value of source is greater than 0 and lower RTS signal while the value of source equals to 0 macro_command main char com_port 1 char value 1 SetRTS com_port value raise RTS signal of COM1 while value gt 0 SetRTS 1 0 lower RTS signal of COM1 end macro_command GetCTS GetCTS com port result Description Get CTS state for RS232 com port refers to the COM port number It can be either a variable or a constant result is used for receiving the CTS signal It must be a variable This command receives CTS signal and stores the received data in the result variable When the CTS signal is pulled high it writes 1 to result otherwise it writes 0 macro_command main char com_port 1 char result 409 re WE NTEK Y WEINTEK 0 Macro Reference Reference GetCTS com port result get CTS signal of COM1 GetCTS 1 result get CTS signal of COM1 end macro command Description _ sound This command plays a beep sound with frequency of 800 hertz and duration of 30 millis
385. ovides a conversion tool to convert the uploaded Data Sampling and Event Log history files to csv files automatically To do so please prepare a Convert Batch File to inform EasyPrinter to convert the history files Backu i dtl I Ethernet evt eMT3000 EasyPrinter Convert Batch File EasyConverter In the illustration above the conversion is actually executed by EasyConverter EasyPrinter simply follows the criteria in Convert Batch File and activates EasyConverter with proper arguments to achieve the conversion EasyConverter is another Win32 application that converts history data into csv or MS Excel xls files Users can find it in the EasyBuilder installation directory m Users requesting this function must ensure EasyPrinter and EasyConverter are placed in the same directory 26 4 1 The Default Value of Convert Batch File The following is the default Convert Batch File convert2csv def Listing 1 Default Convert Batch File There are two lines in the file Each line has two arguments separated by a comma and forms a criterion of how to process a specific type of files The first argument stands for the extension name of the file type to be processed The second argument stands for the command to be executed in console mode Please note that Pathname is a key word to inform EasyPrinter to replace it with the real name of the converted backup file For example 593 Ly WE NTEK EasyPri
386. ow Object layout Nature v RW A enabled C Use LW9450 9455 as time tags of event logs Extra no of events me Keyboard 111 Keyboard Caret color Select color 152 L WE NTEK Object 13 6 Toggle Switch Overview Toggle Switch object is a combination of Bit Lamp object and Set Bit object The appearance of the object is controlled by the ON OFF state of the read bit address when pressing the button Configuration Click the Toggle Switch icon on the toolbar to open a Toggle Switch object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Toggle Switch object will be created 153 NG WE NTEK Object Hew logele Switch Object General Security Shape Label Read address PL name Local HMI w Setting Invert sional Write address PLC name Local HMI Setting Write when button is released A ttribute Macro Execute macro D Cancel Read address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the Toggle Switch object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Invert signal Reverses the display of ON OFF states For example if Invert signal check box is selected when the designated bit is OFF the object displays ON state 154 Ly WE NTEK Object Write address
387. ow Reversed CO Mumeric 677 LW WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 4 Macro Settings 35 4 1 Add Macro There are two ways to create a Macro object 1 Select from the toolbar Objects Add Object Add Macro J Untitled EasyWatch SWEA File Edit Objects Help le ji ret Objent New Page l Name Cal HMI Manager B Add new mac SAP NUM SCRL 2 Select from the quick selection tools Add Macro 678 we WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 4 2 Macro Settings Macro Settings HMI Macro Type Active Type Direct Active Macro Macro Macro ID 0 Macro ID Sleep Sleep Time _ Down Clean Remove Help Name Name the object and the name can t be repeated HMI Select a HMI to monitor Macro Type The ways to execute Macro include Direct Active or Cycle Active Macro Each Macro Object can execute multiple macros The time interval between the execution of two macros can be set 679 Ly WE NTEK EasyWatch 35 4 3 Add New Macro Settings 1 HMI Please refer to 35 3 3 Add a New Device 2 Macro Type Set to Direct Active or Cycle Active Direct Active Directly execute Macro once Macro Settings Vi Diect Active Cycle Active Direct Active Cycle Active Set the interval of executing Macros Macro Setlinzs For example if Cycle Active is set to 5 seconds
388. ow to use multi language 1 Create a Text Object and select Use label Hew Text Object x 1 library check box Text 2 Create a Numeric Input Object and use Er koble let system register LW 9134 Cte bitmap font Attribute Font Color EE Sie 16 m Italic Underline Duplicate these attrib D sd Hew Homeric Input Object Ea General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shane Font Movement i Dimens EN Deserpton O SOS Content Read Write use different addresses Read address Address LW 9134 16bit language mode w W 44 Ly WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language When compiling select the languages Compiling Project name C Documents and Settings user Desktop MTP1 mtp XOB file name C Documents and Settings user Desktop MTP1 xob XOB password Setting fused in decompiler Decompilation is prohibited Select the languages used on the HMI Startup language after redownloading the project Language 1 v Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 Language 5 Language 6 Language 7 Language 8 Picture size 3353858 bytes Shape size 144 bytes Sound size 36474 bytes Macro size 14 bytes Address tag size 10 bytes Label tag size 28 bytes Total size 3798030 bytes 3 62M succeeded Double click error messages to modify the attributes of relative objects Compile V Build font files The simulation is sho
389. pe Data Automatically rrrnnnnnnrnnnnonrnnnnenrnnnrernnnnrennnnenennnnnnrnnnnnnenn 353 Chapter 18 Macro Reference rrrnrnnnrrnrnnnnvnrnnnnvnnnnnnennnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnnnsennnnsnsen 354 18 1 Instructions to use the Macro Editor rrrarernnrennnrrnnnnvanennnrnnnnrnanennnrnnnnevanennnnnnnen 354 18 2 Macro Construction vvrrv Z2 01141 m6311416ss4 300 362 Sa e A 363 18 3 1 Constants and Variables rrrrrnnrrrrnnrrrnnnrnrnnnrrrnnnenrnnnerrnnnennanrennnsennnsnnnnn 363 EG srsracsrnsnrokeesrisocnnsrna skan AEREE EREEREER EREKE ERES EKANSAN EERE ERREEN RRE ERRER SARE RANEE 365 TN 368 18 41 Definition Stateme Me LuaarsesereeeGGSeGGGe eee 368 18 4 2 Assignment Statement rannnnnnnnnrnnrnnnrvnrnnnnvnrnnnrrnrnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnennnnsnrnnnnsnee 368 18 4 3 Logical StatementS rrrrrnnrnrnrnnnrorrnnnrerrnnnrervnnnrenrnnnrennnnerennnnenennnnsnennnnsnee 369 18 4 4 Selective StateMents cccccceecccssececseeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeesseeeesseeesseeeeseeeeesaaes 370 He KE AUS Ae NS EE 372 16 5 FUNCION BS axcinxatencsaxedarcaxadoxnvexstoxsioesstosamesasensaersteranaxedaxeearetaraamdaxteoratexsiondaiis 375 18 6 Built In Function BIock rarernnrrnnnrrnnennnrnnnnnrnnennnennnrnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnennnennnennnnnnnnennsen 378 18 6 1 Mathematical Functions rrrnnnnanennnrnnnnennnennnrnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnennsennnne 378 18 6 2 Data TAN SIO re eee 383
390. play command 1 2 3 stop command toggle pause command Stop 0 5 4 Finish playing Pause 1 Playing 3 Stop lt ______ _ stop command 5 Command Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 are write addresses All others are read only 275 Ki WE NTEK Object Preview tab Users can test whether the video format is supported by using the preview function General Preview Load Select the testing video to preview Play Pause Select to start playing video or pausing Forward lt lt Backward gt gt Go forward of the video of go backward in minutes Stop Stop playing and close the file If testing another video is needed please stop playing the current video first cum e Only one video file can play at one time e If control address is not enabled and Auto repeat is not selected after finish playing the first file the system will stop playing and close e If control address is not enabled the system will find the first file in the designated folder and start to play in ascending order of the file name e If the file can be previewed the format is supported If the video image quality is poor please adjust the resolution e The supported formats mpeg4 xvid flv etc 276 pi WE NTEK Object 13 26 Data Transfer Time based Overview Data transfer Time based object is similar to Data transfer Trigger based object that they all transfer the data
391. pports monitor function only when ON R Y LB 9197 support monitor function only for remote HMIs when ON R Y LB 9198 disable local HMI to trigger a MACRO when ON R Y LB 9199 disable remote HMI to trigger a MACRO when ON R Y 559 pi WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 31 VNC Control LB 12090 a VNC client connecting to HMI when ON Note1 LB 12092 enable VNC set ON disable VNC set OFF LW 9530 8 words VNC server password cm For i Series HMI only OS ver 20120621 or later versions support this function LB 12091 disable auto logout function when a VNC client is R W R Y R Y connected when ON Notei 560 Li WE NTEK HMI Supported Printers Chapter 23 HMI Supported Printers 23 1 The Supported Printer Types HMI supported printer drivers include the following types a SP M D E F Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer Pixels of width must be correctly set and can t exceed printer default setting 100 pixels for 1610 series printers 220 pixels for 2407 4004 series printers The driver uses EPSON ESC Protocol for Serial Micro Printer m EPSON ESC P2 Series Serial printers please configure communication parameters to match the printer The EPSON ESC P2 printer protocol is used Impact Printer LQ 300 LQ 300 LQ 300K RS232 LQ 300 II RS232 Inkjet Printer Stylus Photo 750 Laser Printer EPL 5800 m HP PC
392. put Object s Properties General Data Entry Security Shape Font Profile Reverse highlow byte Use UNICODE Read address PL name Local HMI v Setting Address PLC name Local HMI y Device type Lit aa Address Systerm tag User defined tag Address Format DODDO range 0 10799 Index register Tag Library 492 re WE NTEK Macro Reference Object 4 ASCII Display Read address PLC name Local HMI h Setting 1 Address Lw v Address z PLC name Local HMI b Address nn System tag User defined tag Address Format DDDDC range 0 10799 Index register Lastly use Compile to compile the project and execute Off line simulation or On line simulation Follow the steps below to operate the executing project TPB LTS spp MER TY ULI JO P Li ATS PIF STAD TAIL ZITI IT LI f cast Sel 493 Li WE NTEK Macro Reference om EEE EE 1127314151617 1819 0 JQOJW E RT YU HO P LT A SJD FJG HJJJKJL ZIX C VIB NME JJ spise eee 494 Macro Reference Success Access Accecpted aeia Fail Access Denied 495 Lb WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 15 Macro Password Protection Macro under development Password Password FERRERI max 10 characters Password protect Decompilation cannot recover MACROs when checks Pa
393. r rrrrnrrrrnnrrrrnnnerrnnnevrnnsennnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnsennnssennnssennnssnnnnssen 69 Chapter 6 Window Operations rrrrnrnrnnnnnrrnnnrrvnnnrrrnnnennnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnsennansennnnsennnnsennnssennnn 71 HII I 71 6 1 1 B39 WINGOW secavesercsaretseeeaiseseuetsevogerctoecescue soneseusoe wate vaiocuaseuctoowedoweneweueveuexeseueeson 71 6 1 2 Fast Selection WiINGOW cccccceccecseeeeceeeeecaeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeessaeeessaeeesseeeesanes 71 6 13 Common 1 0 OE aAA arri 72 6 1 4 System Message WIndow cccccccsscccsececseeeceeeecsececeueeceusecsueessaeessaeesseeeeas 72 6 2 Create Set and Delete a Window rrarnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnennenernenennenennennenennnnenennn 74 6 2 1 Creating and Setting a Window arnrnnnnrrnrnnnrnrnnnenrannennnnrnnnnnsnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnn 74 6 2 2 Open Close and Delete a Window rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnennnnennnnen 77 NT ENN 78 7 1 Event Log Management rnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnsnnnnnnnnennnrnnnnnnnnennnen 78 1 1 1 Excel 6110 sasnacsctoan cx nxaianaipnamasenanusanananasean ama umaduatsenarnde anaremdwesasinnaetaremanencusman aneuaines 80 7 2 Create a New Event Log ccccceeccceeecceeeeceeeceueeceueeceueesauseseueessueesueesueessneensees 81 7 2 1 Event Alarm Log General Settings rrrranrrrrannrnrnnnernnnnernnnnrnnnnrnnnnnennnnnenn 81 7 2 2 Event Alarm Log Message Settings c cccc
394. r 16 bit Unsigned hd Write after button is released If this function is selected the action is delayed till button is released otherwise the action is executed once the button is pressed Notification If this check box is selected it will notify a designated bit address setting ON or OFF Notification V Enable Set ON Set OFF Before writing After writing PLC name Local HMI v Setting Address e vlo j Before writing After writing Set the state of the designated bit address before or after the manual operation Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the Notification bit Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 139 WEINTEK Object Address PLC name Local HMI wt Device type LE s Address Format DDDDD range 0 11999 Index register Attribute Set style Select the button action from the drop down list m Write constant value Preset a register with the value entered Each time when the button is pressed it writes the Set value to the designated register Data format is as set by the Write address it can be 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD 32 bit float As shown below when the button is pressed preset the register with 12 Attribute pet Style Write constant value Set value 12 E Increment value JOG Increase value in register by a set amount in Inc
395. r Copynight 2006 Weintek Lab Inc x Welcome to EasyBuilderS000 Please select your model Lip Click on icon DB New 1 2 Select Model Model MTS070IH MTS070IH MT6100WMTE1O0 WT3010 800 x 480 3 Tick Use template Display mode Landscape v 4 Click OK w Use template templateS100 mtp Cancel system Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Frinter Backup Server D Click New Device Model General pystem beth nec Wick A EE 6 Set correct parameters Name Locaton Devce mpe nerave iF Frowcal sttonna 7 Click OK Local HMI Local HMI Local MTADTOH MTADTDO Disable Device Properties Mitsubishi FXOs FXON FX1s FX1N FX2 O HMI GI PLC Location Local v PLC type Mitsubishi FXOs FXOn FX1v FX IN FX2 gt V 1 20 MITSUBISHI_FXON so 8 Device MISUBISHI FXOs FXOn FX1s FX2 is added to the Device List PLC I F RS 485 4W vi COM COM1 9600 E 7 1 Settings PLC default station no 9 Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command System Parameter Settings Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model General System Setting Security Device list VF Proto Nia Location Device type Interface Local MTEDTDHAMTS0VD Disable Mame Local HMI Local HMI i Cancel MITSUBISHI FO Loca
396. r Manual 22 11 Station Number Variables ccccccccsecccseeeceeeeceeeeseeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseueeseeeeseees 527 22 12 Index Register rrarrnnnrrnnrennnrvnnrnranennnrvnnnnnanennnrnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnanennnsnnnsennnennsnnnnsennne 528 2 PIT WNC Mie LOM coc uevensncrvexcnsneweueneneus souenaeeuresiaweuresnevasweeveumsqunes manatees 530 22 14 MODBUS Server Communication rrnrannrnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnee 531 22 15 Communication Parameters Settings rrrrnrrrrnnnrrrnnnrrrnnnerrnnrerrnnrennnnrennnnennnnner 532 22 16 Communication Status with PLC COM rrrarrernnnonnnnrnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 535 22 17 Communication Status with PLC Ethernet rarrrnnnnrnnnrrnnnnrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 537 22 18 Communication Status with PLC USB rrrannornnnonnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 539 22 19 Communication Status with Remote HMI rrrronnrnnnnnrnrnnnenrnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnner 540 22 20 Communication Status with Remote PLG rrnrrvvrnnrrvvrrnrrvenrnnrrennnnerennnnerernnnvne 546 22 21 Communication Error Messages amp No of Pending Cmd ccccceseeeeeeeeees 549 22 22 ME TF UNCHONG cnesta naa eE aE ESEAS 550 22 23 Remote Print Backup Server rarrrrrnrrrrnnnrrvnnnrnrnnnrnrnnnrnrannennansennansennansnnnnnsnnnnnee 552 22 24 EasyAccesSS wns wath srenaceunsnuuaneseneuetednesanainaunnenamstcukeqoananauandsancuaeinesananaknnseanetasnaapeneoudes 553 22
397. r Off line Simulation on PC the files will be saved in the HMI memory SD card USB folder under the installation directory Preservation limit This setting determines how many days the data is preserved For example the Days of preservation is set to two days the data of yesterday and the day before yesterday will be kept Data that is built before this period will be deleted automatically to prevent the storage space from running out Print In System Parameter Settings Model select a printer The printing format can then be Set 79 Ly WE NTEK Event Log 7 1 1 Excel Editing Click on the Excel icon in Event Log setting dialog to open the Excel template for a reference of editing This template is under the installation directory the file name is EventLogExample xls This template includes the ready made dropdown lists and validation mechanism Enable Olmidde Word Local HMI LW null 32 bit Signed isbit BCD rise 16 bit BCD 32 bit BCD 1 System tag and User defined tag cannot set to true simultaneously otherwise the system will view the User defined tag to be a System tag and User defined tag to be false If setting Device type to User defined tag please set System tag to false 2 Color format is R G B each should be an integer form 0 to 255 3 When setting User defined tag to true if the system compares the Device type with the user defined ta
398. r a variable macro_command main char data 5 short checksum data 0 0x1 data 1 0x2 data 2 0x3 data 3 0x4 data 4 0x5 394 re WE NTEK Macro Reference ADDSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is Oxf end macro_command XORSUM source start result data count Description Uses an exclusion method to calculate the checksum from source start to source start data_count 1 Puts the checksum into result resu t must be a variable data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 10x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short checksum XORSUM data 0 checksum 5 checksum is 0x1 end macro_command CRC source start result data count Description Calculates 16 bit CRC of the variables from source starf to source start data_count 1 Puts in the 16 bit CRC into result resu t must be a variable data_count is the amount of the calculated elements of the array and can be a constant or a variable macro_command main char data 5 10x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 short 16bit_CRC CRC data 0 16bit CRG 5 16bit CRC is Oxbb2a end macro_command Name OUTPORT 395 Li WE NTEK Macro Reference OUTPORT source start device name data count Description Sends out the specified data from source starf to sSource start count 1 to PLC via a COM port or the ethernet device name is the name of a device defin
399. r later supports Reset recipe Reset event log v Reset data sampli gt 4 ae Reboot HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling 34 Create an EasyBuilder Project System settings Input the HMI name to search the designated HMI 197 168 1 226 test Search Search all Click to search the HMIs share the same network 192 168 1 11 Default HMI 198 168 1 118 nicolas 8100i 192 168 1 226 test 192 168 1 237 Dero Joevy weintek Y WEINTEK Create an EasyBuilder Project m Way 3 USB Cable Download Select USB cable to download project to HMI The way of setting is same as Way 1 mentioned above USB cable only works for Ethernet USB cable i series only Password Set Series HMI Firmware Font files Necessary if update firmware or execute download first time Cluse user defined startup screen Reset recipe Reset event log V Reset data sampling V Reboot HMI after download Automatically using current settings to download after compiling Download Nore J m Before downloading via USB cable please make sure the USB driver is E correctly installed Go to Computer Management Device Manager to check if USB driver is installed if not please refer to installation steps to manually install 35 es WE NTEK Create an EasyBuilder Project m Way 4 USB Disk SD Card Utility Mana
400. r of words to transfer Trigger address 2 Offset to the start address of PLC register Assume the value is n where n is an arbitrary number the start address of PLC register is Trigger address 4 n Take an OMRON PLC as an example If Trigger address uses DM 100 Trigger address 2 will be DM 102 If the value in DM 102 is 5 the start address of data source would be DM 109 100 4 5 109 Trigger address 3 Offset to the start address of LW or RW memory in HMI Take OMRON PLC as an example If set Trigger address to DM 100 Trigger address 3 will be DM 103 If the value in DM 103 is 100 the start address of memory in HMI is RW 100 or LW 100 Example kr We want to use PLC Control object to transfer 16 words data in OMRON PLLC starting from address DM 100 to the HMI address starting from RW 200 The setting is shown below a Firstly create a PLC Control object set Type of control to General PLC control and set Trigger address to DM 10 that is to use the four sequential registers start from DM 10 to control data transfer PLC Control PLC name OMRON C COMI Series Attribute Type of control General PLC control ar Active only when designated window opened Trigger address PLC name Setting b Confirm the data size and the offset addresses Set DM 11 to 16 since the number of words to transfer is 16 words 284 Ly WE NTEK Object Set DM 12 to 86
401. r selection to make of whether the macro operates after OFF gt ON OFF to ON transition ON gt OFF ON to OFF transition ON lt gt OFF At both of the changes of state 136 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 4 Set Word Overview The Set Word object provides two operation modes manual or automatic Manual mode can change the value in a designated word address when the object is touched In automatic mode the word register is automatically activated when a pre defined condition occurs touching the button will not be effective Configuration a Click the Set Word icon on the toolbar to open a Set Word object property dialog Set up the properties press OK button and a new Set Word object will be created 137 Ki WE NTEK Object Hew Set Word Object General security Shape Label Write address PLC name Local HMI s Setting Write after button is released Notification Enable met ON gt met OFF Before writing After writing PLC name Lacal HMI w Setting A ttribute Set Style Set vale OK Write address Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the word device that controls the Set Word object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object 138 og WE NTEK Object Address PLC name Local HMI wt Device type i Li s Address Format DDDDD range 0 10500 Index registe
402. ral System Setting Security Device list Name Location Device type Interface VF Protocol Stat Local HMI Local HMI Local MT6070iH MT8070 Disable N A Local Mitsubishi FXOs COM 1 9600 E 7 1 R34854W 0 49 WE NTEK System Parameter Settings 5 1 2 How to Control a Remote PLC M Ethernet i Ethernet HMI HMI d Woo ET PLC Device IPic Device Hod WO2 Remote PLC is a PLC being connected to a remote HMI To control a remote PLC add this type of device first Please click System Parameter Settings New to open Device Properties dialog For example use SIEMENS 57 200 as the Remote PLC Device Properties Siemens 57 200 O HMI PLC Location Remote vi Settings IP 192 168 1 10 Port 8000 PLC type Siemens 7 200 gt V 2 40 SIEMENS 57 200 50 PLC I F RS 485 2W COM COM1 Settings PLC default station no 2 Default station no use station no variable Interval of block pack words 5 Max read command size words Max write command size words Cancel 50 L WE NTEK System Parameter Settings The settings are described below Setting Description S HMI or PLC In this example the device used is a PLC so select PLC Location Select Local or Remote In this example the PLC is connected to Remote HMI so select Remote Set the IP address and port number of the Remote HMI
403. rary button The currently selected shape is marked by a red frame Shape Library Library 2 button 3 System Frame 4 System Button 5 System Lamp 6 System Pipe D Untitled Untied Untitled States 3 States 3 3 Delete Cur State Delete Cur State State Rename Pacen e State O State 11 4 Untitled 5 Untitled Untitled z Untitled States 5 States 3 States 3 States 3 Ri i E Frame Frame Frame Frame Display Inner v Frame 96 Ly WE NTEK Object General Properties 2 Green States 5 rame The illustration above provides information of one of the Shapes in the Shape Library as follows 2 Green The number and the name of the shape States 3 The number of the states of the shape Frame IIndicates that the Shape only has a frame The illustration below shows that the Shape has inner and frame O D States 2 Inner Frame Please refer to Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library for more details When finished click OK and preview the design of the shape Ste Picture Background Ev 97 og WE NTEK 9 2 2 Settings of Picture Library Picture Library Select Use picture check box to select a shape from the library How to set Picture Library Object General Properties Click Picture Library button The currently select
404. rd Step 2 Open the setting dialog of Direct Window again to set the Profile to the same size as the created keyboard window Direct Window Objects Properties General Profile Position Pinned X T mize Width 160 F Height Step 3 Create a Numeric Input object and don t select Use a dn keypad check box Hew Numeric Input Object General Data Entry Numeric Format Security Shape Font Input order C Enable Keyboard 120 Vagn 1 1 W WEINTEK Keyboard Design and Usage Step 4 Create a Set Bit object set address to LB 0 and set Set style to Set ON Overlay it on the Numeric Input object Pressing the Numeric Input object will open the keyboard and the Direct Window Hew Set Bit Object General security Shape Label pesten Write address PLC name Local HMI ka Setting Write after button is released Attribute Setstie SetON o Step 5 Add Set Bit objects on the Enter and ESC function keys respectively Set address to LB 0 and Set style to Set OFF In this way when pressing either Enter or ESC key will close the keyboard and the Direct Window 121 Keyboard Design and Usage 12 3 Steps to Design a Fixed Keyboard on Screen Users can also place a fixed keyboard on the screen instead of popup keyboard or Direct Window This type of keyboard can t be moved or closed Step 1 Creat
405. re Preview 0 men Background TF 99 p WE NTEK Object General Properties 9 3 Setting Label Text Select Label tab when creating an object to use the libraries New Bit Lamp Object General Security Shape Label Use label Use label library _ Use bitmap font Label Library state 0 v 4 LF 0 Attribute Font Arial Color Size 16 Align Left Blink Italic Underline Duplicate these attributes to Every state Movement Direction F Continuous Speed Content best Tracking Duplicate this label to every stake Use label select this check box to use a label for the object EasyBuilder supports Windows true font 100 M WEINTEK Object General Properties Use label library Select this check box to choose a label in Label Library Use label Use label brary Label tag NONAME v Label Library Label Library Please refer to Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi Language Usage for more details Font Select a font from the list EasyBuilder supports Windows true font Book Antiqua Bold Bookman OG style Bookman OG Style Bold E Bookshelf Symbol 7 Color Select the font color Size Select the font size Align Align the multiple lines of the text The text aligned Left 111 222222 333333333 101 Ly WE NTEK Object General Properties The text aligned Center 111 222222 33333333
406. request s function code MODBUS server ethernet LW 9286 16bit request s starting address MODBUS server ethernet i LW 9287 16bit request s quantity of registers MODBUS server ethernet 16bit last error code MODBUS server ethernet 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no COM 1 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no COM 2 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no COM 3 16bit MODBUS ASCII server station no ethernet 32bit received data count bytes COM 1 MODBUS server 32bit received data count bytes COM 2 MODBUS server 32bit received data count bytes COM 3 MODBUS server LW 9576 32bit received data count bytes Ethernet MODBUS server OR AR RO RJ AR RO R R RO PR R R R R RO PR R RO R R RO R R RO RJ R RO 531 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 15 Communication Parameters Settings Read Ry Write W Control Y mn TT Ki LB 9030 9030 update COM 1 communication parameters set ON COM 1 communication parameters set ON mm 89091 update COM Zeommuinionparemet etn mv Av 89082 upte COM 3commuinionparemet tr0y mv Av 16bit COM 1 mode 0 RS232 1 RS485 2W 2 RS485 4W LW 9551 16bit COM 1 baud rate 7 1200 8 2400 0 4800 1 9600 10 14400 2 19200 11 28800 3 3 R W R Y R Y 8400 4 57600 Lw552 16b COM 1 datats 7 7bis 8 8bis I mw av av COM 1 parity on none 1 even 2 0dd
407. resses of the two devices are kept identical 634 Lr WE NTEK FTP Server Application Chapter 32 FTP Server Application In addition to backup history data from HMI to PC by SD card USB disk or EasyPrinter FTP Server can also do this After downloading project to HMI FTP Server can be used to backup or update history data and recipe data The files in FTP Server can t be deleted gt dt FAL g Data Log EventLog Recipe eg 32 1 Login FTP Server Step 1 Before login FTP Server please check HMI IP address System information nina emt3120 IP Address 192 168 1 117 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Route Address 192 168 1 254 Mac Address 00 0C 26 03 19 AA 635 Lib WE NTEK FTP Server Application Step 2 Enter HMI IP ftp 192 168 1 117 example and log in user name uploadhis and the HMI history upload password if not changed the default is 111111 Or directly enter ftp uploadhis 111111 192 168 1 117 kv My Computer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help e Back gt hi 2 fo Search Wey Folders Eee Address System Tasks E A VirtualBox na Additions D Sq drive on Yboxsvr zi a Wisi Sy Slee O Shared Documents information Ta user s Documents Add or remove programs fb Change setting Step 3 After entering IP ftp 192 168 1 117 is shown and the datalog eventlog and recipe folders can be seen File Edit View Favorites Tools Help
408. ries it is recommended to assign 5 to Turn around delay and 30 to Send ACK delay 46 L WE NTEK PLC default station no System Parameter Settings lf the interface used is Ethernet click Device Properties Settings and the IP Address Settings dialog opens Please set correct PLC IP address and port number For example use a S7 1200 as the connected PLC as shown below IF Address Settings IF address 192 168 1 34 Timeout sect Turn around delay frist DO Local TS 4P HEX 4d57 Remote TS4P HEX DO If the interface is USB no further setting is required Please check the settings in Device Properties If the interface is CAN Controller Area Network Bus please check the PLC connect guide for CANopen and import the eds device file The default station number for PLC address if the PLC station number is not included in the address as explained later PLC station no can be set in PLC address The address format ABC DEFGH ABC stands for PLC station number and ranges from 0 to 255 DEFGH stands for PLC address And the sign separates the station number and the address As shown below the data is read from PLC station number 1 and address 120 47 System Parameter Settings Mew Toggle Switch Object General Security Shape Label Description Read address PLC name Mitsubishi FXOS FXON FX1S FX1N FX2 w Se
409. ription Local MACRO destiny HMI R Y nie v delete the earliest event log file on HMI memory set ON Py oy 18 9025 delte all event og ies on HMmemory setON w v OY refresh event log information on HMI memory set ON Powel oy y 18 9034 save evenidata samping to HMI USB disk SDcard son w v v 180042 acknowledge alarm events sro w viv k lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt refresh event log information on SD card set ON 16bit no of event log files on HMI memory 32bit size of event log files on HMI memory 16bit time tag of event log second Note1 R W R Y R Y 16bit time tag of event log minute Note1 R W R Y R Y 16bit time tag of event log hour Note 1 R W R Y R Y 16bit time tag of event log day Note1 RAW R Y R Y 16bit time tag of event log month Note1 R W R Y R Y 16bit time tag of event log year Note1 R W R Y R Y 16bit no of event log files on SD card 32bit size of event log files on SD card 16bit no of event log files on USB 1 32bit size of event log files on USB 1 520 System Reserved Words Bits 1 If LW 9450 LW 9455 are used as tags of Event Log time source please set System parameters General correctly 2 The registers for deleting or updating event logs do not work during simulation on PC The following link refers to a demo project of using the system registers LW 9450 to
410. rity parameters can be found in Edit System Parameter Settings Security Up to 12 sets of user and password are available Password should be one non negative integer There are six security classes A to F Once the password is entered the objects that the user can operate are classified As shown below User 1 can only operate objects with class A or class C System Parameter Settings Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Device Model Generel System Setting Security Select operatable classes for each v r Password range 0 4294967295 No Enable Password Class B Class ClassC Cla 1 111 O 2 Pi io s 3 Fl 6d C 4 Fi O O O 5 mo 0 O O 6 Pi 0 O O E Pi oO O O 8 Ol iO O O 9 Pi iO O O 10 0 O O 11 cr o C LJ n l lt gt 107 we WEINTEK User Password and Object Security 10 2 Object Security Settings Safety control General Security Shape Label Use Min press time sec to sr PO avoid miss operations Press and hold the object longer than the rite Cisse ae Min press time set here to activate the object Display confirmation request After pressing the object a dialog appears for operation confirmation If AN ee the response to this dialog comes later than the set Max waiting time sec this dialog disappears automatically and the operation will be canceled Interlock Interlock 5 Tse interlock function When this check box is s
411. rizontal or vertical Printer size Set to print out in Original size or to Fit to printer margins Margin Set the top bottom right and left margin width Communication IP address settings Assign the IP address of the printer via network Port User name Password 69 KR WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Specify the data to log in printer Port can be set from 1 to 65535 Maximum length of user name or password is 12 characters Please refer Chapter 26 EasyPrinter for more information 70 Ly WE NTEK Window Operations Chapter 6 Window Operations A window is a basic element in a project With a window all kinds of information like objects pictures and texts can be displayed on HMI screen Total 1997 windows numbered from 3 1999 in EasyBuilder can be built and edited 6 1 Window Types There are 4 types of windows each with different functions and usages 1 Base Window 2 Fast Selection Window 3 Common Window 4 System Message Window 6 1 1 Base Window The most frequently used window except for main screen it can also be m background of other windows m keyboard window m A pop up window of function key object m A pop up window of direct window and indirect window objects m A screen saver sl Base Window should be in same size as the HMI screen Therefore the resolution of the base window should set to the resolution of HMI 6 1 2 Fast Select
412. rks Here is an example using constants macro_command main short A B AandB are variables A 1234 B 0x12 1234 and 0x12 are constants end macro command 18 3 1 2 Variables Variables are names that represent information The information can be changed as the variable is modified by statements Naming Rules for Variables 1 variable name must start with an alphabet 2 Variable names longer than 32 characters are not allowed 3 Reserved words cannot be used as variable names 363 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference There are 8 different Variable types 5 for signed data types and 3 for unsigned data types bool boolean 1 bit discrete char character 8 bits byte short short integer 16 bits word int integer 32 bits double word 2147483647to 2147483648 float floating point 32 bits double word 8 bits byte 16 bis word 32 bits double word Declaring Variables Variables must be declared before being used To declare a variable specify the type before the variable name Example int a short b switch float pressure unsigned short c Declaring Arrays Macros support one dimensional arrays zero based index To declare an array of variables specify the type and the variable name followed by the number of variables in the array enclosed in brackets The length of an array could be 1 to 4096 Macros only support at most 4096 variables per macro Example int a 10 short
413. rmat specification converts exactly one argument macro_command main char c1 a short s1 32767 float f1 1 234567 TRACE The results are output The results are TRACE c1 c s1 d f1 f c1 s1 f1 output c1 a 1 32767 f1 1 234567 end macro command FindDataSamplingDate return value FindDataSamplingDate data log number index year month day or FindDataSamplingDate data log number index year month day Description query function for finding the date of specified data sampling file according to the data sampling no and the file index The date is stored into year month and day respectively in the format of YYYY MM and DD Data Sampling Object En Read address Sample mode Trigger address Clear address Hold address Auto stop Local HMI LWO Periodical Disable Disable Disable Digable Local HMI LWO Periodical data sampling no The directory of saved data Storage location filename yyyymmdd dtl The data sampling files under the same directory are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four data sampling files as follows 20101210 dtl 20101230 dtl 20110110 dil 20110111 ditl The file index are BO We WEINTEK L P WENTEK 000 Macro Reference Reference 20101210 dtl gt index is 3 20101230 dtl gt index is 2 201
414. ro Reference bool success2 success2 String ToUpper aBcDe dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro command Name StringToLower Syntax success String ToLower source start destination start success StringToLower source destination start Description Convert all the characters in the source string to lowercase characters and store the result in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 aBcDe char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringToUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 abcde char dest2 4 bool success2 success2 String oUpper aBcDe dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro_command Name String ToReverse Syntax success StringToReverse source start destination start success StringToReverse source destination start Description Reverse the characters in the source string and store it in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source sta
415. ro command device name is the PLC name enclosed in the double quotation marks and this name has been defined in the device list of system parameters device type is the device type and encoding method binary or BCD of the PLC data For example if device type is LW BIN it means the register is LW and the encoding method is binary If use BIN encoding method BIN can be ignored If device type is LW BOCD it means the register is LW and the encoding method is BCD address offset is the address offset in the PLC For example SetData read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 5 1 represents that the address offset is 5 If address offset uses the format N AAAAA N indicates that PLC s station number is N AAAAA represents the address offset This format is used while multiple PLCs or controllers are connected to a single serial port For example SetData read data 1 0 FATEK KB Series RT 245 404 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference 1 represents that the PLC s station number is 2 If SetData uses the default station number defined in the device list it is not necessary to define station number in address offset The number of registers actually sends to depends on both the type of the send data variable and the value of the number of data count type of actual number of read data 16 bit register send 8 bit 8 bit bool 8 bit bool 8 bit short 16 bit short 16 bit int 32 bit int
416. rol words of channel 1 is located from LW n the control words of channel 2 is located from LW n 3 and so on As they are all continuous addresses the system could read all the control words in one read command 239 Lig WE NTEK Object Address No of Data n Channel 1 Offset m No of Data n Channel 2 Offset m Channel 1 s data n Channel 2 s data n How to use watch Cursor Line feature You may use the Watch function to check the value of any point of the curve When the user touches Data Block object it will display a cursor line and the system will write the index and value of that data on the cursor line to the designated address Cursor line Enable Color a PLC name Local HMI re Device type LW kr Address 1 When watch address is set to LW n the value written into LW n represents the channel index number to be called up start form 0 Channel 1 Channel Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address Watch indicator 50 Control Index m 7 No of Data 16 bit BCD 30 sad 32 bit 30 20 Data unsigned 240 M WEINTEK Object 40 30 10 Data Index is a 16 bit unsigned integer when the designated register of cursor line is 32 bit device it will be stored in the bit 0 15 If the trend curve is cleared when the cursor line is moved 0 will be displayed as shown below In the example there are no data in channel 1 when the cur
417. rrannrnnnnronnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnennnnnrnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnsnnnnnsnnnnnee 511 212 PC 16 AM COmMM NICIUON xcs cisco cscs ester cs cadens csiescs vandsieneinedaisnd sate nda sndewesleveee cede edes 512 21 3 Operate the PLC Connected with Other HMI rrannnnnrnnnnnnnvennnnrrennnnerennnnvrennnnvne 513 Chapter 22 System Reserved Words Bits r rrrrnrnnnnnnrnnnrenrnnnrennnnnrennnnnnennnnnnrnnnnnnrennnnnenn 514 22 1 The Address Ranges of Local HMI Memory ccccseseeceeeeeeseeeeeseseeeeeeeeeaeess 515 EG gt EE ee eee eee eee 515 22 E WNO 0 Cee eee ee ee ee eee E eee eee 516 22 2 HMI Time ee ceeccccceeecceceeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeseeeceeseeeeessueeeessueeeseeeeesseseeessaeees 517 22 3 User Name and Password rarannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnee 518 224A Da DAWA 10 EE EN 519 22 DP Dvs 520 22 6 HMI Hardware Operation ararnnannrnnnnnrvnnnrrnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnennnssennnnsennansennnnnnnnnee 522 22 7 Local HMI Network Information ccccccceecceeeeseeeceeeeeeeseeeeeueeeeeesseeeueeaeeeneees 523 22 8 Recipe and Extended Memory ccccccccsecccsscecsececeuceceuceceuceceusecsusessusessueessaees 524 22 9 Storage Space ManagGeMei ccccccseccccseececeeeeeceeeecseeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeesseeeesaeeees 525 22 10 Touch POSITION cccccccecccceccccecccccceccenccccaceceacececueneeueaueneaceneaueceeneateneaueaesneaees 526 KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 Use
418. rt 428 Macro Reference This function returns the zero based index of the first character in the source string that is also in the target string If there is no match it returns 1 macro command main char src1 20 abcdeabcde char target1 20 sdf bool pos1 pos1 StringFindOneOf src1 0 target1 0 pos1 3 char src2 20 abcdeabcde bool pos2 pos2 StringFindOneOf src2 1 agi pos2 4 char target3 20 bus bool pos3 pos3 StringFindOneOf abcdeabcde target3 1 pos3 1 end macro command success Stringincluding source start set start destination start success Stringlncluding source set start destination start success Stringlncluding source start set destination start success Stringincluding source set destination start Description Retrieve a substring of the source string that contains characters in the set string beginning with the first character in the source string and ending when a character is found in the source string that is not in the target string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of retrieved substring exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false
419. rt 432 Macro Reference This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of reversed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 abcde char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringToUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 edcba char dest2 4 bool success2 success2 String ToUpper abcde dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same end macro_command success String TrimLeft source start set start destination start success StringTrimLeft source set start destination start success String TrimLeft Source start set destination start success StringTrimLeft source set destination start Trim the leading specified characters in the set buffer from the source string The source string and set string parameters accept both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of trimmed string exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 a bc char set1 20 char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringTrimLeft src1 0 set1 0
420. rt 502 HMIPot Settings Use UDP User Datagram Protocol Station no 1 Use broadcast command MODBUS TCP IP Gateway Terabe Click Address Mapping Tables button and the following default tables will be displayed Modify the tables if needed or add new tables a ro g gt Local Hi II I LB eer LB cz Local HMI LB 0 3x lt LW I 3x 1 Local HMI 4x lt gt LW 4x 1 lt gt Local HMI 3x lt gt RW 3x 10000 lt Local HMI 4x lt gt RW lt gt Local HMI 12400 Bit s Read Write 12400 Bit Read only 9999 Word s Read only 19999 Word s Read Write 55536 Word s Read only 155536 Word s Read Write Note No cross table reading writing i e accessing data from multiple tables in one command LW 9288 indicates the last communication error 0 normal read only error 1 read write undefined registers write only error 2 out of read write range timeout 3 bad command format invalid function code 695 Support the following function codes Ox 1x 3x 1 5 15 15 used only to set LB 4x13 LI we nTEK MODBUS TCP IP Gateway 4 For ex
421. rt MT 500 tag to represent the address Local HMI Local HMI Local Hil Local HMI Local HMI Local Hil Local HMI Local HMI Local Hil Local HMI Local HMI Local Hil Local HMI Local HMI Local Hil Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMI Local HMil Local HMI Export EXCEL Import EXCEL 514 LB 3000 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 1 The Address Ranges of Local HMI Memory 22 1 1 Bits Device Type Range Format Local Memory 0 12095 DDDDD re me Local Word Bits LW BIT 0 1079915 DDDDDdd DDDDD address dd bit no 00 15 Retentive 0 65535f DDDDDh Memory Bit DDDDD address Index h bit no 0 f Use LW 9000 as Index Register and correspond to RW Bit Example When LW 9000 1 RBI 01 RW Bit 11 Retentive RW_ Bit 0 524287 DDDDDh Memory Word DDDDD address Bits h bit no 0 f Retentive RW_A Bit 0 65535f DDDDDh Memory RW_A DDDDD address Word Bits h bit no 0 f 515 Ly WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 1 2 Words Device Type Range Foma me V Retentive RW 0 524287 DDDDDD Ed D Retentive 0 65535 DDDDD Memory Word Use LW 9000 as Index Register Index and correspond to RW Example When LW 9000 10 RWI 5 RW 15 Retentive RW_A 0 65535 DDDDD pe e Extended EMO EM9 0 DDDDDDDDDD EE 516 Ki WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 2 HMI Time i LB 11958 time setting error when ON Note3 R r rR gt
422. rver set the parameters in System Parameter Settings Printer Backup Server COM EPSON ESC P2 Series Baud rate lp p Series USB 8 Bits a q Jsdohm 4630 ae Parity spar SP DII DIV DS D A DN T 1 Bit hv f EPSOM TM L90 Pixels of width BRIGHTEK WH E19 System Parameter Settings Eg Device General System Setting Security Printer Backup Server Font Extended Memory Use MT Remote Prinber Backup Server Note Use EasyPinter to configure PC For printing screen hardcopy and storing backup data Output settings Orientation 8 Horizontal Vertical Printer size 9 Original size CO Fit to printer margins Margin Communication settings IP address o 8 0 Port 8005 Username 111111 Password 111111 567 Lr WE NTEK 23 3 2 Start Printing EasyWatch Start printing with Function Key New Function Key Object General Security Shape Label Activate after button is released O change full screen window O Display popup window O Return to previous window ASCINUNICODE mode O Enter O Backspace ASCII UNICODE Execute macro I Window title bar Hard copy screen to USB disk SD card or printer Printer SP M D E F ka Mode grayscale C Rotate image 90 degrees Motification Enable O change common window O Close window O clear C Esc Or use PLC Con
423. ry from the list Select the state represented by the current Picture If the selected state doesn t have a picture it means that the picture does not exist or the state of the picture isn t defined Select Lib Select a Picture Library to add into the project By previewing the content of the library on the right side of the window users can select a suitable library 332 Lig WE NTEK P WEINTEK 0 Shape Library and Picture Library Library and Picture Library Uper i i yrr fb button 3248 Ti button Ab Butter fb Ti butten 326 SB button 4 fb Te butter fb TE button 32 B F buttond ifb Ta button fb T buttort 2 fb 3 Ta buttorrt 64 IB Ti computer fib lt My Documents My Competes Fhe narrer background fb F es of type pecture bb fb New Lib Hew Library Unattach Lib Delete a Picture Library in the project Warning Picture 4 This picture is used in 1 Window 8 BL_O 2 Window 8 BL 1 3 Window 8 BL 2 4 Window 8 BL 3 Do you really want to unattach this library Delete All States Delete all the states of the selected Picture Delete Cur State Delete the current state of the selected Picture Rename Rename the selected Picture Kename Insert Before Add a new state before the current state 333 og WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library Insert After Add a new state after the current state Import Picture Add a new picture to the Picture Library
424. s Password for entering system Password for uploading project Password for downloading project Password for uploading history data Password confirmation dialog Please enter you new password password ma confirm HEGE Password match Time Date Setting HMI local time date _ System settings Network Time Date Security Yistory me setting hg Year 2012 3 Mon 10 Day a amp Week HE Hour 20 Min 24 Sec 20 41 Hardware Settings Miscellaneous Rotary switch for adjusting LCD brightness System settings va Network Time Date Securit VNC Miscellaneous Backlight LLL Brightness E History Clears history data in HMI Recipe Eventlog Datalog System settings br Network Time Date Securit History me setting hg Firmware setting Upgrades firmware enable portrait mode Ki WE NTEK s HMI name Set HMI name to download upload project System settings pg Securit HMI name setting ha network Time Date HMI name Default HM VNC server Remote HMI monitoring and controlling via Ethernet System settings Network Time Date Securit VNC server setting Step 1 Enable HMI VNC server set password Step 2 Install Java IE or VNC Viewer on PC Step 3 1 Input remote HMI IP in Java IE example http 192 168 1 28 Step 3 2 In VNC Viewer input remote HMI IP and password 42 Hardware Settings D
425. s when Capture address changes from OFF to ON system will start to capture one image per second from 5 seconds before the triggering time to 5 seconds after the triggering time 319 Ly WE NTEK Object Use Control address Select Use control function to control the video input Control address Use control Function Display adjustment PLE name Local HMI ve Setting Address 16 bit Unsigned Skart stop input Lw 100 Pause Lw 100 1 Contrast adjustment Ly 100 2 Bright adjustment Li 100 3 Suppose Control Address is designated as LW100 A Users can set Control Address 0 to enable stop Video Input function LW100 0 gt Stop Playing LW100 1 gt Open video input channel 1 and display it on screen LW100 2 gt Open video input channel 2 and display it on screen LW100 3 gt Open video input channel 1 but don t display it on screen Users can still execute Capture image LW100 4 gt Open video input channel 2 but don t display it on screen Users can still execute Capture image B Users can set Control Address 1 to stop or continue playing video LW101 1 gt Pause Continue playing If users change the value in Control Address 0 the system will keep the new value D If users change the value in Control Address 1 system will first execute the corresponding command and then erase the new value and set it back to 0 E If Use control function is not
426. s Device type System tag Index register of the word device that controls the Slider object Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Notification If enabled the state of a designated bit address will be set to ON or OFF either before or after the Slider is slid Click Setting to select the PLC name Address Device type System tag Index register of the bit device that controls the notification settings Users can also set address in General tab while adding a new object Before writing After writing Change the state of a designated bit register before or after the Slider is slid Watch address When moving the roller the new value written to the word register address can be displayed in real time 161 Ki WE NTEK Object Hew Slider Object A thibute Direction Resolution Low Hich limit Constant 8 Address PLO name Local HMI Setting Increment wa Attribute Direction Select the direction of the slider Right Up Left Down right UP down Resolution sets the value change in the word register for each step of the Slider For example if set to 10 the register value changes by 10 points for each increment or decrement on the Slider 162 og WE NTEK Object Low limit amp High limit a Constant Sets the range of the Slider EX If set Low limit to 5 and High limit to
427. s Toggle All Outlining Update Al Outlining macro command main i abe abe abd end macro command 6 Select a word in the editor to enable the Cut and Copy function After Cut or Copy is performed Paste function is enabled WorkSpace WorkSpace Qo BE AG GS oa LEAR amp L T 2 macro command mein A macro command maint 3 3 g 4 4 abcabe 5 eng Undo Ctil z 5 end mer Undo Che Redo Ctrl HY Redo ad Cut Chk cut F Copy Chit Select All Ctlt Select All Chita Toggle Bookmark Ctrl F2 Toggle Bookmark Ctrl F2 Next Bookmark FI Next Bookmark FI Previous Bookmark Shft F2 Previous Bookmark ShfttF2 Clear All Bookmarks Clear All Bookmarks Togele All Outlining Togele All Outlining Update All Outlining Update All Outlining 357 Ki WE NTEK Macro Reference 7 Use Select All to include all the content in the edit area Works pace Char c Ox40 a RI ER Cut Copy melect All Togele Bookmark Ctil F2 8 Ifthe macro is too long use bookmarks to manage and read the code with ease The illustration below shows how it works a Move your cursor to the position in the edit area where to insert a bookmark Right click select Toggle Bookmark There will be a blue little square that represents a bookmark on the left side of edit area WorkSpace M
428. s select Minimize to system tray Set the backup location MT Box Remote Printer Server Settings General Output Hardcopy Backup Files in When target file has existed Dverwrite it The content will be destroyed 6 Append BAK to the file name Convert Batch File Enable 1 Select Backup on the left side 2 In Output click on W button to browse and select a storage directory of the incoming history files 3 Click OK to confirm the settings 4 In EasyPrinter main menu select File Enable Output to backup data in the selected directory 583 EasyPrinter 26 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder The setting procedure of EasyPrinter 1 Open a new project or an existing project in EasyBuilder 2 In EasyBuilder main menu select Edit System Parameter Settings Printer Backup Server and select Use MT Remote Printer Backup Server check box System Parameter Settings Ed Device Model General System Setting Security Font Extended Memory Printer Backup Server Use MT Remote Printer Backup Server Mote Use EasyPrinter to configure PC For printing screen hardcopy and storing backup data Mutpuek settings Orientation Horizontal Vertical Printer size 4 Original size Fit to printer margins Margin mm Communication settings IP address 1927 168 1 26 Port Password 111 3 In Communication settings fill in the
429. s address 16 bit format LW 100 LW 101 32 bit format LW 100 LW 102 Scale label Select the attribute of scale label on Meter Display acale label v Use scale label Font Arial w Color Sen we No of decimal 0 209 M WEINTEK Object 13 17 Trend Display Overview Trend display object uses curves to represent the data recorded by Data Sampling object The sampling operation is conducted by Data Sampling objects and the Trend Display object displays the result of sampling The following picture shows an example of trend display object 17 32 41 12 03 06 MANN DARA oA AADA Those buttons on the screen mean Go to the beginning of the sampling data and stop auto scrolling Go to previous time interval and stop auto scrolling Enable auto scrolling This shows when auto scrolling is turned off Go to next time interval Go to the latest sampling data Click to stop auto scrolling This shows when auto scrolling is turned on sii Configuration Click Trend Display icon on the toolbar to open Trend Display dialog box Fill in properties click OK button and then create a new Trend Display object R 210 Lr WE NTEK Object The following picture shows the General tab in the Trend Display object properties dialog box Trend Display Objects Properties General Trend Channel Shape Profile Data sampling Object index 1 vi Tend type Roari Note af n
430. s index 23 ik address index 24 Ly 9248 32bit address index 25 While using Index register the address is designated by the following equation The constant set in Address the value in the chosen Index Register Index Registers work for all devices in System Parameter Settings Device list but are limited to word registers only 112 Lr WE NTEK Index Register 11 2 Examples of Index Register The following examples show how to use Index Registers If not selecting Index Address Aa acrana o set read address to pe ee LW 10 The system will MED oe system tag directly read I write LW 1 0 Address format DDDDD range 0 10799 Index register 16 bit Unsigned hd If select Index register Address check box and set index register to INDEX 0 PLC name Read address LW 0 Device type Address pb System tag INDEX 0 Address format DDDDD range 0 10799 As shown in the beginning gt TE aE Index 0 indicates register W 9200 1f the data in LW 9200 is 5 read address is set to LW 0 5 LW 5 Here s a demo project shown as an example Demo Project Index Register Index Function of Word Index 0 LW 9200 LW 0 Index 0 LW 9200 Index Function of Bit Index 6 LW 9206 LB O Index 6 LW 9206 113 Lib WE NTEK Index Register Example T Index Function of Word Index Function of Word Index 0 LW 9
431. s of source string to the last of the contents of destination string The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start Destination must be an one dimensional char array This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after concatenation exceeds the max size of destination buffer it returns false The success field is optional macro_command main char src1 20 abcdefghij char dest1 20 1234567890 bool success1 success1 StringCat src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 123456790abcdefghij nm Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference char dest2 10 1234567890 bool success2 success2 StringCat abcde dest2 0 success2 false dest2 remains the same char src3 20 abcdefghij char dest3 20 bool success3 success3 StringCat src3 0 dest3 15 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro command StringCompare ret StringCompare stri start str2 start ret StringCompare string1 str2 start ret StringCompare str1 start string2 ret StringCompare string1 string2 The ret field is optional macro_command main char a1 20 abcde char b1 20 ABCDE bool ret1 reti StringCompare a1 0 b1 0 ret1 false char a2 20 abcde char b2
432. selected system will play the channel set in Input channel Display adjustment If it is selected the screen brightness and contrast ratio can be adjusted If specify LW100 as the control address A Adjust Contrast Ratio Control Address 2 LW102 range 1 100 B Adjust Brightness Control Address 3 LW103 range 1 100 ora 1 Video In object can only be used MT8000X series 2 Only 1 video input channel can be opened at a time 3 Capture function will not be affected by using pause function The captured images will O 320 Ly WE NTEK Object still be the real time video input images 4 Recommended Format and Resolution Pt 5 gt NTSC 720x480 360 x 240 PAL 20x576 360 x 288 321 pi WE NTEK Object 13 32 System Message If objects use Display confirmation request or local HMI supports monitor function only is turned on off the corresponding messages configured here will be displayed in popup message boxes System Message Confirmation required Dialog size Small Middle Large Message Please confirm the operation Cancel Cancel Font Arial Deny write command Message The system is being prohibited from writing device registers Font Arial Allow vwrite cormand Message The system is now allowed to write device registers Font Arial Cancel 322 L WE NTEK Object Dialog Size Select the si
433. ser 1 Operable class A User 2 Operable class A B User 3 Operable class A B C 2 Design Window no 10 as shown Create two Numeric Input objects NET HHHH LW9219 LW 9219 Username F sl Password HHHt 119220 Length 1word bit 15 hit LW 9220 EST o Current status 1111111111111111 moza For entering user password Length 2 words oo ae Logout 189050 Create a Numeric Display object i Class A Button Displays the status of current user 16 bit Binary PE bee D Buon Create a Set Bit object LB 9050 logout 5B 7 Class C Button Create three Set Bit objects each set to different classes but all select Made invisible while protected After setting please save and compile the project and execute off line simulation The below shows how it works when simulating 109 Ly WE NTEK User Password and Object Security 3 Before entering the password it displays 0000000000000000 which means that the user operable object class is None Class A Button Class C Button objects are classified from A to C and selected Made invisible while protected therefore they are hidden at this moment 4 Enter User 1 password 111 Since User 1 is only allowed to operate class A objects Class A Button object appears for operating LW 9222 bit 0 turns to 1 means that user can operate class A objects Username 1 oez Pa
434. sition The unit is 0 1 second Supposed that Speed is set to 10 the object position will change each second Backward cycle Assumed the object has four positions position 0 position 1 position 2 and position 3 and Backward cycle is not selected When the object moves to the last position position 3 the next position will be back to the initial position 0 and repeat the same when it moves to position 3 again The moving path is shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 0 position 1 position 2 193 Ly WE NTEK Object If Backward cycle is selected when the object moves to the last position position 3 it will move backwards to position 2 position 1 and then the initial position 0 and start over again The moving path is shown as follows position 0 position 1 position 2 position 3 position 2 position 1 position 0 Image state change Determine how state changes either Position dependant or Time based If Position dependant is selected the object state will change when position changes If Time based is selected the object position will change based on Position speed and the object state will change based on Image update time as shown below Time interval attributes Position speed 10 OI second fs Image state change Time based td Backward cycle Image update time 5 O I second fs 194 Lv WE NTEK Animat
435. sor points at Data 4 0 will be displayed as shown below Channel 1 Channel 2 Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address 50 Watch indicator Control 0 Index i No of Data 1 16 bit BCD N se 2 32 bit Data 3 unsigned 20 Data 3 A 10 Data 4 Data 5 Data 6 Data 7 If there are fewer data in Channel 1 when position the cursor in Data 4 0 will be displayed as shown below Channel 1 Channel 2 Watch 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned address Watch indicator 16 bit BCD 32 bit unsigned 1 2 The system can draw at most 32 trend curves 3 The system can draw at most 1024 points for each channel The maximum number of channels is 12 241 Ly WE NTEK Object 13 20 XY Plot Overview XY Plot is drawn where pair of word registers control the X and Y axis Up to 16 channels can be displayed simultaneously This object is for easier data observation and negative numbers can be displayed as well Configuration Click the XY Plot icon on the toolbar to open a XY Plot object property dialog 2 Setup the properties press OK button and a new XY Plot object will be created 242 Ki WE NTEK Object Hew ZY Plot Object General Display Area Shape Direction Right w No of channel 2 g Control Address Address i No of data address 10 Read address PLC name Local HMI meparated address for X and Y data X data PLL name nc Setting Y data PLL name locs
436. ss to Destination Address The unit is word 16 bit Mode Set the trigger mode of data transfer a Touch trigger Press the object to activate data transfer operation b External trigger Activated when specify bit address changes state ON gt gt OFF Transfer the data when the state of Trigger address changed from ON to OFF OFF gt gt ON Transfer the data when the state of Trigger address changed from OFF to ON ON lt gt OFF Transfer the data when the state of Trigger address changes A ttribute No of vart Mode External trigger Ww Trigger mode ON OFF all Trigger address Ki WE NTEK Object 13 24 Backup Overview Backup object can transmit recipe data RW RW A event log and sampling data to external device or Remote printer backup server Users can also use LB 9039 to monitor the backup status If the system is backing up the status of LB 9039 will be turned ON Configuration Click Backup icon on the toolbar to open a Backup object property dialog Set A up the properties press OK button and a new Backup object will be created rs j New Backup Object General Description SOVICE OEW EW 4 Historical event log Historical data sampling Backup postion O SD card USE disk Remote printen backup server Note Use L W 9032 9039 to change the backup folder name Note Use Remote printer backup server to store data to remote PC Enabl
437. ssword 111 z bit 15 bit 0 Current status 0000000000000001 wez Username 1 ewsers Password 0 0220 bit 15 bit 0000000000000000 112222 Current status 5 Enter User 3 password 333 Logout 189050 Since User 3 is allowed to operate JET class A B C objects LW 9222 bit 0 bit 2 turns to 1 means that user can operate class A C objects Username 3 LW9219 6 Click Logout button to log out the system will return to the initial state and current user can only operate class None objects i Password 333 449220 g bit 15 bit0 Current status 0000000000000111 LW9222 Logout LB9050 User name 3 LW9219 Class A Button Password 333 wsz Class B Button bit 15 bit 0 Current status 0000000000000000 LW9222 Class C Button 110 Ly WE NTEK User Password and Object Security sl Password input If the password is incorrect LB 9060 will be ON if the password is correct LB 9060 will be OFF All user passwords User 1 to User 12 can be obtained from system registers LW 9500 LW 9522 24 words in total m Changing password directly on HMI When LB 9061 is set ON the system will read data in LW 9500 LW 9522 to update user password The new password will be used in the further operations Please note that the user operable object classes will not be changed due to the change of pas
438. ssword protect On MACRO editing window there s the Password protect selection tick it and click Set password to set a password less than or equals to 10 characters support ASCII character only ex a hFds After setting MACRO password users will have to input correct password when opening MACRO editing window Password Password m When MACRO is password protected de compilation of XOB file will not be able to restore MACRO contents 496 Ly WE NTEK Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server Chapter 19 Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 Configure HMI as a MODBUS Device Once HMI is configured as a MODBUS device the data of HMI can be read or written via MODBUS protocol MODBUS Server MODBUS Server HMI HMI HMI MODBUS Server MODBUS Server bi RS232 R5485 i T BS232 R5485 HMI HMI As shown above HMI is set as a MODBUS device also called MODBUS Server The HMI PC or other devices can use MODBUS protocol to read or write HMI data via Ethernet or RS 232 RS 485 interface Please follow the steps below 497 Ly WE NTEK Configure HMI as a MODBUS Server 19 1 1 Creating a MODBUS Server To configure HMI as a MODBUS device add a new device in the Device tab first In PLC type select MODBUS Server In PLC I F select RS 232 RS 485 2W RS 485 4W or Ethernet System Parameter Settings Extended Memory l Printer Backup Server
439. st of events triggered in multiple days If History control address is set to LW 0 LW 0 to LW 1 forms a range of log selection Value in LW 0 represents the first history data Example As illustrated below for showing it clearer the history data is numbered according to the date they occur No 0 No 1 No 2 If enter 3 in LW 0 the first data displayed will be data No 3 JEL 20100604 No 4 LEE EVT ER CERT 20100605 Wo HEB EVITER EL 20100608 No I7KB EVIR EIEL 20100609 No 1 AKE EVT 43 EEL 20100610 No 0 12KB EVT 43 LW 1 has two modes a Number of days History control Enable reading multiple historier Mode iden The data range starts from the number in LW 0 The value in LW1 represents how many days to be included from the start to days before Example As illustrated below if enter 1 in LW 0 enter 3 in LW 1 then the range of data will start form 20100609 and include data of 2 days before while 20100609 is included Since data of 20100607 does not exist in this example the data displayed will only include 20100609 and 20100608 JEL 20100604 No 4 IEE EYT FEL 20100605 No 3 6KB EVT EL 20100608 No 2 I7EB EYT IEL 20100609 AKE EVI FEYEL 20100610 No 0 12EB EVT 258 Lig WE NTEK Object b Index of the last history History control PLC name Local HMI wr Setting Address yy vt jo 16 bit Unsigned Enable reading multiple histories Mode Mean The range of data will start form t
440. st recently saved file has the smallest file index number For example if there are four event log files as follows EL 20101210 evt nm Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference EL 20101230 evt EL 20110110 evt EL 20110111 evt The file index are EL 20101210 evt gt index is 3 EL 20101230 evt gt index is 2 EL 20110110 evt gt index is 1 EL 20110111 evt gt index is 0 return value equals to 1 if referred data sampling file is successfully found otherwise it equals to 0 index can be constant or variable year month day and return value must be variable return value is optional macro command main short index 1 year month day short success if there exists an event log file named EL 20101230 evt gt with index 1 the result after execution Success 1 year 2010 month 12 day 30 success FindEventLogDate index year month day end macro command FindEventLogindex return value FindEventLogIndex year month day index or FindEventLogindex year month day index Description A query function for finding the file index of specified event log file according to date The file index is stored into index year month and day are in the format of YYYY MM and DD respectively The event log files stored in the designated position such as HMI memory storage or external memory device are sorted according to the file name and are indexed starting from 0 The most recently saved file h
441. sult must be a variable source and source2 must be a nonnegative value macro_command main float y result y 0 5 POW 25 y result result 5 end macro command Name SIN source result Description Calculate the sine of source degree into result Source can be aconstant or a variable result must be a variable macro command main float source result SIN 90 result result is 1 Source 30 SIN source result result is 0 5 end macro command COS source result Description Calculate the cosine of source degree into result source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro command main float source result COS 90 result result is 0 379 re WE NTEK Macro Reference source 60 GetData source Local HMI LW 0 1 COS source result result is 0 5 end macro command TAN source result Description Calculate the tangent of source degree into result Source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main float source result TAN 45 result result is 1 source 60 TAN source result result is 1 732 end macro command COT source result Description Calculate the cotangent of source degree into result Source can be a constant or a variable result must be a variable macro_command main float source result COT 45 result result is 1 source 60 COT source result result is
442. sword 111 Index Register Chapter 11 Index Register 11 1 Introduction EasyBuilder provides Index Registers for users to change addresses flexibly With Index Registers users can change object s read write address directly on HMI without changing its settings There are 32 Index Registers divided into 16 bit and 32 bit Address LW1 a LWO LW2 16 bit Index Register Index 0 LW 9200 16 bit Index 15 LW 9215 16 bit Max address range 65536 words 32 bit Index Register Index 16 LW 9230 32 bit Index 31 LW 9260 32 bit Max address range 4294967296 words Address PLE name Device type Address hw 9 01 16bit Lw 9202 16bit Address format Lw 9203 fLebit Address L S el address index 0 Address index 1 address index 2 Address index 3 it address index 4 it address index 5 iki address index 6 ik address index 7 iki address index 8 iki address index 9 iki address index 10 address index 11 address index 12 iki address index 13 ith address index 14 it address index 15 ik the result of importing email data ik i user no 12912 ik password ith classes can be operated For current user bit 0 4 bit 1 B bit it address index 16 it address index 17 it address index 18 it address index 19 it address index 20 ik address index 21 iki address index 22 ith addres
443. t button typel3 Oo sd Oi On E Gd fi re button ae 14 338 O F YELLOW States 2 30054 bytes BMP 100x1001 Ly WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language Chapter 15 Label Library and Multi Language Build the Label Library Select a suitable label in the program 15 1 Introduction In run time the project displays the corresponding language based on the settings Label Tag Library se vHHONOGGSGNK No Lab name fe Language 1 Language 2 Language 3 Language 4 Language 5 Language 6 Language 7 Language 8 lt al gt Export EXCEL File Import EXCEL File Gral Language no EasyBuilder supports the editing of 8 languages in maximum State no Indicates the current state Each Label has a maximum of 256 states state no 0 255 The state no is determined by Language no selected If 8 languages are used the maximum state no is 256 8 32 New Add a new label 339 Li WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language Settings Settings of the selected label Save Label File Save all labels in Ibl format Load Label File Load the existing lbl file to Label Library Export EXCEL File Load the existing csv or xls file to label library Import EXCEL File Load the existing lbl file to Label Library sl m Unicode is not supported when importing and exporting Excel file 340 LW WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language 15
444. t SEES GetData OK 0 Local HMI LB O 8 for J to 3 Tibb D gt set gnlurrentMCount gt gt gt gt QnCurrentNCount 1 netDatal gnCurrentMCount Local HHI Hoo Set gnlurrentMCount gt gt gt gt if OK K 1 then KS Ed SetDbatalk else EF E4 1 end ir ff gt gt gt 33532335 qnturrentMCount 2 netData qnCurrentMCount Local HMI LU k set gniurrentlCount gt gt gt gt Local HMI TE gt get gnourrentMCount gt gt gt gt next J 360 og WE NTEK Macro Reference 11 Sometimes the outlining might be incorrect since that the keywords are misjudged For example Workspace end macro cormSsnd 1 2 Macro command main 3 4 if 1 then SGl if 1 then 6 end if To solve this problem right click and select Update All Outlining Works pace Macro IC 18 macro Command main i if 1 then TE i 1 thin Lend if end macro CcommSsnd l 2 3 5 6 5 12 The statements enclosed in the following keywords are called a block of the macro code a Function block sub end sub b Iterative statements i for next ii while wend c Logical statements i if end if d Selective statements select case end select 361 Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference 18 2 Macro Construction A macro contains statements The statements contain constants variables and operations The statements are put in a specific order to create the desired output
445. t gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt GetDatal adress Local HMI LW 1 1 for i 0 to 9 step 1 setData value Local HHI LW adress 1 tempval value value func value une adress EEr gt get gnCurrentMNCount gt gt 3 gt gt gt 3 gt gt gn urrentMcount okt Data gnCurrentMCount Local HMI LU 1 Forren get gnlurrentMCount gt gt gt gt gt gt 5 gt 55 gt Fj je assert FSH Arraras d Selecting Clear All Bookmarks will delete all bookmarks 9 Macro editor provides outlining or code folding Outlining will hide macro codes that belong to the same block and display them as 1 There will be a tree diagram on the left side of edit area Users can click to hide the block or to open as shown below 359 Lv WE NTEK Macro Reference WorkSpace 26 27 GetData OK 0 Local HHI LB 28 291 for J 0 to 3 30 Fjes 31 gnCurrentMCount 1 32 SetDatalgniurrentMCount a5 ff S gt 5 gt 5 gt 5353 gt get gnlurrentM 34 1 Press to fold if then block ske if OKE K 1 then 36 E K 4 1 Local HMI SEG gnturrentM Loch cle SetDatalkK 38 else 39 40 end if 41 ff gt gt gt gt gt gt 33 gt 3 gt get gnCurrent MN 42 qgniurrentMCount 2 43 netDatal qntCurrentMCount 44 f gt 5 gt gt 5 gt 5 gt 5 gt 5 set gnCurrentH 45 t next J 46 a7 7 s gt gt gt gt gt 3530 gt SDD 48 GetDatalgnmacrolD Local HM 49 gnmacrolbD gnlurrent MID
446. t and ASCII Display rrorrorrnnrorrnnrerrnnrernnnnennnnnennnnrennnnnnnnnnrnnnnnennnnner 173 TE IN sss rerrrpieersir iirinn ee nee en eee 177 Be ENN 182 13 13 Moving Shape rannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnnennnnsnnnssnnnsennnssnnnsennnsen 185 DD TTNNNN Z Z 3m39913901907371799190193111 311113909 191 PPT ON 196 13 16 Meter PE EE 202 13 17 USNS aiaaaesieamamaeiaamanmemens cmaiewaneaneieaneuaneuasuanineemaneenrs 210 Me da EN AD DE oe NN 224 1919 DNA BIOCK DIS 0 EE RR 232 TOLOA PIO EE 242 13 21 Alarm Bar and Alarm Display rrranonnnrnnnnnnnnennnennnrnnnnennnennnrnnnnnnnnennernnnnnnnnennnen 251 19 22 E VCNL DIS OIA sees E 255 13 23 Data Transfer Trigger based rrrnnnrnnnnrrnnnrrnnnrrnnnrrnnnrnnnnrrnnnrnnnnrnnnnsnnnnnnnnnee 263 IE 20 BA OT EEE 265 13 25 Media Player rrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnrrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnennnnsnnnssnnnsennnnennnsennnsen 269 13 26 Data Transfer Time based rrrareranernnrrnnnevarernnrrnannranennernannnanenneennnnnnanennsen 277 12 PENN 280 TS 20 CNCE EEE 289 13 29 Option List rrrrnnnrrnnnnorrnnnrnrnnnrnrnnnrnrnnnennnnnenransennansennansennansennassennnssrnnnsennnnssnnnnnee 307 BV TN Z 314 PIONER eee ee 318 RS SICA MESSAGE EE EEE 322 Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library arrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnrnnnnnennnnnrnrnnnennnnnennnnnen 325 KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 User Manua
447. tended Memory Printen Backup Server e Mail Recipes Device Model General systemeettineg security Fot HMI model aMT3105 800 x 600 w HMI station mo 0 select HHI HI Name Default Htl w 192 168 1 103 Tina hkdTS8100G 192 168 1 117 nicolas mt lOdsh 192 168 1 118 nicolas 81007 192 168 1 208 kevin MTSD 0iH Search All 192 168 1 226 susan hmi 192 150 1 233 Demo Joey 058 20091002 or later supports 197 IRA 1 997 Meme 19004 Project Port 5005 v The three consecutive ports of the project port no are preserved for HMI communication In the setting above as an example Port No is set as 8005 Port 8005 8006 and 8007 should be reserved In this case when executing simulation on PC please make sure that these ports are not occupied by other programs 1 TRACE Syntax List Name TRACE TRACE format argument Description Use this function to send specified string to the EasyDiagnoser Users can print out the current value of variables during run time of macro for debugging When TRACE encounters the first format specification if any it converts the value of the first argument after format and outputs it accordingly format refers to the format control of output string A format specification which consists of optional in and required fields in bold has the following form flags width precision type Each fiel
448. ter LB 9047 reboot HMI and LB9048 reboot HMI protection to reboot HMI Set LB 9048 ON first and then set LB 9047 ON to restart HMI 638 Va Bed I W WE INTEK EasyDiagnoser Chapter 33 EasyDiagnoser 33 1 Overview and Configuration Overview EasyDiagnoser is a tool for detecting the error occurs while HMI is communicating with PLC Configuration step 1 Open Project Manager and click EasyDiagnoser amp Project Manager HMI IP Password Type MT6000 8000 i Series Reboot HMI Connection GJ Ethernet CO USB cable fi series only settings Data Event Log File Information FasyBuilder8000 EasyDiagnoser EasyConverter EasyAddress viewer RS EasyPrinter Easy Diagnoser Recipe Extended Memory Editor Build Download Data for CF USB Disk Download Upload On line Simulation Off line Simulation Pass through 639 Lr WE NTEK step 2 EasyDiagnoser Set the IP address of the HMI to communicate with Users can input IP address manually or simply click Search All Please input Project Port as well select HHI Project Port Select HHI ot Search All 05 20091002 or later supports Project Port 8000 Input HMI IP address Search HMI in HMI Name Tina MT8100 LAN TEET Dermoa does 192 168 1 237 Demo S7 12003 192 168 1 39 test 192 168 1 44 Default HMI 192 160 147 Tina MTe100n 640 Lib WE NTEK EasyDiagnoser
449. tering the password Only when the password is correct can the user edit this project FasyBuilder8000 Password ker Limited to 3 times 64 Lib WE NTEK 5 6 Font Parameters in this tab determine the non ASCII fonts System Parameter Settings System Parameter Settings J Model Generel System Setting Extended Memory Fonts for non ascii strings Albertus Bold Albertus Extra Bold Albertus Medium Algerian Antique Olive Arial Arial Black Arial Bold Arial Narrow Arial Narrow Bold Batang Berlin Sans FB Book Antiqua Book Antiqua Bold Bookman Old Style Bookshelf Symbol 7 Calibri Calibri Bold Cambria Bold Century Gothic Century Gothic Bold Comic Sans MS Comic Sans MS Bold Consolas Consolas Bold Constantia Constantia Bold Corbel Corbel Bold Courier New Counter New Bold vi Franklin Gathie Meadinnn 65 Security Printer Backup server Delete All Ly WE NTEK System Parameter Settings Fonts for non ascii strings The non ASCII fonts are listed above When using non ASCII characters or double byte characters including Simplified or Traditional Chinese Japanese or Korean which are not listed in Fonts for non ascii strings table EasyBuilder will select a font from the list to substitute for it automatically The non ASCII fonts in Windows can be added to the Fonts for non ascii strings table Line spac
450. the battery N 522 Lt WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 Local HMI Network Information a 1 __ _ A _ ER _ ER _ Ru 523 y WE NTEK System Reserved Words Bits 22 8 Recipe and Extended Memory Read R Write W Control Y Remote Address Description ye kr LB 9028 9028 reset all recipe data set ON ene ee L8 9029 save all recipe data to machine setON w yy fy L8 9460 EMO s storage device SD card does not exist when ON R R R L8 9461 EMt s storage device SD card does not exist when ON R R R gt L8 9462 EM2 s storage device SD card does not exist when ON R R R gt 1B 9463 EM3 storage device SD card does not exist when ON R R R gt L8 9464 EM4 s storage device SD card does not exist when ON R R R gt L8 9465 _ EM5 s storage device SD card does not exist when ON R R R L8 9466 _ EM6 s storage device SD card does not exist when ON R R R gt L8 9467 EM7 storage device SD card does not exist when ON R R R EM8 s storage device SD card does not exist Art OR R R 189409 Es storage device SD card does notexst when oN R R R L8 9470 EMO s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R gt L8 9471 EM1 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R R L8 9472 EM2 s storage device USB1 disk does not exist when ON R R
451. the string result1 is 4 bytes 1 4 DEGC2ASCII source result2 0 4 result2 0 is 5 result2 1 is 6 result2 2 is 7 result2 3 is 8 the length of the string result2 is 8 bytes 2 4 end macro_command HEX2ASCII HEX2ASCIl source result start len Description Transforms a hexadecimal value Source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of the string and the unit of length depends on result s type i e if result s type is char the size is byte the length of the string is byte len If result s type is short the size is word the length of the string is word len and so on source and en can be a constant or a variable resu t must be a variable start must be a constant macro_command main short source char result 4 source 0x5678 HEX2ASCII source result 0 4 result 0 is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 is 7 result 3 is 8 end macro command Name FLOAT2ASCII 385 re WE NTEK SR WENTEK 0 Macro Reference Reference FLOAT2ASCII source resultfstart len start must be a constant macro_command main float source char result 4 source 56 8 FLOAT2ASCII source result 0 4 result O is 5 result 1 is 6 result 2 is result 3 is 8 end macro command Description Transforms a floating value source into ASCII string saved to an array result len represents the length of th
452. ting Address 16 bit Unsigned k Cancel Read address Click Setting to configure the PLC name Device type Address System tag or Index register of the word devices that control the display of object s state and moving distance Users can also set the address in General tab while adding a new object The table below shows the address in different data format Data format Object state Moving Distance Moving distance on the X axis on the Y axis 16 bit Address LW n Address 1 Address 2 LW n 1 LW n 2 32 bit Address LW n Address 2 Address 4 LW n 2 LW n 4 186 Lb WE NTEK Object For example if the object s read address is LW 100 and the data format is 16 bit Unsigned LW 100 is used to control the object s state LW 101 is used to control the object s moving distance on the X axis and LW 102 is used to control the object s moving distance on the Y axis The picture below shows that the object s read address is LW 100 and initial position is 100 50 Supposed you want to move the object to the position 160 180 and change its state to State 2 then assign 2 to LW 100 160 100 60 to LW 101 180 50 130 to LW102 100 50 LW 100 L W101 LW102 mm 2 12 16 State X Offset Y Offset L W100 LW101 LW102 2 60 130 State X Offset Y Offset 160 180 next position 187 Lig WE NTEK Object Attribute Select the object s movement mode and range a X
453. ting next command even if no response from this device Descriptions of send data device name device type address offset and data count are the same as SetData macro command main int I bool a true bool b 30 short c false short d 50 inte 5 int f 10 for i 0 to 29 b i true next I for i 0 to 49 d i i next fori O0to9 f i 1 next setthe state of LB2 SetDataEx a Local HMI LB 2 1 set the states of LBO LB29 SetDataEx b 0 Local HMI LB 0 30 set the value of LW2 nD re WE NTEK Y WENTEK eC Macro Reference Reference SetDataEx c Local HMI LW 2 1 set the values of LWO LW49 SetDataEx d 0 Local HMI LW 0 50 set the values of LW6 LW7 note that the type of e is int SetDataEx e Local HMI LW 6 1 set the values of LWO LW19 10 integers equal to 20 words since each integer value occupies 2 words SetDataEx f 0 Local HMI LW 0 10 end macro_command macro_command main short err char byData 10 GetDataEx byData 0 MODBUS RTU 4x 1 10 read 10 bytes if err is equal to 0 it is successful to execute GetDataEx GetErr err save an error code to err end macro command PURGE PURGE com port Description com port refers to the COM port number which ranges from 1 to 3 It can be either a variable or a constant This function is used to clear the input and
454. tings IP 192 168 1 2 IP address 192 168 1 2 Port mo 8000 3 In HMI A project Hew Set Bit Object Create a Set Bit Object select HMI B in PLC name General Security Shape Label to control the address of the Write address remote HMI rcnome fw Sa Write after button is released Attribute am s One HMI can handle requests from a maximum of 64 HMIs simultaneously 511 p WE NTEK Ethernet Communication and Multi HMI Connection 21 2 PC to HMI Communication P Ethernet o m mm Crossover cable With On line Simulation PC can collect data from HMI through Ethernet network and save the data files to PC To connect PC with two HMIs HMI A and HMI B the settings of the project on PC is shown below WH 1 Set the IP address of the two HMIs i e HMI A 192 168 1 1 HMI B 192 168 1 2 2 In PC project System Parameter Settings System Parameter Font Extended kHemory Frinter Backup Server Settings Device list Devis Model General System Setting Security Device list Add a remote HMI A IP 192 168 1 1 amp HMI B IP 192 168 1 2 Device type Interface WF Pro MTADSO0 MT Disable MA Remote HMI 2 HMI B Remote 1P 192 168 1 2 Poxt 5000 MTE Ethemet TCP IP Hew Set Bit Object 3 In PC project Ae General Security Shape Label Create a Set Bit Obje
455. tion Click Media Player object icon on the toolbar or select from Objects Media Player New Media Player Object dialog box will appear 269 WW WE NTEK Object General tab New Media Player Object General Preview Control address Enable PLC name Local HMI w Setting Parameter 1 wio File index Parameter 2 iwio 2 Start time End time Update video playing time Update period Playing time Ext device 5D card 8 USB disk Folder name Attribute Auto repeat Background x Setting l Deseription S amp Selected a Control the Media Player operations b Designate a word register to control the object operations amp Not selected No manual control Video will be played Control automatically when the designated window address opens Command Enter a value in the Command register to designate which action is required gt Command control address 0 Parameter 1 Enter a value in Parameter 1 associated with each command action see below for details 270 L WE NTEK Object ne gt Parameter 1 control address 1 Parameter 2 Enter a value in Parameter 2 associated with each command action see below for details gt Parameter 2 control address 2 Indicate the status or errors gt Status control address 3 The file number in the designated folder It is recommended to file the video name with a number gt
456. trol Screen hardcopy to start printing with a designated bit address PLE Control Description PLC name Local HMI Attribute Type of control Screen hardcopy Active only when designated window opened F Rotate image 90 degrees Trigger address PLC name Trigger mode oFF gt 0k vi Source window For print CO Current base window CO Designate window no PLC name Printer SP M D E F w Mode black and white Cancel Setting 568 ps WE NTEK Recipe Editor Chapter 24 Recipe Editor 24 1 Introduction Recipe Editor is used to create view and edit recipe data Open Project Manager and click Recipe Extended Memory Editor to start editing 24 2 Recipe Extended Memory Editor Setting Select your data format Save the specified data format for loading next time The saved file name dataEX fmt under EasyBuilder installation directory How to add new rcp emi files Set Address Range Select Data Format Set Data Format Eg Add ress range Address range unit word Select your data format li Data 0 a Fill in address range EE gt z Ei the unit IS word Save Format Delete Format Data format Size Description Add 1 WORD 16 bit Unsigned recipe no 10 WORDS String ASCII product Delete Data format 2 WORDs 32 bit Unsigned price 10 WORDS String ASCI barcode Edit new data format Clear All in this field Med gt
457. truct Name Data Type Description E Strings Datal INT Predefined varBool Bool Module Defined Bool rrayvBool 32 VarReal REAL Real rrav REAL S varInt Int rray member e Deleting data type Select from the list on the left side of the main menu and then select the data type to be deleted on the right side then press Delete on the keyboard The data type can then be deleted 660 p WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names Stoctire Editor Data Types E User Defined Mame TestTypeE TestTyped TestTypeB Description gt TestTypet TestTypeD TestTypeF TestStruct Data Type Description Strings INT 4 Predefined H Module Defined e Saving the revision After revising click Save in the main menu and then restart EasyBuilder to check the result Siooictire Editor Data Types 3 User Defined Mame TestTypeE TestTypeA TestTypeB Description TestTypel TestTypeD a lestTypet TestTypeF TestStruct Data Type Description Strings INT Predefined Module Defined Bef E import JL Epo revad seve D ot Je 661 Ly WE NTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names e Reload To abandon all the changes and re edit click Reload button in main menu Structure Editor E Data Types el User Defined Mame TestTypeE b TeskTyped TestTypeB Description i TestTyper TestTy TestTypeF TestStruct Data Type Description tl Strings INT H Predefined tl Module De
458. tting Address T v 1 20 Address PLC name Mitsubishi FXO0s FXOn FX1s FX1N FX2 Device type T Address 1 20 Address format DDD range 0 255 Default Use the station number variables as the default PLC station number Select station no one from LW 10000 to LW 10015 as the station number variables If the use station station no is not specified in PLC address the station number will be no variable determined by the station no variable For example if var is set for default station no PLC default station no 1wW 10007 16bit varz Default station no use station no variable Use broadcast command The followings demonstrate some examples a The PLC station number is 5 Read address PLL name MODBUS RTU yt Setting The PLC station number is determined by var7 LW 10007 Read address PLL name MODBUS RTU Ww Setting PLC address is set to 111 since PLC station no is not specified and the default station no is using var3 the PLC station no is determined by var3 LW 10003 Read address PLC name MODBUS RTU Ww Setting Use When Use broadcast command check box is select please fill in broadcast Broadcast station no according to the broadcast station number defined command by PLC When HMI sends a broadcast command to the station number set 48 L WE NTEK System Parameter Settings here PLC will only receive the command and not reply to
459. tton is held longer than a set time in JOG delay increase the value in a register by a set amount in Inc value at a set rate in JOG speed to the Upper limit then reset to the Bottom limit As shown below when the button is held longer than 0 5 second increase the value in the designated register by 1 every 0 1 second till the value is 10 and then reset to 0 and increase again by holding the button Attribute set Style Cyclic JOG v Bottom limit 0 Upper limit 10 Inc value 1 JOG delay 0 5 second s vi JOG speed 0 1 second 5 y m Cyclic JOG When the button is held longer than a set time in JOG delay decrease the value in a register by a set amount in Dec value at a set rate in JOG speed to the Bottom limit then reset to the Upper limit As shown below when the button is held longer than 0 5 second decrease the value in the designated register by 1 every 0 1 second till the value is 0 and then reset to 10 and decrease again by holding the button Attribute Set Style Cyclic JOG a Bottom limit 0 Upper limit 10 Dec valve 1 JOG delay 0 5 second s v JOG speed 0 1 second s v Dynamic limits Set the Bottom limit and Upper limit by a designated register When Dynamic Address is LW n where n is an arbitrary number the rule of setting Upper Bottom limit is Upper imi When Dynamic Address is LW 100 the rule of setting Upper Bottom limit is Dynamic Address LW 100 LW
460. ttone System Frame System Button System Lamp gt 2 3 Faret 0 Es 0 States D States 0 None Hone None None 328 Shape Library and Picture Library Step 2 Add a state to the selected Shape First use the drawing tools to draw a shape in the window and select it to add to the Shape Library EasyBuilder Pro MIP1 10 WINDOW 010 EB File Edit view Option Draw Objects Library Doce ed gh BS EO Oy Z Traan Fs Bae B Aa EE toe MO bi E By es g 4 10 WINDOW 010 x Chick Save to Shape Library button in the toolbar and the following dialog appears Saye to Shape Library shape library TEST Description Untitled mi Shape no 0 v x Frame Inner Width 77 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined Setting Description Shape library Select the Shape Library to add the selected shape In this ane TEST Ira eaaa S The name of the Shape The number in the Shape Library that the shape belongs to Select the state that the shape represents In this case the state Pl Frame If Frame is selected the shape is defined as a frame Inner If Inner is selected the shape is defined as the inner part 329 Lb WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library The following shows the information of the shape numbered 0 in the TEST library Its state 0 is not defined as a frame or inner Width 77 Height 73 Frame undefined Inner undefined Click OK the shap
461. ture address F Use capture Function Control address C Use control function 318 Ly WE NTEK Object Input Channel Video Input 1 or Video Input 2 can be selected Encode format NTSC or PAL can be selected Use Capture address Enable Use capture function to capture the image of the input video Capture address Use capture Function PLC name Local HMI ww Setting Storage medium 5D card USB disk Record time Before seconds After seconds 1 Capture address Configure the address that triggers image capturing of the video 2 Storage medium select the storage medium to save captured images either SD card or USB disk Images of video channel 1 will be saved in directory VIP1 in the chosen storage and images of video channel 2 in directory VIP2 3 Record time Set a period of time for image capturing The longest period can be set starts from 10 seconds before triggering Capture address to 10 seconds after triggering In this case there will be 21 images captured including the one captured at the triggering moment The time interval for capturing is once in each second The captured jpg file will be named in the following format Before or after Capture address is triggered YYYYMMDDhhmmss jpg The moment that Capture address is triggered YYYYMMDDhhmmss jpg The figure above as an example set Record time Before and After to 5 second
462. twise operators are used to manipulate bits of signed unsigned character and integer variables The priority of these operators is from left to right within the statement Shift Operators Description example lt lt Shifts the bits in a bitset to the left a specified number of positions gt gt Shifts the bits in a bitset to the right a specified number of positions Bitwise Operators Description Exampe a bmseanD fassa O O ooo ewean ase o pH One s complement B 366 re WE NTEK Macro Reference Priority of All Operators The overall priority of all operations from highest to lowest is as follows Operations within parenthesis are carried out first Arithmetic operations Shift and Bitwise operations Comparison operations Logic operations Assignment Reserved Keywords The following keywords are reserved for system These keywords cannot be used as variable array or function names gt gt lt lt lt gt and or xor not lt lt gt gt amp exit macro command for to down step next return bool short int char float void if then else break continue set sub end while wend true false SQRT CUBERT LOG LOG10 SIN COS TAN COT SEC CSC ASIN ACOS ATAN BIN2BCD BCD2BIN DEG2ASCII FLOAT2ASCII HEX2ASCII ASCIIZDEC ASCII2ZFLOAT ASCII2HEX FILL RAND DELAY SWAPB SWAPW LOBYTE HIBYTE LOWORD HIWORD GETBIT SETBITON SETBITOFF
463. ul it returns true otherwise it returns Rr WE NTEK Macro Reference char src3 20 ab c char dest3 4 bool success3 success3 StringTrimRight src3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro_command Name Stringinsert success Stringinsert pos insert start destination start success Stringlnsert pos insert destination start success Stringinsert piss insert start length destination start success Stringlnsert pos insert length destination start Description Insert a string in a specific location within the destination string content The insert location is specified by the pos parameter The insert string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start The number of characters to insert can be specified by the length parameter This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of string after insertion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char str1 20 but the question is char str2 10 that is char dest 40 to be or not to be bool success success Stringinsert 18 str1 3 13 dest 0 success true dest to be or not to be the question success Stringinsert 18 str2 0 dest 0 success true dest to
464. until the scroll rolls to the end then stop holding Press Ctrl C to copy and Cirl V to paste in the editing window as shown below varBool BOOL Bool rray BOOL 32 varReal REAL Real rray REAL S varint INT IntArrav INT S varDBint CIMT Dint rray DINT 3 Step 4 Click OK to finish setting then return to the main menu to check the added data structure Editor Data Types User Defined Mame TestType TestTypeA TestTypebB Description TestT ype TestTypeD TestTypetE TestTypeF TestStruct Description E Strings Datel H Predefined varBool H Module Defined Bool rrayBool varfeal Real rray varint IntA rrav varDint Dint rrayDINT Imember 659 LIN WeINTEK Rockwell EtherNet IP Free Tag Names 34 4 Miscellaneous e Revising sub item data Double click on the sub item to be revised in the main menu or click on the sub item then click Edit e Deleting sub item data Select the data to be deleted then click Delete To delete all sub items press and hold the Delete button on the keyboard then click the Delete button in the main menu e Adjusting the order of sub item data After selecting a single sub item use the move up and move down buttons in main menu to change the order This makes selecting items in EasyBuilder easier Stouctore Editor Data Types User Defined Mame TestType TestTypeA TestTypeB Description TestTypeC TestTypeD TestTypet TestTypeF TestS
465. up window number to be displayed is calculated by the following equation value in the word register offset window number The offset can be set from 1999 to 1999 not including 0 Auto adjust window size Automatically adjust the size of the Indirect Window to the size of the popup window Not necessary to preset the popup window size Alignment When Auto adjust window size is selected the system generates 5 reference points If one reference point is selected the popup window is displayed according to the point See the following example the upper left reference point is selected the following figure shows the position of a popup window 179 M WEINTEK Object Alignment relative to object display region Popup Window Indirect Window Note To use this function please note the size and direction of the popup window to avoid covering the objects in the main window or the object size exceeds the range of the main window Here is an example of using Indirect Window The setting is shown in the following figure set the address to LW 100 which calls the window number Create window no 35 and 36 first Read address Address Ly w 100 16 bit Unsigned Set constant 35 to LWI 0 O Set constant 36 to L WI100 Set constant 0 fo LW100 Use the Set Word object and set the value of LW 100 to 35 the display is shown in the following figure 180 Lv WE NTEK Object WINDOW 35
466. use to select this mode 39 Hardware Settings m How to hide HMI System Setting Toolbar When DIP Switch 2 is set ON the system setting toolbar is disabled When set OFF the system setting toolbar is enabled Please restart HMI to enable disable the toolbar System register LB 9020 can also enable disable system setting toolbar When LB 9020 is set ON the toolbar is displayed and set OFF to hide the toolbar Note LB 9020 is available for all HMI series DIP Switch 2 is available for i and X Series 4 2 3 System Information Network Displays network information amp HMI IP Version Displays HMI system version System Inforamtion nicorus 81001 pas System information Default HMI Network Version Network Version IP Address 192 168 1 28 MT8xxx S3C firmware build 20120619 Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Route Address 192 168 1 254 Mac Address 00 0C 26 01 E7 35 Type MTS81001 4 2 4 System Setting m Network Download project to HMI via Ethernet Confirm IP address of target HMI Obtain an IP Address Automatically or IP address get from below System settings Set or modify system parameters Confirm password for security System settings Ea Enter your password Obtain an IP Address Automatically IP address get from below IP address Subnet Mask 255 12 GateWay 192 Password I 40 Lb WE NTEK a Security Password protection the default is 111111 System setting
467. user defined radius Dynamic limit PLC name Local HMI sr Setting scale label Color se 16 O Fight of decimal poiat 0 80s Cancel Value To set object s display range Meter Display object will use the value of Zero and Span and the value of register to calculate the pointer s position For example supposed that Zero is 0 Span is 100 when the value of register is 30 Start degree is 0 and End degree is 360 then the degree indicated by the pointer is 30 Zero Span Zero End degree Start degree 30 0 100 0 360 0 108 Pointer will be pointing at 108 degrees See the picture below 207 Object Range limits Configure the values of Low limit High limit their corresponding display colors and the width 60 30 0 Use user defined radius Fange limits 7 Enable Low E Mid La High E meoo a C Range lmite Enable Low E Mid i Hish wan o a Use user defined radius 30 Zz 208 Ly WE NTEK Object Dynamic Limits The low limit and high limit are decided by the register The following table shows the read address of low limit and high limit When address is LW n the register s address Data format Low limit s read High limit s read address address For example if the address is LW 100 the corresponding addresses will be Data format Low limit s read High limit s read addres
468. v gt EasyBuilder8000 User s Manual For EasyBuilder8000 Version 4 65 08 Copyright 2012 Weintek Labs Inc All rights reserved KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 User Manual Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Installation and Startup Guide rrranrrnnnnrnnnnrvnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnner 11 1 1 EasyBuilder INNSE OMe xcnosivinssenssanananusnnwaruaanswexenaauieuraeusvesamouaienxdnevaxsnanenennwannwananed 11 Le SE NENNE PN 12 Chapter 2 Project Manager rrrnrannrnnannrnrannrnnnnnennnnnennansnnnansnnnnnsnnnnnsnnnnnennnnnennnnsennnnsennnnsennnn 18 2 1 HMI IP PASSWOMKd 2 ccc cececececeececececeeeeeeneceeeceeeuaenenececeeeuauaeneneceeevenaenenenseenenannenens 19 2L FANG TN 20 2 2 1 Build Download Data for Saving in CF SD Card or USB Disk 20 2 2 2 Steps to Download Project to HMI via USB Disk or CF SD Card 21 EG GN E EEE EEE 22 ES Da AG EE 22 2UVU AG co eria tint ciate yes hasusaiauctanniniatni sien sintgiuaesunseulcineeisiolaneieteieianngimuuieisiaseieds 24 2A NAO orders septs E E EEEN 25 2 4 1 Off line Simulation On line Simulation eranrrrrnnrrnrnnrvrrnnrennnrrernnrrrnnnrrennnn 25 PS MUNN anne een ersncrs 27 Chapter 3 Create an EasyBuilder Project ccccccccccccseceeceeeeeseeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeessaeeesaeeesaaes 28 3 1 Create a NEW Prod sveve 28 3 2 Save and Compile the Project cccccseececeececeeeeeceeeeeseeceeseeeesseeeesseueeseeeeeseeeeeas 30 3
469. value each time when the button is pressed to the Upper limit As shown below each time when pressing the button increase 1 in the designated register till the value is 10 Attribute Set Style Increment value JOG v Inc value 1 Upper limit 10 E Decrement Value JOG Decrease value in register by a set amount in Dec value each time when the button is pressed to the Bottom limit As shown below each time when pressing the button decrease 1 in the designated register till the value is 0 Attribute Set Style Decrement value 1OG v Dec value 1 Bottom limit 0 140 Lig WE NTEK Object m Press and hold increment JOG When the button is held longer than a set time in JOG delay it will increase the value ina register by a set amount in Inc value at a set rate in JOG speed to the Upper limit As shown below when the button is pressed increase the value in the designated register by 1 When the button is held longer than 1 second increase the value in register by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 10 Attribute Set Style Press and hold increment JOG vi Inc value 1 Upper limit 10 JOG delay 10 second s w JOG speed 0 5 second s vw m Press and hold increment JOG When the button is held longer than a set time in JOG delay it will decrease the value ina register by a set amount in Dec value at a set rate in JOG speed to the Bottom limit As shown belo
470. veral word devices with continuous address for example LW 12 LW 13 LW 14 LW 15 and so on Use Data Block Display object to draw multiple data blocks For example it can display two data blocks LW 12 LW 15 and RW 12 RW 15 in trend curve simultaneously It is very useful to observe and compare the difference of trend curves The following displays the data block of LW 12 LW 15 Display Control LW10 LW11 LW LW13 LW14 LW15 LW12 LW13 LW14 LW15 Snapshot of Data Block Display Configuration Click Data Block Display icon on the toolbar to open Data Block Display properties dialog box as follows 232 Object Hew Data Block Display Object General Display Area Shape No of channel 1 de Cursor line v Enable Color EEE v PLC name Local HMI w Setting Control address PLC name Local HMI w Setting No of data address 1041 Jottsetto stut address Data storage start address PLO name Local HMI Ww Setting Limit cancel No of channel set the no of channel for this object Each channel represents one data block The maximal number of channels is 12 Cursor Line If Cursor Line is enabled when user touches the Data Block Display object it will display a vertical cursor line on it and store the data on the line to the designated registers Channel Select the channel to be configured Control address PLC name select the PLC where the target
471. w when the button is pressed decrease the value in the designated register by 1 When the button is held longer than 1 second decrease the value in register by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 0 Attribute Set Style Press and hold decrement JOG v Dec value 1 Bottom limit 0 JOG delay 1 0 second s vo JOG speed 0 5 second s v E Periodical JOG An automatic function which operate the designated word address to increase the value in the register by a set amount in Inc value at a set rate in Time interval to the Upper limit As shown below the system will automatically increase the value in the register by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 10 Then the value returns to 0 and add 1 every 0 5 second again Attribute Set Style Periodic JOG up gt 0 gt up gt v Inc value 1 Upper limit 10 Time interval 0 5 second fs v 141 Lig WE NTEK Object m Automatic JOG An automatic function which operate the designated word address to increase the value in the register by a set amount in Inc value at a set rate in Time interval to the Upper limit then hold this value As shown below the system will automatically increase the value in the register by 1 every 0 5 second till the value is 10 and then stops Attribute Set Style Automatic JOG up to high limit v Inc value 1 Upper limit 10 Time interval 0 5 second s v m Automatic JOG An automatic function wh
472. w events Transparent If selected the colors of the object frame and background are not displayed selects the color of the object frame Background Selects the color of the object background Select box Selects the color of the select box shown when an event is chosen Display order Selects the items to display when an event occurs If Display a chars is set to 0 displays the full content of the item 693 MODBUS TCP IP Gateway Chapter 37 MODBUS TCP IP Gateway 37 1 Overview To access the data of the PLC connected to HMI with SCADA software Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition the former way was to transfer PLC data to the HMI s local address first and then use MODBUS TCP IP protocol on PC to read HMI local address to get PLC data Now by using MODBUS TCP IP Gateway provided by EasyBuilder the mapping of MODBUS address to PLC address can be defined first and then one can directly use MODBUS TCP IP protocol to access PLC data PLC Address Mapping Table HMI SCADA 37 2 Configuration 37 2 1 Steps to Create an Address Mapping Table To create an Address Mapping Table please follow the steps 1 In System Parameter Settings Device tab add the PLC device In the example FATEK FB Series is used 2 Add MODBUS Server Ethernet select Enable check box under MODBUS TCP IP Gateway as shown in the following figure 694 Ly WE NTEK 3 MODBUS TCP IP Gateway LocalPo
473. w no from register Print the window designated by the value in a PLC address If the window number is valid the screen is printed as shown below Source window For print Current base window 0 Window no from register Designate window no PLC name Loca Setting Address LW lo 16 bit Unsigned Printer SD card Designate window no select a base window to be printed as shown below 287 Ly WE NTEK Object Source window For print Current base window Window no from register Designate window no Window no 10 WINDOW 010 v Printer SD card vi Printer If not specifying any printer there are other selections such as SD card or USB disk The printer can be set in System Parameter Settings Model m A background printing procedure is performed when the printed window is not the current base window m lf the hard copied window is not current base window its Direct Window and Indirect Window objects will not be printed 288 pi WE NTEK Object 13 28 Schedule Overview Scheduler object turns bits ON OFF or writes values to word registers at designated start times It works on a daily or weekly basis Configuration Click the Schedule icon on the toolbar to open the Scheduler management Hi dialog To add new Scheduler click New Set up the properties press OK button and a new Scheduler object is created Scheduler 289 Ki WE NTEK
474. when ON SD card free space insufficiency alarm when OM LB 9037 LB 9038 LB 9039 LB 9040 USB I free space insufficiency alarm when OM USB 2 free space insufficiency alarm when ON status of file backup activity backup in process if ON backlight up set OM Backlight down set OM LB 9042 LB 9043 acknowledge all alarm events set ON unacknowledged events exist when ON Users can import MT 500 tag to represent the address Export EXCEL 621 PLC name Local Hl Local Hh Local Hl Local HR Local HR Local HMI Local HR Local HR Local HMI Local Hl Local HR Local HMI Local Hl Local Hvil Local HMI Local HFI Local Hvil Local HMI Local Hl Local Hvil Local HMI Local HMI Ly WE NTEK Project Protection 30 4 Project Key Projects can be restricted to run on a specific HMI The setting is in System Parameters Settings General Project protection Project protection Enable Project key 111111 range 0 4294907295 Jf this key is different from HMI kev the project won t be executed normally Use L 9046 9047 to change HMI key LB9046 indicates check result hey error when status f on If the Enable check box is selected in Project protection please set the Project key password range 0 4294967295 System registers LW 9046 LW 9047 32 bit can be used to set the HMI key for HMI The values in LW 9046 LW 9047 cannot be read or written by a remote device
475. which indicates the address of data source is DM 100 100 10 4 86 Set DM 13 to 200 which indicates the destination address is RW 200 c Set DM 10 according to the direction of data transfer If set DM 10 to 1 the data will be transferred from PLC to HMI RW register If set DM 10 to 3 the data will be transferred from HMI RW register to PLC Setting DM 10 to 2 or 4 works the same the difference is that the HMI memory is LW d Back light control write back When Trigger address is turned ON HMI backlight will be turned ON OFF and Trigger address will be turned OFF Any touch on the screen will turn the backlight on Attribute Type of control Back light control write back v Active only when designated window opened Turn on back light Turn off back light e Back light control When Trigger address is turned ON HMI backlight will turn ON OFF and Trigger address will not be changed f Sound control Trigger address PLC name Setting Sound Sound Library Beep When the state of the designated Trigger address changes the HMI will play the sound selected from the sound library To activate the sound by Trigger address 1 Bit goes ON OFF gt ON 2 Bit goes OFF ON gt OFF 3 State change either ON gt OFF or OFF gt ON 285 KR WE NTEK Object g Execute macro program Attribute Type of control Execute macro program v Active only when designated window opened Macro name
476. wn below if change the value of LW 9134 the content displayed by the Text Object will be changed English LW9134 language mode Q fal f SIMPLE LW9134 language mode 2 i pe O KOREAN LW9134 language mode 4 i 345 Ly WE NTEK Label Library and Multi Language cum m At most 8 languages can be downloaded to HMI simultaneously Please confirm your internet connection before downloading the demo project 346 Address Tag Library Chapter 16 Address Tag Library 16 1 Building Address Tag Library Generally it is recommended to define the commonly used addresses in Address Tag Library when start to build a project It not only avoids setting the addresses repeatedly but also expresses the function of an address more clearly Display Display system reserved address user defined tags The registers listed cannot address tags be deleted or changed Addv 25 Tag Library fx 8 Customized System No Address tag name PLC name Addestpe Address escripton Tag 0 ocal Hi eag w Tte test To create a new address tag Save all current add ress tags Users can import MT500 tag to represent the address as tgl file Load the TTS existing tgl file RS ot the of address tag ealecicd orde rrent address tag ject pie Load the existing Save all Load the existing r NE ade csv file of current xIs file of pe cev iil address tag to the address lags address tag to the
477. wn in the preceding figure if Data length is set to 10 when the 11 data is generated the oldest data is deleted and the newest data is added m A Data Sampling may include more than one type of records Data Sampling can retrieve different types of records at the same time For example user defines three types of data 4 words in total In this way system retrieves a 4 word data each time from the designated address to be the content in one Data Sampling m When running simulation and save data sampling records to change the data format be sure to delete the previous data records in the installation directory to avoid the system to read the old data records 4 Clear address Set when the bit address status changes from OFF gt ON or ON gt OFF clear the sampled data in Trend Display Real time Mode The number of data records returns zero but the data records that are already saved will not be cleared Clear address Enable Mode OFF gt ON vi PLC name Setting 5 Hold address If the status of the designated address is set ON or OFF sampling will be paused until the status of the designated address returns 88 Ves WE NTEK Data Sampling Hold address PLC name Setting 6 History files History files C Save to HMI memory C Save to CF card Save to USB 1 _ Save to USB 2 Preservation limit Days of preservation day s Save to HMI momery save Data Sampling to HMI only when its siz
478. words have ok to be reset Project will be removed Confirm by typing yes yes 38 NG WE INTEK Hardware Settings The above shows the steps to restore factory settings of T and i Series HMI For X Series users will need a connected USB keyboard and press any key or space key right when the first image displayed as HMI power ON to enter the menu Select Factory Mode the window mentioned will pop up when system displays project In case users may miss the very first image shown to press space key continuously since HMI power ON will ensure entering the system setting window op swten SWISW2SW3SWA Mode Hogg al eine OFF OFF ON OFF Boot loader mode X Series excluded OFF OFF OFF ON Enable front panel power switch X Series only OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal cm m Dip Switch 4 is set ON or OFF according to the LCD used If it should be ON when out from factory the Dip Switch 4 would be set ON and cut off If it should be OFF the Dip Switch 4 would be set OFF but the switch is not cut 4 2 2 System Toolbar After rebooting HMI users can set the system with System Toolbar at the bottom of the screen Normally this bar is hidden automatically Only by touching the target at the bottom right corner of the screen will the System Toolbar pop up Screen Calibration shortcut X Series only for other series turn SW1 to ON When X Series touch screen drifting problem occurs please connect an USB mo
479. xport DTL or EVT file OPC sene 572 29 2 SAINTS 574 25 3 How to Use Multi File Conversion arrrrranrrnrannennnnrennnnnrnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnennnnsennnnee 576 Chapter BEEN 577 26 1 Using EasyPrinter as a Printer Server rrrnnnnrrnnnnervnnnrnvnnnrnnnnnennnnnnnnnnsnnnnnsnnnnnee 578 26 1 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter cccccececeeeeceeeeceeeeseeeesaeeeseeeeseeeesaaees 578 26 1 2 Setup Procedure in EaSyBuilder ccccccccceeceseseeceeeeceeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeseaees 579 KR WE NTEK EasyBuilder 8000 User Manual 26 2 Using EasyPrinter aS a Backup Servel ccccceccccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeeesaaeess 582 26 2 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter rarrrnnrrnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnee 582 26 2 2 Setup Procedure in EasyBuilder rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnrennnrrennnnnen 584 BENN Operation GUIE eee ene eee ee AE aa aTa ias 587 20 9 1 APDOIANCO EE EEE 587 26 3 2 Operation Guide rrnnnnnnrnvnnnnrvvrnnnrenrnnnrenvnnnrennnnerennnnsrennnnnnennnnsnennnnnseennnne 588 26 4 Convert Batch File srrrnnnnrnnnnnrnnannvrnnnnvrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnrnnannennannnnnannnnnnnsnnnnnee 593 26 4 1 The Default Value of Convert Batch File rrrrrnnrrnrnnrrrnrnnrernnnrernnnrnnnnnnnn 593 26 4 2 Specialized Criteria ccccccccccsssccceececeeeeceeececeeeeseeeesseeessseeessaeeessaeeenes 594 26 4 3 The Format of a Convert Batch File rrrronrrrnrnnnrorrnnnrorrn
480. ytime 8 Compile and Download project to HMI Press the Function Key object in the screen to make a screen hardcopy A PLC Control object can also make screen hardcopies Alarm information cannot be printed via EasyPrinter m EasyPrinter can only communicate with HMI via Ethernet please check the HMI located in private network environment 581 Lr WE NTEK EasyPrinter 26 2 Using EasyPrinter as a Backup Server Backup Server Backup objects can upload historical data such as Data Sampling and Event Log history files to MT remote backup server 26 2 1 Setup Procedure in EasyPrinter In EasyPrinter main menu select Objects Settings and the following dialog appears MT Box Remote Printer Server Settings Hardcopy Port number of the server socket Backup User name Max length 12 characters Password Max length 12 characters Naming Convention for HM Folder when writing files 8 Use IP address CO Use HMI name assign HMI name by Lw5032 Lw9039 Prefix Properties Minimize to system tray Detailed message 582 Vase i 0 WE NTEK EasyPrinter 1 Select General on the left side 2 In Server set Port number of the server socket to 8005 User name to admin and Password to 111111 Note These are default values 3 In Naming Convention for HMI Folder select Use IP address and enter IP_ in the Prefix field 4 In Propertie
481. ze for pop up window and texts Size Reference Middle Large j Please confirm the operation OK Cancel Confirmation required If an object uses Display confirmation request this message would pop up when the object is used Message shown on confirmation dialog and the text label of the 2 buttons OK and Cancel can be set Please use the same font for the labels of Message OK and Cancel Additionally only when selecting Label Library for Message the use of Label Library for OK and Cancel buttons can be enabled 9 Please confirm the operation OK Cancel System Message Confirmation required Message Please confirm the operation Use label library Use label library Cancel Cancel Use label library Font Times New Roman v 323 Ly WE NTEK Object Deny write command Display when system tag LB 9196 local HMI supports monitor function only is turned ON Allow write command Display when system tag LB 9196 local HMI supports monitor function only is turned OFF 324 Lip WE NTEK Shape Library and Picture Library Chapter 14 Shape Library and Picture Library EasyBuilder provides Shape Library and Picture Library to add visual effects on objects Each Shape and Picture includes up to 256 states This chapter explains how to create Shape Library and Picture Library For more details please refer to Chapter 9 Object General Properties 14 1 Creating Shape
482. ze of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 cabbageabc char set1 20 ge 430 Ly WE NTEK Macro Reference char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringExcluding src1 0 set1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 cabba char src2 20 cabbage char dest2 20 bool success2 success2 StringExcluding src2 0 abc dest2 0 success2 true dest2 char set3 20 ge char dest3 4 bool success3 successes StringExcluding cabbage set3 0 dest3 0 success3 false dest3 remains the same end macro command Name String ToUpper Syntax Description success StringToUpper source start destination start success String ToUpper source destination start Convert all the characters in the source string to uppercase characters and Store the result in the destination buffer The source string parameter accepts both static string in the form source and char array in the form source start This function returns a Boolean indicating whether the process is successfully done or not If successful it returns true otherwise it returns false If the length of result string after conversion exceeds the size of destination buffer it returns false macro_command main char src1 20 aBcDe char dest1 20 bool success1 success1 StringToUpper src1 0 dest1 0 success1 true dest1 ABCDE char dest2 4 BD re WE NTEK Mac

Chapter 1 EasyBuilder Pro Installation and Setup Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents